Tender Pages

CA NO: CE CG/GOA/ OF 2022-23 SER PAGE NO 01
MILITARY ENGINEER SERVICES
NAME OF WORK: PROVISION OF HANGER WITH APRON LINK TAXI TRACK AND EARTH
FILLING AT JUHU MUMBAI
CONTENTS
Sl Description Serial Page No.

No
1 2 3
1. Contents.
2. Forwarding letter.
3. Instructions for filling and submission of tenders.
Notice of e-Tender IAFW-2162 (Revised 1960) including Appendix ‘A’

4. to notice inviting e-Tender and Integrity Pact
Item Rate tender and contract for works [comprising BOQ

5. /Schedule ‘A’, `B', `C' &`D'- IAFW-2159]
6. General Conditions of contracts IAFW-2249 (1989 Print)

includingamendments/errata there to and Schedule of Minimum
Wages
7. Special Conditions.
8. Particular Specifications, List of drawings and Appendices.
9. Amendments / Errata to Tender documents
10. Relevant correspondence.
11. Acceptance letter.
Total Pages
Drawings: ______sheets
Signature of Contractor Jt. Dir(Contracts)

Date: for Accepting Officer
HQ, Chief Engineer (Coast Guard)

Military Engineer Services
Indian Coast Guard Chicolna
JNC Nagar Road,Bogmalo Post
Tel : 0832- 2970606 Goa:- 403-806
Email:cezcgg2-mes@gov.in
82079 / 120 / E8 22 Jul 2022
M/s____________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
Dear Sir (s),
1. Tender documents in respect of above work are uploaded on the site www.deproc.gov.in.The tender
is based on single stage two cover e-tendering system. The contents of Cover I & Cover II are specified
in NOTICE OF TENDER.
2. Bids will be received online by ACCEPTING OFFICER upto the date and time mentioned in the
NOTICE INVITNG TENDER (NIT). No tender/bid will be received in physical form and any tender/bid
received in such manner will be treated as non bonafide tender/bid.
3. Bid will be opened on due date fixed for opening as per critical dates given in the portal. Cover-1 will
be opened first. Tenderers may see the result of the opening of Cover-1 on the tender portal. Date of
opening of Cover-2 shall be decided after technical evaluation of Cover-1 keeping in view the various
eligibility criteria given in the NIT and same will be intimated to the tenderers while uploading the
technical evaluation on the tender portal.
4. Your attention is also drawn to instruction on filling and submission of tender attached herewith. You
may forward your points on tender documents and/or depute your technical representative for discussion
on tender/drawing and to clarify doubts, if any, before the bid submission starts. You are requested not
to write piecemeal points and forward your points duly consolidated in one go.
5. Unenlisted contractors are required to submit the scanned copies (in pdf file) of documents
required as per eligibility criteria mentioned in instructions for filling the tender documents and Appendix
‘A’ to NIT along with tender fee on e-procurement portal and submit the physical documents in the office
of HQ Chief Engineer (Coast Guard) Goa within time limit specified in NIT. Inadequacy/deficiency of
documents shall make the bid liable for rejection resulting in disqualification for opening of finance bid.
6. Enlisted contractors of MES shall submit the scanned copies (pdf file) of enlistment letter, tender fee
and such other documents as mentioned in Appx ‘A’ to NIT on e-procurement portal and submit physical
documents in the office of HQ Chief Engineer (Coast Guard) Military Engineer Services, Indian Coast
Guard Chicona, JNC Nagar Road, Bogmalo Post - Goa, 403 806before date and time fixed for this
purpose.
7. The contractor must ensure that the tender/bid is uploaded on the tender portal using authorised DSC
in time as the Accepting Officer will take no cognizance of any quotations/offer received in any other
electronic or physical form like email/fax/by hand/through post from tenderer/bidder even if they are
received in time.
8. Keeping in view delays due to system failure or other communication related failures, it is suggested
that the tender/bid be uploaded, if necessary, sufficiently in advance of the last due date and time fixed
on the portal.
9. General Conditions of Contracts (IAFW-2249) (1989 Print) and errata and amendments thereto,
Schedule of minimum fair wages and MES SSR (Part - I and Part - II) are not enclosed with these
documents. These are available for perusal in the Office of GE concerned and this office. Tenderer is
also requested to keep the copy of these documents with him as same are available in market.
10. PERFORMANCE SECURITY DEPOSIT

After acceptance of the tender, the contractor will be required to lodge with the AcceptingtOffficer
Performance Security Deposit at 3% of contract amount. The amount is required to be lodged within 28
(twenty eight) days of the receipt by the contractor of notification of acceptance of tender/ bid, failing
which action as stipulated in condition No 19.3 (IAFW-2249) (1989 print) shall be taken.
11. Any tenderer, which proposes alterations to any of the condition, specifications laid down in the
tender documents or any new condition, whatsoever, is liable to be rejected.
12. Consequent of implementation of GST (wef 01 July 2017), the contractors quoted rate shall be
deemed to include GST as applicable and applicable percentage will be paid to GST authority by the
Contractor at his own arrangement. The liability to pay GST lies with the contractor. Contractor is
advised to consider this aspect before quoting the tender. Nothing extra whatsoever shall be admissible
on this account.
13. Department may issue amendments. /errata in form of CORRIGENDUM to tender/revised BOQ
to the tender documents. The Tender /bidder is requested to read the tender documents in conjunction
with all the errata/amendments/corrigendum if any issued by the Department.
14. In case the BOQ is revised by the Department and the bidder has failed to quote in revised BOQ
(i.e. he has quoted in previous BOQ). Such bid shall be treated as willful negligence by the bidder and
his quotation shall be considered non-bonafide. In such case the lowest tender shall be determined by
the lowest amount amongst the valid/ bonafide bids only. Accepting Officer may decide whether to
retender or otherwise. The remark of ‘non-bonafide finance bid’ against such bidder and copy of CST
shall be uploaded along with Finance Bid Opening Summary.
15. Court of the place from where tender has been issued shall alone have jurisdiction to decide any
dispute out of or in respect of this tender. After acceptance of tender Condition-72 of Jurisdiction of
courts of IAFW-2249 shall be applicable.
Yours faithfully,
Signature of Contractor Jt. Dir(Contracts)
Date: For Accepting Officer

INSTRUCTIONS ON FILLING AND SUBMISSION OF TENDER
01 EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD)

Contractor(s) who are not enlisted with MES/who are enlisted but have not executed the
Standing Security Bond shall submit Earnest Money Deposit as detailed in Notice of Tender in
one of the following forms, along with their tender/bid:-
(a) Deposit at Call Receipt from a Scheduled Bank in favour of GE/AGE (I) concerned.
(b) Receipted Treasury Challan, the amount being credited to the Revenue Deposit of
GE/ AGE (I).
It is advisable that Earnest Money is deposited in the form of deposit call receipt from an
approved Schedule Bank for easy refund. In case the tenderer/bidder wants to lodge 'Earnest
Money Deposit' in any other form allowed by MES, a confirmation about its acceptability will be
obtained from the Accepting Officer well in advance of the bid submission end date and time.
Earnest Money Deposit shall be submitted in the name of concerned GE/AGE(I).
NOTES: Earnest money deposit in the form of cheque / bank Guarantee etc will not be accepted.
Non-Submission of Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) (scanned copy along with Technical Bid &
hard copy before the date & time fixed for opening of BOQ) will render the bid disqualified for
opening of Cover -02 (finance bid).
2 PERFORMANCE SECURITY (Refer Condition 19 of IAFW-2249 General Condition of

Contract)
2.1 After receipt of the letter of Acceptance, the successful contractor shall deliver to the Accepting
Officer a Performance Security in any of the forms given below for an amount equivalent to 3% of
the contract sum to issue Work Order.
(i) A Bank Guarantee in the prescribed form.
(ii) Government Securities, FDR or any other Government instruments stipulated by the
Accepting Officer.
2.2 Work Order No 1 shall be placed only after submission of performance security of adequate
value by the contractor.
2.3 If the performance security is provided by the successful Contractor in the form of a Bank
Guarantee, it shall be issued by Nationalized / Scheduled Indian Bank but its confirmation shall
be done only from the Head Office of the Bank.
2.4 Failure of the successful contractor to comply with the requirements of sub-clause 2.1 and
2.2shall constitute sufficient grounds for cancellation of the award of work and forfeiture for the
Earnest Money. In case of MES enlisted contractor, amount equal to the Earnest Money
stipulated in the Notice Inviting Tender, shall be notified to the tenderer for depositing the
amount through MRO. Issue of tender to such tenderers shall remain suspended till the aforesaid
amount equal to the Earnest Money is deposited in Government Treasury.
2.5 All compensation or other sums of money payable by the contractor to the Government under
terms of this contract or under any other contract with Government may be deducted from or paid
by the sale of a sufficient part of the Performance Security or from the interest arising there from
or from any sums which may be due or become due to the contractor by the Government on any
account whatsoever and in the event of his Performance Security being reduced by reason of
any such deduction, or sale a aforesaid, the contractor shall within ten days thereafter make
good in cash or securities, endorsed as aforesaid, and sum or sums which may have been
deducted from or realized by the sale of his Performance Security or any part thereof.
2.6 Government shall not be responsible for any loss of securities or any depreciation in the value
of securities while in their charge nor for loss of interest thereon.
2.7 In the event of contract being cancelled, under Condition 52, 53 & 54 of General Conditions of
Contract, the Performance Security shall be forfeited in full and shall be credited into
Consolidated Fund of India.
INSTRUCTIONS ON FILLING AND SUBMISSION OF TENDER (CONTD…)
3. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE
3.1 The bids received only in the electronic from will be considered. All bids shall be submitted on
‘deproc.gov.in’ portal. Documents should be scanned and forwarded in ‘pdf’ form and ‘xls’ form as
indicated.
3.2 Bids shall be uploaded on ‘deproc.gov.in’ portal on or before the bid closing date mentioned in the
tender. No tender/bid in any other electronic or physical form like email / fax / by hand / through post will
be considered.
3.3 Bid should be DIGITALLY signed using valid DSC. All pages of tender documents,
corrections/alterations shall be signed/ initialled by the lowest bidder after acceptance.
3.4 Drawings, if issued in physical form, must be returned duly initialled by the tenderer/bidder in
separate envelope indicating his name and address.
3.5 The tender shall be signed, dated and witnessed at all places provided for in the documents after
acceptance. All corrections shall be initialled. The Contractor shall initial every page of tender and shall
sign all drawings forming part of the tender. Any tender/bid, which proposes alterations to any of the
conditions whatsoever, is liable to be rejected.
3.6 Digital signatory of the bid/ tender shall ensure that he is competent to bind the contractor (through
partnership deed, general power of attorney or Memorandum and Article of Association of the Company)
in all the matters pertaining to the contract with Union of India including arbitration clause. A scanned
copy of the documents in confirmation of such authority shall be attached with the tender/ bid in ‘pdf’
form in Cover-1. It shall be ensured that power of attorney shall be executed in accordance with the
constitution of the company as laid down in its Memorandum & Article of Association.
4.0 BOQ:
4.1 The tenderer shall quote his rates on the BOQ EXCEL FILE only as per guide line of e-procure web
portal. No alteration to the format will be accepted and such bid will be disqualified.
4.2 In case any tenderer wishes to revise/ modify the rates quoted in the BOQ file, he can do so only in
the BOQ files before uploading the tender through http://defproc.gov.in site only before closing date and
time.
4.3 After uploading of tender, Department may upload the errata/ amendment through corrigendum. The
tenderer/ bidder should submit their offer considering the errata/ amendment carried out through
corrigendum issued from time to time.
4.4 While uploading the bid, the tenderer/ bidders should specially check whether any Revised BOQ
has been uploaded by department through corrigendum prior to Bid submission start date. Tenderers/
bidders attention is specially drawn to the fact that they should submit their offer on revised BOQ only. In
case any tenderer/ bidder submits offer on pre-revised BOQ in lieu of Revised BOQ. It will be
considered as a wilful negligence by the tenderer/ bidder and quotation shall be considered non-
bonafied.
5.0 Tenders/ bidders who uploaded their priced tenders/ bids and are desirous of being present at the
time of opening of the tenders/ bids, may do so at the appointed time.
6.0 Hard copies of all above documents shall be sent by the contractor to the tender issuing authority
well in advance to be received before the date & time fixed for the same.
7.0 The contractor shall employ Indian Nationals after verifying their antecedents and loyalty. Attention is
also drawn to relevant provisions in Special Condition referred here-in-after and also conditions 24 & 25
of IAFW-2249 (General Condition of Contract).
8. REFUND OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY
(Refer Condition 19 of IAFW 2249 General Condition of Contract) – The Performance security Deposit
mentioned hereinbefore may be refunded to the contractor after expiration of the defects liability period
(ref Sch A notes) by the GE provided always that the contractor shall first have been paid the final bill
and rendered a No-Demand Certificate (IAFW-451). Any recovery if outstanding against the contractor
shall be effected from the performance security as stipulated under condition 19 of IAFW-2249 (as
amended).
9. These instructions shall form part of the contract documents.
Signature of Contractor Jt. Dir (Contracts)

Dated: for Accepting Officer

NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT)
(IN LIEU OF IAFW-2162 (REVISED 1960)
1. A tender is invited for the work as mentioned in Appendix ‘A’ to this NOTICE INVITING
TENDER (NIT).
2. The work is estimated to cost as indicated in aforesaid Appendix ‘A’. This estimate, however, is
not a guarantee and is merely given as a rough guide and if the work costs more or less, a tenderer /
bidder will have no claim on this account.
3. The work is to be completed within the period as indicated in the aforesaid Appendix ‘A’ in
accordance with the phasing, if any, indicated in the tender from the date of handing over site, which
will be on or about two weeks after the date of Acceptance of tender.
4. Contractors whose names are on the MES approved list and within whose financial category
the estimated amount would fall and un-enlisted contractors may submit tender/ bid subject to the
other criteria mentioned in Appendix-A. However in case of term contracts, enlisted contractors of
class SS to E may submit tender. Not more than one tender shall be submitted/ uploaded by one
contractor/ firm. Under no circumstances will a father and his son(s) or other close relations who have
business dealing with one another be allowed to tender/ bid for the same contract as separate
competitors. Two firms shall be deemed to have business dealing if any of the partners/proprietor/
director is common among both of them. A breach of this condition will render the tenders/ bids of both
the parties liable for rejection.
5. The Office of Chief Engineer (Coast Guard) Goa will be the Accepting Officer here-in-after
referred to as such for the purpose of the contract.
6. Not more than one tender/ bid shall be submitted/ uploaded by one bidder firm. Under no
circumstances will a father and his son(s) or other close relations who have business dealing with one
another be allowed to tender/ bid for the same tender as separate competitors. A breach of this
condition will render the tenders/ bids of both the parties liable for rejection.
7. The Technical Bid and Financial bid (Cover-1 and Cover-2) shall be uploaded by the
tenderer/bidder on or before the date & time mentioned in NIT. A scanned copy of DD with enlistment
details/ documents shall be uploaded as packet 1/ cover-1 (‘T’ bid) of the tender / bid on e-tendering
portal. DD is refundable in case T bid is not accepted resulting in non-opening of ‘Q’ bid. The applicant
contractor shall bear the cost of bank charges for procuring and encashing the DD including
revalidation of DDs and shall not have any claim from Government whatsoever on this account.
8. Tender forms and conditions of contracts and other necessary documents shall be available on
website www.defproc.gov.in for download and shall form part of contract agreement incase
tender/bid is accepted.
9. Sample of materials and stores to be supplied by the contractor will also be available for inspection
by the bidder at the office of concerned GE(I) during working hours. The bidder is advised to visit the
site of work by making prior appointment with concerned GE(I) who is the executing agency of the work
(see Appendix-A). The bidder shall be deemed to have full knowledge of all relevant documents,
samples, site etc whether he has inspected them or not.
10.Any bid which proposes any alteration to any of the conditions laid down or proposes any other new
condition whatsoever, is liable to be rejected.
NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT) (CONTD…)
11. The uploading of bid implies that bidder has read this notice and the Conditions of Contract and
has made himself aware of the scope and specifications of work to be done and of the conditions and
rates at which stores (as applicable) etc will be issued to him and local conditions and other factors having
bearing on the execution of the work.
12. Tenderers/bidders must be in possession of a copy of the MES Standard Schedule of Rates(SSR
Part-I & part-II of latest edition) including errata and amendments there to.
13. The Accepting Officer does not bind himself to accept the lowest or any tender bid or to give any
reason for not doing so.
14. The Accepting Officer reserves the right to accept a tender submitted by a Public Undertaking/
Small & medium Enterprises (SMEs), giving a price preference over other tender(s)/bids which may be
lower, as are admissible under the Government Policy. No claim for any compensation or otherwise shall
be admissible for such tenderer/bidder whose tender/bid is rejected.
15. This Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) including Appendix ‘Á’ and annexures there to, if anyshall form
part of the contract agreement.

APPENDIX ‘A’ TO NOTICE OF E-TENDER
1. Name of Work: : PROVISION OF HANGER WITH APRON LINK TAXI TRACK

AND EARTH FILLING AT JUHU MUMBAI
2. Estimated Cost: : Rs. 2800.00 lakhs (At par market)

3. Period of completion: : 24 Months (720 days)
4. Cost of tender documents : Rs. 3000/- in the form of Demand Draft / Bankers Cheque from
any Scheduled bank in favour of Garrison Engineer ( I ) (CG)
DAMAN and payable at DAMAN.
(Note:- In case of retendering, the contractor who had quoted in
the previous call is not required to submit the cost of tender).
5. Website/Portal Address : www.defproc.gov.in
6. Type of contract : The tender shall be based on drawings and specifications (IAFW-
2159) and GCC (IAFW-2249) with schedule ‘A’ (list of items of
work) to be priced by tenderer. The tenderers are required to
quote their lumpsum amounts for part of schedule ‘A’ and quote
rates against items of other parts of schedule ‘A’.
7. Timeline Details
(a) Bid submission start date
Refer critical dates
(b) Bid submission end date
(c) Date of bid opening
8. Eligibility Criteria
(A) For MES enlisted : Contractors shall be enlisted with MES in Class ‘SS’ and
contractor category a(i) subject to satisfactory remarks wrt performance in
respect of works in hand as reflected in workload return (WLR) or
any other report circulated by competent Engineer authority.
(B) For contractors not : (a) Contractors not enlisted with MES should meet the enlistment
enlisted with MES criteria of ‘SS’ class and category a(i) Contractor with regards to
satisfactorily completion of requisite value works with Central/
State Government/ Central/ State PSUs/ AWHO/ AFNHB/
CGEWHO/ DGMAP, Annual turnover, Bank Solvency, working
capital and other requirements given in MES Manual on
Contracts-2020 as available in all MES formations as well as MES
website (www.mes.gov.in)
(b) Not carrying adverse remarks in work load report (WLR) or
any other similar report circulated by any competent authority.
(c) Not suspended/debarred/blacklisted (either permanently or
temporarily) from participating in any bid or for business dealings
by any Central/State Government department or any
Central/State Government PSU or any Autonomous Body under
Central/State Government or any Local Body as on the bid
submission end date.
9. Tender issuing and Accepting : Chief Engineer (CG) Goa
Officer Address:- Military Engineer Services, Coast Guard Air Enclave
Dabolim, Goa– 403 806
Phone No:- 0832 2970606
Email:- Cezcgg2-mes@gov.in
10. Executing agency : GE (I) (CG) DAMAN.
11. Earnest Money : Rs. 15,00,000/- in favour of GE (I) CG Daman, in the form of
Deposit at call receipt from scheduled Bank.
12 Integrity Pact The Integrity Pact uploaded along with NIT shall be properly
executed and duly signed by the bidder and the scanned copy
thereof shall be uploaded as part technical bid (Cover-1) and
original IP duly signed on each page shall be forwarded by post
along with demand draft. Bid of all the bidders who do not upload
signed copy of IP along with technical bid, (Cover-1) shall be
rejected.
13 MOU Both enlisted and un-enlisted bidders to upload MOU with
approved PEB manufacturers, format attached at Sch ‘A’ Notes
APPENDIX ‘A’ TO NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT) (Contd…)

NOTES:-
1. After opening of Cover 1, if the number of MES enlisted contractors of eligible class as well as un-
enlisted contractors, if any, fulfilling the other eligibility criteria given in NIT are less than 7 (Seven),
applications in respect of contractors One class below eligible class shall also be considered subject to
fulfillment of other eligibility criteria given in NIT. Therefore MES contractor’s One class below may also
bid for this tender. Contractors of One class below the eligible class shall not be considered in case
their present residual work load in hand is more than five times their present tendering limit. In case
such contractors fulfil the criteria of upgradation to the stipulated eligible class based on past
experience of completed works (Individual work experience and /or average annual turnover , as
applicable ) and financial soundness (Solvency / Financial soundness and working capital ) the ceiling
of present residual work will not apply and they will considered for issue of tender. Such bidders shall
upload in their Cover-1 bid details of works in hand showing names of work, name of Accepting
Officers, Contract amounts, dates of commencement and completion (stipulated) and progress as on
bid submission date. These details shall be verified by the Tender Issuing Authority from concerned
formations in case bids of such contractors are considered for evaluation.
2. In case after opening Cover 1, the number of MES enlisted contractors of eligible class as well as un-
enlisted contractors, if any, fulfilling the other eligibility criteria given in NIT, are 7 (Seven) or more,
applications of only those One class below the eligible class bidders shall be considered, who have
previously completed similar works satisfactorily and are meeting the criteria of up-gradation in respect
of past experience of completed works (individual work experience and/or average annual turnover as
applicable) and financial soundness (solvency/financial soundness and working capital) as per details
given in manual on contracts. Therefore such contractors shall upload the requisite
information/documents in the Cover-1.
3. Un-enlisted contractor shall be considered provided he meets the criteria. Foreign firms shall
not be eligible for this tender. However Indian Firms having foreign national/Indian nationals
staying abroad / Indian national having taken foreign citizenship, as director(s) shall be
considered subject to security clearance from concerned authorities.
Contractors enlisted with MES will upload following documents in Cover-1 for checking eligibility :-
a) Application for the tender on Tenderers letter head..
b) Enlistment letter issued by the Registering Authority duly renewed for the cyclic period in vogue.
c) Scanned copy of DD / Bankers cheque towards cost of tender and EMD instrument in case
SSD bond is not signed at the time of registration.
d) MOU with approved PEB manufacturers.
e) Annexure ‘A’ to ‘F’.
f) Any other document required as described in this appendix.
4. Contractors not enlisted with MES will required to upload following documents in Cover-1 for
checking eligibility:-
a) Application for the tender on Firm’s letter head.
b) Scanned copy of DD / Bankers cheque towards cost of tender and EMD instrument
c) Copy of Police Verification Report / Police clearance Certificate / Character Certficate from the
Police Authority of the area where the registered office of the firm is located/notarized copy of
valid passport of Proprietor /each Partner/each Director.
d) All documents required for enlistment in MES for the class mentioned in Para 8(B) above as
per MES Manual on Contracts 2020.
e) All the documents mentioned in Note No 3 (d) to (f) above.
5. Tenders not accompanied by scanned copies of requisite DD/Bankers cheque towards cost of
tender and earnest money (as applicable) in Cover-1 shall not be considered for validation of ‘T’
bid and their Financial Bids will not be opned.
6. Contractors should ensure that their original physical DDs and Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)
instrument (as applicable) reach the office of Accepting Officerwithin 05 days of bid submission
end date failing which following action shall be taken.
a. In case of tenders from an enlisted contractor of MES. Where scanned copies of

requisite DD/ Bankers cheque towards cost of tender have been uploaded in Cover 1, but physical
copies are not received within the stipulated period, their financial bids (Cover-2) will be opened.
However non-submission of physical copies of cost of tender shall be considered as willful
negligence of the tenderer with ulterior motives and such tenderer shall be banned from bidding
for a period of six months commencing from the date of opening of Financial Bid (cover-2).
b. In case of tenders from un-enlisted Contractor, where scanned copies of requisite DD /
Bankers Cheque towards cost of tender have been uploaded in Cover-1 but physical copies are
not received within the stipulated period, their financial bids (Cover-2) will not be opened. Name of
such contractors along wih complete address shall be circulated for not opening of their bids for a
period of six months commencing from the date of opening of Financial bid (Cover 2).
c. In case of tenders from enlisted and un enlisted contractors, where scanned copies of
instrument forEarnest money (as applicable) have been uploaded in Cover 1 but the same are not
received in physical form within stipulated period, such tenders shall not qualify for opening of
financial bid (Cover 2).
7. Contractor will not be allowed to execute the work by subletting or through power of attorney to a
third party/another firm on his behalf. However a contractor canexecute the work through power of
attorney to Sons/Daughters/Spouse of proprietor /Partner/Director and firm’s own employees,
director, project manager provided they are not having a separate enlisted firm in MES in their
name as Proprietor/Partner/Director.
8. After opening of Cover -1 and during its technical evaluation, in case any deficiency is noticed in
the documents required to be uploaded by the tenderers as per NIT, a communication in the form
of e-mail/SMS/Speed post etc shall be sent to the contractor to rectify the deficiency within a period
of seven days from date of communication failing which their financial bid (Cover 2) shall not be
opened and contractor shall not have any claim on the same.
9. Invitation for e-tender does not constitute any guarantee for validation of Technical bid and
subsequent opening of financial bid of any applicant/bidder merely by virtue of enclosing DD.
Accepting Officer reserves the right to reject the Technical bid and not to open the financial bid of
any applicant/bidder. Technical bid validation shall be decided by the Accepting Officer based on
eligibility of the firm as per criteria given in this Appendix. Tenderer/bidder will be informed
regarding non validation of his Technical bid assigning reasons therefore through tender evaluation
report which shall be uploaded on the website. Such tenderer, if desires, may appeal to the next
higher engineer authority (NHEA) vizHQ Additional Director General (Projects), Military
Engineer Services C/O Chief Engineer Chennai Zone, Island Ground, PallavanSalai, Chennai
– 600 009on email id adgpchn-mes@nic.in with copy to the Accepting Officer on email (Email id :
cezcgg2-mes@gov.in) before the scheduled date of opening of Cover 2. NHEA shall decide the
matter within a period of seven working days from the date of receipt of appeal. The decision of the
NHEA shall be final and binding. The tenderer/bidder shall not be entitled for any compensation
whatsoever for rejection of his bid.
10. In case an un enlisted contractor is already executing works in MES, he shall not be considered
eligible for the subject tender if the total value of such works is more than twice the tendering limit
of the MES Class of contractor for which it is eligible. For this purpose, details of the work being
executed by such contractor shall be uploaded in the Cover 1 of the bid and shall be checked/
verified by the Accepting Officer.
11. In case the BOQ is revised through the corrigendum and the bidder has failed to quote on revised
BOQ (ie, he has quoted on pre revised BOQ), such bid shall be treated as willfull negligence by the
bidder and his quotation shall be considered non bonafide. In such cases the lowest tender shall be
determined from amongst the valid/bonafide bids only. Accepting Officer may decide whether to re-
tender or consider the lowest bonafide tender for acceptance.
12. Revoking the offer or revising the rates upward or offering voluntary reduction by the lowest
tenderer after opening cover 2 shall be considered as a willful default. For this default a penalty of
an amount equal to Earnest Money shall be levied. In case of an un-enlisted tenderer, Earnest
money deposited by him shall be forfeited. In case of MES enlisted tenderer having deposited the
standing security bond, an amount equal to the earnest money stipulated in the NIT, shall be
notified to the tenderer for depositing through MRO and consideration of such tenderer in tender
evaluation for future works shall remain suspended till the aforementioned amount is deposited in
the Government Treasury. No other disciplinary/administrative action shall be taken against such
tenderers. In such situation, the next lowest offer shall not be considered for acceptance. Instead,
retendering shall be resorted to in a transparent and fair manner and the defaulting tenderer and
his related firm if any shall not be eligible for this tender in second call or subsequent calls.
13. Tender to related firms shall not be issued simultaneously. Firms shall be termed as related if
Proprietor/One or more Partner/Directors are common. Decision of Accepting Officer on issue/deny
the tender to any one of the related firms shall be final and binding.
14. In case of any document uploaded by bidder is found to be false or bidder has concealed some
relevant information before acceptance, in that case his EMD shall be forfeited and action will be
initiated against the defaulting bidder as per law.
15. In case of after acceptance of contract it is observed that contractor has submitted false document
or has concealed some information, in that case Contract will be cancelled and performance
security will be forfeited. Also action will be initiated against the contractor as per law.
Signature of Contractor Jt Dir (Contracts)

For Accepting Officer
82079/NIT/ 119 /E8
JNC Nagar Road, Bogmalo Post
Goa– 403 806
Dated : 22 Jul 2022
INTEGRITY PACT
GENERAL
Whereas the President of India represented by Chief Engineer (Coast Guard), Goa herein after
referred to as Principal/ Owner, and the first part, has floated the tender (NIT No: 82079/ /E8
dated Jul 2022) and intends to award, under laid down organizational procedure, contract for
“PROVISION OF HANGER WITH APRON LINK TAXI TRACK AND EARTH FILLING AT JUHU
MUMBAI” hereinafter referred to as the works / Services and M/s
………………………………................. Represented by ………………………………...........… (which
term unless expressly indicated by contract, shall be deemed to include its successors and its
assignees), hereinafter referred to as the Bidder/ Contractor and the second part is willing to carry
out the works/ services.
1. Whereas the bidder is a Proprietorship Concern/ Partnership firm/ Limited Liability firm/ Private
Limited Company/ Limited Company/ Joint venture constituted in accordance with the relevant law
in the matter and the Principal/ Owner is Chief Engineer (CG) Goa performing its function on behalf
of President of India.
Objectives:
2. Now, therefore, the Principal/ owner and the bidder agree to enter into this pre-contract agreement,
referred to as INTEGRITY PACT (IP) to avoid all forms of corruption by following a system that is
fair, transparent and free from any influence/ prejudiced dealings prior to, during and subsequent to
the conclusion of the contract to be entered into with a view to :-
2.1 Enabling the principal/ Owner to get desired works/ services at a competitive price in
confirmity with the defend specifications of the services by avoiding high cost and the
distortionary impact of corruption on public procurement.
2.2 Enabling Bidders to abstain from bribing or any corrupt practice in order to secure the
contract by providing assurance to them that their competitors will also refrain from bribing
and other corrupt practices ant the Principal/ Owner will commit to prevent corruption, in
any form, by their officials by following transparent procedures.
Commitments of principal/ Owner

3. The principal/ Owner commits itself to the following :-
3.1 The Principal/ Owner undertakes that, no official of Principal/ Owner, connected directly or
indirectly with the contract will demand, take a promise for or accept, directly or through
intermediaries, any bribe, consideration, gift, reward, favour or any material or immaterial
benefit or any other advantage from the bidder, either for themselves or for any person,
organisation or third party related to the contract, in exchange for an advantage, in the
bidding process, bid evaluation, contracting or implementation process related to contract.
3.2 The Principal/ Owner will, during the pre-contract stage, treat all Bidders alike and will
provide to all Bidders the same information and will not provide any such information to any
particular Bidder which could afford an advantage to that particular Bidder in comparision to
other Bidders.
3.3 All the officials of the Principal/ Owner will report to the appropriate Government office any
attempted or completed breach(s) of above commitments as well as any substantial
suspicion of such a breach.
4. In case of any such preceding misconduct on part of such official(s) is reported by the bidder to the
Principal/ Owner wilful and verifiable facts and the same is prime facia found to be correct by the
Principal/ Owner, necessary disciplinary proceedings, or any other action as deemed fit, including
criminal proceedings may be initiated by the Principal/ Owner and such a person shall be debarred
from further dealing related to the tender/ Contract process. In such a case while an enquiry is
being conducted by the Principal/ Ownerthe tender process/ proceedings under the contract would
not be stalled.
INTEGRITY PACT (Cont…)
Commitments of Bidders
5. The Bidder(s) commits himself to take all measures necessary to prevent corrupt practices, unfair
means and illegal activities during any stage of his bid or during any pre-contract or post-contract
stage in order to secure the contract or in furtherance to secure it and in particular commits himself
to the following.
5.1 The Bidder will not offer directly or through intermediaries, any bribe, gift, consideration,
reward, favour of any material or non-material benefit or other advantage, commission, fee,
brokerage or inducement to any official of Principal/ Owner, connected directly or indirectly
with the bidding process, or to any person, organization or third party related to the contract
in exchange for any advantage in the bidding, evaluation, contracting and implementation of
the contract.
5.2 The Bidder further undertakes that he has not given, offered or promised to give, directly or
indirectly any bribe, gift, consideration, reward, favour of any material or non-material benefit
or other advantage, commission, fee, brokerage or inducement to any official of Principal/
Owner or otherwise in procuring the contract or forbearing to do or having done any act in
relation to the obtaining or execution of the contract or any other contract with the
Government for showing or forbearing to show favour or disfavour to any person in relation
to the contract or any other Contract with the Government.
5.3 The bidder will not collude with other parties interested in the contract to impair the
transparency, fairness and progress of the bidding process, bid evaluation, contracting and
implementation of the Contract.
5.4 The Bidder will not accept any advantage in exchange for any corrupt practice, unfair means
and illegal activities.
5.5 The Bidder would not enter into conditional contract with any Agent(s), broker(s) or any
other intermediaries wherein payment is made or penalty is levied, directly or indirectly, on
success or failure of the award of contract.
5.6 The Bidder commits to refrain from giving any complaint directly or through any other
manner without supporting it with full and verifiable facts. Complaint will be processed as per
Guidelines for handling of Complaints in vogue. In case the complaint is found to be
vexatious, frivolous or malicious in nature, it would be construed as a violation of Integrity
Pact.
6.0 Previous Transgression
6.1 The Bidder declares that no previous transgression occurred in last three years
immediately before signing of this Integrity Pact with any other company in respect of any
corrupt practices envisaged hereunder or with any Public Sector Enterprise in India or any
Government department in India.
6.2 If the Bidder makes incorrect statement on this subject, Bidder can be disqualified from
tender process or the contract and if already awarded, same can be terminated for such
reason.
7.0 BLANK
8.0 Company Code Of Conduct
8.1 Bidders are advised to have a company code of conduct (clearly rejecting the use of bribes
and other unethical behavior and a compliance program for the implementation of code of
conduct throughout the country.
9.0 Sanction for Violation
9.1 Any breach of the aforesaid provisions by the bidder or any one employed by him or acting
on his behalf (whether with or without the knowledge of the Bidder) or the commission of
any offence by the bidder or any one employed by him or acting on his behalf, as defined in
Chapter IX of the Indian Penal Code, 1860 or the prevention of corruption Act 1988 or any
other act enacted for the prevention of Corruption shall entitle the Principal/ Owner to take
all or any one of the following actions wherever required :-
INTEGRITY PACT (Cont…)
(i) Technical bid of the Bidder will not be opened. Bidder will not be entitled to or given
any compensation. However the proceedings with the bidder(s) would continue.
(ii) Financial bid of the bidder will not be opened. Bidder will not be entitled to or given
any compensation. However, the proceedings with the bidder(s) would continue.
(iii) The Earnest Money Deposit shall stand forfeited either fully or partially, as directed by
the Principal/ Owner, in case contract is not awarded to the Bidder and the Principal/
Owner shall not be required to assign any reason therefor. For enlisted contractors an
amount less than equal to Earnest Money Deposit as decided by the Principal/ Owner
shall be deducted from any amount held with the Department/ any payment due.
(iv) To immediately cancel the contract, if already concluded/ awarded without any
compensation to the Bidder.
(v) To encash the Performance Security furnished by the Bidder.
(vi) To cancel all or any other contract(s) with the Bidder.
(vii) To temporarily suspend or temporarily debar/ permanently debar the bidder as per
extent policy.
(viii) If adequate amount is not available in the present tender/ contract, the deficient
amount can be recovered from any outstanding payment due to the Bidder from the
Principal/ Owner in connection with any other contract for other works/ Services.
(ix) If the bidder or any employee of the bidder or any person acting on behalf of the
Bidder, either directly or indirectly, is closely related to any of the officer of Principal/.
Owner, or alternatively if any close relative of an officer of the Principal/ Owner has
financial interest/ Stake in the Bidders firm, the same shall be disclosed by the bidder at
the time of submission of tender. Any failure to disclose the interest involved shall entitle
the Principal/ Owner to debar the bidder from the bid process or rescind the contract
without payment of any compensation to the Bidder. The term ‘Close Relative’ for this
purpose would mean spouse whether residing with the Government servant or not, but
does not include a spouse separated from the Government servant by a decree or order
of competent Court, son but does not include a child or step child who is no longer in any
way dependent upon the Government Servant or daughter or step son or step daughter
and wholly dependent upon Government servant or whose custody the Government
servant has been deprived of by or under any law, any other person related, whether by
blood or marriage, to the Govt servant or to the Government servant’s wife or husband
and wholley dependent upon Government Servant.
(x) The Bidder shall not lend to or borrow any money from or enter into any monetary
dealings or transactions, directly or indirectly with any employee of Principal/ Owner and
he does so, the principal/ Owner shall be entitled forthwith to cancel the contract and all
other contracts with the bidder.
9.2 The decision of the Principal/ Owner to the effect that breach of the provisions of this Integrity Pact
has been committed by the Bidder shall be final and binding on the Bidder. However, the bidder
can approach the Independent External Monitor(s) (IEMs) appointed for the purpose of this Pact.
10 Independent External Monitors(IEMs)
10.1 MoD has appointed the following Independent External Monitors for this Pact in
consultation with Central Vigilance Commission
(INTEGRITY PACT (Cont…)
a) Shri. Sudhir Bhargava,IAS(Retd) bhargav4@nic.in
b) Shri. Vikram Srivastava ,IPS (Retd) vikramsrivastava1973@gmail.com
10.2 Details of Nodal Officer nominated by E-in-C’s Branch are as follows :-

Name : Shri Sanjay Kumar Gupta, Director (Contracts)
Postal address : Room No 174
Dte of Contract Management
Engineer-in-Chief’s Branch
Kashmir House Rajaji Marg
New Delhi – 110011
Tele No(Office) : 011-23015619
e-mail ID : dircont1einc-mes@nic.in
Mobile No : 8826908855
10.3 In case of any complaint with regard to violation of Integrity Pact, either party can approach
IEMs with copy to Nodal Officer and the other party. If any such complaint from bidder is
received by Principal/ Owner, the Principal/ Owner shall refer the complaint to the
Independent External Monitors for their recommendations/ inquiry report.
10.4 If the IEMs need to peruse the relevant records of the Principal/ Owner and/ or of the
Bidder/ Contractor in connection with the complaint sent to them, the Principal/ Owner and/
or the Bidder/ Contractor shall make arrangement for such perusal of records by the IEMs
as demanded by them including unrestricted and unconditional access to the project
documentation and minutes of meeting. If records/ documents of sub-contractor(s) are also
required to be perused by the IEMs, the bidder shall make arrangement for such perusal of
records bythe IEMs as demanded by them, IEMs are under obligation to treat the
information and documents of the Principal/ Owner and Bidder/ Contractors with
confidentiality.
10.5 The task of the IEMs, is to review independently and objectively, any complaint received
with regard to violation Integrity Pact and offer recommendations or carry out inquiry as
deemed fit. The IEMs are not subject to any instructions by the representatives of the
parties and shall perform their functions neutrally and independently. The report of inquiry,
if any, made by the IEMs shall be submitted to either of the following for a final and
appropriate decision in the matter keeping in view the provision of this pact :-
(a) Engineer-in-Chief in normal cases
(b) CVO (MES & BRO)/ MoD in cases involving vigilance angle.
11. Examination of Books of Accounts:

In case of any allegations of violation of any provisions of this Integrity Pact or payment of
commission, the Principal/ Owner or its agencies shall be entitled to examine the Books of
Account of the Bidder and the Bidder shall provide necessary information of the relevant
financial documents in English and shall extend all possible help for the purpose of such
examination.
12. Law and Place of Jurisdiction

This pact is subject to Indian Law. The place of performance and jurisdiction is the seat of the
Principal/ Owner.
13. Other Legal Actions

The actions stipulated in this Integrity Pact are without prejudice to any other legal action that
may follow in accordance with the provisions of the extant law in force relating to any civil or
criminal proceedings.
(INTEGRITY PACT (Cont…)
14 Signing of Integrity Pact on behalf of Bidder
(a) Proprietorship Concern: The Integrity Pact must be signed by the proprietor or by an
authorized signatory holding power of attorney signed by the proprietor.
(b) Partnership Firm: The Integrity Pact must be signed by all Partners or by one or more
partner holding power of attorney signed by all partners.
(c) Limited Liability firm: The Integrity Pact must be signed by all partners or by one or more
partner holding power of attorney signed by all partners.
(d) Private Limited/ Limited company: The Integrity Pact must be signed by a representative
duly authorised by Board resolution.
(e) Joint Venture: The Integrity Pact must be signed by all partners and members to Joint
venture or by one or more partner holding power of attorney signed by all partners and
member to the joint venture.
15. Validity
15.1 The validity of this Integrity Pact shall be from date of its signing. It expires for the
contractor after final payment under the contract has been made or till the continuation of defect
liability period, whichever is later and for all other bidders, till the Contract has been awarded.
15.2 Should one or several provisions of this pact turn out to be invalid, the remainder of this
Pact remains valid. In this case, the parties will strive to come to an agreement to their original
intensions.
Jt Dir (Contracts)
for Accepting Officer
INTEGRITY PACT
To
…………………………………….
…………………………………….
…………………………………….
Sub:Tender ID No. FOR THE WORK “PROVISION OF HANGER

WITH APRON LINK TAXI TRACK AND EARTH FILLING AT JUHU MUMBAI
Dear Sir (s),
It is hereby declared that MES is committed to follow the principle of transparency, equity and
competitiveness in public procurement.
The subject Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) is an invitation to offer made on the condition that the
Bidder will sign the Integrity Pact, which is an integral part of tender/bid documents, failing which the
tenderer/ bidder will stand disqualified from the tendering process and the bid of the bidder would be
summarily rejected.
This declaration shall form part and parcel of the Integrity Pact and signing of the same shall be
deemed as acceptance and signing of the Integrity Pact on behalf of the MES.
Yours faithfully
Jt Dir (Contracts)
for Chief Engineer
INTEGRITY PACT
To
HQ Chief Engineer (Coast Guard)
JNC Nagar Road, Bogmalo Post,
Goa– 403 806
Sub::Tender ID No. FOR THE WORK “PROVISION OF HANGER WITH

APRON LINK TAXI TRACK AND EARTH FILLING AT JUHU MUMBAI
Dear Sir,
I/We acknowledge that MES is committed to follow the principles thereof as enumerated in the
Integrity Pact enclosed with the tender/bid document.
I/We agree that the Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) is an invitation to offer made on the condition
that I/We will sign the enclosed Integrity Pact, which is an integral part of tender documents, failing
which I/We will stand disqualified from the tendering process. I/We acknowledge that THE MAKING
OF THE BID SHALL BE REGARDED AS AN UNCONDITIONAL AND ABSOLUTE ACCEPTANCE of
this condition of the NIT.
I/We confirm acceptance and compliance with the Integrity Pact in letter and spirit and further
agree that execution of the said Integrity Pact shall be separate and distinct from the main contract,
which will come into existence when tender/bid is finally accepted by MES. I/We acknowledge and
accept the validity of the Integrity Pact, which shall be in line with Para 1 of the enclosed Integrity Pact.
I/We acknowledge that in the event of my/our failure to sign and accept the Integrity Pact, while
submitting the tender/bid, MES shall have unqualified, absolute and unfettered right to disqualify the
tenderer/bidder and reject the tender/bid is accordance with terms and conditions of the tender/bid.
Yours faithfully
(Duly authorized signatory of the Bidder)

INSTRUCTIONS ON FILLING AND SUBMISSION OF TENDER
1.0 EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD)

1.1 Contractor(s) who are not enlisted with MES/who are enlisted but have not executed the
Standing Security Bond shall submit Earnest Money Deposit as detailed in Notice of Tender in
one of the following forms, along with their tender/bid:-
(a) Deposit at Call Receipt from a Scheduled Bank in favour of GE/AGE (I) concerned.
(b) Receipted Treasury Challan, the amount being credited to the Revenue Deposit of GE/AGE
(I).
It is advisable that Earnest Money is deposited in the form of deposit call receipt from an
approved Schedule Bank for easy refund. In case the tenderer/bidder wants to lodge 'Earnest
Money Deposit' in any other form allowed by MES, a confirmation about its acceptability will be
obtained from the Accepting Officer well in advance of the bid submission end date and time.
Earnest Money Deposit shall be submitted in the name of concerned GE/AGE(I).
NOTES: Earnest money deposit in the form of cheque / bank Guarantee etc will not be
accepted. Non-Submission of Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) (scanned copy along with
Technical Bid & hard copy before the date & time fixed for opening of BOQ) will render the bid
disqualified for opening of Cover -2 (finance bid).
2 PERFORMANCE SECURITY (Refer Condition 19 of IAFW-2249 General Condition of
Contract)
2.1 After receipt of the letter of Acceptance, the successful contractor shall deliver to the Accepting
Officer a Performance Security in any of the forms given below for an amount equivalent to 3%
of the contract sum to issue Work Order.
(i) A Bank Guarantee in the prescribed form.
(ii) Government Securities, FDR or any other Government instruments stipulated by the
Accepting Officer.
2.2 Work Order No 01 shall be placed only after submission of performance security of
adequate value by the contractor as per condition 19 of IAFW 2249.
2.3 If the performance security is provided by the successful Contractor in the form of a Bank
Guarantee, it shall be issued by Nationalized / Scheduled Indian Bank but its confirmation shall
be done only from the Head Office of the Bank.
2.4 Failure of the successful contractor to comply with the requirements of sub-clause 2.1 and 2.2
shall constitute sufficient grounds for cancellation of the award of work and forfeiture for the
Earnest Money. In case of MES enlisted contractor, amount equal to the Earnest Money
stipulated in the Notice Inviting Tender, shall be notified to the tenderer for depositing the
amount through MRO. Issue of tender to such tenderers shall remain suspended till the
aforesaid amount equal to the Earnest Money is deposited in Government Treasury.
2.5 All compensation or other sums of money payable by the contractor to the Government under
terms of this contract or under any other contract with Government may be deducted from or
paid by the sale of a sufficient part of the Performance Security or from the interest arising there
from or from any sums which may be due or become due to the contractor by the Government
on any account whatsoever and in the event of his Performance Security being reduced by
reason of any such deduction, or sale a aforesaid, the contractor shall within ten days thereafter
make good in cash or securities, endorsed as aforesaid, and sum or sums which may have
been deducted from or realized by the sale of his Performance Security or any part thereof.
2.6 Government shall not be responsible for any loss of securities or any depreciation in the value
of securities while in their charge nor for loss of interest thereon.
2.7 In the event of contract being cancelled, under Condition 52, 53 & 54 of General Conditions of
Contract, the Performance Security shall be forfeited in full and shall be credited into
Consolidated Fund of India.
3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE
3.1 The bids received only in the electronic from will be considered. All bids shall be submitted on
‘eprocuremes.gov.in’ portal. Documents should be scanned and forwarded in ‘pdf’ form and ‘xls’ form
as indicated.
3.2 Bids shall be uploaded on ‘eprocuremes.gov.in’ portal on or before the bid closing date mentioned
in the tender. No tender/bid in any other electronic or physical form like email / fax / by hand / through
post will be considered.
3.3 Bid should be DIGITALLY signed using valid DSC. All pages of tender documents,
corrections/alterations shall be signed / initialed by the lowest bidder after acceptance.
3.4 Drawings, if issued in physical form, must be returned duly initialed by the tenderer/bidder in
separate envelope indicating his name and address.
3.5 The tender shall be signed, dated and witnessed at all places provided for in the documents after
acceptance. All corrections shall be initialed. The Contractor shall initial every page of tender and shall
sign all drawings forming part of the tender. Any tender/bid, which proposes alterations to any of the
conditions whatsoever, is liable to be rejected.
3.6 In the technical bid, a scanned copy of Power of Attorney in favour of the person uploading the bid
using his/her DSC shall be uploaded. In case the digital signatory himself is the sole proprietor,
scanned copy of an affidavit on stamp paper of appropriate value to this effect stating that he has
authority to bind the firm in all matters pertaining to contract including the Arbitration Clause, shall be
attached in ‘pdf’ form. In case of partnership concern or a limited company, digital signatory of the
bid/tender shall ensure that he is competent to bind the contractor (through) partnership deed, general
power of attorney or Memorandum and Articles of Association of the Company) in all the matters
pertaining to the contracts with Union of India including arbitration clause. A scanned copy of the
documents confirming of such authority shall be attached with the tender/bid in ‘pdf’ form, if not
submitted earlier. The person uploading the bid on behalf of another partner(s) or on behalf of a firm or
company using his DSC shall upload with the tender/bid a scanned copy (in ‘pdf’ form) of Power of
Attorney duly executed in his favour by such other or all of the Partner(s) or in accordance with
constitution of the company in case of company, stating that he has authority to bind such other person
of the firm or the Company, as the case may be, in all matters pertaining to the contract including the
Arbitration Clause.
3.7 Even in case of Firms or Companies which have already given Power of Attorney to an individual
authorizing him to sign tender in pursuance of which bids are being uploaded by such person as a
routine, fresh Power of Attorney duly executed in his favour stating specifically that the said person has
authority to bind such partners of the Firm, or the Company as the case may be, including the condition
relating to Arbitration Clause, should be uploaded in ‘pdf’ form with the tender/bid; unless such
authority has already been given to him by the Firm or the Company. It shall be ensured that power of
attorney shall be executed in accordance with the constitution of the company as laid down in its
Memorandum & Articles of Association.
3.8 Hard copies of all above documents should be sent by the contractor to the Tender issuing
authority well in advance to be received before the date and time fixed for the same.
3.9 Bid (Cover 1 & 2) shall be uploaded online well in time.
3.10 The contractor shall employ Indian National after verifying their antecedents and loyalty. Attention
is also drawn to special condition 3 referred hereinafter and also conditions 24 & 25 of IAFW 2249
(General conditions of contract).
3.11 Tenderers/bidders who uploaded their priced tenders/bids and are desirous of being present at
the time of opening of the tenders/bids, may do so at the appointed time.
3.12 The tenderer/bidder shall quote his rate on the BOQ file only. No alteration to the format will be
accepted, else the bid will be disqualified and summarily rejected.
3.13 In case the tenderer/bidder has to revise/modify the rates quoted in the BOQ (excel sheet) he can
do so only in the BOQ, through eprocuremes.gov.in site only before the bid closing time and date.
4 REVOKATION/REVISION OF OFFER UPWARD/ OFFERING VOLUNTARY REDUCTION,
AFTER OPENING OF FINANCIAL BIDS BY LOWEST BIDDER.
In the event of lowest tenderer/ bidder revoking his offer or revising his rate upward/ offering voluntary
reduction, after closing of bid submission date & time, his offer will be treated as revoked and the
Earnest Money deposited by him shall be forfeited. In case of MES enlisted Contractors, the amount
equal to the Earnest Money stipulated in the Notice of tender, shall be notified to the tenderer/bidder for
depositing the amount through MRO. Bids of such Contractors/bidders shall not be opened till the
aforesaid amount equal to the earnest money is deposited by him in Govt Treasury. In addition, bids of
such tenderer/bidder and his related firm shall not be opened in second call or subsequent calls.
Reduction offered by the tenderer/bidder on the freak high rates referred for review shall not be treated
as voluntary reduction.
5 C P M (Critical Path Method)
5.1 The project planning for work covered in the scope of tender is based on CPM.
5.2 The tenderer/bidder is expected to be fully conversant with the CPM technique and employ
technical staff who can use the technique in sufficient details. Sufficient books and other literature on
the subject are widely available in the market which the tenderer/bidder may make use of.
5.3 The tenderer’s/bidder’s attention is drawn to special condition of the tender regarding preparation
of the detailed network analysis and time schedule for the work and his liability for employing sufficient
resources to adhere to this schedule. Any inability on the part of the tenderer/bidder in using the
technique will be taken as his technical inefficiency and will affect his class of enlistment and future
prospect/invitation to tenders for future works.
5.4. Department may issue amendments/errata in form of CORRIGENDUM to tender/revised BOQ to
the tender documents. The tenderer/bidder is requested to read the tender documents in conjunction
with all the errata/amendments/corrigendum, if any, issued by the department.
6 In case the BOQ is revised by the Department and the bidder has failed to quote in revised BOQ
(i.e he has quoted in previous BOQ), such bid shall be treated as willful negligence by the bidder and
his quotation shall be considered non-bonafide. In such cases the lowest tender shall be determined by
the lowest amount amongst the valid/bonafide bids only. Accepting Officer may decide whether to
retender or otherwise. The remark of ‘non bonafide financial bid’ against such bidder and copy of this
CST shall be uploaded alongwith Financial Bid Opening Summary.
7. REFUND OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY
(Refer Condition 19 of IAFW 2249 General Condition of Contract) – The Performance security Deposit
mentioned hereinbefore may be refunded to the contractor after expiration of the defects liability period
(ref Sch A notes) by the GE provided always that the contractor shall first have been paid the final bill
and rendered a No-Demand Certificate (IAFW-451). Any recovery if outstanding against the contractor
shall be effected from the performance security as stipulated under condition 19 of IAFW-2249 (as
amended).
8. These instructions shall form part of the contract documents.
Signature of Contractor
Dated: Jt Dir (Contracts)
In lieu of IAFW-2159 (Revised 1947)

[To be used in conjunction with General Conditions
of Contracts IAFW-2249) (1989Print)]

JNC Nagar Road, Bogmalo Post
Tel: 08322970606 Goa :-403 806
82079 / 120 /E8 22 Jul 2022
PROVISION OF HANGER WITH APRON LINK TAXI TRACK AND EARTH FILLING AT JUHU MUMBAI
A tender/ bidder who is qualified as per the eligibility criteria mentioned in the tender documents and has
interalia sound past record is hereby authorized to tender for the above work. The tender / bid [both
COVER-1 & COVER-2] shall be submitted / uploaded on the MES website portal
[www.eprocuremes.gov.in] as per time and date mentioned in the tender documents.
Any correspondence concerning this tender should be addressed as indicated at the top of this sheet
quoting the reference as given.
THE PRESIDENT OF INDIA DOES NOT BIND HIMSELF TO ACCEPT THE LOWEST OR ANY
TENDER
Jt Dir (Contracts)
SCHEDULE À' NOTES
(List of Works and Prices)

NOTES :-
1.0 Applicable to all Parts of Schedule À’.
1.1 This Schedule is divided into 17 (Seventeen) parts, as detailed below:-
(a) Part – I : Building works

(b) Part – II : Site Clearance, Area Development, Excavation & Earth work
(c) Part – III : Internal Electrification other than PEB hangar
(d) Part – IV : Internal Water Supply other than PEB hangar
(e) Part – V : Roads, Path & Culverts
(g) Part – VI : Area Drainage
(h) Part – VII : Sewage Disposal
(i) Part – VIII : Dispersal Area
(j) Part –IX : Fire Fighting
(k) Part – X : External Electrification
(l) Part – XI : External water supply
(m) Part – XII : Lightening Protection
(n) Part – XIII : DG Sets
(o) Part – XIV : Aviation obstruction Light/ Conduit for TV & Telephone
(p) Part – XV Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
(q) Part - XVI : Provisional sum
(r) Part - XVII Miscellaneous Items
1.2 Sch ‘A’ Part-I and Srl Item No 18.00 to 21.00 of BOQ are firm, whereas the quantities (Approx No
of units) required for all items of Sch ‘A’ Part-II to XVI and as mentioned in BOQ (Part XVII) as indicated
are provisional. Description of building works and services given in various parts of Schedule ‘A’ are in
brief. These are deemed to be amplified and read in conjunction with special conditions, particular
specifications, specifications for material and workmanship and conditions in relevant trade sections of
MES Standard Schedule of Rates Part-I (Specifications)-2009 & Part-II (Rates)-2020 and contract
drawings (including notes thereon)
1.0. PERIOD OF COMPLETION.
2.1 The entire work under this contract comprising building works & services described in Schedule 'A'
Part I to XVII and items catered in BOQ shall be completed within 24 (Twenty Four) Months from the
date of handing over of site as per work order No 01 placed by GE.
2.1 A Dates of start and finish of activities shall be made out as per duration given in the Schedule after
placement of Work Order. The tenderer is advised to go through the scope of work in conjunction with
Schedule ‘A’ items minutely and study the project thoroughly.
2.2 The site for buildings shall be handed over to the contractor immediately on commencement
date as per work order No 01 placed by GE. Site for execution of work will be available as soon as the
GE places the Work Order No. 1. In case, it is not possible for the Dept to make the entire site
available immediately after Work Order No. 1 is placed, the contractor will have to arrange his working
programme accordingly. No claim, whatsoever for not giving the entire site on placement of Work
Order No. 1 and for giving the site gradually will be tenable. No dispute on this account shall be
entertained.

SCHEDULE À’ NOTES (Contd.)
2.3 No claim whatsoever for non handing over the entire site on placement of Work Order No. 1 and for
giving the site gradually will be tenable. No dispute on this account shall be entertained.
2.4 Defect liability period (Condition 46 of IAFW 2249): Defect liability perod for the subject work
shall be 36 (Thirty Six) Months from the certified date of completion.
3.0 In case of details in respect of items shown on any of the main drawings are not given in the
drawings referred to in the main drawings then the same shall be followed from any other drawing(s)
included in the list of drawings. Any drawings mentioned in the contract/contract drawings but not included
in the list of drawings shall also be deemed to form part of the contract. No dispute on this account shall
be entertained.
4.0 In case of variation in the drawings shown in the list of drawings of a particular details and in the
particular main drawing (not included in list of drawings) the drawings mentioned in list of drawings shall
take precedence for that particular details.
5.0 Layout of buildings indicated in the site plan is tentative. No adjustment in prices shall be done on
account of final approved layout within the area by GE/ Engr-in-Charge.
6.0 Probable distribution of various items of internal/external services is indicated on drawings. These
are tentative and may be varied where necessary at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge. The
contractor shall not be entitled for any claim on account of such varied alignment.
7.0 Tenderers are required to get fully acquainted with the scope of work as catered for in the tender
documents and also the site of work.no claim shall be entertained subsequently for any misunderstanding
or any inaccuracy with regard to site conditions & provisions made in tender documents as well
whatsoever for not handing over of entire site on placement of Work Order No 1 and for giving the site
gradually will be tenable. No dispute on this account shall be entertained.
8.0. Unless otherwise specified, unit rates for all items of Schedule ‘A’ and BOQ include the ‘Materials
& labour’ or ‘Supply and fix’ including installing, commissioning, testing etc complete all as specified
and/or shown on drawing. Contractor’s special attention is drawn to the fact that all the provisions
involving use of material or labour or both specified in the particular specifications and/or shown on
drawings but not specifically included in the description of the relevant item of Schedule ‘A’ shall also be
deemed to be included in the unit rate/lump sum quoted by the contractor and nothing extra shall be
admissible on this account.
9.0. Work in respect of Schedule ‘A’ Part-I to XVI which are pre-priced by MES and are carried over to
BOQ. The unit rates inserted in Schedule ‘A’ against these parts are based on unit rates given in MES
Schedule of Rates-2020 or analogous rates thereof or assessed rates. The tenderer shall work out total
lump sum against each of these Parts of Schedule ‘A’. The percentage above SSR pre-priced amount
shall be derived in the excel sheet automatically by the system. As per Condition 6A of IAFW-2249, the
amount shall be treated as firm and percentage shall be amended accordingly. The contractor shall have
no claims, whatsoever, on account of any error in the unit rates/lumpusum prices inserted by MES.
10.0. The tenderer has to insert his unit rates in BOQ for all items (which are pre-priced and not pre-
priced by the department) as given in BOQ under respective columns. The bidder must quote their rates
(s) in INR only.
11.0. The contractor’s quoted rates shall be deemed to inclusive all taxes/cesses viz GST, duties,
royalties octroi and other levies payable under respective states as applicable on the date of receipt of
tender. It may be noted that any tender imposing any condition in this regard or any other account shall be
treated as a conditional tender and the same shall be liable to be rejected.

12.0 No increase/decrease in any taxes/duties, statutory or otherwise except as mentioned in Special

Condition No 36 here-in-after, after submission of tender and during execution of the woks shall be
adjusted.
13. Contractor shall execute the work pertaining to provisional quantities in respect of Schedule ‘A’
Part-II to XVI & as mentioned in BOQ (Except Item No 18.00 to 21.00) as per site requirements and as
directed. No claim whatsoever on this account shall be entertained. Quantities considered in Sch ‘A’ Part-I
shall be considered as firm.
14. The contractor shall provide necessary barricading around the entire work area as directed by the
GE/Engr-in-Charge, using CGI/Galvalume sheets mounted on MS angle/wooden or other MS tubular
section. Height of barricading shall not be less than 2.40m. Cost of barricading shall also be deemed to
be included in contractor lump sum.
15. The under mentioned columns and remarks shall be deemed to have been inserted in respective
columns of Schedule 'A' Part-I to Part- XVI and BOQ against each item(s):
Drg No. Period of completion for Remarks

individual item from the
date of handing over the
site
Col 3 Col 7 Col 8
Refer list of drawings Refer Schedule ‘A’ Notes Refer Schedule ‘A’ Notes
for all items of Sch ‘A’
16. Contractor shall provide granite stone plate of adequate size at the place as directed by GE,
engraving the following information in the project works. Cost of this provisions shall be deemed to
inclusive in the lump sum cost of tender :-
(a) Job No.
(b) CA No. & year
(c) Name of work
(d) Name of Contractor
(e) Name of Garrison Engineer
(f) Name of Engr-in-Charge
(g) Date of commencement
(h) Date of completion
(j) Date of expiry of defect liability period.
17. QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
To ensure that the work shall be executed after complying the contract provisions with sound engineering
practice and laid down codal provisions, and contractor shall submit quality control plan to GE within 30
days of commencement of work.

18. DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHS
The Contractor shall provide digital photographs (minimum 200 in number) taken at various stages as
decided by GE during the progress of work and submit the same along with subsequent RARs. Two
copies (A4 size) and two soft copies (CD) of each digital photograph shall be submitted by contractor to
GE. The unit rates against Sch ‘A’ shall be deemed to include the cost of above provision and nothing
extra payable on this account. In the event of failure by contractor to submit the same within 30 days of
issuance of completion certificate, an amount of Rs. 50,000/- (Rupees fifty thousand only) will be
recovered from the contractor.
19. RECORD DRAWINGS

After completion of work, the contractor shall submit the record drawings (dimensional line plan)
separately for each (internal and external) services. The contractor shall also submit record drawings of
the completed buildings incorporating all changes on A1 size polyester film and one blue print alongwith
CD showing all changes, within 30 days of issue of completion certificate failing which an amount of `Rs
40,000/- (Rupees forty thousand only) will be recovered as a penalty from the final bill.
20. FLIGHT SAFETY MEASURES:

20.1 The FFL of proposed dispersal consequent to filling shall be finalized on mutual consultation jointly of
AAI, CG and MES authorities after taking levels at 2mt x 3mt grid by contractor. Also drainage for rain
water/ storm water be planned with to avoid flooding has to be designed and vetted by IIT/
NIT/Government Engineering College before execution.
20.2 The contractor to ensure right to way for Deccan charter and BFC Batliwala Hangar for routine
operation during construction of Dispersal as per direction of AAI/ CG. Accordingly necessary planning
shall be done during execution.
20.3 The Dispersal will be handed over in phases for execution due to various operational commitments.
20.4 Contractor to ensure flight safety while quoting rates such as marking/ markers/ marshaller etc during
execution of work as per requirement of AAI/ CG authority.
20.5 Juhu Airport being sensitive area, security clearance for men and machinery are mandatory. Also
fiscal charges as levied by security department (AAI – Juhu) for issuing requisite security clearance shall
be borne by contractor.
20.6 The existing cables/wires/pipes/water supply lines/other services etc. if any shall be taken care of
during the execution of the work and any damages in this regard shall be made good by contractor at his
own cost.
20.7 Trenches shall be filled and made good to match with the existing premises by the contractor at his
own cost.
20.8 Any other damages in addition to the above to any structure/ roads etc. shall be made good by
contractor at his own cost.
20.9 The work shall not obstruct the operational activities of Juhu Airport. Adequate measures and
required permissions to be taken by Contractor from ATM dept while execution to ensure that the
operations/ aircraft movement from the adjacent hangars are not hampered.
20.10 The necessary layout drawings of water supply line/ cable route are to be submitted by Contractor
before start of the work.
20.11 The Contractor shall plan and execute the work in such a way that the finished floor level of Hangar
No 2 after construction should not exceed the present floor level of the erstwhile BFC hangar.
20.12 The Contractor shall plan and execute the work in such a way that the finish floor level of Hangar
No 1 i.e. Hangar beside CAMA hangar should not exceed the adjacent perimeter road levels.

20.13 The drawings along with reduced levels etc of the proposed apron shall be submitted to AAI by
Contractor for NOC before execution of the same.
20.14 No labour huts shall be permitted inside the operational area.
20.15 The contractor shall take all precautions at site by exhibiting necessary caution boards, speed limit
board, caution lights, barriers/ barricading etc. wherever necessary as per operational/safety
requirements.
20.16 The contractor shall stock materials at site in coordination with AAI strictly keeping in view the
operational/ safety requirements.
21. UNIT RATES
21.1 SCHEDULE À’ PART -I
21.1.1 Unit rate of building work under Schedule À’ Part –I shall include:-
(a) In All buildings masonry work shall be with PCC block masonary conforming to BIS 12894
irrespective of whatever shown in Drawings.
(b) Anti-termite treatment to buildings mentioned in BOQ item No 18.00 to 21.00
(c) RCC, masonary, foundations, plinth beams, dwarf walls, toe walls, ramps (where
applicable) including lean concrete, super structure, lintels/beams, DPC, RCC Jali, brick steps etc
all as applicable and shown on drawings.
(d) HDPE water tank(s) over roof as shown on drawings including staging, brass valve with
PVC ball, etc. If capacity of HDPE water storage tank is not shown on drawing then it shall be of
capacity 500 ltrs.
(e) Built in furniture articles as shown on drgs.
(f) Toilet/sanitary appliance such as WHBs, Urinals, WCs, EWCs with seat cover & Water Jet,
flushing cisterns, PVC partitions, towel rails, toilet papers holders, mirrors, Soap niche, peg sets,
bottle trap,etc.
(g) Seismic strengthening measures, Crumple joints.
(h) Saucer drain alongwith & including apron/Ramp of garages, ground sump, wooden/ steel/
FRP/aluminium doors, MS rungs.

(i) Cost of any cutting, leveling/forming holes/chases etc in walls, floors and ceiling as required for
concealed water supply pipe and/or internal wiring and making good in cement mortar 1:3 &
finished to match the adjoining surfaces. No adjustment shall, however, be made on this account
for pricing of any deviation in respect of Schedule ‘A’ Part-I and also for any variation in quantities
indicated as “PROVISIONAL’ in the tender.
(j) Contractor's lump sum in BOQ shall be deemed to include for all minor details, processes and
operations which may not have been specifically mentioned or shown on drawings or given in
particular specifications but which are essential for the execution of the building works and
services in a sound and workman like manner so as to be structurally and functionally sound. In
case of any difference of opinion between GE and the contractor as to whether or not certain items
of works constitute(s) minor detail(s) which is included in the contractor's lump sum, the decision of
the Accepting Officer shall be final, conclusive and binding.
(k) Rain water pipes with fittings including splash stones, spouts, guard bars/grills, railing etc.
(l) Numbering of building on both sides as shown in drawings and as per the direction of GE.
(m) Inlet/outlet pipes of PVC overhead tank upto 60cm from edge of plinth protection is included in
the lumpsum.
(n) Water proofing treatment for over RCC roofs, sunken portions, etc wherever shown on
drawings.
(o) Word ‘DC’ wherever shown on drawing shall be RCC slab for desert cooler of size
750mmx750mm.
(p) Fan hooks with boxes complete in permanent buildings/prefab buildings.
(q) Plinth protection alongwith PCC drain, steps, ramps, aprons, RCC shelves, platform,
sump, splash stones, black boards, cable duct etc.
(r) Crumple joints as per design requirements.
(s) Niches for DBs and suitable opening in wall for fixing exhaust fan including all necessary
civil work.
(t) Numbering of building on both sides at the height of 3.00 mtr above ground level.
(u) Drawings provided shall be treated as line plan for size, height, opening only. Details of
roof gutters & down take pipe shall be provided as per structural drawing.
(v) Irrespective what is shown on drawing all doors for BOQ item No 18.00 to 21.00 (except
Hangar Building) shall be flush door of 35mm thick with SS fittings.
21.2. The above, however, is not an exhaustive list of items of work, but is an illustration for guidance,
hence no plea shall be entertained that other items shown on drawings and/or specified in particular
specifications are not covered in the unit rates of the item as these have not been included in the above
list.
21.3. The lump sum quoted by the tenderer shall also include for any details of works and construction
which are obviously and fairly intended and which may not have been specifically referred to in the tender
documents and/or partially shown on drawings but which are essential for the execution and completion of
the work in a workman like manner and sound construction.
21.4. If certain details are missing, in that case, the details indicated elsewhere in the drawings, which
are similar or nearer to the missed out items of work, shall be followed. In the absence of any other similar
and near details, the minimum essential requirement for the completion of work from the structural and
utility point of view shall be deemed to be included in the amount quoted

21.5. However, some of the details/items which shall be deemed to be essential for execution and
entire completion of the works are detailed as under for guidance:-
(i) Reinforcement for any RCC member not indicated on the drawings but is structural requirement.
(ii) Dwarf wall in situation like verandah, passage etc. are not indicated in drawings.
(iii) Lintel over doors, windows and openings not shown in drawings.
(iv) Builder hardware for doors/windows/vents etc, though not indicated on drawings but essential for
usage.
(v) Internal/external surface of walls/RCC surfaces where no finish specified on drawings but essential for
appearance shall be carried out to match the adjoining surface and as specified in particular
specifications such as internal/external plaster, white/colour wash, cement base paint, OBD, dry
distemper, painting etc.
21.6. In the case of difference of opinion between the contractor and GE as to whether or not a certain
item of work constitutes minor or extra and constructional detail included in the lump sum amount quoted
or not, the decision of the Accepting Officer shall be final, conclusive and binding.
21.7. The contractor shall be deemed to have calculated his own details from drawings & specifications
before quoting his rates. Notwithstanding any errors or inaccuracies in the rates quoted by the contractor,
those rates shall be deemed to include for the full and entire completion of the items of work in
accordance with provision of the contract and no adjustment shall be made on account of any errors in
those rates.
21.8. For structural details, refer structural drawings only. If there is any discrepancy between
architectural and structural drawings with regard to structural details, details shown on structural drawings
shall prevail. Similarly if there is any discrepancy between structural and architectural drawings with
regards to architectural details, details shown in architectural drawings shall prevail. The decision of the
Accepting Officer as to what constitutes structural or architectural details shall be final, conclusive and
binding.
21.9. For missing reinforcement details of RCC works, minimum reinforcement as required as per IS
shall deemed to be included in the quoted lump sum. The decision of the Accepting Officer as regards
minimum requirement as per IS shall be final and binding.
21.10 . In case where type and size of beams, slabs and columns etc are not indicated, these shall
be provided as directed by the Accepting Officer as per details of similar beams, slabs and columns, etc
and cost of same and shall deemed to be included in the quoted lump sum. The decision of the Accepting
Officer as to the similar of beams, slabs, columns etc. shall be final and binding.
21.11 . If there is any discrepancy regarding General Notes on RCC STD (structure type detail)
drawing and structural drawings, the details shown in main structural drawing shall be followed. Similarly
details shown in main architectural drawings shall always be followed in case of discrepancy between
main architectural drawing and TD (Typical detail) drawings.
21.12. Nothing extra shall be admissible on account of work executed as stated above and the contractor
shall be deemed to have taken into considered the above provisions before quoting his lump sum and
submitting his tender.

22. Unit rates of building work under Schedule 'A' Part I shall not include the cost of the following :-
(a) Plumbing, Internal water supply, internal electrification and other services which are covered
under Schedule 'A' Part-II to Part-XVI and BOQ.
(b) Supplying and fixing of bulbs/tubes unless specifically stated otherwise in description of
any particular item of work.
23. APPLICABLE TO SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-II TO XVI i.e PROVISIONAL SCHEDULES AND BOQ
ITEMS AFTER SRL ITEM NO 21.00:
23.1 All quantities are PROVISIONAL.
23.2 Unless otherwise specified unit rate of each item of work is inclusive of materials and labour or
supply and fix complete.
23.3 Particular Specifications for common materials such as PCC solid blocks, stone, sand, coarse
aggregates, stone aggregate, wood, paint etc. and/or workmanship specified for building work against
Sch ‘A’ Part-I and BOQ item No 18.00 to 21.00 mentioned above shall also be applicable for other
items of Sch ‘A’ against Sch ‘A’ Part-II to Part-XVI and items taken in BOQ. All masonry work in
provisional sections shall be with PCC block masonary conforming to BIS 12894 irrespective of whatever
is shown in drawings or specified elsewhere in tender.
23.4 Special Conditions in MES Schedule Part-II (SSR 2020) and preambles to items given in MES
Schedule Part-II (SSR 2020) under respective trades shall be applicable. If any provision in the
description of item of Schedule ‘A’ and/or in particular specifications is at variance with the provision in
Special Conditions in MES Schedule Part-II and preambles to MES schedule items, the provision in
description of items of Schedule ‘A’ and provision in particular specification shall take precedence there
over.
23.5 Probable distribution of various items of internal and external services are indicated on drawings.
These are tentative and may be varied where necessary at the discretion of the GE. The contractor shall
not be entitled for any claim on account of such varied alignment/quantities.
23.6 Irrespective of what is specified in Sch ‘A’, all internal wiring and internal water supply pipe shall
be concealed. The cost of cutting chasing and making good is deemed to include in the lump sum cost of
the respective buildings/structures covered under Sch À’ Part-I and Srl Item number mentioned above of
BOQ.
23.7 Area drainage system under Sch A shall be designed by contractor and got vetted from any
approved IIT/ NIT/ Govt Engg Colleges. The rate quoted for the items shall deemed to be included for the
above provisions.
23.8 Execution of taxi track/ Dispersal lighting including conduit for cable work by specialist agency: It
shall be undertaken through a specialized agency viz. M/s AMA Pvt Ltd, M/s Honeywell Automation Ltd,
M/s Three D integrated solutions Ltd, M/s YPR engineering solution & M/s Vardhman Air Port Solutions
Pvt Ltd by the contractor. AFLS conduit survey has to be carried out by the contractor through special
agency mentioned above in liaison with GE Daman and approval of Accepting officer to be obtained
before executing the work.
23.8A Structural steel/plates required for PEB shall be purchased by PEB manufacturer from primary
producer/manufacturer only as per the PS clause 12 on serial page No.310 of the tender document. The
original steel purchase voucher, manufacturer test certificate etc shall be submitted by PEB manufacturer
to contractor and same shall be submitted by contractor to department for verification and kept on record.
Any third party test required by GE shall be carried out by contractor without any extra cost to Govt.
23.9 It is to note that Technical Rep detailed by E-in- C Br, Rep of Project Management Group &
Rep of Accepting Officer will be inspecting the site during post 40% progress and before expiry of
DLP.
a) While making trial bays specifications contained under tender for the various items shall be
followed as per approved design mix based on MORTH/ PS clause and trial bays shall be
accordingly casted and tested to meet complete criteria defined under tender. In case trial bays do
not meet acceptance criteria as per parameter in MORTH and PS clause, the same shall be
recasted after getting design mix redone and no extra cost will be paid to contractor. Trial bays will
be approved by Accepting Officer.
23.9.1 The work of trial bays as mentioned above shall be provided by the Contractor at his own
expenses and the quoted rates shall be deemed to be included for these provisions and nothing
extra will be paid by Government in this regard.
23.10 T&P and laboratory equipment during execution :

(a) The lists of T&P as given at Sl. Page No 278 and laboratory equipment (on Sl. Page No 279 to 281
applicable for different types of pavement work shall be provided by contractor. These equipment must be
deployed on site appropriately as per Contract Agreement provisions. Any delay in bringing the said T&P
shall be penalised at the rate of 1% per fortnight of the contract amount subject to maximum of 10% of
contract amount. (The contract amount for this purpose shall be considered as 10% of the total accepted
amount of CA)
(b) Plant equipment should be in sound working condition. The following will be ensured for all plant
and equipment to be incorporated in work: -
(i) The plant has fitness certificate from the authorized service center of original
manufacturer/ OEM.
(ii) The plant has been calibrated by the OEM/ authorized service center, as per
recommended periodicity.
(iii) The original manufacturer's AMC is current and valid
(iv) The operator of plant to be certified by the OEM
24. PEROFRMANCE EVALUATION AND MONITORING OF WORK

Performance evaluation of the work will be carried out by the Accepting Officer along with concerned GE
& Engr-in-Charge and staff officers from Chief Engineer’s Office concerned with the contract as per laid
down stages of the work mentioned below :-
(a) First Evaluation :- To be carried out within two months from the date of commencement as
per work order No 1 placed by GE.
(b) Second/Intermediate Evaluation :- To be carried out at intervals of every six months from
the date of commencement of work as per work order No 1 placed by GE.
(c) One month prior to original/extended date of completion :- This meeting will evaluate
progress achieved in month prior to original date of completion vis-a-vis extended date of
completion.
(d) Final Evaluation :- Final evaluation will be carried out one month after the physical
completion of work as certified by GE.
24.1 The contractor shall give on site presentation in these evaluations to the Accepting Officer and all
officers concerned with the contract including representatives from CFA, PMG, Users and audit authorities
to note and clear all bottleneck / hindreses on site. All the points from both sides shall be recorded in the
minutes of meeting and signed by all concerned.
24.2. As per Government of India, Ministry of Labour and Employment New Delhi circular No
35025/02/2014-SS II dated 15 Jul 2015, it is mandatory to the contactor that all the workers deployed by
him are enrolled as members of provident fund and shall have the Universal Account Number (UAN).
24.3. It is mandatory to the GE that while clearing the bills/payments (RAR) of contractors, a certificate
be obtained from the contractor that all workers employed by him directly or indirectly are registered for
EPF and the due contributions have been credited into their accounts.
(a) The above mentioned aspects are to be inspected by Rep of Project Management Group & Rep
of Accepting Officer and certified in writing.
(b) The listed T&P and laboratory equipment as per Special condition clause No 53 & 54. for different
type of works are the minimum T&P and laboratory equipment required to be placed by the contractor.
However any additional T&P and lab equipment required as per site requirement shall be provided by the
contractor without any cost to Govt.
24.4 Cat part No of light fittings in certain E/M items have been given in the BOQ.The contractor shall
provide items of cat part No of make/ brand as specified in sch ‘A’ to the relevant bldg .
25. YARD STICK FOR ASSESSMENT OF STAGE-WISE PROGRESS OF PAYMENT OF BLDG
(i) Interim payment (RAR)/advances on account in respect of buildings listed in Schedule ‘A’ Part-I
and BOQ Sl Item No 18.00 to 21.00 shall be made after preparing the yard stick by contractor and
the same shall be approved by GE and payment shall be made accordingly immediately after
issue of work order of work
(ii) Contractor shall submit yard stick for each buildings/structure mentioned in Schedule ‘A’ Part-I and
BOQ Sl Item No 18.00 to 21.00 in duplicate to GE within one month of acceptance of tender,
including percentage payment to be made for each stage of the building alongwith supporting
details i.e detailed estimate, stage wise abstracts etc.
(iii) There may be certain changes in Yard stick percentages as submitted by the contractor while
approving the yardstick for said buildings/structures due to market rates of various materials & due
to policy of department of with-holding sufficient amount for later stages of the building. Contractor
shall not have any claim on this account and percentage payment to be made for each stage as
approved by the GE shall be final & binding on the contractor.
(iv) Payment against lump sum buildings mentioned in Schedule ‘A’ Part-I and BOQ Sl Item No 18.00
to 21.00, shall be made as per approved yardstick. Payment against lump sum buildings
mentioned in Schedule ‘A’ Part-I and BOQ Sl Item No 18.00 to 21.00 shall be allowed in for
payment without yardstick till 2nd RAR. Payment from 3rd RAR and onwards to contractor only after
yardstick are finalized. Any delay in payment of 3rd RAR on account of late submission of yard
stick by the contractor to the GE shall be contractor’s responsibility and no claim on this account
shall be admissible.
(v) The cost of all the above aspects shall deemed be included in quoted lump sum of the
contractor.
26. The contractor shall submit PSMB (periodical services measurement book) of all buildings duly
recorded all measurement in details for finishes provided thereon. The PSMB shall be binded and also in
digital form in CD. These shall be signed by Engineer-in-charge and GE in token of their check. Performa/
pattern of PSMB shall be as given by GE. The cost of the same shall be deemed to be included in the unit
rates quoted by tenderer of respective bldgs, if the contractor fails to do the same a lump sum recovery of
Rs 20,000/- shall be recovered from the contractor due.
27. Staging for water storage tanks shall be provided as shown on the drawings and cost shall be
deemed to be included in the amount quoted.
28. Blocks/ units indicated in name of drawings are intended to reflect scope of work as per
administrative approval. Whole scope of work has been divided in blocks/ units and covered in Sch ‘A’.
In case of any doubt/ discrepancy with regards to what constitutes the blocks/ units as mentioned in Sch
‘A’ item, the tenderers may approach HQ CE (CG) Goa for clarification before quoting their rates. After
acceptance of the lowest tenderer decision of Accepting officer with respect to blocks/units covered in any
Sch ‘A’ item will be final and binding and no claim in this regard will be admissible to contractor.
29. Integrity Pact (IP) is an integral part of the contract Agreement and both parties are bound by its
provisions. Scanned copy of IP as per Sl Page No 13 to 19 duly signed on each page by the bidders shall
be uploaded as part of technical bid (Cover-1) and original IP duly signed on each page shall be
forwarded by post alongwith the demand draft. Bid of all the bidders who do not upload signed copy of IP
alongwith the technical bid (Cover-1) shall be rejected.
30. DEPLOYMENT OF ENGINEERS & T&P
The contractor will be required to strictly ensure engagement of Engineers as per Special condition 53 & 54
(on Sl Page No 278 to 281) and deployment of 'T & P, Machinery & Transport' as stipulated here in after in
tender. Inadequate engagement of engineers and deployment of 'T&P. Machinery & Transport' as per
contract conditions shall be considered as serious lapse attracting ban / removal / downgrading /
debarment of the Firm/Company.
31.0 PREFABRICATED/ PEB STRUCTURES, ANNEXE BUILDING AND OTHER BUILDINGS (Hangar
No 01 and Hangar No 02) (APPLICABLE TO SERIAL ITEM NO 18.00 to 21.00 OF BOQ)
31.1 Unless otherwise specially mentioned, the unit rate of PEB, Annexe and other buildings to be quoted
by contractor in Serial Item Nos 18.00 to 21.00 mentioned in BOQ shall include for Design of all materials
& labour, supply and fix, etc complete for all works as shown on drawings & as specified in particular
specifications except the works covered in Schedule ‘A’ Part-II to XVI & other items of BOQ ( Sch ‘A’ Part
XVII). Irrespective of whatever mentioned in any part of tender; Internal Electrification works of Hangar,
PQC floor of Hangar, PQC floor sub layers along with dummy/ expansion/ construction joints, PCC block
masonry wall upto 3.0mt height on both side of hangar, motorised power & manually operated vertically
opening door as shown in drawing on front side, galvalume sheet in roofing and cladding, turbo
ventilators, all primary steel surfaces painted with epoxy based paint as shown in drawings or mentioned
in PS or BOQ or tender documents shall be part of Lumpsum quoted against Item No 18.00 to 21.00.
31.2 Bidders shall upload the scanned copy of Memorandum of understanding (MoU) with any of the E-in-
C’s Br approved PEB manufacturer mentioned in the tender documents alongwith ‘T’ bid (cover1). Draft
MoU is enclosed in Sl No 41 to 43 with tender.
31.3 Lump sum of building in Serial Item Nos 18.00 to 21.00 mentioned above of BOQ shall include all
works as shown on drawings, mentioned in notes thereon, specified in Schedule ‘A’ and/or particular
specifications, tender documents unless otherwise specifically indicated to be excluded from the lump sum
except for the items of works catered for in Schedule ‘A’ Part-II to XVII and other items of BOQ complete
for entire completion work. For illustration, broadly the following item of works shall also deem to be
included in the unit rate of item(s) of serial item Nos mentioned above of BOQ interalia shall include the
following:-
(a) In buildings masonary work shall be with PCC block masonary conforming to IS
2572:2005 irrespective of whatever shown in Drawings.

(b) PEB Structure of Hangar 1 & 2 (including PU floor, PQC floor, its sub layers, turbo
ventilators, Internal electrification of the Hangar, door & windows etc), RCC, brickwork, foundation
of Hangar H-1, (Foundation of Hangar H-2 & its annexe is measurable, under provisional sum, ie. Item No
16 of BOQ, upto the top of pile cap/grade beams in case of pile foundation and upto plinth beam in case of
raft/open/hybrid foundation), plinth beams, dwarf walls, toe walls, ramps (where applicable)
including lean concrete, super structure, lintels/beams, DPC, RCC Jali, brick steps etc all as
applicable and shown on drawings.
(c) Antitermite treatment to buildings.
(d) HDPE water tank(s) over roof as shown on drawings including staging, brass valve with
PVC ball, etc. If capacity of HDPE water storage tank is not shown on drawing then it shall be of
capacity 500 ltrs.
(e) Built in furniture articles as shown on drgs.
(f) Toilet/sanitary appliance such as WHBs, Urinals, WCs, EWCs with seat cover & Water
Jet, flushing cisterns, PVC partitions, towel rails, toilet papers holders, mirrors, Soap niche, peg
sets etc.
(g) Seismic strengthing measures, Crumple joints.
(h) Cost of any cutting, leaving/forming holes/chases etc in walls, floors and ceiling as
required for concealed water supply pipe and/or internal wiring and making good in cement
mortar 1:3 & finished to match the adjoining surfaces. No adjustment shall, however, be made
on this account for pricing of any deviation in respect serial items No mentioned above of BOQ
and also for any variation in quantities indicated as “PROVISIONAL’ in the tender. Size/location
of exhaust fan opening shall be as per the direction of Garrison Engineer.
(i) Fan hooks with boxes complete in permanent buildings/prefab buildings.
(j) Plinth protection alongwith PCC drain, steps, ramps, aprons, RCC shelves, platform,
sump over roofs, splash stones, black boards, cable duct etc.
(k) Water proofing treatment for over RCC roofs, sunken portions, etc wherever shown on
drawings.
(l) Hangar floor to be provided with proper drainage system to avoid spread of foul with
suitable traps and sufficient ventilation to prevent vapour mixture forming within the underground
drainage system, Rain water pipe with fittings, spouts, drapery/curtain rods, guard bars/grills,
railing, rolling/collapsible shutters, desert cooler stand etc.
(m) Crumple joints as per design requirements.
(n) Niches for DBs and suitable opening in wall for fixing exhaust fan including all necessary
civil work.
(o) Numbering of building to be done on both sides at the height of 3.00 mtr above ground
level. At the top of the Hanger building painting/ lettering logo work “ INDIAN COAST GUARD “
(one each in English & Hindi ), letter size- height 2.1mt with proportionate width to be painted on
both sides with shining bright reflective yellow colour
(p) Drawings provided shall be treated as line plan for size, height, opening only. Details of
roof gutters & down take pipe shall be provided as per structural drawing.
(q) All buildings other than Annexe shall be provided with 35mm thick flush door & Aluminium
windows with grills. In case if in any drawing aluminium door has been provisioned in that case
aluminium door shall be provided. All Annexe building shall be provided with aluminium windows
double glazed sound proof with glazed systems etc with 12mm air gap between front and back glass
panels 6mm thick. All aluminium windows of Annexes shall be provided with SS grade 304 grill of
weight not less than 8 to 10 kg/sqm and pattern as approved by Engg-in-Charge irrespective of what
is shown in drawing, one side/ middle window panels as shown in drawing is openable. Sound proof
aluminium windows shall be manufactured by approved fabricators after approval of GE. Annexe
doors shall be of steel as specified in Particular specification and drawings.
(r) Vertical sealing (EPDM) to be done in Hangar doors to ensure there is no ingress of dust
inside the hangar area.
(s) Irrespective of what is mentioned in drawing/particular specification, all primary structural
members (columns, rafters) shall be painted with two coats of epoxy paint after preparation of steel
surfaces by shot blast and all secondary structural members shall be GI coated sections of 275 GSM.
(u) Structural steel/plates required for PEB shall be purchased by PEB manufacturer from primary
producer/manufacturer only as per the PS clause 12 on serial page No.310 of the tender document. The
original steel purchase voucher, manufacturer test certificate etc shall be submitted by PEB manufacturer
to contractor and same shall be submitted by contractor to department for verification and kept on record.
Any third party test required by GE shall be carried out by contractor without any extra cost to Govt.
(v) Internal Electrification of Hangar along with all fittings, Hangars, PU floor, PQC floor and its sub
layers and expansion/ construction/ dummy joints
31.4 The PEB structures shall be designed as steel structures except brick work or conventional RCC members as
shown on drawings. All foundation work/footing in sub structure shall be RCC. Further, if any building is combination
of PEB, bidders have to get the building designed accordingly as shown on drawing.
31.5 The quoted lump sum for Serial item Nos 18.00 to 21.00 mentioned above of BOQ (for designing and
construction of prefabricated structures/ Annexe building and other buildings) also includes for designing complete
structure from foundation (except foundations of Hangar & annexe of H-2 Hangar)’ including foundation to roof,
submission of design calculation details including structural and architectural drawing and any other
drawing as applicable including specification of materials proposed by the contractor, submission of structure
stability certificate, connected drawings, proposed materials duly vetted by Any IIT / any NIT/ any Government
Engineering College” as approved. Designing of PEB structures (Hangar), Hangar door support structure & Annexe
building and other buildings shall be got done from any of the approved firms as specified in PS clause No 57.1 on
Page 396 and same shall be got vetted from any IIT / any NIT/ any Government Engineering College (defined as
‘Institutions’) as approved. Despite of vetting of design analysis, contractor shall be deemed fully responsible for the
structural soundness and stability of the building.
31.6 The contractor shall also upload quantities mentioned in Annexure ‘A to F” herein after for srl item No
18.00 to 21.00 mentioned above of BOQ to verify the quoted amount. These quantities shall remain provisional and
no claim on account of any variation in quantities shall be admissible:-
(a) Complete Pre Engineered Building (PEB) structures (Hangar) including hangar door, Annexe & other buildings.
(b) Foundation details of PEB structures (Hangar), Annexe building (except foundations of Hangar & annexe of H-2
Hangar) & other buildings steel, PCC, Earthwork, PCC block masonry etc. bidders are required to upload complete
Quantities mentioned in ‘A’ to ‘F’ herein after including all elements/ items of structure(Hangar). In case any bidder
fail to upload the same, his financial bid will be rejected summarily and no claim in this respect will be entertained.
(c) Irrespective of whatever is mentioned elsewhere in tender documents, contractor can have MoU with more than
One PEB designer and manufacturer as approved by E-in-C’s Br New Delhi as per the names in the tender
document. Accordingly MoU(s) required to be uploaded with cover 1. On acceptance of contract, design and
execution would be by only ONE such PEB designer and manufacturer. However, after Acceptance of tender,
Contractor has option to enter into a fresh MoU with any other approved PEB manufacturer other than the MoU
submitted with Cover-1.
31.7 (i) After acceptance of work, contractor shall submit the duly vetted structural design of Pre Engineered
Building (PEB) structures (Hangar 1 & 2), vertical automated hoist -up door and its support structure of Hangar 1 & 2,
foundation, flooring, Annexe Buildings & other building etc from any IIT/any NIT/ any Government Engineering
colleges and BOQ within 60 days of acceptance of tender. H-2 Hangar and its annexe design is included in the cost
of foundation design & execution (as per item No 16 of Sch ‘A’ Part XVI). Nothing extra will be paid for design &
vetting of Hangar H-2 & its annexe.
(ii) Contractor shall ensure that before vetting from institutions, the design has to be checked by Dir (Des)/ SO1 (D)
& Dir (Arch)/ Officer nominated of CE (CG) Goa and BOQ by Dir (C) in terms of E-in-C's Br letter No A/0015/23-
1/PO1/E2W (PPC) dated 02 Jun 2017 as amended vide letter No A/0015/23- 1/PO1/E2W (PPC) dated 23 Jul 2020.
(iii) If Contractor fails to submit the vetted design in 60 Days of acceptance of tender action to recover
compensation of 1% per week of value of work, with a maximum of 10% of value of work will be recovered. (Note:-
value of work for this purpose shall be 10% of contract accepted amount). Accepting Officer may grant extension in
case of unavoidable circumstances. Contractor may also note that the 60 days’ time limit as above mentioned
includes 07 days’ time for scrutiny of design in this office by Dir (Des), Dir (Arch), SO1 E/M and any other Officer of
the zone.

(iv) In case of contractor summarily fails to submit the design and get it vetted even with levy of 10%
penalty in such case action as per 3.16.8 of contract manual 2020 shall be taken and no penalty of 10%
shall be recovered.
31.8 The contractor shall submit alongwith the tender the name of vendor/ vendors/ specialist firm
(as mentioned in Particular Specifications) from whom the PEB structure shown in respective Drawing is
proposed to be executed. The contractor shall also upload Bills of Quantities (BOQ) as per Annexure-A
to F enclosed with tender for the following works to verify the quoted amount. These quantities shall
remain provisional and no claim on account of any variation in quantities shall be admissible:-
(a) Complete Pre Engineered Building (PEB) structures, hangar floor, Internal lighting of Hangar.
(b) Conventional all RCC members
(c) Foundation, columns, steel, PCC, RCC, Earthwork, PCC block masonary etc & foundation details for
PEB structure/ Annexe Buildings.
(d) Complete quantity take off as per Annexure-A to F for PEB structure, annexe buildings & other
buildings respectively.
31.9 Bidders are required to upload complete Annexure-A to F including all elements/ items of
structure. In case any bidder fail to upload completely filled annexures alongwith above details, his
financial bid will be rejected summarily and no claim in this respect will be entertained.
31.10 In case of variation in quantities on minus side in final approved drgs, as mentioned here-in-
after, necessary minus price adjustment shall be made as per CA provisions. In case of variation on plus
side, no extra payment shall be admissible. Please note that in case of contractor fails to upload the name
of PEB vendor/vendors/specialist firm & Annexure - A to F as mentioned above, his quoted tender shall
be declared non bonafide & shall not be opened and will be rejected for which no claim shall be
entertained. During final design of Hangar so as to ensure roof slope of 1:10 and clear opening of 9.50mt,
the ridge height may go more than 17.0 meters, for which no extra claim would be allowed to the
contractor.
31.11 Lowest bidder shall take approval of officers of CE (CG) Goa on structural and
architectural/working drawings by officers of CE (CG) Goa before sending to said Institutions, for vetting
and vetted drawings shall be submitted to Accepting Officer for the final approval. (To be read in
conjunction with clause 31.7 on page 36).
31.12 Brief specification of Pre-Engineered structure, Annexe & other buildings are given here-in-
after and Architectural features, reference drawings are enclosed with tender documents which shall be
taken into consideration by the contractor for designing the structural components of the building. The
contractor shall not alter/make any amendment to the Architectural features of Main buildings viz length,
width, height, sizes of opening etc as given in reference drawings forming part of contract.
31.13 Lowest bidder shall submit the 04 sets of design calculation details & connected particular and
09 sets of structural and architectural/working drawings in A1 size of PEB structures, Annexe and other
buildings duly vetted by said any IIT/any NIT/any Government Engineering College. Soft copy of the
same in CD’s and tracings of complete drawings on tracing paper in addition to 09 sets of drawings shall
also be submitted by the contractor to Accepting Officer.
31.14 The contractor’s special attention is invited to the facts that details like SBC of soil, size of
building, certain materials which are essentially required to be incorporated and certain technical
requirement of the departments are given in specification and drawings forming part of tender documents.
Based on the above details the contractor is required to submit complete design details, BOQ,
specification of materials other than materials which are essentially required to be incorporated in the
works which are proposed in the design for the completion of item of work and specification of other
materials which he proposes to use in the work and submit complete drawings incorporating his design
details. His lump sum rate quoted shall be deemed to include above provisions. The design
calculations/details including the structural working drawings and any other drawing and specification of
materials proposed by the contractor shall be duly vetted by said any IIT/any NIT/any Government
Engineering College must accompany the structural stability certificate and certificate certifying for fulfilling
all the departmental requirements.
Any additional items required during execution for the completion of the work but not covered in the design details
and structural drawings prepared by the contractor shall be provided by the contractor without extra cost to the Govt
inspite of acceptance of drawings vetted by any IIT/any NIT/any Government Engineering College.
31.15 STRUCTURAL DESIGN PARAMETERS FOR PRE FABRICATED/ PEB STRUCTURES/ ANNEXE
BUILDINGS (HANGAR NO 1 & 2):-
(APPLICABLE TO SERIAL ITEM NO 18.00 & 19.00 OF BOQ)
1. Location of structure Mumbai
2. Type of construction RCC framed construction for PEB (Annexe and
hanger)
3. Type of concrete M30 Concrete
4. Type of steel FE-500D grade (CRS) grade
5. Safe bearing capacity of soil As per soil test report
6. Superstructure RCC framed/ PEB
7. Analysis and design STAAD Pro connect edition ETABS latest version
8. Seismic zone and importance factor Zone –III, I=1.5
9. Exposure condition Severe
10. Basic wind speed 44 m/s
11. Fire resistance rating 2.0 Hours
31.16 Design loads:-
1) Dead load: Self weights from all support and supporting elements and as per provisions of IS:875(Part I)
2) Live load : As per provision of IS:875 (Part 2).
3) Wind load as per IS 875 Part 3 of 2015. However the structure should be designed for basic wind speed
of 44 m/s.
4) Design life of structure shall be taken corresponding to probability factor risk coefficient K1 of 1.07 for
basic wind speed of 44 m/s.
5) The probability factor risk coefficient K1 and importance factor for cyclonic region K4 shall be taken as
1.07 and 1.30 respectively.
6) Topography factor K3 to be considered as per the slope of the roof of hangar and topography.
7) Terrain roughness and height factor K2 to be considered for category 1.
8) Seismic load: As per provision IS:1893-2016 with importance factor 1.5, zone III shall be considered.
9) Load combination: As per provision of IS:875 Part 5 and IS:800 2007
10) Other load: Temperature, erection, crane loads and other collateral loads will be considered as per
relevant data provided.
11) Latest version of IS codes to be referred if not mentioned.
31.17 Floors of Hangar H-1 & H-2 :- The design of PQC floors and its sub layers for Hangar H-1 & H-2 has been
done for K-Value of 3kg/cm²/cm. K-value as per soil investigation report attached at Ser page No 44 to 137 is
less than 3kg/cm²/cm. Therefore contractor will have to stabilize the soil of Hangar H-1 and H-2 to K- Value
of 3kg/cm²/cm before laying sub layers of floors. No extra will be paid for soil stabilization. Soil stabilization
cost is deemed to be included in lumpsum. Contractor will get the methodology of soil stabilization designed,
so as to achieve K value of 3kg/cm²/cm and get it vetted from IIT/NIT/Govt Engg College before
commencement of work. This methodology of soil stabilization shall be got approved from Accepting Officer.
Cost of necessary testing of K-Value before and after stabilization is deemed to be included in quoted rate,
nothing extra shall be paid on this account.
31.17.1 Flexible Dispersal:- Specification of various layers of Dispersal as mentioned in BOQ Item No 24.00 to 24.02
are tentative. Contractor will have to design the resurfacing of flexible pavement alongwith filling (required if
any) and get it duly vetted from IIT/NIT/Govt Engg College. Any additional items other than as mentioned in
BOQ will be paid extra as per relevant Condition 62 of IAFW-2249. However cost of testing of CBR is
deemed to be included in quoted rate nothing extra shall be paid on this account.
31.17.2 Hangar:- Cost of testing of K-Value for flooring of Hangar is deemed to be included in lumpsum.
31.17.3 Floor level of H-1 Hangar:- Finished floor level shall be highest point of road adjacent to H-1 hangar.
31.17.4 Floor level of H-2 Hangar:- Finished floor level shall be same as that of existing floor level of
demolished BFC hangar.

31.17.5 For Hangar No 2 and its Annexe (BOQ Item No 19 & 16 of Sch ‘A’ Part XVI) :- Hangar 2 and its
Annexe is being constructed at the site where a old dilapidated hangar, which has been demolished, but its floor
and foundation is still existing. Therefore cost of demolition of old dilapidated Hangars floor (Hangar has already
been demolished), cost of demolition of foundation of demolished hangar (if required), cost of design of new
foundation getting it vetted from IIT/NIT/Govt Engg College and execution of new foundation has been taken off from
lumpsum cost of Hangar 2 and its annexe (Item No 19). All such foundation and floor related items have been made
part of provisional sum item (Item No 16 of BOQ Sch “A’ Pat XVI).
(a) Item No. 19: This item is for lumpsum cost of Design, manufacture and erection of PEB Hangar 2 and
its annexe but excluding their foundation. This lump sum cost includes cost of all items and structures of
Hangar-2 and its annexe, above the top of pile cap/grade beam in case of pile foundations and top of plinth
beam in case of raft/open/hybrid foundation. Dowels of columns to be anchored in pile cap shall also be part of
lump sum.
(b) Item No 16 (Provisional sum): This covers the cost of demolition of existing floor (At the location of H-2
hangar and its annexe), demolition of existing foundation at the location of H-2 hangar and its annexe (If
required), and material and labour including execution of complete foundation of Hangar-2 and its annexe.
Design of foundation and its vetting from IIT/NIT/Govt Engg college is deemed to be included in the over cost of
provisional sum, nothing extra shall be paid. While designing the new foundation, existing foundation can be
made use of in hybrid mode with new foundation, post adequate testing of its strength and approval from
Accepting Officer. Decision of feasibility of utilizing existing foundation in hybrid mode with new foundation will
rest solely with Accepting Officer. Items which are not available on SSR shall be priced as per Condition 62 of
IAFW 2249.
31.17.6 Contractor to scan entire area to find out any existing cables/pipe lines etc below earth. After scanning the
entire area approval needs to be obtained before digging from GE/Users and surface to be made good. All
damage to be made good, otherwise suitable penalty will be charged, nothing extra shall be paid for such
scanning.
31.17.7 No cutting of existing dispersal/road is permitted and if any cable/pipe line needs to be laid below, then same
is to be laid by using trenchless technology. No extra shall be admissible on this account.
31.18 Overall height of hangar fixtures shall remain to within limits as approved by CGHQ.
31.19 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION:
31.19.1 The building should be designed as per the following material specification:
S. N Structural Components Specifications Make
1. Build - up sections ASTM A572M Grade 50 or equivalent, 345 MPA
2. Cold formed secondary members ASTM A653 M Grade 65 or equivalent 450 MPA,
Zinc coating- Z 275
3. Anchor Bolts Back Unpainted ASTM A36M Grade 36 or equivalent, 240MPA
4. Hot Rolled Sections I-Sections ASTM A36M Grade 36 or equivalent, 250MPA
As per
5. Hot Rolled Sections Channels - ASTM A36M Grade 36 or equivalent, 240MPA approve
Rods d list of
6. Diagonal “X” bracing & Sag rods ASTM A36M or equivalent, 240 MPA makes
7. Diagonal “X” bracing & Sag rods ASTM A36M or equivalent, 240 MPA
HR angles
8. Wall panels, 0.50 MM (TCT) ASTM A792 M or AS 1397, 550 MPA, AZ150
9. Roofing Panels,0.55 MM (TCT) ASTM A792 M or AS 1397, 550 MPA, AZ150
PPGL
11. High Strength Bolts & Nuts ASTM A 325 M or equivalent for Bolts, ASTM A 563
M or equivalent for Nuts
12. Secondary Connection Bolts Gr-4.6 IS 1367 Gr Zinc Plated
31.19.2 Dimensions of Screw:
(i) Head across flats: 9.33 - 9.52mm (ii) Thread dia (OD): 6.10 - 6.25mm
(iii) Thread dia (I D): 5.45 - 5.55mm (iv) EPDM Washer dia: 19mm
31.19.3 Steel work finish:

31.19.3.1. Welding: The Welding for the Primary Structures will be done Double Sided by Continuous Submerged
Arc Welding (SAW) process.
31.19.3.2. All Secondary Members (Purlins, Grits) will be G.I coated – 275 GSM
31.19.3.3 All Primary & Secondary Bolts will be galvanized.
31.20 STRUCTURAL DESIGN PARAMETERS FOR RCC STRUCTURES OTHER THAN PEB & ANNEXE:-
(APPLICABLE TO SERIAL ITEM NO 20.00 to 21.00 OF BOQ)
1. Location of structure Mumbai
2. Type of construction RCC framed construction all building other than PEB
(hanger & Annexe)
3. Type of concrete M30 Concrete
4. Type of steel FE-500D grade (CRS) grade for RCC structure and as per
material specs for steel/ PEB
5. Safe bearing capacity of soil As per soil test report
6. Superstructure RCC framed construction
7. Analysis and design STAAD Pro connect edition ETABS latest version,
8. Seismic zone and importance factor Zone –III, I=1.5
9. Exposure condition Severe
10. Basic wind speed 44 m/s
11. Fire resistance rating 2.0 Hours
31. 21 Design loads:-
1. Dead load: Self weights from all support and supporting elements and as per provisions of IS:875(Part I).
2. Live load : As per provision of IS:875 (Part 2).
3. Wind load as per IS 875 Part 3 2015. However the structure should be designed for basic wind speed of
44 m/sec.
4. Design life of structure shall be taken corresponding to probability factor risk coefficient K1 of 1.0 for basic wind
speed of 44 m/s.
5. The probability factor risk coefficient K1 and importance factor for cyclonic region K4 shall be taken as 1.0 for 1.0
respectively.
6. Topography factor K3 to be considered as per the slope of the roof of hangar and topography.
7. Terrain roughness and height factor K2 to be considered for category 1.
8. Seismic load: As per provision IS:1893-2016 with importance factor 1.5, zone II shall be considered.
9. Load combination: As per provision of IS:875 Part 5 and IS:800 2007.
10. Other load: Temperature, erection, crane loads and other collateral loads will be considered as per relevant data
provided.
11. Latest version of IS codes to be referred if not mentioned.
31.22 The soil investigation report on the proposed building is attached at Sl page No 44 to 137
32.0 VALUATION OF DEVIATION
The percentage addition / deduction of MES Schedule of Rates for the purpose of pricing deviation vide sub
clause C (c) or C (d) of Condition 62 of IAFW – 2249 shall be as follows:-
a) For works covered under Percentage above / below as automatically indicated in Column 9
BOQ (Sch ‘A’) Part- I to XVI of BOQ (Schedule À') of tender documents comparing with the lump
sum quoted by tenderer to the amount inserted by MES as stipulated in
Condition 62 of IAFW – 2249.
b) For works covered under As per Condition 62 of IAFW 2249 (General Conditions of Contracts) and
BOQ (Sch ‘A’) Part – XVII) at par with SSR Part-II (2020) for all items available in SSR Part-II (2020)
33.0 All anodised aluminium doors /windows will be fabricated at authorized fabricators workshop and then to be
brought at site.
34.0 All periodical services (paintings) shall be got done through mechanized means.
35.0 All windows cills shall be provided with 19mm thick Black granite stone.
36.0 Schedule ‘A’ part XVI (provisional Sum):- Bidders to note that the amount to be quoted in BOQ against Sch
‘A’ Part XVI (Provisional sum) is at par SSR 2020.
37.0 All items of Dispersal shall have specifications and testing as per E-in-C’s Branch TI No 09/2018 and other
policies and instructions of ICAO & MORTH.

Date :- For Accepting Officer
MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING
This Memorandum of understanding (MoU) is entered into on _____________by and between M/s
__________________ (Name of Bidder)(here-in-after referred as ‘Contractor’), with a Registered Office at
_______________________ (Address of Bidder).
AND
M/s___________________________(Name of Original PEB Manufacturer)(here-in-after-referred as ‘PEB

Manufacturer’), with a Registered Office at____________(Address of PEB Manufacturer)
WITNESSETH
WHEREAS M/S______________( Contractor) is enlisted of MES in prerequisite Class and Category.
WHEREAS M/S______________( PEB Manufacturer) is in business of Design, Engineering and supply

of Pre Engineered Building and approved PEB Manufacturer of MES Deptt. , having valid approval on
date of submission of Bid.
WHEREAS Chief Engineer (Coast Guard) Goa-403806(here-in-after referred as ‘Client’) has invited a tender
for ‘PROVISION OF HANGER WITH APRON LINK TAXI TRACK AND EARTH FILLING AT JUHU
MUMBAI
This MoU is executed specifically for the above mentioned work and cannot be used for any other
Works/Project.
AND
M/s __________________ (Contractor) is submitting its bid and has decided to enter into an exclusive
MoU with M/s____________( PEB Manufacturer) to engage them exclusively as PEB Manufacturer as a
part of above-mentioned work for which tenders are invited by MES.
Now, therefore, both the parties hereto agree as follows:

1. M/s ___________ (Contractor) is submitting its bid with M/s___(PEB Manufacturer) as Original
PEB Manufacturer.
2. M/s____________(PEB Manufacturer) will be the Original PEB Manufacturer to M/s ___________
(Contractor).
3. M/s____________( PEB Manufacturer) shall provide following services to M/s
__________________ (Contractor).
a) Shall design and supply all components and articles/items related to PEB building.
b) Shall review all drawings and verify duly stamped and signed as per requirements
of above mentioned tender.
c) Shall provide supervision assistance during erection and execution of PEB building.
d) Shall provide supervision assistance during defect liability period.
e) Shall provide all design basis reports and assist the design team/officers of
CE(CG)Goa during evaluation/checking of their design.
4. M/s __________________ (Contractor) will be the main contractor and will execute all works as
per contract provisions.
5. M/s____________( PEB Manufacturer) shall provide and commit such resources as are
necessary to perform their scope of work for the successful completion of the Project.
6. M/s __________________ (Contractor) shall make all payments due to M/s____________( PEB
Manufacturer) or to their accredited representative as per their Offer to be decided between
themselves.
7. Each party hereto in relation with the other is solely responsible and liable for their respective
scope of work, to be mutually agreed between the parties (Contractor & PEB manufacturers) and
Parties and incorporated in a detailed Agreement/Purchase Order to be entered into between the
Parties before start of work. Such detailed Agreement/Purchase Order shall deal with technical
and financial aspects of the Project.
8. Each Party agrees to and undertakes to indemnify and hold harmless the other Party against any
liability, loss, cost, damages or expenses sustained as a result of negligent or improper
performance or disturbance caused by itself or by of its sub-contractors, suppliers or associates in
connection with its share of Works as per Contract. If any third party enforces any claim, which is
attributable to the scope of work of a certain party that Party shall settle such claims. The Parties
agree to indemnify each other against all claims made by any third party in respect of any
infringements of any rights protected by patents, designs of copyrights or trademarks employed in
the Project by any Party.
9. In the course of working as associates. M/s ______________ (Contractor) and
M/s____________( PEB Manufacturer) will be sharing information with each other which may be
proprietary/confidential information/knowledge acquired by each other. Both the parties will
maintain complete secrecy regarding such information/knowledge and will not divulge to any third
party for any other purpose except for the success of the joint execution of the contract.
10. Further, it is to be explicitly understood by the bidder that bidder shall not copy/or develop a
similar technology or disclose any of the technology information including drawing and design to
any third party or use them for any other Project other than covered under this MoU.
11. This MoU shall be effective from the date as mentioned in the first page of the MoU and shall
remain valid till the project completion and shall terminate on the happening of any of the
following:
a) The bid submitted by M/s ______________ (Contractor) is rejected or M/s
______________ (Contractor) is unsuccessful in the bid.
b) The Contract for the Works has been awarded to other Third Parties.
c) CE(CG)Goa notifies the Parties that they will not proceed with the Project.
d) Any of the Parties to the Agreement is declared insolvent by a Court of Competent
jurisdiction.
e) Contractor decides to terminate this MoU with PEB manufacturer before award of
contract.
For the sake of correspondence, following Addresses and the Persons concerned are to be contracted:
Name of the bidder Name of the PEB Manufacturer
Address of bidder Address of PEB Manufacturer
Tel. No. Tel. No.
Email ID: Email ID:
Name of Contact Person Name of Contact Person
Designation: Designation:
For (Name of Bidder M/s_________ For (Name of Bidder M/s_________

(Authorized Signatory) (Authorized Signatory
Name: Name:
Designation: Designation:
Witness
1. _______________ 2.__________________
Note:-
1. This MoU should be on Rs 100/- Non-Judicial stamp paper and duly notarized at the place of office
of the PEB Manufacturer.
2. This MoU should only be signed by the Proprietor/Director or GPA holder in case of Limited
Company.

ANNEXURE ‘A’
PEB structure (Hangar -1)
Sl No Item Description Unit
1. Excavation in trenches CUM
2. Excavation over areas CUM
3. Boring (if any) RM
4. PCC (lean concrete) as in foundation/ beams CUM
5. RCC as in foundation CUM
6. Form work in beams/footing SQM
7. Beams / Footing reinforcement. KG
8 PQC Flooring for Hangar
(a) 200mm thick Granular sub base SQM
(b) WMM 150mm thick in two layers SQM
(c) DLC (Dry lean Concrete) SQM
(d) Sand cushioning CUM
(e) HDPE film SQM
(f) 200 mm thick PQC CUM
(g) PU Sqm
9 Built up sections of steel KG
10 Structural steel sections (Purlin, Girts & ES, Rake angle) KG

11 Hardware (Anchor Bolt (AB) & HS/MS-MF ) etc. KG
12 Misc. steel (AB) Templates, Sag rod, rod bracing, flange brace & CRS Steel, KG
sturt pipes & clips-Purlin/Girts/ES or which is not covered in above items.
13 Roofing (0.55mm (TCT) Galvalume sheet ) SQM
14 Wall cladding (0.50mm (TCT) Galvalume sheet) SQM
15 Other sheeting ( which is not covered in above sheeting items) SQM
16 Trims (Corner trim, rake trim, ridge cap & drip trim) etc SQM
17 Gutter RM
18 Sky lights SQM
19 Ridge vents ( Nos and type) NOS
20 Down pipe RM
21 Aluminium Windows NOS
22 Polycarbonate sheet of thickness SQM
23 Flashing gutter SQM
24 Testing of piles ( Integrity/ routine/ lateral etc) (if any) NOS
25 All items required for Internal Electrification of Hangar
26 Motorized vertical hoist door SQM
27 Turbo ventilators NOS

Note:- Bidder may add other items as per design/requirements

ANNEXURE ‘B’
Annex for Hangar -1

5. RCC as in beams/ Columns…etc CUM
6. Form work in beams/ Columns…etc SQM
7. Reinforcement in all types of beams/ Columns, parapet, chajjas and slabs KG
8. ATT Sqm
9. Use & waste of form work as in all types of beams/ Columns, parapet, chajjas and SQM
slabs.
10. RCC work in all types of beams / Columns, parapet, chajjas and slabs. CUM
11. 200mm thick PCC solid block masonry in CM 1:6(C 5) CUM
13. FRP door including frame work SQM
14. 100mm thick, PCC M-15 as in floors SQM
15. 75mm thick, PCC M-10 as in Plinth protecton etc SQM
16. 75mm thick, PCC M-7.5 as in floors. SQM

18. 10mm thick polymer modified readymix cement base plaster for internal walls SQM
19. 2-3mm thick wall care putty in ceiling SQM
20. 15mm thick polymer modified readymix cement base plaster for external walls SQM
21. Double charged Vitrified tiles SQM
22. Kota stone SQM
23. Screed Cum
24. Steel Door SQM
25. Sound proof Aluminium windows Powder coated with steel grill SQM
27. Water proofing treatment to roof slab with APP SQM
28 Other items as per Schedule of finishes

ANNEXURE ‘C’
PEB structure (Hangar -2)

1 PQC Flooring for Hangar
(a) 200mm thick Granular sub base SQM
(b) WMM 150mm thick in two layers SQM
(c) DLC (Dry lean Concrete) SQM
(d) Sand cushioning CUM
(e) HDPE film SQM
(f) 200 mm thick PQC CUM
(g) PU Sqm
2. Built up sections of steel KG
3. Structural steel sections (Purlin, Girts & ES, Rake angle) KG
4. Hardware (Anchor Bolt (AB) & HS/MS-MF ) etc. KG
5. Misc. steel (AB) Templates, Sag rod, rod bracing, flange brace & CRS KG
Steel, sturt pipes & clips-Purlin/Girts/ES or which is not covered in above
items.
6. Roofing (0.55mm (TCT) Galvalume sheet ) SQM
7. Wall cladding (0.50mm (TCT) Galvalume sheet) SQM
8. Other sheeting ( which is not covered in above sheeting items) SQM
9. Trims (Corner trim, rake trim, ridge cap & drip trim) etc SQM
10. Gutter RM
11. Sky lights SQM
12. Ridge vents ( Nos and type) NOS
13. Down pipe RM
14. Aluminium doors/ Windows NOS
15. Polycarbonate sheet of thickness SQM
16. Flashing gutter SQM
17. Testing of piles ( Integrity/ routine/ lateral etc) (if any) NOS
18. All items required for Internal Electrification of Hangar
19. Motorized vertical hoist door SQM
20. Turbo ventilators NOS
Note:- Bidder may add other items as per design/requirements

ANNEXURE ‘D’
Annex for Hangar -2

5. RCC as in Grade beams/ Columns…etc CUM
8. ATT Sqm
slabs.
15. 75mm thick, PCC M-10 as in Plinth protecton etc SQM

22. Kota stone SQM
23. Screed Cum
24. Steel Door SQM
25. Sound proof Aluminium windows Powder coated with steel grill SQM
28 Other items as per Schedule of finishes
ANNEXURE ‘E’
POL Storage Accommodation

8. ATT SQM
slabs.
14. Aluminium door/windows including frame work SQM
16. 75mm thick, PCC M-10 as in Plinth protection etc SQM

23. Kota stone SQM
24. Screed Cum
25. Aluminium windows Powder coated with Aluminium grill SQM
26. Flush doors SQM
ANNEXURE ‘F’
Battery Charging shop

8. ATT SQM
slabs.
14. Aluminium door/windows including frame work SQM
16. 75mm thick, PCC M-10 as in Plinth protection etc SQM

22. Acid proof flooring SQM
23. Kota stone SQM
24. Screed Cum
25. Aluminium windows Powder coated with Aluminium grill SQM
26. Flush doors SQM
SCHEDULE ’A’ NOTES
(Applicable for PILE FOUNDATION only)

38.0 PILES:
38.1 The works as required at site shall be executed under written orders of the GE:
(a) All piles shall be bored cast-in-situ piles.
(b) Construction of all piling work shall be carried out as per clause 7.1 to 7.12 of IS:2911 (Part-I/
Sec-2- Latest revision)
(c) Before starting piling work, all the pile caps and piles shall be marked on ground and if any
discrepancy is observed the matter shall be referred to Accepting Officer.
(d) Initial and routine load test on piles shall be carried out asper IS:2911 (Part-4) latest revision.
Following load test shall be carried out
(i) Vertical load test for Safe load in compression
(ii) Lateral load test for safe load in lateral thrust
(iii) Pullout test for safe load in up lift.
(iv) Non-Integrity as per IS 14893-2001
(e) Initial test/ Routine test as per relevant IS shall be carried out on piles.
(f) Safe load carrying capacity of pile in compression shall be verified by Initial load tests before
commencing the actual piling work. If test results of Initial pile load test indicate lesser value than those
specified, the matter shall be referred to Accepting Officer.
(g) Concreting of piles shall be using Tremie method.
(h) Minimum nos of pile to be casted for Initial load tests shall be as per IS code.
(i) Results of all pile load test shall be reported to the Accepting Officer.
(j) In case of failure of pile load test, the piles will be redesigned. The additional expenditure in
such case shall not be borne by the department.
38.2 The initial load testing on test pile should also be performed in the presence of representative of
accepting officer. Routine load test shall be carried out on working piles and initial load tests on
working piles shall not be carried out.
38.3 Execution of working piles shall only be carried out after getting clearance from Accepting
Officer after review of initial test pile results.
38.4 The procedure for under water concreting in pile bores will be as per relevant IS guidelines,
both the methods like placement of concrete by direct pumping and tremie method shall be
allowed. The equipment for under water concreting like mechanical hoists, derricks, funnels,
valves, trolleys, flow of bentonite slurry, location of slurry ponds, density test and viscosity testing
shall be approved by GE before commencement of boring.

Date :- For Accepting Officer
SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-I

(BUILDING & STRUCTURE WORKS)
N Brief description of items of work D Rate per unit No Amount Period of

r Rs of ( Rs) completio
n of
g unit
Remarks
Individual
requi item from
N red the date
o of
handing
over of
site
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Construction of Pump House over 10,00,000.00 01 10,00,000.00
and including RCC UG Sump Each
(50000 Litre Capacity) in M-30
design mix all as specified, shown on
drawing and as directed by Engineer-
in-charge
Total of this schedule C/o to BOQ Rs. 10,00,000.00
Dated : Jt Dir (Contracts)
For Accepting Officer
SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-II

(List of works & prices)
(SITE CLEARANCE, AREA DEVELOPMENT, EXCAVATION & EARTHWORK)
SN Brief description of items of work D Rate per No of Amount

rg unit Rs unit ( Rs)
Individual item
completion of
required.
Remarks
Period of
N
o
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Site clearance in soft / loose soil all as 17.90 5239.00 93778.10
specified and directed SQM
2 Surface excavation not exc. 30cm deep 93.20 3050.00 284260.00
and averaging 15cm deep in soil and SQM
getting out.
3 Excavation in trenches not exc 1.5 mtr 383.70 1160.00 445092.00
wide and not exc. 1.5 mtr in depth for CUM
foundation etc. for shafts, wells, manholes
etc. not exc 10 Sqm on plan and getting
out in soft/loose soil upto 50m.
4 Excavation in trenches by mechanical 228.55 1456.00 332768.80

means (Hydraulic excavator) not exc 1.5m CUM
wide and not exc 1.5m in depth for
foundation etc not exc 10sqm on plan and
getting out in any type of soil upto 50m.
5. Excavation in trenches, not exc 1.5m wide 1542.20 151.00 232872.20

and not exc 1.5m in depth for foundations CUM
manholes etc or for laying cable/ pipes
erecting poles etc not exceeding 10 Sqm
on plan and getting out in
soft/disintegrated rock for cable and Pole
upto 50m.
6. Forming embankments including raising 168.10 705.00 118510.50

(or lowering) earth , spreading in layers n. CUM
Exc. 30 cm thick watering ,
ramming/rolling and finishing to required
size shape. etc n. Exc. 1.5 m high from
base.
Note:- (i) Good/approved earth obtained
from Item No 3, 4 & 5 shall be used under
this item.
(ii) Only excess quantity if required shall
be obtained and used from item No 11.
Total of this page C/o to Summary of Part-II Rs. 1507281.60

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-II (Contd..)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7. Returning, filling in, including spreading, 139.10 1512.00 210319.20
levelling, watering and well ramming in CUM
layers not exc 25 cm in hard/dense soil.
8. Removing excavated soil/soft 338.60 1101.50 372967.90

disintegrated rock out side Airport land all CUM
as specified and directed.
NOTE:- Contractor has to visit the site
and assess distance and quote
accordingly.
9. Supply only moorum / Red Bajri brought 950.00 50.00 47500.00

out side from MoD Land at any distance. CUM
Total of this page C/o to Summary of Part-II Rs. 630787.10
Summary of Sch ‘A’ Part-II
1 Total brought forward from serial Page No.146 Rs. 1507281.60

3 Total of Sch ‘A’ Part-II C/o to BOQ Rs. 21,38,068.70

Dated : For Accepting Officer
SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-III

(INTERNAL ELECTRIFICATION)
Notes:
1. All quantities under col 5 are provisional
2. Rates under col 4 are for both materials and labour complete unless mentioned otherwise
3. All excavation and earthwork required for items of works covered under this Schedule-À'
shall be measured & paid under relevant items of Schedule-À' Part-II, unless otherwise
specifically mentioned in the description of the items
4. For probable distribution details, refer drawings
SN Brief description of items of work Dr Rate per No of Amount Period of
g unit Rs unit (Rs) completion
of
required.
Remarks
Individual
No item from
the date of
handing
over of site
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. M & L for point wiring using ISI marked
1.1 kV grade single core FR-LSH
flexible cable, conforming to IS: 694-
1990, having multi-drawn thin strands of
electrolytic copper conductors,
conforming to IS: 8130- 1984 and
insulation conforming to IS: 5831- 1984,
for phase, neutral and earth continuity
conductor (same size of phase
conductor) connecting to earth dolly,
drawn in not less than 25 mm NB PVC
medium grade concealed conduits,
conforming to IS: 9537 (Part 3)- 1983,
colour-coded as specified in IS: 11353-
1985, including factory made sunken,
galvanized, not less than 1.00 mm thick
modular flush sheet metal enclosure
having top, bottom, side and back-wall
knockout for conduit entry from any
direction, conforming to IS: 14772- 2000
and including modular cover-plates
complete all as specified in IS: 732-
1989 and directed.
NOTE: Circuit wire from DB to switch
boards shall be included in quoted rate.
(a) One light point controlled by one 992.75 284 281941.0

switch with cables 1.5 mm² size Per point
(b) One light point controlled by two, 2 1397.96 24 33551.04
way switches with cables 1.5 mm² size Per point
(c) One fan or exhaust fan point 992.75 67 66514.25

controlled by one switch with cables 1.5 Per point
mm² size
Total of this page C/o to Summary of Part-III Rs. 382006.3

List of works & prices)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(d) One 6 A socket outlet, on the same

284.1 72 20455.2
Per point
board with other switches, with cables
1.5 mm² size
(e) One 6 A socket outlet, independent, 1070.4 108 115603.2
with cables 1.5 mm² size. Per point
2. M & L for point wiring using ISI marked

1.1 kV grade single core FR-LSH flexible
cable, conforming to IS: 694- 1990,
having multi-drawn thin strands of
electrolytic copper conductors,
conforming to IS: 8130- 1984 and
insulation conforming to IS: 5831- 1984,
for phase, neutral and earth continuity
conductor connecting to earth dolly,
drawn in not less than 25 mm NB PVC
medium grade concealed conduits,
conforming to IS: 9537 (Part 3)- 1983,
colour-coded as specified in IS: 11353-
1985, including factory made sunken,
galvanized, not less than 1.00 mm thick
modular flush sheet metal enclosure
having top, bottom, side and back-wall
knockout for conduit entry from any
direction, conforming to IS: 14772- 2000
and including modular cover-plates
complete all as specified in IS: 732- 1989
and directed.
(a) One 16 A socket outlet, 1131.39 38 42992.82
independent, with cables 2.5 mm² Per point
size
3. S & F modular type 6 A one-way SP 260.5 531 138325.5

switch, conforming to IS: 3854- 1997 Each
with finger proof terminal complete as
specified and directed.
4. S & F modular type 6 A two-way SP 307.3 48 14750.4

switch, conforming to IS: 3854- 1997 Eac
specified and directed
5. S & F modular type 16 A one-way SP 343.7 38 13060.6

switch, conforming to IS: 3854- 1997 Each
Total of this page C/o to collection of PART-III Rs 345187.7


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6. S & F modular type 2/3 pin combined 340.54 180 61297.2

shuttered type 6 A socket conforming to Each
IS: 1293- 2005 complete as specified
and directed.
7. S & F modular type 2/3 pin combined 528.4 38 20079.2

shuttered type 6/16 A socket Each
conforming to IS: 1293-2005 complete
as specified and directed.
8. S & F modular type 120 W step fan 1017.95 58 59041.1

regulator of 2 module size, conforming Each
to IS: 11037-1984 complete as
9. S & F 6 A, 250 V high quality robust 65.7 375 24637.5

surface/flush type polycarbonate/PVC Each
ceiling rose, conforming to IS: 371-
1979, having 3 terminals and outside
diameter not less than 63.5 mm
complete all as specified and directed.
10. Supply and fixing LED lights fitting 1x 1305.4 187 244109.8
20W, 230V, with heavy duty driver Each
having THD<10% with powder coated
metallic housing and high quality poly
carbonate diffuser connecting up with
three core flexible copper conductor
cable of suitable size from ceiling rose
complete.
Make:
Havells/WIPRO/BAJAJ/PHILLIPS
11. Supply and Fixing surface mounted 693.75 89 61743.75

LED batten 10W with extruded Each
aluminum housing heavy duty
integrated electronic driver, surge
protection more than 2 KA and
THD<10%
Make:Havells/WIPRO/PHILLIPS
/BAJAJ
12. Supply and fixing LED lights fitting 1x 1745.46 8 13963.68

5W mirror light , 220V, AC decorative Each
box type with driver, including LED
connecting up with three core flexible
copper conductor cable of suitable size
from ceiling rose complete Make:
Havells/Wipro/Phillips.
Total of this page C/o to collection of PART-III Rs 484872.2


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13. Supply and fixing LED security light 2966.25 16 47460

fitting 25 Watt 230 V AC outdoor Each
type with high pressure die cast
aluminum hosing and heat resistant
complete with driver, lamp bracket
with impact and corrosion resistant
including thermal management in
multiple optics complete with IP
65/66 protection complete.
Make: Havells/WIPRO/BAJAJ.
14. S&F single pole and neutral 1720.5 35 60217.5

enclosure with a two pin and earth Each
plug and socket complete with one
double pole MCB (For AC)
15. S & F single pole & neutral DB

(double door), conforming to IEC
61439- 3, suitable for flush mounting
with 100 A insulated & shrouded
copper busbar for each phase, fully
insulated & shrouded neutral bar,
earth bar, wire set and cable ties for
cable management, IP 43 & IK 09
protection with provision for DP
RCBO as incomer and SP MCBs as
outgoing, all complete as specified
and directed.
NOTES:
[I] MCBs shall be measured and
paid in relevant items.
a)Single Pole & Neutral DB, 8 Way 1912.7 1 1912.7
Each
b)Single Pole & Neutral DB, 12 Way 2264.9 2 4529.8
Each
Total of this page C/o to collection of PART-III Rs. 114120


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
16. S & F triple pole & neutral, double 4583.3 10 45833.00

door, 12-way metallic modular Each
distribution board conforming to IEC
61439-3, suitable for flush / surface
mounting with provision for FP RCCB /
RCBO / Isolator / MCB as incomer and
SP MCBs as outgoing, reversible
metal door, 100 A copper busbar for
each phase, fully insulated & shrouded
neutral bar, earth bar, wire & cable ties
for cable management, prefited
marking sheet, etc. having IK 09 & IP
43 protection complete all as specified
and directed by engineer-in-charge.
17. S & F RCBO conforming to IS 12640

(Part 2): 2016, assembled for AC
applications having front face
indication for earth leakage fault,
sliding shutters, IP 20 protected 35
mm² terminals, colour coded on/off
indication on dolly, integrated label
holder, etc complete all as specified
and directed.
a)32 A, 100 mA, FP 415V, 50 Hz 4414.52 3 13243.56
RCBO Each
b)63 A, 100 mA, FP 415V, 50 Hz 5713.63 5 28568.15
RCBO Each
18. M & L for submain wiring using ISI

marked 1.1 kV grade single corers
1990, having multi-drawn thin strands
of electrolytic copper conductors and
insulation conforming to IS: 5831-
1984, type C, HR 85° C + FR for
phase, neutral and earth continuity
drawn in not less than 25 mm NB
UPVC medium grade concealed
conduits, conforming to IS: 9537 Part-
3, colour-coded as specified in IS:
732- 1989, including making good of
disturbed surfaces of wall/ceiling/floor,
all complete as specified and directed.
NOTE: 01 run of phase conductor, 01
run of neutral conductor, 01 run of
earth continuity conductor and 01 run
of concealed conduit shall be
measured as one length.
Total of this page C/o to collection of PART-III Rs. 87644.71


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
a) 2 X 4.0 mm² + 1 X 4.0 mm² earth wire 215 300 64500.0

Rm
b) 2 X 6.0 mm² + 1 X 6.0 mm² earth wire 259.2 60 15552.0
Rm
19. M & L for submain wiring using ISI
marked 1.1 kV grade single core
1990, having multi-drawn thin strands
of electrolytic copper conductors and
insulation conforming to IS: 5831-
1984, type C, HR 85° C + FR for
phase, neutral and earth continuity
drawn in not less than 50 mm NB
UPVC medium grade concealed
conduits, conforming to IS: 9537 Part-
3, colour-coded as specified in IS:
732- 1989, including making good of
disturbed surfaces of wall/ceiling/floor,
all complete as specified and directed.
NOTE: 03 run of phase conductor, 01
run of neutral conductor, 02 run of
earth continuity conductor and 01 run
of concealed conduit shall be
measured as one length.
4 X 10.0 mm² + 1 X 10.0 mm² earth 565.78 300 169734.0

wire Rm


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20 M & L for earthing complete with 6688.4 8 53507.20

galvanized steel earth plate electrode Each
of 60 cm X 60 cm X 6 mm size,
buried directly in ground (earth pit not
less than 2.25 m deep below ground
level) with top edge of the plate not
less than 1.5 m below normal ground
level, connected to galvanized strip of
size 32 mm X 6 mm as earth lead by
means of bolts, nuts, check nuts and
washers of galvanized iron or steel,
galvanized iron pipe of 40 mm
diameter connected to earthing test
point, all as shown in electrical plate
No. 3, connected to earthing test
point including testing on completion,
excavation, earthwork, PCC earth pit
of dimensions 550 mm X 550 mm
(outer) and 300 mm X 300 mm
(inner) and 250 mm deep with a 10
mm deep CI cover hinged to CI frame
on ground level, GI watering pipe,
funnel, etc. all as specified and
directed by engineer- in – charge.
21 M & L for GI strip of size 32 mm x 6 989.6 60 59376.00

mm as earth lead fixed to wall on Rm
batten or recess or chases or buried
in ground or drawn in conduit/pipe or
fixed to poles or any other indicated
situation for loop earthing etc
complete all as specified and
directed.


List of works & prices
1. Total brought forward from serial Page No. 148 Rs. 382006.30
Total of this schedule C/o to BOQ Rs. 1776500.11
(Signature of Contractor) Jt Dir(Contracts)

Dated :
SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-IV

(INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY)
Notes:
3. All excavation and earthwork required for items of works covered under this Schedule-À' shall be
measured & paid under relevant items of Schedule-À' Part-II, unless otherwise specifically mentioned in
the description of the items
SN Brief description of items of work Dr Rate per No of unit Amount Period

g unit Rs. required. (Rs.) of
completi
N on of
Remarks
o Individu
al item
from the
date of
handing
over of
site
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Supplying and laying of 3-layer PP-R
Polypropylene random copolymer)
concealed pipes SDR 7.4 & SDR 11 UV
stablised and antimicrobial welded
having thermal stability for hot & cold
water supply including all PP-R plain &
brass threaded Polypropylene random
fittings fixed complete to walls, ceilings
or in floors etc .complete all as specified
and directed.
a) 25mm outer dia bore of pipe 174.20 150 26130.00
Rm
b) 20mm outer dia bore of pipe 145.16 100 14516.00
Rm
c) 16mm outer dia bore of pipe 122.40 50 6120.00
Rm
2. S&F, gate valves 25mm dia,(brass 545.30 16 8724.80
insert) as per requirement of site Each
3. S&F 15 mm dia Bib taps (Fancy Type) 607.57 20 12151.40
chromium plated, cast copper alloy with Each
crutch or butterfly handle, screwed
down, screwed for iron/CPVC pipes
4. S&F 15 mm dia Angular Stop valves 682.03 55 37511.65

Fancy Type chromium plated, casted Each
copper alloy, screwed down, high
pressure with crutch or butterfly handle
Total of this page C/o to collection of PART-IV Rs. 105153.85

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-IV

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 S&F of pillar taps, cast copper alloy 676.44 10 6764.40

with capstan heads, chromium plated Each
Fancy Type screwed down, high
pressure with long screwed shanks and
flynuts, complete all as specified, 15mm
dia.
6 S&F of PVC connections 15mm size 200.00 54 10800.00

with PTMT nuts of length 600mm Each
7 S&F of 15mm stop valves, cast copper 720.14 03 2160.42

alloy, Fancy Type, chromium plated Each
with long shank and cup (concealed
type) screwed down, high pressure,
with crutch or butterfly handle, screwed
both ends for iron pipe or for unions
Total of this page C/o to collection of Part-IV Rs. 19724.82
SUMMARY OF SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-IV

1. Total brought forward from serial Page No.156 Rs. 105153.85
2.Total brought forward from serial Page No. 157 Rs. 19724.82
(Signature of Contractor)
Jt Dir(Contracts)
Dated : for Accepting Officer
SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-V

(ROADS, PATH , CULVERTS & HARD STANDING)
Notes:
S Brief description of items of work Dr Rate per No of Amount Period of

N g unit Rs. unit (Rs.) completi
on of
required.
Remarks
Individua
No l item
from the
date of
handing
over of
site
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. M&L Rolling and consolidation of formation 26.00 45.0 1170.00
surfaces in cutting with using 8 to 12 tonne 10 SQM
power roller
2 M&L for solling or sub base with broken 3694.10 45.0 166234.50
boulders or quarried stone, interstices filled, 10 SQM
surface formed and rolled and consolidated
to required gradient and camber spread
thickness 200 mm complete all as specified
and as directed by engineer in charge.
3 M&L for 150 mm thick PCC 1:3:6 (Type C 2 ) 830.80 450.0 373860.00
using 40 mm graded stone aggregate. SQM
4 M&L for 50 mm thick sand filling under floors 1974.30 22.50 44421.75
etc including watering and consolidation. CUM
5 M&L Machine pressed precast concrete 955.00 450.0 429750.00
interlocking paver block, with grey cement SQM
and pigment, any shape and size confirming
to IS 15658-2006 of 80 mm thickness M-40
Grade, laid over complete all as specified
and as directed by Engineer In Charge.
6 M&L for applying two coats of cement based 70.50 180.0 12690.00
paint. SQM
7 M&L for factory made pre-cast cement 9158.70 13.50 123642.45

concrete solid blocks type B1 1:2:4 using 20 CUM
mm graded aggr exc 10 cm in width and set
in CM 1:4 as in road curb stone or sides of
path etc
Total of Schedule A Part V C/o to BOQ Rs. 11,51,768.70

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-VI
(AREA DRAINAGE)
Notes:
3. All excavation and earthwork required for items of works covered under this Schedule-À' shall
be measured & paid under relevant items of Schedule-À' Part-II, unless otherwise specifically
mentioned in the description of the items
SN Brief description of items of work D Rate per No of Amount Period of
rg unit Rs unit ( Rs) completion
Remarks
of Individual
required. item from
N the date of
o handing
over of site
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. M&L for PCC (1:4:8) type D2 using 40mm 5483.10 39.00 213840.90
graded stone aggregate as in foundation CUM
filling and mass concrete.
2. M&L for PCC (1:3:6) type C1 using 20mm 8532.50 80.00 682600.00
graded stone aggregate precast solid block CUM
masonry ece 10 cm in width setting in
Cement mortar 1:4, all as specified
3. M&L for PCC 1:2:4, Type B-0 using 12.50mm 9259.40 7.20 66667.68
graded stone aggregate as in coping, CUM
including necessary formwork, weathering,
slightly rounded or chamfered angles and
throating complete all as specified and
directed.
4. Rendering 15mm thick on brick and concrete 304.24 660.00 200798.40
surfaces finiesh even and smooth without SQM
using extra cement in CM (1:4)
5. M & L Extra for formig fair finish drain 43.35 180.00 7803.00
channel 30 cm inner girth. Note:-Inner girth RM
only shall be measured.
6 M&L for pre-cast cement concrete 1:2:4, 11036.80 14.00 154515.20
type B1 (using 20mm graded stone CUM
aggregate) as in manhole cover with plain
fair surface including chamfers, weatherings,
throatings, necessary form work and set in
CM (1:6), placed in position complete all as
7 Mild Steel TMT Bar CRS, Fe-500D 10 mm 82.60 1400.0 115640.00
dia and over as in reinforcement, cut to KG
length, bent to shape required, including
cranking bending and binding with and
including mild steel wire (annealed) not less
than 0.9mm dia or securing with clips.
Total of Schedule ‘A’ Part VI C/o to BOQ Rs. 14,41,865.18

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-VII
(SEWAGE DISPOSAL)
Notes:
SN Brief description of items of work D Rate per No of Amount Period of
r unit Rs unit ( Rs) completio
n of
Remarks
g required. Individual
item from
N the date of
o handing
over of
site
1. M&L for PCC type C-2 1:3:6 (40mm graded 5483.10 0.50 2741.55
aggregate) as in foundations, filling and mass CUM
concrete complete all as specified and
directed.
2. M&L for cement concrete bed to drain pipes in 466.89 20.00 9337.80
PCC 1:3:6, type C2 (using 40mm graded stone RM
aggregate), for 150mm dia drain pipe including
packing under and haunching against the sides
of pipes with concrete after they are laid and
tested complete all as specified and directed.
3. M&L for reinforced concrete pipe of 150mm 364.00 20.00 7280.00

bore of pipe, class NP-2, laid and jointed in RM
cement mortar (1:1) complete with collars
4. M&L for PCC (1:3:6) type C1 using 20mm 8532.50 2.00 17065.00
graded stone aggregate precast solid block CUM
masonry exc 10 cm in width setting in Cement
mortar 1:4, all as specified.
5. M&L for PCC (1:2:4) type B-2 using 40 mm 6586.10 0.50 3293.05
graded aggregate as in benching to surface CUM
channels for manholes or drains etc,
6. M&L for extra for forming fair finished drain or 43.35 5.00 216.75
channel 30 cm inner girth in cement concrete, RM
using extra cement including forms, moulds,
mitred / stopped ends etc complete all as
specified and directed. Note:- Inner girth only
shall be measured.
7. M&L, rendering 10 mm than fair faces of brick 204.80 20.00 4096.00
work or concrete suraces in CM 1:4 finished SQM
even and smooth without using extra cement
Total of this page C/o to Summary of Schedule ‘A’ Part-VII Rs 44030.15
SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-VII (Contd..)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8. M&L for pre-cast reinforced cement concrete 11036.80 0.50 5518.40
1:2:4, type B1 (using 20mm graded stone CUM
aggregate) as in manhole cover with plain fair
surface including chamfers, weatherings,
throatings, necessary form work and set in CM
(1:6), placed in position complete all as specified
and directed
9 M&L for PCC 1:2:4, Type B-0 using 12.50mm 9259.40 0.20 1851.88
graded stone aggregate as in coping, including CUM
necessary formwork, weathering, slightly
rounded or chamfered angles and throating
10 Mild Steel TMT Bar CRS, Fe-500D 6 to 8 mm 84.55 25.00 2113.75
dia as in reinforcement, cut to length, bent to KG
shape required, including cranking bending and
binding with and including mild steel wire
(annealed) not less than 0.9mm dia or securing
with clips.
Total of this page C/o to Summary of Schedule ‘A’ Part-VII Rs 9484.03
SUMMARY OF SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-VIII


SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-VIII

(DISPERSAL AREA)
Notes:
SN Brief description of items of work Drg Rate per No of unit Amount Period of
unit Rs required. ( Rs) completio
No n of
Individual
Remarks
item from
the date
of
handing
over of
site
1. Demolition of cement concrete of any 1631.30 50.00 81565.00
description and in any position not otherwise CUM
specifically provided for all as specified and
directed.
2. Scarifying or picking gravelled macadam or 32.80 260.00 8528.00

bituminous macadam surfaces 50mm thick, X SQM
area not exc 400 sqm all as specified and
directed.
Total of Schedule ‘A’ Part VII C/o to BOQ Rs 90,093.00

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-IX

(FIRE FIGHTING)
Notes:
4. For probable distribution details, refer drawings.
S Brief description of items of work Drg Rate per No of Amount Period
N unit Rs unit ( Rs) of
No required complet
. ion of
Remarks
Individu
al item
from the
date of
handing
over of
site
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Supply, Installation, Testing and 6227.00 20.0 124540.00
commissioning of fire hydrant valve with EACH
necessary fittings as per specification, Details SET
:Hydrant valve shall be marked as per IS:
5290 and shall have single outlet having 100
mm flanged inlet and complete set shall be
made of Gun metal. Oblique outlet female
instantenous type coupling having spring
loaded lugs, internal parts shall be of copper
or gunmetal. A cap (made of gun metal ) with
chain shall be provided on the outlet of the
valve, which have 63 mm instanteneous
pattern female coupling conforming and
marked IS-903.
2 Hose box made of 18 gauge MS Sheet 800 3359.00 20.0 67180.00

mm X 600mm X 250mm with double door with EACH
4 mm thick glasses and door frame made of SET
16 gauge MS sheet painted fire red out side
and brilliant white inside yard for fixing 2
lengths of 15 mtr long canvass hoses and
branch pipes & 1 No hose reel 30 mtr of 20
mm dia with glass and locking arrangement
complete including applying 2 coats of primer
paints as per seven tank process and powder
coated finally in post office red etc complete.
3 Supply and fix hose reel swinging wall 7751.00 16.0 124016.00
mounted type comprising rubber hose EACH
19/20mm dia 30m long high pressure double SET
braided bearing IS-5132 type'A' 5 mm bore
PVC shut off nozzle and 25mm gun metal
inlet valve conforming to IS-884 and
connected to down comer
Total of this page C/o to Summary of Schedule ‘A’ Part IX Rs 315736.00

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-IX (Contd..)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 Supply and fix gun metal branch pipe 3048.00 20.0 60960.00
63mm dia male instantaneous inlet EACH
threaded outlet fitted with hexagonal SET
based nozzle of 12.5 mm dia heavy duty
conforming to IS-903
5 Supply and fix 63 mm dia 30 meter long 7751.00 40.0 310040.0
hose conforming to IS 636 complete with EACH
male and female coupling conforming to SET
IS 903
6 Supply ,install test and commissioning 545.00 96.0 52320.00
pendant type Sprinkler quick / early EACH
response type as per IS:15105/TAC
guidelines 68 degree temperature rating
7 Supply and fix fire hydrant stand post CI 21642.00 4.00 86568.00
of 80mm dia 1.5m height with with provn EACH
of single outlet conforming to IS 908
8 Supply and fix Fire Alarm sounders / 4972.00 2.00 9944.00
Sirens electronic type horizontal two EACH
stage continuous normal operation for at
least 50 minutes with sound level 65 db to
120 db Measured at 1.5 m with sound
output variation of + 5 db 1500m range
9 Supply and fix MS ERW flanged pipe 1260.00 300.0 378000.0
150mm NB heavy duty for multi storied RM
building duly painted with 2 coats of
synthetic enamel paint over coat of zinc
chromate primer
10 Supply and fix MS ERW flanged pipe 903.00 140.0 126420.00
100mm NB heavy duty for multi storied RM
chromate primer
11 Supply and fix MS ERW flanged pipe 80 662.00 100.0 66200.0
mm NB heavy duty for multi storied RM
chromate primer
chromate primer
chromate primer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14 Supply installation and testing of CI Sluice 14500.0 2.00 29000.00
valve 150mm dia flanged end, class - PN1.6 EACH
as per IS 14846 latest revision, heavy duty
with stainless steel spindle and iron wheel at
the top flanged end including two no of flange
joint including jointing materials i.e nuts bolts
washers of size all as specified and directed.

valve 100mm dia flanged end, class - PN1.6 EACH

valve 80 mm dia flanged end, class - PN1.6 EACH
17 Supply,install,test and commissioning Fire 374000.0 1.00 374000.00
pump electrically driven horizontalend EACH
Suction, centrifugal type confirming to IS-
12469 :1988 with CI Casing , bronze impeller
and Stainless steel shaft mounted on heavy
duty bearings Suitable for continuous
operation with 'range of operation' 0 % to 150
% of rated capacityfor 440 V , 3 Phase. 50 Hz
70m Head, 2850 LPM discharge
18 Supply,install,test and commissioning Fire 634500.0 1.00 634500.00
pump diesel engine driven horizontal end EACH
suction, centrifugal type confirming to IS-
12469 1988 with CI casing, bronze impeller
and stainless steel shaft mounted on heavy
duty bearings suitable for continuous
operation with 'range of operation' 0 % to 150
% of rated capacity for 440 V , 3 phase, 50 Hz
AC supply 70 m Head. 2850 LPM discharge
all as specified and as directed.
19 Jockey pump horizontal end suction centrifugal 117400.0 1.00 117400.00
type Confirming to IS- 12469:1988 with CI casing , EACH
bronze impeller and stainless steel shaft mounted SET
on heavy duty bearings suitable for automatic
operation with non over loading power
characteristics for frequent start / stop operations
for 440 V , 3 phase, 50 Hz 70 m head 180 LPM
discharge
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20 Motor control centre electrical driven hydrant / Sprinkler 213500.0 1.00 213500.0
common main & Jockey Control panel for proper EACH
functioning of following fire fighting pumps:- SET
Main electric driven pump rated capacity for 440 V, 3
phase, 50 Hz AC supply, 70 mtr head, 2850 LPM
discharge - Qty as per tender
(ii) Fire pump diesel engine capacity for 440 V, 3
Phase, 50 Hz AC supply, 70 mtr head, 2850 LPM
discharge - Qty as per tender
(iii) Jockey pump capacity for 440 V, 3 Phase, 50 Hz
AC supply, 70 mtr head, 2850 LPM discharge- Qty as
per tender
(iv) Booster pump suitable for 440 V, 30 mtr head, 900
LPM discharge -02 Nos
The control panel should be CPRI approved, IP-52, 7
tank process powder coated CRCA sheet, vermin proof,
copper bus bar including provision of suitable size of
incoming/ outgoing breaks and indication lamps,
voltmeter & ammeter for main supply duly complete in
all respect.
Note :- The following provision be made in control panel
(i)Separate ON/OFF push button with indication lamp
for each pump with provision of trip lamp.
(ii) Audio visual alarm & indications having disconnect/
reset facility with a range of 1/2 km Annunciator to be
provided in the fire panel with hooter and acknowledge,
test and reset PBs. The indication shall come on when
electric driven pump set fails to start on pressure drop
or when there is power failure during pressure drop get
disconnected Further when indication of fire come,
sprinkler etc should get ON in auto mode
(iii) Panels shall be interlocked in such a way, when fire
pump start on pressure drop in the wet riser, the supply
to jockey pump be disconnected and if main hydrant
panel fails to start, diesel engine pump start in auto
mode and supply to other pump
(iv) The complete fire extinguishing scheme ie start/stop
of jockey pump, main pump Diesel engine pumps foam
making generators solenoid valve Sprinkling systems,
siren hooter etc functioning in their pre decided SET
sequence in auto mode
technical
(v) The complete scheme are required to operate in
auto mode, therefore any items required to be installed
in to panel and not covered in schedule are to be
provided by contractor without extra cost
(vi) Complete drawing along with technical specification
and make need to be produced by contractor for
approval of accepting officer before placing order of
control panel.
21 Booster pumps for 440 V, 3 Phase, 50 Hz Confirming to 67400.0 2.00 134800.00

IS- 12469 :1988 With CI Casing bronze impeller and EACH
stainless steel shaft mounted on heavy duty bearings SET
suitable for 440 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz 30m head, 900
LPM discharge
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
22 Supply & fix Strainer for suction for 100 mm 7895.00 1.00 7895.00
dia EACH
23 Supply & fix Strainer for suction for 150 mm 16053.0 2.00 32106.00
dia EACH
24 Supply and fixing NRV of following size
(a) 150 mm dia 12450.0 2.00 24900.00

EACH
(b) 100 mm dia 7542.0 5.00 37710.00
EACH
25 Supply and fix Air cushioning tank (Air 24636.0 2.00 49272.00
vessel) 250mm dia x 1000mm high with EACH
dished top, made of minimum 6mm thick MS SET
pipe /plate complete with 20mm dia. Brass
air valve (ball type), 20mm dia stop valve,
pressure gauge with brass stop cock, nipple
tees elbows and all accessories complete
26 Supply and fix Gun metal fire brigade in let 4349.00 1.00 4349.00
connection for connecting to external fire EACH
hydrant ring main consisting of two nos SET
63mm dia instantaneous type male coupling
with built in check valves and 150mm dia,
flanged outlet complete with all accessories
27 Supply and fix Pressure gauge Pressure 1264.00 4.00 5056.00
gauge 4"dial 0-14 kgs rating EACH
28 M & L for gate valve of following size
(a) 25 mm dia 1556.00 16.00 24896.00
EACH
(b) 50 mm dia 4063.00 6.00 24378.00

EACH
29 M& L for Pressure switch of universal type 4802.00 1.00 4802.00
all as specified as directed EACH
30 Supply & fix fire alarm control panel 86991.0 2.00 173982.00
complying with BS EN 54 double loop panel EACH
of capacity of 99 detectors & 99 Modules
and up to 200 detectors & modules per loop
(Hangars-02 as repeater panel)

Detectors Complying with and type certified EACH
to EN - 45 Addressable type multi sensor
detector with heat and smoke combination
with base with self built intelligence as per
IS: 11360

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
32 Supply, install test and commissioning 2382.00 16.00 38112.00
Detectors Complying with and type EACH
certified to EN - 45 but Addressable type
heat detector with base with rate of rise
cum fixed temperature
as per lS:2175
33 Supply and fix Addressable manual call 3132.00 16.00 50112.00
point, resetting type with relay modules EACH
including all accessories like junction
boxes, glands terminating lugs etc.
Addressable type Multi-Spectrum Quad EACH
Band Triple IR Fire and Flame Detectors
with UV/IR detection capacity ( add up
cost of module to be a complete set, the
type of module shall be relay type
module)including necessary control panel
and required wiring from detectors to
Panel all as specified and as directed.
35 Supply and fixing MS conduit of 20 mm 62.00 600.0 37200.0
dia fixed under wall/slab with necessary RM
clamps etc.
Summary of Schedule ‘A’ Part-IX
Total brought forward from serial Page No.165 Rs. 1284100.00
Total of Schedule ‘A’ Part-X C/o to BOQ Rs. 63,03,274.00

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-X

(EXTERNAL ELECTRIC SUPPLY)
Notes:
S Brief description of items of work D Rate per No of Amount Period of
N r unit Rs unit ( Rs) completio
g require n of
d. Individual
Remarks
N item from
o the date
of
handing
over of
site
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Supply, lying & testing cable XLPE insulated, 1240.09 45.0 55804.05
screened, PVC bedded, galvanized steel strip or RM
wire armoured,electric power cables (heavy duty)
with standard aluminimum conductor, 11000 volts,
earthed, grade, of size 3 core 120 sqmm.
2. Supply and lay UG cable XLPE insulated,
armoured, electric power cables (heavy duty)
1100V with aluminimum conductor of following
size.
(a) 3.5 core 300 sqmm 1422.84 100.0 142284.00

RM
(b) 3.5 Core 240 Sqmm 1168.69 210.0 245424.90
RM
(c) 3.5 Core 185 Sqmm 937.13 45.0 42170.85
RM
(d) 3.5 Core 120 Sqmm 648.15 545.0 353241.75
RM
(e) 4 Core 16 Sqmm 193.50 800.0 154800.00
RM
(f) 4 Core 6 Sqmm 148.30 300.0 44490.00
RM
3 Cable jointing kit for 11 kV (Earthed) grade cable 6372.90 2.00 12745.80
for indoor termination heat shrink type joint EACH
complete with jointing material and accessories
suitable for 3 core XLPE armoured aluminium
conductor cable size 120 to 185 sqmm.
4 Supply and fix LED type street light fitting complete 2966.25 10.0 29662.50
30/35W with IP 65/66 protection , with bracket of EACH
GI tubing light grade of size 40 mm dia upto 1.2 m
length bent to shape desired shape with clamps
nuts & bolts etc all as specified and directed by
Engineer-in-Charge.
Total of this page C/o to Summary of Schedule ‘A’ Part X Rs 1080623.85

CA NO: CECG/GOA/ OF 2022-23 SER PAGE NO: 170
SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-X (Contd..)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 Steel tubular swaged poles complete with 12009.70 10.0 120097.00

cast iron base plate, final taper plug, bolts, EACH
nuts & screws as specified type 410 SP-31
(9.00 meters long) Swan neck type all as
specified and as directed.
6 Automatic Power factor correction (APFC) 380666.7 1.00 380666.70

Panel for 3 Phase,415 V & 50 Hz System of EACH
capacity 150 KVAR with 5 steps
(50+25+15+5+5)
7 Earth continuity conductor or main earthing 989.60 80.0 79168.00

lead fixed to wall on batten or recess or RM
chases or buried in ground or drawn in
conduit/pipe or fixed to poles or any other
indicated situation for loop earthing etc.as
required 32x6mm dia copper strip.
8 Supply and laying 50mm bore dia GI tubing 402.00 12.0 4824.00
(light grade) with all fittings laid in trenches RM
or fixed with wall for cable protection All as
Specified and directed.
9 Supply and laying 80 mm bore dia GI tubing 705.00 12.0 8460.00

(light grade) with all fittings laid in trenches RM
or fixed with wall for cable protection/Road
crossing all as Specified and directed.
10 M&L for sand filling in trenches with clean 875.00 97.0 84875.00
dry sand unwashed including gently punning CUM
around cables complete all as specified.
Note:- Punning depth of sand wiil be
measured and paid.
11 Supplying and laying un-reinforced precast 63.90 13500.0 862650.00
concrete cable cover, class LV, Type-2. flat EACH
size 300mm x 180mm x 40mm thick, all as
specified.
12 Supplying and laying un-reinforced precast 57.40 110.0 6314.00

concrete cable cover, class HV, Type-1. flat EACH
size 300mm x 180mm x 40mm thick, all as
specified.
13 M&L for PCC 1:4:8 type D-2 (using 40mm 5483.10 0.06 328.98
graded crushed stone aggregate) as in CUM
foundation complete all as specified.
Total of this page C/o to Summary of Schedule ‘A’ Part X Rs 1547383.68

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-X (Contd..)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14 M & L cement concrete 1:3:6 type C2 (Using 5862.00 5.50 32241.00

40mm graded stone aggregate) for CUM
foundation of stay including coping form
work as required/ ordered complete all as
specified.
15 M&L for Earthing complete with galvanised 7572.90 20.0 151458.00

steel earth plate electrode 600x600x6mm EACH
thick buried directly in ground vertically to a SET
depth not less than 2.25mtr deep below
ground level with top edge of the earth plate
not less than 1.5mtr deep below normal
ground level, connected with & including
galvanised iron strip of size 32 x 6mm
connected to main test point as directed as
earthing lead by means of nuts, bolts and
washers of galvanised iron protected by
40mm dia (medium grade) GI tubing, funnel,
wire mesh, 20mm bore GI tubing (light
grade) watering pipe , including concrete pit
in PCC (1:3:6) type C-1, precast RCC(1:2:4)
type B-1 cover slab of size 350x350x50mm
reinforced with 8mm dia TMT bars @ 15cm
c/c in both ways and 10mm dia MS handle
(01 No) of suitable size for lifting of cover
slab, charcoal and salt in alternate layers
including necessary excavation and earth
work in soft/loose soil all as shown in
Electric plate No. 3 of SSR part-I and testing
on completion complete all as specified and
directed.
16 All as per Item No 15 above, but using 6688.40 2.00 13376.80

galvanised earth lead wire 4.00 mm dia as EACH
earthing lead. SET
Total of this page C/o to Summary of Schedule ‘A’ Part X Rs. 197075.80
SUMMARY OF SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-X

Total of Schedule ‘A’ Part XI C/o to BOQ Rs. 28,25,083.33

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-XI

(EXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY)
Notes:
S Brief description of items of work D Rate No of Amount
from the date of

handing over of
N rg per unit unit ( Rs)
Individual item
completion of
Remarks
Period of
Rs requir
N ed.
o
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Supply and lay Tubes galvanised iron 'medium 916.50 120.0 109980.00
grade' with all fittings laid in trenches Bore of tube RM
100 mm all as specified and directed.
grade'' with all fittings laid in trenches Bore of tube RM
50 mm all as specified and directed.
grade'with all fittings laid in trenches Bore of tube 40 RM
mm all as specified and directed.
4 Supply and fix stop valve, cast copper alloy, 1093.28 4.00 4373.12
screwed down, high pressure, with crutch or EACH
butterfly handle, screwed both ends for iron pipe or
unions fancy type chromium plated for 50 mm dia of
pipe all as specified and directed.
5 Supply and fix stop valve, cast copper alloy, 954.63 4.00 3818.52
screwed down, high pressure, with crutch or EACH
butterfly handle, screwed both ends for iron pipe or
unions fancy type chromium plated for 40 mm dia of
pipe all as specified and directed.
6 Supply and fix valve non return valve , 100 mm dia 7542.00 2.00 15084.00
all as specified and directed. EACH
7 Supply and fix valves, sluice, flanged of class 1.6 8200.00 3.00 24600.00
PN, 65 mm dia all as specified and directed. EACH
8 Supply and fix valves, sluice, flanged of class 1.6 9500.00 2.00 19000.00
PN, 80 mm dia all as specified and directed. EACH
Total of Schedule ‘A’ Part XI C/o to BOQ Rs. 3,59,205.64

DateL For Accepting officer
SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-XII

(LIGHTNING PROTECTION)
Notes:
S Brief description of items of work Drg Rate per No of Amount Period
N unit Rs unit ( Rs) of
No required completi
Remarks
. on of
Individu
al item
from the
date
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Supply & fix single pointed air termination 278.90 54.0 15060.60
aluminium rod, 12 mm dia, 300 mm long. EACH
2. Supply & fix aluminium strip 25 mm x 3 mm 125.10 2500.0 312750.00
complete with saddles and fixing screws for RM
Fitting the strip.
3. Supply and fix test point terminal block made of 689.70 20.0 13794.00
gun metal or phosphorus bronze of size EACH
75x75x25mm drilled and screwed including 3
Nos 8mm dia 25mm long hexagonal head screw
complete
4. Supply and Fixed GI earth strip 32 X 6 mm 213.00 270.0 57510.00
burried in ground complete all as specified RM
5. Supply and lay GI Pipe light grade with all fittings 380.20 270.0 102654.00
of 40 mm dia RM
6 M&L for Earthing complete with galvanised steel 7572.90 20.0 151458.00
earth plate electrode 600x600x6mm thick buried EACH
directly in ground vertically to a depth not less
than 2.25mtr deep below ground level with top
edge of the earth plate not less than 1.5mtr deep
below normal ground level, connected with &
including galvanised iron strip of size 32 x 6mm
connected to main test point as directed as
earthing lead by means of nuts, bolts and
washers of galvanised iron protected by 40mm
dia (medium grade) GI tubing, funnel, wire mesh,
20mm bore GI tubing (light grade) watering pipe ,
including concrete pit in PCC (1:3:6) type C-1,
precast RCC(1:2:4) type B-1 cover slab of size
350x350x50mm reinforced with 8mm dia TMT
bars @ 15cm c/c in both ways and 10mm dia MS
handle (01 No) of suitable size for lifting of cover
slab, charcoal and salt in alternate layers
including necessary excavation and earth work in
soft/loose soil all as shown in Electric plate No. 3
of SSR part-I and testing on completion complete
all as specified and directed.
Total of Schedule ‘A’ Part XII C/o to BOQ Rs. 6,53,226.60

Date; For Accepting Officer
SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-XIII

(DG SET)
Notes:

Remarks
of
requir Individual
No ed. item from
the date of
handing
over of site
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Earthing complete with galvanised steel 7572.90 6.00 45,437.40
earth plate electrode 60x60cm x 6mm Each
thick, buried directly in ground (earth pit
not less than 2.25metres deep below
ground level) with top edge of the plate not
less than1.5m below ground level,
connected to galvanised iron strip 32x6mm
as earthing lead by means of bolts nuts,
check nuts and washers of galvanised iron
or steel all as shown in electrical plate No
3 connected to earthing test point all as
specified or indicated including testing on
completion.
Total of Schedule ‘A’ Part XIII C/o to BOQ Rs. 45,437.40

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-XIV

(Aviation obstruction light/Conduit for TV & Telephone)
Notes:

g unit Rs unit (Rs) completio
n of
required.
Remarks
Individual
No item from
the date
of
handing
over of
site
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Supply and laying or fixing or passing 130.00 200.0 26000.00
through pipe,1100 Volts heavy duty cable RM
with PVC insulated aluminium conductor
served with an inner sheathing of PVC
tape armoured with galvanised steel wire
or tape and overall PVC seathed 6 sq.mm
nominal cross section all as specified and
as directed.
2 M&L Rigid non metalic PVC conduit 84.30 300.0 25290.00

exclusive of boxes (junction/terminal) but RM
inclusive of all tees, bends, elbows,
reducer, bell mouth tube ends and fixing
accessories such as couplers, lock nuts,
saddles pipe hooks etc 25 mm external dia
for communication cable complete all as
3 S&F PVC Junction boxes (1 to 4 way) for 46.21 50.0 2310.50
25mm dia PVC conduit complete all as EACH
Total of Schedule ‘A’ Part XIV C/o to BOQ Rs. 53600.50

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-XV

(REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING)
Notes:

of
Remarks
require Individual
No d. item from
the date of
handing
over of site
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Supply and install hi wall spilt AC units 60815.37 7.0 425707.59
indoor/outdoor complete with cordless EACH
remote control unit and with in built air
ioniser and Plasma filter for better indoor
air quality with minimum 5 star rating and
EER 3.2 of capacity 1.5 TR
2. Supply and install hi wall spilt AC units 97843.50 16.0 1565496.00

indoor/outdoor complete with cordless EACH
remote control unit and with in built air
ioniser and Plasma filter for better indoor
air quality with minimum 5 star rating and
EER 3.2 of capacity 2 TR
3. Supply and fix Refrigerator, electric 28577.37 2.00 57154.74
driven (single phase) capacity, more than EACH
195 litres upto 310 litres .BEE 5 star
rated
4 Supply,installation commissioning of 43410.39 8.00 347283.12
water cooler fully stainless steel,electric EACH
driven single phase having approx
storage andnominal cooling capacity
40/80 ltr/hr
Total of Schedule ‘A Part XV C/o to BOQ Rs. 23,95,641.45

SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-XVI

(Provisional lumpsum)
Notes:
(LIST OF WORKS AND PRICES TO BE QUOTED BY BIDDERS IN BOQ)
SN Item description Quantity Unit. Estimated Rate in Amount Total
% having above/
Rate Figures to (Rs.) Amount
be entered in
below
by Bidder words
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Refer Serial Item No. 16.00 of
BOQ Part-XVI Here in After
(Provisional lumpsum)
Jt. Dir (Contracts)

SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR FOR ACCEPTING OFFICER
SCHEDULE ‘A’ PART-XVI

(MISC B/R & E/M WORKS & SERVICES)
Notes:
(LIST OF WORKS AND PRICES TO BE QUOTED BY BIDDERS IN BOQ)
SN Item description Quantity Unit. Estimated Rate in Amount Total
% having above/
Rate Figures to (Rs.) Amount
be entered in
below
by Bidder words
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Refer Serial Item No. 18.00 to
33.01 of BOQ Part-XVII Here
in After
Jt. Dir (Contracts)

SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR FOR ACCEPTING OFFICER
DATED: _______
In lieu of IAFW-1779A (Revised 1955)
NAME OF WORK: PROVISION PROVISION OF HANGER WITH APRON LINK TAXI TRACK AND
EARTH FILLING AT JUHU MUMBAI
GENERAL SUMMARY
1. Total Amount brought forward from BOQ Rs _________________

Serial Page No
Net Contract Sum Rs ________________
(Rupees ___________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________only)
SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR Jt Dir (CONTRACTS)

FOR ACCEPTING OFFICER
SCHEDULE-`B’
(ISSUE OF MATERIALS TO CONTRACTOR)

(See condition 10 of IAFW-2249)
Rate at which
material shall be Place of
Sl
Particulars Unit issued to the issue of Remarks
No
Contractor material
`
1 2 3 4 5 6
----NIL___
S C H E D U L E - `C'
List of Tools and plant (other than transport) which will be hired to the
Contractor (See conditions 15, 34 and 35 of IAFW 2249)
Standby
Hire charges
Details of charges per Place of
Sl per unit per
Quantity Particulars MES crew unit per off issue (by Remarks
no working day
supplied day name)
`
`
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
----------------------------- Nil ---------------------------------
S C H E D U L E - `D'
(TRANSPORT TO BE HIRED TO THE CONTRACTOR)

(See conditions 16 and 35 of IAFW 2249)
Rate per unit per

Sl working day Place of issue Remarks
Quantity Particulars
no (by name)
`
1 2 3 4 7 8
----------------------------- Nil---------------------------------

TENDER
To,
The President of India
Having examined and perused the following documents:
1. Specifications & Special Conditions signed by the Jt Dir (Contracts) for the Chief Engineer (CG)
Goa -403 806
2. Drawings detailed in the specifications.
3. BOQ and Schedule À', `B', `C', and `D' attached hereto.
4. MES Standard Schedule of Rates Part-I 2009 Specifications (including amendment Nos. 01 to 03)
and MES Standard Schedule of Rates 2020 Part-II Rates {hereinafter and in IAFW-2249 referred to
as the MES Schedule}.
5. General Conditions of Contracts IAFW-2249 [1989 Print] together with errata 01 to 20 and
amendments 01 to 48 and the Schedule of Minimum Wages.
6. Water Condition 31 of IAFW-2249 [General Conditions of Contracts].
WATER WILL NOT BE SUPPLIED BY MES.
7. Should this tender be accepted, * I/WE AGREE
*(a) "That the sum of Rs.15,00,000/- (Rupees Fifteen lakh only) forwarded as Earnest
Moneywhich shall either be retained as a part of Security Deposit or be refunded by the
Government on receipt of an appropriate amount of the Security Deposit, within the time specified
as per condition 22 of IAFW-2249.
(b) To execute all the works referred to in the said documents upon the terms and conditions
contained or referred to therein and as detailed in the Summary and to carry out such deviations as
may be ordered vide condition 7 of IAFW-2249 up to a maximum of ( +)10% (Ten Percent) and
further agree to refer all disputes as required by condition 70 to sole Arbitration of Serving Officer
having degree in Engineering or equivalent or having passed final/direct final examination of sub
division-II of Institution of Surveyors (India) recognized by the Government to be appointed by the
Engineer-in-Chief, or in his absence the Officer officiating as the Engineer-in-Chief, or the Director
General of Works if specially delegated in writing by the Engineer-in-Chief, Army HQ, New Delhi
whose decision shall be final, conclusive and binding.
*Delete whichever not applicable.

In lieu of IAFW-2159 (Revised 1947)
Total brought forward from General Summary on serial page No.for the Lump Sum of
Rs._________________________/(Rupees______________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
______________________only)
Signature ___________ in the capacity of _______________________ duly authorized to
sign the tender for and on behalf of Messer’s _____________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
(BLOCK CAPITALS)
Name of the Signatory:

(IN BLOCK CAPITALS)
Date :
Postal Address :
Witness Telegraphic Address:
Address
Telephone:
lieu of IAFW-2159 (Revised 1947)
ACCEPTANCE
____________ Alterations have been made in these documents and as evidence that these alterations
were made before the execution of the Contract Agreement these have been initialled by the
Contractor and S'Shri/Shri ____________________________________________________________
The said Officer/Officers is/are hereby authorized to sign and initial on my behalf the documents
forming part of this contract.
The above tender was accepted by me on behalf of the President of India for the lump sum of
Rs.(Rupees__________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________only) on the day of
Signature dated this day of .
(FOR AND ON BEHALF OF THE PRESIDENT OF INDIA)

The Chief Engineer (Coast Guard)
Coast Guard Air Enclave
Dabolim, Goa– 403 806
Accepting Officer
CA NO: CE CG/GOA/ OF 2022-23 SER PAGE NO 203 to 251
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACTS - IAFW 2249 (1989 PRINT) FOR

LUMP SUM CONTRACT -IN LIEU OF IAFW-2159 (REVISED 1947)
A copy of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACTS - IAFW 2249 (1989 Print) with errata
1 to 20 and amendment No. 1 to 48 has been supplied to me/us, has been perused by me/us and is in
my/our possession. I/We have read and understood the provisions contained in the aforesaid
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACTS before submission of this tender and I/We shall abide by
the terms and conditions thereof, as modified if any, elsewhere in these tender documents.
It is hereby further agreed and declared by me/us, that the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF
CONTRACTS, IAFW-2249 (1989 Print) including condition 70 thereof pertaining to settlement of
disputes by arbitration, containing 33 pages (serial page Nos.203 to 235) with errata 1 to 20 and
amendment Nos. 1 to 48 (serial page Nos. 236 to 251 form part of these tender documents.
Note: In case of difference in interpretation due to wordings of English and Hindi versions of the
General Conditions of Contracts (IAFW-2249) (1989 Print), the English version will prevail.

NAME OF WORK: PROVISION OF HANGER WITH APRON LINK TAXI TRACK AND EARTH FILLING
AT JUHU MUMBAI
SCHEDULE OF MINIMUM FAIR WAGES
It is hereby agreed that the Schedule of Minimum Fair Wages' as published vide Government of
India / State Govt. / Union Territory latest Notification forms part of these tender documents. My/Our
signature hereunder amounts to my/our having read and understood the provisions contained therein and
I/we agree that I/we shall abide by the same and that aforesaid documents form part of this tender.

Dated: for Accepting Office
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. GENERAL
1.1 The following special conditions shall be read in conjunction with General Conditions of Contracts
(IAFW-2249) including amendments and errata thereto. If the provision in these conditions are at
variance with the provision in these conditions are at variance with the provisions in the aforesaid
documents, the provisions in these special documents shall be deemed to take precedence there-over.
1.2 General specifications mentioned any where in the contract including those in General
Conditions of Contracts, viz IAFW-2249, shall mean the specifications given in the MES Standard
Schedule of Rates Part I: 2009 print. Particular specifications given here-in-after are in brief and only to
particularise/amend and emphasise the specification given in the MES standard Schedule of Rates.
Specifications, General Rules. Preambles and special conditions contained in MES standard Schedule
of Rates 2020 Part-II shall, unless specifically described otherwise, be applicable to this contract.
1.3 Any work shown on drawings(s) but not described in particular specifications shall, unless
specifically described to be excluded from the contract, be deemed to be included in the lumpsum
quoted by contractor for Schedule 'A' Part-I. In case of doubt with regard to the manner of detail for
executing the work, the decision of the Accepting Officer shall be final, conclusive and binding. This
shall not be applicable to the items of work pertaining to services for which separate parts of Schedule
'A' setting out the requirements have been given. Should there be item(s) or parts as shown on
drawings but not included in the relevant sections of Sch 'A' these shall, unless otherwise described or
stated in the contract, constitute an additional work.
1.4 All headings and marginal notes to these special conditions or to any other documents of this
contract are solely for the purpose of giving a concise indication and not a summary of the contents
thereof, and they shall never be deemed to supersede the contents of the clauses.
1.5 The tenderer is advised to point out in writing discrepancy(s), if any, of the tender documents, at
least 10 days before the due date of receipt back of tender. In case discrepancy(s) in contract
documents is/are noticed by the Contractor during execution of the works, it shall be brought out to the
notice of the Accepting Officer of contract and others concerned in writing before commencement of the
particular work where discrepancy (s) is/are noticed failing which the contractor shall forfeit his right to
claim on account of such discrepancy (s)
1.6 Also where there are obvious mistakes in any of the contract provisions, the Accepting Officer
shall be sole deciding authority with regard to the intention of the contract documents and his decision in
this respect shall be final, binding and conclusive.
1.7 Where the drawings show finishes to wooden members, such finishes shall be applied to wooden
members as well as wood based members. However, surfaces covered with laminates shall not be
given any finish such as painting, polishing etc.
1.8 Where reinforcement details/thickness of RCC members such as slab, beams, lintels etc are not
shown on the drawings, the same shall be supplied by the GE on the basis of provisions in IS-456-2000
and the same shall be provided and incorporated in the works by the contractor and no extra payment
will be admissible on this account.
1.9 Where ever nomenclatures of structural slabs ( e.g S-I, S-2 etc) is given in the RCC Plans, the
details of reinforcement for such slabs shall be as given for slabs of the same nomenclature else-where,
if not given in the same drawing.
1.10 Dwarf wall in situations like verandah, passage etc even if not shown on drawings, shall be
deemed to be included in the scope and shall be provided at no extra cost to the department.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS (CONTD…)
2. CONDITIONS OF CONTRACTS AND EXECUTION OF WORKS
2.1 The various sections/ Sub-divisions of the tender documents shall be deemed to be
supplementary/ complementary to each other.
3. INSPECTION OF SITE BY THE TENDERER
3.1 The tenderer is advised to contact the Garrison Engineer for the purpose of inspection of site (s) and
relevant documents other than those sent herewith, who will give reasonable facilities for the purpose. The
tenderer shall also make themselves familiar with the working conditions, accessibility of site (s), availability of
materials and other cogent conditions which may effect the entire completion of work under this contract.
3.2 The tenderer shall be deemed to have inspected the site (s) and made themselves familiar with
the working conditions, whether they have actually inspected the site (s) or not.
4 CONDITIONS OF WORKING IN RESTRICTED AREA
4.1 The work under this contract lies in HIGHLY RESTRICTED AREA.
4.2 The restrictions for entry to work site and conditions of working in restricted area shall be as under :-
(a) Entry And Exit : The contractor/his agents/representatives / workmen etc. and his
materials, carts, trucks or other means of transport etc. will be allowed to enter through and
leave from only such gate or gates and at such times as the GE or’ authorities in charge of the
restricted area may at their sole discretion permit to be used. Contractor’s authorized
representative is required to be present at the places of entry and exit for purpose of identifying
his carts, trucks, etc. to the person in charge of the security of the restricted area.
(b) Identity of Workmen :

(i) Every workman shall be in possession of an identity card. The identity card shall be
issued after a thorough investigation of antecedents of the labourers by the contractor and
attested by Officer-in-Charge of the unit concerned in accordance with the standing rules and
regulations of the unit. Contractor shall be responsible for conduct of his workmen, agents or
representatives.
(ii) Identity Card or Passes: The contractor, his agent and representatives are required
individually to be in possession of an identity card or pass which will be examined by the security
staff at the time of entry into or exit from the restricted area at any time or number of times inside
restricted area.
(c) Search: Thorough search of all persons and transport shall be carried out at each gate
and for as many times the gate is used for entry or exit and may also be carried out any number
of times at the site within the restricted area.
(d) Working Hours: The units controlling restricted area, usually work during six days in a
week and remain closed on the 7th day. The working hours available to the contractor’s labour
and staff are however appreciably reduced because of the time of entry and exist during working
hours. The exact working hours, working days and number of working days observed for these
restricted area (s) where works are to be carried out shall be deemed to have been ascertained
by contractor before submitting his tender. The tenderer’s attention is invited to the fact that
number of working hours for a unit is prescribed in regulations and that they cannot be increased
by the Garrison Engineer or authorities controlling the restricted area. The definition of “working
days” as given under condition 1 (t) of IAFW-2249 does not apply in case where the works are
carried out in restricted area.
(e) Working on Holidays: The contractor shall not carry out any work in gazetted holidays,
weekly holidays and other non working days except when he is specially authorized in writing to
do so by the Garrison Engineer. The GE may at his sole discretion declare any day as holidays
or non working day without assigning any reasons for such declaration.
(f) Fire Precautions:
(i) The contractor, his agents, representatives, workmen etc. shall strictly observe the order
pertaining to fire precautions prevailing within the restricted area.
(ii) Motor transport vehicle, if allowed by the authorities to enter the restricted area must be
fitted with the serviceable fire extinguisher.
(g) Female Searcher: If the contractor desires to employ female labour or works to be
carried out inside the area of factory, depot, part etc. and a female searcher is not borne on the
authorized strength of the factory, deport, part etc. at the time of submission of tender, he shall
be deemed to have allowed in his tender for pay and allowances etc. for a female searcher
(Class IV servant) calculated for the period female labourers during any month and female’s
searcher (s) has/have to be employed in addition to the authorized strength of the factory, depot,
part etc. the salary and allowances paid to the additional female searches shall be distributed on
equitable basis between the contractors employing female labour taking into consideration the
value and period of completion of their contracts. The GE’s decision in regard to the amount
payable on this account by any contractor shall be final and binding.
(h) The contractor and his work people shall observe all the rules promulgated from time to time
by authority controlling the area in which the work is to be carried out e.g. prohibition of smoking,
etc. Any person found violating the security rules laid down by the authority shall be immediately
expelled from the area without assigning any reasons, whatsoever, and the contractor shall have
no claim on this account. Nothing shall be admissible for any man hours lost on this account.
5. WORKING ON HOLIDAYS
5.1 The contractor shall not carry out any work in gazetted holidays, weekly holidays and other non
working days except when he is specially authorized in writing to do so by the Garrison Engineer. The
GE may at his sole discretion declare any day as holidays or non working day without assigning any
reasons for such declaration. No claim, whatsoever for loss of any working hours shall be entertained on
this account.
6. FIRE PRECAUTIONS
6.1 The contractor, his agents, representatives, workmen etc. shall strictly observe the order
pertaining to fire precautions prevailing within the restricted area.
6.2 Motor transport vehicle, if allowed by the authorities to enter the restricted area must be fitted
with the serviceable fire extinguisher.
7. FEMALE SEARCHER
7.1 If the contractor desires to employ female labour or works to be carried out inside the area of
factory, depot, park etc. and a female searcher is not borne on the authorized strength of the factory,
deport, part etc. at the time of submission of tender, he shall be deemed to have allowed in his tender for
pay and allowances etc. for a female searcher (Class IV servant) calculated for the period female labour
by him inside that area. If more than one contractor employs female labour during any month and
female’s searcher (s) has/have to be employed in addition to the authorized strength of the factory,
depot, park etc. the salary and allowances paid to the additional female searches shall be distributed on
an equitable basis between the contractors employing female labour taking into consideration the value
and period of completion of their contracts. The GE’s decision in regard to the amount recoverable on
this account by any contractor shall from final and binding.
7.2 The contractor and his work people shall observe all the rules promulgated from time to time by authority
controlling the area in which the work is to be carried out e.g. prohibition of smoking, etc. Any person found
violating the security rules laid down by the authority shall be immediately expelled from the area without assigning
any reasons, whatsoever, and the contractor shall have no claim on this account. Nothing shall be admissible for
any man hours lost on this account.
8. SECURITY OF CLASSIFIED DOCUMENTS
8.1 Contractor's special attention is drawn to Condition 2-A & 3 of General Conditions of Contracts (IAFW-
2249). The contractor shall not communicate any classified information regarding the works either to Sub-
contractors or others without prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor shall also not make copies
of the design/drawings and other documents furnished to him in respect of the work and he shall return all
documents on completion of the work or earlier on termination of contract. The contractor shall alongwith final bill
attach a receipt from the Engineer-in-Charge in respect of his having returned the classified documents as per
Condition 3 of General Conditions of Contracts (IAFW-2249).
9. OFFICIAL SECRET ACT
9.1 The contractor shall be bound by the India Official Secret Act, 1923, particularly Section 5 thereof, all as
per condition 2A of IAFW-2249.
10. EMPLOYMENT OF PERSONNEL
10.1 Contractor shall employ only Indian Nationals as his representatives, servants and workmen after verifying
their antecedents and loyalty. He shall ensure that no person of doubtful antecedents and nationality is in any way,
associated with the work. If for the reasons of technical collaboration or other considerations the employment of
foreign national (s) is unavoidable, the contractor shall furnish full particulars to this effect to the Accepting Officer
at the time of submission of the tender. As a proof that the contractor has employed only India Nationals, he shall
render a certificate to GE within one month from the date of acceptance of tender to this effect. In case the GE
desires, contractor will have the police verification done of personnel employed by him.
10.2 The GE shall have full powers, and without giving any reason to order the contractor immediately to cease
to employ, in connection with this contract, any agent, servant or employee whose continued employment is, in his
opinion, undesirable. The contractor shall not be allowed any compensation on this account.
10.3 The contractor's attention is also drawn to Condition 25 of IAFW-2249 in this connection.
11.0 Engineering Establishment:-
Following staff must be made available by the firm for the project at site during execution:-
Sl No Appointment Nos. Qualification Experience

(i) Executive Engineer 1 B.Tech (Civil) 05 years including 02 years of Rigid pavement
/ Asst engineer execution
(ii) Executive Engineer 1 B.Tech (Civil) 05 years including 02 years of PEB structure
/ Asst engineer execution
(iii) JE’s 1 Diploma (Civil 05 years including 02 years of Rigid
Engg) pavement execution
(iv) JE’s 1 Diploma (Civil 05 years including 02 years of PEB structure
Engg) execution
(v) Lab Asst 1 Diploma 05 years including 02 years of Rigid pavement
work and site lab
Note :-
(i) Note that affidavits on Non Judicial Stamp Paper of Rs. 100/- each duly notarized shall be submitted by the
firm, having employed all the above mentioned engineers and also affidavit shall be submitted by the engineers
confirming for the employment in the firm, duly supported by attested copies of Engineering Degree / Diploma as
applicable. If the contractor failed to employ any one of the above Engineers, penalty @ rate of Rs. 5000/head/day
for Sl. No (i), Rs.3000/head/day for Sl. No (ii) and Rs.1500/head/ day for Sl. No (iii) to (v) shall be recovered from
Contractors dues.
12. MATERIALS AND SAMPLES (REFER CONDITION 10 OF IAFW-2249)
12.1 The tenderer is advised to inspect samples of the local building materials maintained by the GE before
submitting this tender. He will be deemed to have full knowledge of these materials whether he inspects them or
not. The materials to be provided by the contractor shall conform to/shall be superior to the standard of samples
displayed in the office of GE in the matter of quality unless otherwise specified.
12.2 Items conforming to India Standard Specification shall be accepted only when ISI marked material are not
manufactured. However, before incorporating such materials/items, the contractor shall produce necessary test
certificates as required by the GE.
12.3 The contractor shall produce samples of materials which he proposes to use in the work to GE through
Engineer-in-Charge and get them approved in writing before commencement of work. All approvals of materials
shall be in writing from GE to contractor. The materials, articles, etc. as approved shall be labelled as such and
shall be signed by GE and Contractor and kept in the safe custody of Engineer-in-Charge.
12.4 The materials to be incorporated in the work shall be of the make as specified in the Particular
Specifications or as given in Appendix ‘B’. Where make of the material has not been specified, materials to be
incorporated in the work shall be ISI marked. Where specified firm manufacturers both ISI marked and non ISI
marked product, the material incorporation in the work shall be ISI marked and no extra payment shall be
admissible on this account. In case the material having ISI certification marked are not manufactured, material
conforming to relevant ISI may be incorporated in the work after approved by GE. Where make of the same
material has been specified in particular specification as well as in the Appendix ‘B’ to Particular Specification the
make given in Appendix ‘B’ to Particular Specification shall be provided. However, in case the Make of materials
specified in Sch ‘A’, the same shall take precedence over the Make as specified in Particular Specification or in
Appendix ‘B’.
12.5 The materials/articles/fittings which are generally superior to IS/BIS certified products shall be incorporated
in the work as approved by GE.
12.6 In case the fixture/fittings/materials which are not manufactured/available with ISI marks/BIS certified
products as specified here-in-before the fixtures/fittings/material of superior to IS/BIS specifications or conforming
to IS shall be got approved from the GE before incorporation in the work. Fixture/fittings/materials where these are
superior to IS/BIS specifications conforming to relevant IS/BIS certifications marks, no price adjustment shall,
however, be made on this account.
13. AVAILABILITY OF LAND FOR STORAGE OF MATERIALS, TEMPORARY WORKSHOP AND

OFFICES ETC.
13.1 Refer Condition 24 of IAFW-2249. The contractor shall be permitted to store his materials ,
temporary workshops and the like during the currency of the contract, at area of land marked for the
purpose on the site plan and he shall pay a licence fee @ Re. 1/- (Rupee one only) per year or part
thereof in respect of each and every separate area of land allotted to him. The contractor shall dismantle
all stores, temporary workshops & offices erected inside defence land within one month of actual
completion of the work. An amount equal to 0.50% of the contract amount or Rs 2.00 lakhs whichever is
less, shall be retained from the RARs which shall be released back to the contractor only after complete
dismantling of labour camps and temporary workshops and clearing the debris from the site to the
complete satisfaction of the Engr-in-Charge.
13.2 Land for T&P and site lab shall be provided by GE within 1km vicinity of the work site
14. SECURITY
14.1 Contractor’s attention is invited to Condition 25 of IAFW-2249. He shall employ only Indian
Nationals after verifying their antecedents and loyalty. The contractor shall, on demand by the Engineer-
in-Charge, submit list of his agents, employees and work people concerned and shall satisfy the
Engineer-in-Charge as to the bonafides of such people.
14.2 The Contractor and his agents, employees and work people shall observe all the rules
promulgated by the authority controlling the installation/area in which the work is to be carried out e.g.
prohibition of smoking and lighting, fire precautions, search of persons on entry and exist, keeping to
specific routes, observing specified timing etc. Nothing extra shall be admissible for man hours etc lost
on this account.
15. DAMAGE TO EXISTING STRUCTURES
15.1 Any damage to the existing structures, any existing road, etc during the execution of work shall
be made good by the contractor at his own expense. Rectification, replacement, making good and
touching up etc shall be carried out to conform to the materials and workmanship originally provided and
to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. In case of any dispute on this account, the decision of the
GE shall be final, conclusive and binding.
16. QUARRIES AND ROYALTIES
16.1 Quarries are not available on land which is in the charge of MES authorities. Condition 14 of
IAFW-2249 shall be treated as not applicable.
17. APPROACHES
17.1 The contractor shall make arrangements for and provide at his own cost all temporary
approaches, if required to the site (s), after obtaining approval in writing of the GE to the layout of such
approaches.
18. LOCATION OF BUILDINGS AND WORKS
18.1 There may be some changes in location/sitting of building shown in site (layout) plan (s) to suit
local conditions and/or departmental requirements. The contractor shall have no claim what-so-ever
consequent to such change in the location/sitting of works.
19. ACTION WHERE NO SPECIFICATIONS EXIST
19.1 In case of any class of work for which there are no specifications in the tender documents
including SSR, such work shall be carried out in accordance with Indian Standard Specifications and
where Indian Standard Specifications do not cover the same, the work shall be carried out as per
standard engineering practice subject to the approval of the GE.
19.2 No claim what-so-ever will be tenable for any misunderstanding or for not having ascertained
requisite information/knowledge to muster the resources required in satisfactory completion of the entire
work to requirements as per contract agreement
20. METHOD OF MEASUREMENTS
20.1 Measurement of all measurable work executed under this contract shall be taken in accordance
with the rules of measurements as laid down in SSR Part –I, 2009 & SSR Part-II, 2020 pertaining to
various items of work as applicable, unless otherwise indicated in the respective sections\ parts of
Schedule 'A'. In case the method of measurements for a particular item of work is not given in SSR, a
reference will be made to the relevant provisions contained in the latest edition of IS-1200.
21. CONTRACT LABOUR (REGULATION AND ABOLITION) ACT 1970
21.1 The contractor when required to employ more than twenty workmen on the works under this
contract, shall be bound by the Contract Labour (Regulation and abolition) Act, 1970 and rules framed
there under including (State and Central) all other rules related to Labour including deduction of EPF etc.
No contractor can undertake or execute his work without a licence issued by a licensing officer.
22. CRITICAL PATH METHOD/NET WORK ANALYSIS AND THE TIME SCHEDULE
22.1 The time and progress chart, to be prepared as per Condition 11 of IAFW-2249 (General
Conditions of Contracts), shall consist of detailed net work analysis and a time Schedule. The critical
path net work will be drawn by the contractor and approved by GE and the contractor soon after
acceptance of the tender. The time scheduling of the activities will be done by the contractor so as to
finish the work within the stipulated time. The contractor is advised to use the facility of computerization
available with any organization which affords such facility in doing the same. On completion of the time-
schedule, a firm calendar date schedule will be prepared and submitted by the contractor to GE, who will
approve it after scrutiny. No financial liability shall accrue to the Govt in connection with
computerization.
22.2 The schedule will be submitted in quadruplicate within two weeks from the date of handing over
the site. In case the contractor fails to submit the CPM net work diagram, the net work prepared by the
GE will be binding on him and he will be bound to employ resources of men and materials in the manner
directed by the GE.
22.3 During currency of the work, the contractor is expected to adhere to the time schedule and this
adherence will be part of the contractor's performance under the contract. During the execution of the
work, the contractor is expected to participate in the reviews and updating of the net work undertaken by
GE. These reviews may be undertaken at the discretion of the GE either as a periodic appraisal
measure or when the quantum of work ordered on the contractor is substantially changed through
deviation order (s)/or amendment. Any revision of the Schedule as a result of the review will be
submitted by the contractor to the GE within a week, who will approve it after due scrutiny. The
contractor will adhere to the revised schedule thereafter.
22.4 In case of Contractor not agreeing to the revised Schedule, the same will be referred to the
Accepting Officer whose decision will be the final, conclusive and binding. GE's approval to the revised
Schedule resulting in completion date beyond the stipulated date of completion shall not automatically
amount to grant of extension of time. Extension of time shall be considered and decided by the
appropriate authority in terms of Condition 11 of IAFW-2249 and separately regulated.
22.5 Contractor is expected to mobilise and employ sufficient resources to achieve the detailed
schedule within the broad frame work of the accepted methods of working and safety.
22.6 No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for any multiple shift work or other incentive
methods contemplated by him in his work schedule even though the time schedule is approved by the
department.
23. CO-OPERATION WITH OTHER AGENCIES
23.1 The contractor shall permit free access and afford normal facilities and usual convenience to
other agencies or departmental workmen to carryout connected works or services under separate
arrangements.
23.2 The contactor’s prices shall be deemed to cater for all the above contingencies and nothing extra
shall be admissible on this account.
24. SECURITY AGAINST LOSS OR DAMAGE
24.1 The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-charge every morning a distribution return of his
plants/equipments on the site of the work, stating the following particulars:-
(i) Particulars of plants/equipments, its make, manufacture No., Model No., if any, Registration
No., if any, capacity, year of manufacture and year of purchase etc.
(ii) Total No. (Quantity) on site of work.
(iii) Location and indication of No.(quantity) at each location of the site of work.
(iv) Purchase value on the date of purchase. For the purpose of this condition, plant/equipment
shall include vehicles i.e. trucks and lorries but neither the workmen's tools nor any manually
operated tools/equipment. The Engineer-in-charge shall record the particulars supplied by the
contractor in the works diary and send monthly return to the GE for record in his office.
24.2 Loss on account of Enemy Action:-

If as a result of enemy action the contractor suffers any loss or damage, the Govt, shall reimburse to the
contractor such loss or damage to the extent and in the manner provided here-in-after :-
(i) The loss suffered by him on account of any damage or destruction of his plants/equipment
(as defined in special condition (a) above), materials or any part or parts thereof the amount of
loss assessed by the Accepting Officer of the contract on this account shall be final, conclusive
and binding.
(ii) The compensation paid by him under any law for the time being in force, to any workmen
employed by him for any injury caused to workman or workman's legal successor for loss of the
workman's life.
(iii) Payment of compensation for loss or damage to any work or part of work carried out. The
amount of compensation shall be determined in accordance with Condition 48 of General
Conditions of Contracts ( IAFW-2249).
(iv) No reimbursement shall be made nor shall any compensation be payable under the above
provision unless the contractor had taken Air Defence precautions ordered by the GE/or
concerned, or in the absence of such order, reasonable precautions taken by the contractor. No
reimbursement shall be made nor shall any compensation be payable for any plants/equipment
or materials not lying at site of work at the time of enemy action.
25. FORCE MAJEURE
25.1 Should any force majeure circumstances arise, each of the contracting party shall be executed
for the no fulfillment or for the delayed fulfillment of any of its contractual obligations, if the affected part
within 15 days of its occurrence informs the other party in writing. Force majeure shall mean fires,
floods, natural calamities or other acts such as war, turmoil’s, strikes ( as no limited to be establishment
of the spelled), sabotage, explosions, quarantine restrictions beyond the control of either party.
25.2 It is understood and agreed between the parties hereto that the rights and obligations of the
parties shall be deemed to be in suspension during the continuance of the force majeure event as
aforesaid and the said rights and obligations shall automatically revive upon the cessation of intervening
force majeure event. The period within which the rights & obligations of the parties shall be in
suspension due to the force majeure event shall not be considered as a delay with respect to the period
of delivery and/or acceptance of delivery under the contract or otherwise the detriment of either party.
25.3 Not withstanding the provisions of the immediately foregoing clauses it is further understood and
agreed between the parties hereto that in the event of any force majeure persisting for an uninterrupted
period exceeding 6(six) months, either party hereto reserves the right to terminate this contract upon
giving prior written notice of 30 (thirty)days to the other party of the intention to terminate without any
liability other than reimbursement on the terms provided in this agreement of the goods received.
26. WATER
26.1 Refer to Condition 31 of IAFW-2249
26.2 Water will not be supplied by the MES. The contractor shall make his own arrangements for
water required for work and his workmen at his own cost.
26.3 The tenderers are advised to visit the site of works to ascertain availability of water form civil
sources or form nearby natural sources outside ministry of defence land. The contractor shall be
allowed, if he so desires, to install hand pumps, tube wells at site of work at places as approved by
Engineer-in-Charge and nothing shall be charged from the contractor. The contractor shall remove the
hand pumps, tube wells as and when asked to do so by Engineer-in-Charge/GE and in any case on
completion of the work and before issue of completion certificate, unless GE desires that these hand
pumps, tube wells be left in position and the contractor agrees to do so without claiming cost thereof
from department. No compensation whatsoever shall be admissible to the contractor, if he is required to
remove the pump(s) tube wells before completion of work. Use of water from such sources shall only be
permitted if, found after testing, potable and fit for use in the work. The water from such sources shall be
got tested by the contractor from laboratory approved by the GE, who shall after satisfying himself permit
the contractor to use the water from such sources. Testing charges shall be borne by the contractor.
26.4 The water arranged by the contractor from his owns resources and the resources stated in para
26.3 above, it will be ensured by him that the water is free from injurious quantities of acid, alcohol, silt,
oil, injurious salt, organic matters or other impurities all as specified in IS-456 and is clean, potable and
suitable for mixing concrete and mortar for washing aggregate soaking of bricks/bricks tiles and for
curing concrete and plaster.
26.5 In the event of contractor using sub soil water as above, no recovery will be made for the rent of
land/royalty for the sub soil water etc.
26.6 The contractor shall at his own cost provide and fix pipes and install pumping sets(s) etc as
required for drawing the water from tube wells/hand pumps.
26.7 The contractor shall at his own cost provide and fix pipes and install pumping set(s) etc, as
required for drawing the water from tube well. On completion of work & make good tube well bore (s)
and clear the site as directed by Engr-in-Charge
27. ELECTRIC SUPPLY:- MES will not supply electricity. Contractor has to make his own
arrangement of electricity required for entire completion of work.
28. VALIDITY OF TENDER
28.1 Tender shall remain open for acceptance for a period of 60 days from the date on which the
tender is due to be submitted.
29. RECORD OF PROPRIETORY MATERIALS/ARTICLES
29.1 The quantities of materials as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge (the quantity of which cannot
be checked after incorporation in the works), shall be recorded in measurement books and signed by the
contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge as a check to ensure that the required quantity has been brought
to site for incorporation in the work.
29.2 The proprietary articles such as Antitermite Chemical, bitumen, fibre base felt, water proofing
compound, paint, etc. when brought to site, shall be inspected and approved by the GE.
29.3 The proprietary materials shall be stored as directed. Those already recorded in the
Measurement book shall be marked suitably for identification.
29.4 The contractor shall, on demand, produce to the GE, Original receipt vouchers in respect of the
supplies, this is to ensure that the contractor has actually brought the articles of required quality and
quantity from the authorised agent/manufacturer/supplier and also to find out the rates thereof. The
contractor shall ensure that the materials are brought at site in original sealed containers/packing,
bearing manufacturer’s marking except in the case of the requirement of materials being less that
smallest packing.
29.5 Bitumen for road, roof treatment and mastic filling to be used in the work shall be purchased
directly from manufacturer's stockiest or their authorised dealers only.
29.6 All vouchers/invoices shall be defaced by the GE/Engineer-in-charge, indicating reference to the
contract number, under his dated signature, and CTC thereof shall be kept on record so as to avoid their
being used again. Test certificate from the manufacturer shall also be produced by the contractor
alongwith purchase voucher of materials.
29.7 The chemical required for antitermite treatment shall be purchased from
manufacturers/authorised dealers only and contractor shall produce the cash voucher etc. to prove the
genuineness of the same. GE will also ensure that proper quality/quantity of chemicals are brought and
incorporated in the works.
29.8 The contractor shall be required to submit the purchase vouchers in respect of all items for which
payment is claimed in RARs as material laying at site. However the purchase vouchers in respect of
following items shall invariably be submitted by the contractor irrespective of whether claimed in RARs
as material lying at site or not:-
(i) Cement (ii) Major E/M equipments like transformers, all

electrical panels, Voltage stabilizers,
\Solar water heating system.
(iii) Steel (iv) All types of factory made shutters.
(v) Water Proofing compound/ admixture. (vi) All types of factory made steel windows &
ventilators.
(vii) Chemical for antitermite treatment (viii) Aluminium sections for all types of joineries.
(ix) All types of paints. (x) HT/LT cables
(xi) Plywood & particle boards, (xii) APP membrane including primer.
(xiii) CI, DI pipes including fittings and all types of (xiv) Electronic tamper proof energy meter.
valves.
(xv) All types of electrical poles. (xvi) All sanitary fittings including flushing cisterns.
(xvii) All types of MCCB’s, MCB’s, DB’s, Air circulators, ceiling fan, desert cooler, water cooler, light fittings,
exhaust fans, ACs, deep freezer , geyser GOD,DG set, Lift and similar items as required by the GE.
The Vouchers will clearly indicate the contract number and the IS No and specific alternative to which
the material conforms in case of various alternatives given in IS.
30. ACCEPTANCE QUALITY OF WORK AND FINISHES
30.1 To determine the acceptable standard of materials and workmanship/final finishes and layout of
fittings, etc contractor shall execute stages of work viz excavation, foundation concrete walling up to
plinth/lintel/roof levels, roofing, flooring, joinery, built in items, finishes and the like and services i.e.
internal electrification, water .
supply, plumbing, sanitary fittings in one portion of the building ie one room, WC and bath of a block (as
decided by GE) and shall be completed at least three months ahead the progress stipulated completion
time period given in Schedule ‘A’ Notes from the date of commencement of Phase-I of work under the
close supervision of Engineer-in-Charge and shall get it approved by the GE. The above portion of the
block shall be labelled as sample block. The workmanship of various trades and finishes of the sample
block shall serve as guiding samples for work in remaining portion of that block and other buildings.
30.2 Approval of the stages and workmanship of sample quarters shall be separately entered and
approved in stage passing register giving reference to block and quarter number for easy identification
even at a later date.
31. RECORD OF CONSUMPTION OF CEMENT
31.1 For the purpose of keeping record for cement issued and consumed in works one properly bound
register serially numbered and all pages initialed against the numbering by the Engineer-in-charge and
in the form approved by the Engineer-in-charge showing daily receipt, quantity used in the work, balance
in hand, shall be maintained.
31.2 The register shall be kept at site in the safe custody of the contractor's representative during the
progress of the work and shall be produced for verification of the Inspecting Officer on demand.
31.3 The entries in the aforesaid register will be signed daily by the contractor or his authorised
representative and the concerned JE (Civil) and Engineer-in-charge in token of their verification of its
correctness. This check will not however, absolve the contractor of his responsibility to justify the
consumption of cement at the time of finalisation of his accounts.
31.4 On completion of the work, the contractor shall deposit the cement register with the Engineer-in-
charge for record.
32. WATCH/LIGHTING
32.1 The contractor shall at his own cost take all possible precautions to ensure safety of life and
property by providing necessary fencing, barrier, light, watchman etc. during the progress of work and as
directed by Engineer-in-charge.
33. MAKING GOOD
33.1 The contractor shall not leave or form holes in concrete (Plain or RCC), Brick work, stone
masonry and in any other situation as required for the work or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge and
make good all the holes in the same mortar and mix as specified for that portion of work.
34. SITE CLEARANCE
34.1 Refer Condition 49 of IAFW-2249.
34.2 The contractor shall remove from the site all unused stores and huts and the like belonging to the
contractor provided for the execution of work under this contract and the site of works shall be cleared
off all rubbish and waste materials by the contractor and the site works delivered in clean and tidy
manner to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge on or before the date of completion. Nothing extra
whatsoever shall be paid to the contractor for such clearance of site.
34.3 The contractor shall clean all floors, remove cement, lime or paint drops, clean joinery, glass
panes etc, touch up all painter's work and carry out all other necessary items of work in connection there
with and leave the whole premises clean and tidy to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-n-charge before
handing over the items/works. No extra payment shall be admissible to the contractor for this operation.
35. OUT OF POCKET EXPENSES
35.1 Out of pocket expenses incurred by the tenderer in submitting this tender shall not be reimbursed
whether tender is accepted or not.
36. ADJUSTMENT OF TAXES/LEVIES
36.1 Tendered rates are inclusive of all taxes and levies payable under respective statutes. The
contractor shall include this tax in his tender.
37. CONSTRUCTION LABOUR WELFARE CESS/TAX
37.1 Consequent upon promulgation of ordinance by the President of India, the Contractor is liable to
pay element for construction labour welfare cess/Tax. The rates quoted by the contractor shall be
deemed to be inclusive of this CESS/TAX at the rate prevailing on last due date for receipt of tenders.
38.2 BUILDING AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION WORKERS (RECS) ACT 1996 AND BUILDING
AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION WORKERS WELFARE CESS ACT 1996
38.2.1 The contractor has to provide welfare measures to the worker engaged in the construction of
buildings and other projects as per the Act Building and other construction workers (RECS) act 1996 and
building and other construction workers welfare Cess Act 1996. The contractor shall be bound by the
above act rules framed there under:-
38.3 MINIMUM WAGES: PAYMENT TO LABOUR (CONDITION 58 OF IAFW-2249)
38.3.1 Refer Condition 58 of IAFW-2249. The contractor shall not pay wages lower than the latest
minimum wages for labour as fixed by the Govt. of India/State Govt/Union Territory, whichever is higher.
38.3.2 The fair wages referred to in Condition 58 of IAFW-2249 shall be deemed to be the same as the
minimum wages payable as referred to above.
38.3.3 The contractor shall have not claim whatsoever if on account of local factors and/or regulations or
otherwise he is required to pay the wages in excess of minimum wages as described above during the
execution of work except reimbursement/refund of wages of labour as specified in the Contract.
39. ADVANCE ON ACCOUNT
39.1 Refer Condition 64 of IAFW-2249.

40 ------- Blank----.
41. OUTPUT OF ROAD ROLLER
41.1 Refer Condition 15 of IAFW-2249
41.2 Where the contractor procures road roller (s) from sources other than the Department, a log book
for each road roller shall be maintained by him for recording hours of working of the Road Roller. Entries
in the log book shall be signed by the contractor or his authorised representative and by the Engineer-in-
charge.
41.3 To ensure proper consolidation, Road Roller must work for atleast the number of days assessed
on the basis of output (per day for 8 hours work) hereunder :-
(i) Consolidation of formation surfaces/sub grade :1850 Sqm
(ii) Consolidation of stone soling 15 Cm spread thickness : 800 Sqm
(iii) Consolidation of WBM (stone metal) 7.5 cm compacted thickness : 372 Sqm
(iv) Consolidation of 2.5 cm bituminous carpet including seal coat : 600 Sqm
(v) For Consolidation of 2.5 cm/4.0cm thick dense asphaltic concrete, out put of road rollers
shall be assessed by GE as per Engineering practice for proper rolling and compaction of road
surface and fix minimum rolling hours for entire work. Proper record in this regard duly signed by
contractor, Engineer-in-Charge & GE shall be kept on record by GE.
41.4 If the roller has not worked for the number of days so assessed, recovery shall be affected from
the contractor for the number of days falling short of the days assessed on the basis of output stipulated
above. The recovery shall be effected as under :-
(a) Where road roller is hired by the contractor only from sources other than the Department
at Rs 1500/- working day of 8 hours.
41.5 The above provision shall not absolve the contractor of his responsibility for properly
consolidating surfaces as required under the provisions of the contract.
42. SETTING OF SITE LABORATORY AND TESTING OF MATERIALS
42.1 Site laboratory for all contracts of Rs. 1 crore and above shall be set up by the contractor. The
contractor may set up site lab for the works costing less than Rs. 1 crore at his option. The type of tests
and frequency of tests to be carried out in such site lab (A-level tests), in MES (CE/GE) lab (B-level
tests) and in Govt. Approved test house/Engg. Colleges (C-level tests) are attached as given in
Appendix ‘D’.
42.2 TESTING OF MATERIALS :
42.2.1 A LEVEL TESTS FOR WORKS COSTING 100 LAKHS AND ABOVE: -
The contractor shall set up site laboratory for testing of materials (except Sch „B‟ materials) for „A‟ level
tests as listed in Appendix ‘D’ here in after. The contractor shall arrange all equipment/ machines for the
tests specified in Appendix ‘D’ here in after as „A‟ level tests at his own cost with prior approval of GE.
This cost shall be included in the lump-sum costs quoted by the contractor. The contractor shall employ
a competent technical representative as approved by the GE for the purpose of testing and all such tests
shall be carried out in the presence of Engineer-in-charge. The successful tests result thereof shall be
recorded and singed jointly by the contractor and the Engineer-in-charge. Charges for these tests i.e. „A‟
level tests carried out in site laboratory of the contractor shall not be recovered. In case, the contractor
has not set up the site laboratory and the test are carried out in zonal or any other laboratory setup/
approved by GE, the recovery shall be made at rates applicable i.e. as given in Appendix ‘D’ here in
after.
42.2.2 “A’ LEVEL TESTS FOR WORKS COSTING UPTO 100 LAKHS :-
The contractor may set up site laboratory at his option for works costing upto 100 lakhs. The other
stipulations will be same as specified in preceding para 42.2.1. However in case the contractor has not
set up the site laboratory and tests are carried out in zonal or any other laboratory approved/ setup by
the GE, the recovery shall be made at rates applicable i.e as given in Appendix ‘D’ here in after.
42.2.3 “B” & “C‟ LEVEL TESTS : -
42.2.3.1 For tests of ‘B’ and „C‟ level as indicated in Appendix ‘D’ here in after, the contractor shall
provide all facilities for testing of materials at NABL lab/ Govt. approved laboratories or test house/ Engg.
Colleges at his own cost. The lump sum/ rates quoted by the contractor shall be deemed to be inclusive
of these tests. The rates of various tests conducted in laboratory of MES are indicated in Appendix “D‟ to
PS-II here-in-after. The contractor shall bear the actual charges of „C‟ level tests (to be done in labs
other than MES labs) irrespective of rates indicated in Appendix ‘D’ here in after. Wherever it is
convenient to get “B‟ level test done at approved test house/ Engg. College/NABL lab, the same can be
done at the cost of the contractor and no separate recoveries will be made by the Department for the
same.
42.2.3.2 The recoveries on account of testing charges wherever applicable shall be effected from the
running account payments due to the contractor payable after completion of the respective test or
whenever the test is due whichever is earlier.
42.2.3.3 The cost of materials and carriage, etc shall be borne by the contractor. The cost of material,
carriage-testing charges etc. shall be deemed included in the quoted rates and nothing extra shall be
43. SIGNING OF TENDER
43.1 The person signing the tender on behalf of another partner or on behalf of a firm shall attach with
the tender, a proper Power of Attorney duly executed in his favour by such other person or by the
partners, stating that he has authority to bind such other persons or the firm as the case may be in all
matters pertaining to the contract including the Arbitration clause.
44. QUALIFIED TRADESMEN
44.1 In compliance with the Condition 26 of IAFW-2249 (General Conditions of Contracts), the
contractor shall employ skilled/semi skilled tradesmen who are qualified and possessing certificate in
particular trade from Industrial Training Institute (ITI)/National Institute of Construction Management and
Research (NICMAR)/National Academy of Construction (NAC)/Similar reputed and recognized institutes
by State/Central Government, to execute the works of their respective trade. The number of such
qualified tradesmen shall not be less then 25% of total skilled/semi skilled tradesmen required in each
trade. The contractor shall submit the list of such tradesmen alongwith requisite certificates to Garrison
Engineer for verification and approval. Notwithstanding the approval of such tradesmen by GE, if the
tradesmen are found to have inadequate skill to execute the work of their trades, leading to
unsatisfactory workmanship, the contractor shall remove such tradesmen within a week after written
notice to this effect by the GE and shall engage other qualified tradesmen after prior approval of GE.
GE’s decision whether a particular tradesmen possesses requisite qualification, skill and expertise
commensurate with nature of work, shall be final and binding. No compensation, whatsoever, on this
account shall be admissible.
45. CONCILIATION
45.1 SCOPE OF CONCILIATION
45.1.1 The scope of conciliation shall be restricted to the following types of disputes with financial limits
as indicated therein:-
(a) Disputes relating to levy of compensation for delay in completion - actual amount of
compensation.
(b) Disputes relating to technical examination of works.
(c) Disputes relating to interpretation of the provisions of the contract with reference to their
application to parties.
(d) Disputes relating to non return of Sch 'B' stores over-issued to contractor.
(e) Any other dispute having fair chances of being resolved by conciliation and considered fit to be
referred to conciliation by the parities.
For Condition 45.1.1 (b), (c), (d) & (e) each as stated above the financial limit shall be Rupees two lakhs
or one percent of the contract amount whichever is less.
45.2. COMMENCEMENT OF CONCILIATION PROCEEDINGS
45.2.1 The party initiating conciliation shall send to the other party a written invitation to conciliate, briefly
identifying the subject of the dispute.
45.2.2 Conciliation proceedings shall commence when the other party accepts in writing the invitation to
conciliate.
45.2.3 If the other party rejects the invitation, there will be no conciliation proceedings. If the party
initiating conciliation does not receive a reply within 30 days from the date on which he sends or within
such other periods of time as specified in the invitation, he may elect to treat this as a rejection of the
invitation to conciliate and if he so elects, he shall inform in writing the other party accordingly.
45.3 NUMBER OF CONCILIATORS
45.3.1 There shall be a Sole conciliator.
45.4 APPOINTMENT OF CONCILIATOR
45.4.1 All disputes brought out in Para 45.1.1(a) to (c) above shall be referred to the Sole conciliator viz
Serving Officer not below the rank of Superintending Engineer/Superintending Engineer (QS&C) having
degree in Engineering or equivalent or having passed final/direct examination of Sub Division-II of
Institution of Surveyors (India) to be appointed by the Engineer-in-Chief, Army HQ, New Delhi or in his
absence the officer officiating as Engineer-in-Chief or Director General of Works specifically delegated
by the Engineer-in-Chief, in writing.
45.5 STATUS OF EFFECT OF SETTLEMENT AGREEMENT
45.5.1 The settlement agreement signed by the parties as a result of conciliation proceedings shall have
the same status and effect as it is an arbitral award on agreed terms.

46. PRICING OF DEVIATIONS
46.1 The principle enumerated in Condition 62 of IAFW-2249 shall apply to various sections of
Schedule 'A' of this contract. The contractor's percentage applicable for pricing deviation as per
Condition 62 of IAFW-2249 shall be the contractor's percentage for the respective sections of Schedule
'A'.
47. MINIMUM WAGES PAYABLE
47.1 Refer Condition 58 of IAFW-2249 have fixed minimum rates of wages as upto dated from time to
time for various categories of employees under the Minimum Wages Act, 1948.The contractor shall not
pay wages lower than minimum wages including allowances as fixed under said notification as updated
till the date of receipt of tender. Where in any area the minimum rates of wages are also fixed by State
Government for employees in employment in the construction/maintenance of buildings/roads/ runways,
the labour wages as fixed vide above said updated Notification of Ministry of Labour or respective state
Government whichever is higher in respect of these areas shall be deemed minimum rates of wages
payable under this contract and the contractor shall not pay lower than this minimum rates of wages.
47.2 Contractor's attention is also drawn, amongst other things to the 'explanations' to the schedule of
minimum wages referred to above.
47.3 The fair wages referred to in Condition 58 of IAFW-2249 will be deemed to be the same as the
minimum wages, referred to above as upto dated from time to time.
47.4 The contractor shall have no claim, whatsoever, if on account of local factor and/or regulations or
otherwise, he is required to pay the wages in excess of minimum wages as described above during the
execution of work except reimbursement/refund of wages of labour as specified in contract.
48. INTERIM PAYMENT (RAR) /ADVANCES OF ACCOUNT :
48.1 Interim payment (RAR)/advances on account in respect of buildings listed in Schedule ‘A’ Part-I
shall be made as per yard stick. Balance buildings for which yard stick is not attached the same shall be
approved from Accepting officer and payment shall be made accordingly.
48.2 In case of any dispute over yardstick, decision of Accepting officer will be final and binding on
both the parties. GE should satisfy himself before making payment as per Yard stick that contractor is
not overpaid due to any error/discrepancy in yardstick.
49. TRAINING OF MES PERSONNEL
49.1 Department personnel as detailed by the GE shall be given training for operation and
maintenance of E/M equipments/installation to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge for a period
of 15 working days. Cost of imparting training shall be deemed to be included in the rate/lump sum
quoted by the contractor.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS (CONTD…..)
49(A) REIMBURSEMENT/ REFUND ON VARIATION IN PRICES

49(A).1 Refer Condition 63 of the General Conditions of Contracts (IAFW-2249)/Re-imbursement/
Refund on variation of Prices. The Condition 63 of General Conditions of Contract shall be deemed to be
modified to the extent mentioned hereinafter, Increase or decrease in prices of Cement, Steel and other
materials shall be adjusted on the basis stipulated hereinafter irrespective of the actual variation in prices
(to the contractor):
(a) CEMENT: The cement cost component for the contract as a whole shall be taken as Kc % of the
value of works executed under the contract. Accordingly value/cost of cement consumed in the work as
well as that lying at site for which reimbursement/ refund is applicable shall be:
VMC = (Kç x Vg) + Vc
100
Variation in prices of cement shall be worked out by applying the following formula:-
EMc = (VMc2 – VMc1) x (C1-C0)

C0
EMc = Variation in prices of cement to be adjusted.
Kç = Constant representing the percentage cost of Cement as compared to the total value of work under
the contract as a whole. The value of Kc for this work shall be 10 (Ten) only.
Vg = Amount of work done priced at contract rates up to for the last date of the period of reckoning
excluding amount payable to the contractor towards items on star rate and PC sum.
Vc = Cost of all cement lying at site for incorporation in the work excluding cement issued under
Schedule 'B' and excluding cement brought and paid or payable to contractor under Price Cost Sum
and/or Star Rate (s).
C1 = Wholesale Price Index for Cement (Base Year 2011-2012) published by Economic Adviser to the
Government of India as on the date of commencement of the period of reckoning. In case the original
contract period is extended: under condition 11 of General Conditions of Contracts(IAFW-2249), the
Price Index as applicable on the date of commencement of the last period of reckoning before the
original completion date (s) (phase wise except where phasing has been done only for sample
quarter/block)shall only be applicable during the extended period. If phasing has been done for only
sample quarter/sample block, the price index as applicable on the date of commencement of the last
reckoning period before the original completion date of the project as a whole shall only be applicable
during the extended period.
C0 As per C1, but the index as on the last due date of Bid Submission. In case of tenders for specialist
works made in two parts viz "T" and "Q", Co shall be as on date of opening of "Q" Bid.
Note- The type of cement wholesale Price index shall be considered for Co & C1, shall be specified in
the tender based on type of cement to be used in the work and after verifying the type of cement for
which Whole sale Price Index is published by Economic Adviser to the Government of India.
VMc2 = Amount of cement up to the last date of the period of reckoning for which variation is adjustable
as worked out as per formula for VMC.
VMc1 = As per VMC2 but as on date of immediate preceding period of reckoning.
(b) STEEL : The Steel cost component for the contract as a whole shall be taken as Ks% of the value of
works executed under the contract. Accordingly value/cost of steel consumed in the work as well as that
lying at site for which reimbursement/refund is applicable shall be
VMs = (Ks x Vg) + Vs
100
CA No : CECG/GOA/ OF 2021-22 Serial Page No. 271
Variation in prices of steel shall be worked out by applying the following formula:-
EMs = (VMs2 - VMS1) x (S1-S0)
S0
EMs = Variation in prices of steel to be adjusted.
Ks = Constant representing the percentage cost of Steel as compared to the total value of work under
the contract as a whole. The value of Ks for this work shall be 20(Twenty) only.
Vs = Cost of all steel lying at site for incorporation in the work excluding steel issued under Schedule 'B'
and excluding steel brought and paid or payable to contractor under Prime Cost Sum and/or Star
Rate(s).
S1 = Wholesale Price Index for Mild Steel (Long Products) (Base Year: 2011-2012) published by
Economic Advisor to the Government of India as on the date of commencement of it he period of
reckoning. In case the original contract period is extended under Condition 11 of General Conditions of
Contracts (IAFW-2249), the Price Index as applicable on the date of commencement of the last period of
reckoning before the original completion date(s)(phase wise except where phasing has been done only
for sample quarter/block) shall only be applicable during the extended period. If phasing has been done
for only sample quarter/ sample block the price index as applicable on the date of commencement of the
last reckoning period before the original completion date of the period as a whole shall only be
applicable during the extended period.
S0 = As per S1: but the Index as on the last due date of Bid Submission. In case of tenders for specialist
works made in two parts viz "T" and "Q", So shall be as on date of opening of "Q" Bid.
VMs2 = Amount of steel up to the last date of the period of reckoning for which variation is adjustable as
worked out as per formula for VMs.
VMS1 = As per VMs2 but as on date of immediate preceding period of reckoning.
(c) OTHER MATERIALS (EXCEPT CEMENT & STEEL) : The material cost component except cement
& steel for the contract as a whole shall be taken as KOM% of the value of works executed under the
contract. Accordingly value/cost of other materials consumed in the work as well as that lying at site for
which reimbursement/refund is applicable shall be:
VM = (KOM x Vg) + (VOM - VB)

100
Variation in prices of materials (except cement & steel) shall be worked out by applying the following
formula :-
EM = (VM2- VM1) x (W1-Wo)

Wo
EM = Variation in prices of material to be adjusted except cement & steel.
KOM = Constant representing the percentage cost of other material except cement & steel as compared
to the total value of work under the contract as a whole. The value of KOM for this work shall be
30(Thirty) only.
Vg = Gross value of work done at contract rates upto the last date of period of reckoning excluding
amount payable to the contractor towards items on Star Rate and PC sum.
VOM = Value of all materials (except cement & steel) lying at site for incorporation in the work including
materials (except cement & steel) issued under schedule 'B' and including materials (except cement &
steel) brought and paid or payable to contractor under Prime Cost Sum and/or Star Rate (s).
VB = Value of all materials (out of Vg and VOM) (except cement & steel) issued under schedule 'B' plus
value of all materials (except cement & steel) brought and paid or payable to contractor under Prime
Cost Sum and/or Star Rate (s).
W1 = Wholesale Price Index for All Commodities (Base Year 2011-2012) published by Economic
Advisor to the Government of India, as on the date of commencement of the period of reckoning. In case
the original contract period is extended under Condition 11 of General Conditions of Contracts (IAFW-
2249), the price index as applicable on the date of commencement of the last period of reckoning before
the original completion date (s)(phase wise except where phasing has been done only for sample
quarter/block) shall only be applicable during the extended period. If phasing has been done for only
sample quarter/sample block, the price index as applicable on the date of commencement of the last
reckoning period before the original completion date of the period as a whole shall only be applicable
during the extended period.
Wo = As for W1 but the index as on the last due date of bid submission.
VM2 = Value of material (except cement & steel) upto the last date of the period of reckoning for which
price variation is adjustable as worked out as per formula for VM.
VM1 = -do- but as on date of immediate preceding period of reckoning.
Note:-
1. No adjustment, whatsoever, due to variation in prices of materials on account of coming into
force of any fresh law or statutory rule or order as provided in Condition 63 of IAFW-2249 or otherwise
than provided in this condition shall be made.
2. No adjustment in prices shall be made for any work done with materials brought at site after the
original date of completion of the work as mentioned in work order No 01 under contract except as
contemplated under definition of C1, S1 and W1 hereinbefore.
3. Periodicity of working out the escalation on account of variation in prices will be three months.
The last calculation shall however be done for the value of work at contract rates and materials lying at
site for incorporation in the work as on date of completion or extension there of as mentioned in Note 2
above. Valuation of RARS is to be timed in such a manner that relevant date required for quarterly
calculation under this condition is available from RARS. In case on these dates no RAR is preferred by
the contractor, dummy RAR would be prepared & shall be kept on record duly technically checked and
audited. Amount payable relevant to work done and materials collected in quarter will be worked out
after firm whole sale price indices for the relevant quarter are available. Once the amount adjustable for
any quarter is worked out, the same shall be adjusted as and along with advance on account payment in
the subsequent RAR (s).
4. Any dispute arising out of interpretation or application of this Special Condition shall be referred
to the Accepting Officer whose decision shall be final and binding.
5. For the purpose of calculation of retention money liquidated damages, GST on works contracts,
deduction of income tax at source and recovery of water charges (in case of un metered supply) the
value of contracts are revised by the above price variation will be taken into account.
6. In cases, where value of VM2 - VM1 works out to minus on account of higher utilization of
schedule B' stores (i.e value of Sch B stores under contract as a whole is higher than KoM value) and
the reimbursement on account of variation in prices of materials (except Cement & Steel) works out to
be negative in spite of the Whole sale Price Index for All Commodities published by Economic Adviser to
Government of India going up from Wo, reimbursement on account of variation in prices of materials
shall be treated as "Nil".
7. The value/ percentage of Kc, Ks & KOM i.e cement, steel and other materials component,
depends on type of construction. However, the summation of Kc, Ks & KOM shall not exceed 60%.
49(B) Reimbursement/ Refund on Variation in prices - wages of Labour:
Refer Condition 63 of the General Conditions of Contracts (IAFW-2249)/Re-imbursement/ Refund on
variation of Prices. The Condition 63 of General Conditions of Contract shall be deemed to be modified
to the extent mentioned here-in-after, Increase or decrease in prices of labour shall be adjusted on the
basis stipulated hereinafter irrespective of the actual variation in prices (wages of labour to the
contractor):
The labour component for the work under the contract as a whole shall be taken as KL of the value of
work executed under the contract. Variation in labour wages shall be worked out by applying the
following formula: -
EL = KL x Vg l X L1–L0
100 L0
Where :-
EL= Variation in wages of labour reimbursement to be made to the contractor or refund to be
made by the contractor.
KL = Constant representing the percentage cost of labour element as compared to the total
value of work under the contract as a whole. The value of KL for the work shall be 20
(Twenty).
Vgl = Gross value of work done at contract rates during the period of reckoning less value of
work paid or payable to the contractor based on actual cost (e.g. star rate(s), work
executed under prime cost sum, etc) during the period of reckoning.
L1 = Minimum wages in rupees of an unskilled adult male mazdoor as fixed under any law,
statutory rule or order as on the date of commencement of the period of reckoning.
L0 = As for L1 but the minimum wages in rupees of an unskilled adult male mazdoor as on the
Bid submission end date. If labour wage on the bid submission end date are increased
afterward with retrospective effect the value of L0 shall be fixed keeping in view the
following aspects:-
(a) If the increase/decrease in wages of labour are made known to the public by any
means of media before Bid submission end date but the same is officially notified
thereafter giving retrospective effect, the value of “L0” shall be as per notification though
made subsequently.
(b) If a net-wage comprises a fixed basic wage and the living allowance revised from
time to time based on consumer price index (CPI) and increased CPI is made known to
the public by means before the Bid submission end date, the “L0” will be revised wages
corresponding to revised CPI, though the formal notification for the net wage (considering
the revised living allowance corresponding to revised CPI) is made subsequent to Bid
submission end date.
(c) In case the labour enforcement officer makes the announcement before Bid
submission end date but gazette notification is made subsequently making wages
applicable with retrospective effect, the value of “L0” shall be as per Gazette Notification
though subsequently made.
(d) If the increase/decrease in wages of labour is notified/announced subsequent to Bid
submission end date with retrospective effect without making the same publicly known by
means of publicity/ media prior to the Bid submission end date, then, the value of “L0”
shall be as per wage known at the Bid submission end date.

NOTES: -
1. The contractor shall within reasonable time of his becoming aware of any alteration to the
payment of wages of labour consequent on fixation of minimum wages under any law, statutory rule
or order, give written notice thereof, to the GE stating that the same is given pursuant to this Special
Condition together with all information relating thereto which he may be in a position to supply.
2. Irrespective of the variation in minimum wages for any category of labour, for the purpose of
adjustment under this Special Condition the variation in minimum wages fixed under any law,
statutory rule or order for an unskilled adult male mazdoor, if any, shall only form the basis.
3. Periodicity of working out the variation in wages of labour will be three months commencing
from the last Bid submission end date. The last adjustment for variation in wages of labour shall
however, be done for the period upto the date of completion or extended date of completion.
Valuation of price adjustment due to increase/decrease in minimum wages under any law, statutory
rule or order for the purpose of making reimbursement/refund in RARs, will be timed in such a manner
that relevant data required for quarterly calculation under this special condition is available from the
RARs. The first price adjustment in respect of variation in wages of labour will be worked out for the
relevant quarter during which alteration to the wages of labour took place. For implementing this
provision, the period of reckoning in such quarter will have to be divided into two periods i.e., the first
period up to the RAR payable immediately after the date of variation and the other up to the end of the
quarter. Value of L1 at the beginning of the other period shall be the altered wage. If there are more
than one change in wages in a quarter there will be more than two periods of reckoning on similar
basis. Amount payable relevant to work done for any quarter will be worked out after the minimum
wage of an unskilled adult male mazdoor as fixed under any law, statutory rule or order for the
relevant quarter is available. Once the amount adjustable for any quarter is worked out, the same
shall be adjusted in subsequent RAR as "advance on account" adjustment, alongwith adjustment for
"Materials" and "Fuel".
4. No adjustment in prices shall be made for any work done after the due date of completion or
extension of time granted under condition 11 of IAFW-2249 (whichever is later) for the work under the
contract.
5. No adjustment in prices, whatsoever, due to variation in wages of labour on account of coming

into force of any fresh law or statutory rule or order as provided in Condition 63 of IAFW-2249 or
otherwise, than provided in this Special Condition shall be made.
6. Any dispute arising out of interpretation or application of this Special Condition shall be referred
to the Accepting Officer whose decision shall be final and binding.
7. For purposes of calculation of retention money, liquidated damages, GST on works contracts,
deduction of income tax at source and recovery of water charges (in case of unmetered supply) the
value of contract as revised by the above price variation will be taken into account.
50.0 RE-IMBURSEMENT/REFUND ON VARIATION IN “TAXES DIRECTLY RELATED TO

CONTRACT VALUE”
(a) The rates quoted by the Contractor shall be deemed to be inclusive of all taxes (including
GST on materials, GST on Works Contracts, Service Tax, Turnover Tax, Labour Welfare Cess @ 1%,
etc.), duties, Royalties, Octroi & other levies payable under the respective statutes. No
reimbursement/refund for variation in rates of taxes, duties, Royalties, Octroi & other levies, and/or
imposition/abolition of any new/existing taxes, duties, Royalties, Octroi & other levies shall be made
except as provided in sub para (b) here-in-below.
(b)(i) The taxes which are levied by Govt at certain percentage rates of Contract Sum/Amountshall be
termed as “taxes directly related to Contract value” such as GST on Works Contracts, Service Tax,
Turnover Tax, Labour Welfare Cess @ 1%/tax and like but excluding Income Tax. The tendered rates
shall be deemed to be inclusive of all “taxes directly related to Contract value” with existing percentage
rates as prevailing on last due date for receipt of tenders. Any increase in percentage rates of “taxes
directly related to Contract value” with reference to prevailing rates on last due date for receipt of
tenders shall be reimbursed to the Contractor and any decrease in percentage rates of “taxes directly
related to Contract value” with reference to prevailing rates on last due date for receipt of tenders shall
be refunded by the Contractor to the Govt/deducted by the Govt from any payments due to the
Contractor.
(ii) Similarly imposition of any new “taxes directly related to Contract value” after the last due date for
receipt of tenders shall be reimbursed to the Contractor and abolition of any “taxes directly related to
Contract value” prevailing on last due date for receipt of tenders shall be refunded by the Contractor to
the Govt/deducted by the Govt from the payments due to the Contractor.
(iii) The Contractor shall, within a reasonable time of his becoming aware of variation in
percentage rates and/or imposition of any further “taxes directly related to Contract value”, give written
notice thereof to the GE stating that the same is given pursuant to this Special Condition, together with
all information relating there to which he may be in a position to supply. The Contractor shall submit the
other documentary proof/information’s as the GE may require.
(iv) The Contractor shall, for the purpose of this condition keep such books of account and other
documents as are necessary and shall allow inspection of the same by a duly authorized
representative of Govt, and shall further, at the request of the GE furnish, verified in such a manner as
the GE may require, any documents so kept and such other information as the GE may require.
(v) Reimbursement for increase in percentage rates/imposition of “taxes directly related to Contract
value” shall be made only if the Contractor necessarily & properly pays additional “taxes directly related
to Contract value” to the Govt, without getting the same adjusted against any other tax liability or
without getting the same refunded from the concerned Govt Authority and submits documentary proof
for the same as the GE may require”.
51. DISPUTE RESOLUTION BOARD (DRB) (CONDITION 71 OF IAFW 2249 GENERAL

CONDITION OF CONTRACTS REFERS)
(i). During execution of the works or after completion or after determination/ cancellation/ termination
of the contract all disputes between the parties to contract arising out of the contract (except those for
which decision of Accepting Officer or any other officer (GE) is expressed to be final and binding),
including any disagreement by either party with any action, inaction, opinion, instruction, certificate or
valuation by the Accepting Officer or his nominee, the matter in dispute shall, in the first place be
referred to the dispute resolution board (DRB). In case of disagreement with the decision of such DRB,
any party may invoke arbitration clause.
(ii). The Constitution of the DRB shall be a three members body as under:-
(i) Chairman : Joint DG (Contracts) of the concerned Command Chief

Engineer. Where Jt DG (C) is not posted in the Command, any
other Chief Engineer /Brig level offr posted in CE Comd
shall be nominated by Comd CE at his sole discretion.
(ii) Member 1
Col /Director rank officers of Comd CE or of any other
(iii) Member 2 Zonal CE be nominated by Comd CE
(iii). The name of chairman and members shall be notified by the Accepting Officer within one month
of the date of acceptance of contract
(iv). Once the DRB is constituted, the members and chairman shall disclose in writing their neutrality
and impartiality about any personal interest in the work.
(v). The dispute shall be referred to the chairman of the DRB by the concerned party after giving
notice to the other party for invoking of this clause.
(vi). The DRB shall decide the dispute in accordance with the terms of the contract, principal of
natural justice, equity and fair play.
(vii). The DRB may fix oral hearing at a place, date and time as decided by the chairman.
(viii). The requisite administrative support to the DRB shall be provided by the Accepting Officer.
(ix). All the contract documents pertaining to the case shall be provided by the Accepting Officer for
reference by the DRB.
(x). DRB shall give its decision on the disputes within three months of notice from any party invoking
the DRB clause. This period can be extended by one month with the consent of the parties.
(xi). All the decisions given by the DRB shall be by majority and such decisions shall be
communicated in writing by chairman to the parties.
(xii). If the decision of the DRB is not to the satisfaction of either party or if the DRB fails to give
decision within the laid down time, either party shall indicate his reservations on the decision to
Accepting Officer within 30 days of such decision and to refer that dispute for arbitration within the
provision of condition 70 of IAFW 2249 General Condition of contract.
(xiii). It shall be mandatory for the party invoking arbitration on any particular dispute to have first
exhausted the remedy provided under the DRB clause for that particular dispute.
(xiv). The mandate of the DRB shall terminate on completion of one year from the date of
completion/determination/cancellation/ termination of the contract.
(xv). If any member or chairman of the DRB is unable to function due to any reason whatsoever, or he
resigns his appointment, Chief Engineer command as the case may be, shall fill the vacancy so caused
within 15 days of happening of such vacancy.
(xvi). Any dispute referred to the DRB and having been decided by the DRB and not objected to by
either party within 30 days shall attain finality and shall not be referable to arbitration.
(xvii). Accepting officer shall ensure implementation of the decisions of the DRB which attain finality,
i.e. except those which are objected by him or by contractor within 30 days as per para (xii) above.
(xviii). Findings and decision of DRB shall be admissible as evidence, to the extent permissible as per
law, in the subsequent Arbitration and /or litigation.
(xix). DRB Chairman/members shall not, in any case, be liable to be called as witness or to produce
any evidence in any Arbitration or departmental proceedings of any kind.
(xx). During execution of work the disputes may be referred to the DRB as per the requirement of
each party after having exhausted the decision making process provided in the contracts. In case of
completion of work or after determination/ cancellation/ termination of the contract all the disputes
including payment/non-payment/delay in final bill shall be simultaneously referred to the DRB within six
months of completion/ determination/ cancellation of the contract.
(xxi). The department case before the DRB shall be presented by Accepting Officer himself and/or Dir
(Contract) of CE Zone assisted by GE and his AGE (Contract) and any other officer and legal counsel
nominated by Accepting Officer. The contract or may present his case by himself and/ or by his
nominated reps & authorized legal/technical counsel.
52. T & P, MACHNERY & TRANSPORT :
The contractor shall install all the T&P as per Pre qualification criteria mentioned in clause No 1 g (ii)
on Sl Page No 11 . The contractor shall also install minimum laboratory equipments as per Sl. Page
No 173 to 175 here-in-after. Any additional laboratory equipments based on site requirement shall be
provided by the contractor as per direction of Engineer in charge. The rates for the concerned items
shall be deemed to be included in the quoted rates.

Date: For Accepting Office
53.0 (LIST OF MINIMUM PLANTS AND MACHINERY TO BE PROVIDED FOR RIGID PAVEMENT)
Srl Description Qty Vintage

No. in years
1 2 3 4
1 Computerized ready mix concrete plant with printing facility (*) 1(1x20 5
cum)
2 Fixed form paver 1 5
3 Texturing machine 1 8
4 Hand held heavy duty needle vibrators (electrically operated / diesel 4 8
driven ) for PQC
5 Machine for joint filling 2 8
6 Diamond cutter for joints (Diesel / electric driven )(two full depth 2 8
concrete cutting machine)
7 WMM plant of 20TPH capacity (*) 1 8
8 Sand washing plant along with vibratory type sand screeners 1 8
9 Mechanized runway marking and painting equipment 1 8
10 Vehicle mounted high mast lights with built in gen set 1 8
11 Air compressor 350cfm 1 8

12 Core cutting machine 150mm dia/100mm dia bit. 1 8
13 Weigh bridge capacity 100T 1 8
14 Total station survey equipment 1 8
15 Excavator 1 8
16 Transit mixer 1 8
17 Tipper 1 8
NOTES:
1) Above mentioned list is only the minimum requirement. Any T&P at site laying idle due to any reason
whatsoever shall not form the basis of claim at a later date. The contractor shall plan the need of above
T&P in bringing at site with due diligence.
2) Following to be ensured :
(i) The plant has fitness certificate from the Authorized Service Centre of Original Manufacturer/ OEM
(ii) The Plant has been calibrated by the OEM/ Authorized Service centre as per recommended
periodicity.
(iii) The Original manufacturer’s AMC is current and valid.
(iv) The Operator of plant to be certified by the OEM
3) Plant and equipment applicable to type of construction (Rigid) shall be deployed
4) Cost / value of rigid pavements as mentioned above are exclusive to type of pavements work.
(*) If due to practical issues at site viz non availability of space at site for installation of plant/
equipment, then with recommendations of GE, Accepting officer may waive off requirement of
these machinery. Under such situation no penalty will be levied.
54.0 LIST OF LABORATORY EQUIPMENT AT SITE LAB FOR RIGID PAVEMENT SHALL BE AS
UNDER :-
Srl Description Qty

No.
1 2 3
1 Liquid limit measuring device 1
2 Equipment for measuring field densities
(a) Core cutter method 2

(b) Sand replacement method 2
3 Proctor needle (spring type) 2
4 Proctor compaction apparatus 1
5 Rammer 4.9 Kg + 50 gm for heavy compaction 1
6 Rapid moisture meter 2

7 Pycnometer flask 2
8 Humidity chamber 1
9 Aggregate impact value test apparatus 1
10 Aggregate crushing value test apparatus 1
11 Los angles abrasion testing machine 1
12 Flakiness and Elongation test apparatus 1 each
13 Sand bath apparatus 1
14 Anderson pipette 1
15 Apparatus for organic impunities in aggregate 1
16 Apparatus for silt content test in sand 1

17 Vicat needle apparatus 1
18 Tensile briquettes testing machine 1
19 Briquette moulds 2
20 Le Chatelier moulds 3
21 Desiccator 1
22 Bulk density apparatus including buoyancy balance 1
23 Water testing kit including chemicals for testing 1
24 Measurement cylinder 25 ml, 50 ml and 100ml 3 each
25 Electric oven of suitable capacity 2
26 Cylinder core cutting Machine (Dia - 150 mm and 1 each
100 mm)
27 Wind velocity measuring equipment 1
28 Stop watch handheld digital 2
29 Variable frequency table vibrator 2
30 Weigh Balance( all digital)
(a) 300 kg 1
(b) 40 kg 1
(c)10 kg 2
(d) 05 kg 2
(e) 500 gm 1
31 Hand gloves rubber 6
32 Wash bottles 500 ml 6
33 Specific gravity bottles 2
(a) 50 ml 2
(b) 100 ml
1 2 3
34 Volumetric flask of suitable capacity 2
35 Bowis enameled
(a)1 litre 8
(b)5 litre 4
36 Enameled trays 12"x 15" 12
37 Aluminium trays of required size 8
38 Crucible of porcelain 6
39 Hammers 14 Ibs and 8 lbs 2 each
40 Tape measuring
(a)100 m 1
(b)15 m 2
(c)5 m 5
41 Steel scales (1 ‘ long) 4
42 Set of steel/ iron wire brushes 2
43 Set of IS Sieve with lid and Pan ( Complying with IS 02 set
460 standard)
450 mm dia - 90 mm, 75 mm, 63 mm, 50 mm, 53
mm, 45 nm, 40 mm, 37 5 mm, 31.5 mm, 26.5 mm,
25 mm, 22.4 mm, 20 mm, 19 mm, 16.0 mm, 13.2
mm, 12.5 mm, 11.2 mm, 10 mm, 9.5 mm, 6.7 mm,
4.75 mm
44 (a)200 mm dia-4.75 mm, 2.36 mm, 2.0 mm, 1.70 02 set
mm, 1. 18 mm,
(b)600 micron, 300 micron, 180 micron, 150 micron
and 75 micron
45 Automated small sieve shaker ( for Pan of dia 200 1
mm)
46 Automated heavy duty sieve shaker ( For Pan of dia 1
of 450 mm)
47 Stove Oil 2
48 Trimming blade 6" 3
49 Spatula 4” 5
50 Sample extractor 1
51 Vernier callipers 2
52 Adjustable spanner set 1 set
53 Set of spanners 1 set
54 Set of screw drivers 1 set
55 Pliers 2
56 Measurement cans ( different sizes) 8
57 Tongs 2
58 Chemicals
As required
59 Straight edge 3 m long 6
60 Air permeability test Apparatus 1
61 Gauging Trowel 1
62 Digital Thermometer
Mercury in glass (range upto 250°C) 4
Mercury in steel with 30 cm stem (range upto 300°C) 8
Relative humidity measuring equipment 2
Rain gauge 2
63 Slump test apparatus 1
64 Compaction Factor apparatus 1
65 Digital Compression testing machine 1
1 2 3
66 Digital/Rebound Hammer 1
67 Cube moulds 15 cm x 15 cm x 15 cm 36
68 Water tank for curing ( with electric heating and 1
thermostat facility)
69 Dynamic cone penetro meter 1
70 Weigh Balance (all digital) 300gm 1
Additional Equipment for Rigid Pavement
71 Flexural strength testing machine 1
72 Plate load test apparatus 1
73 Beam moulds 15cmx15cmx70cm 36
NOTE:
(i) Above mentioned laboratory equipments are minimum requirements depends upon type of pavement
work. Any additional laboratory equipments based on site requirement shall be provided by the
contractor as per direction of Engineer in charge. The rates for the concerned items shall be deemed to
be included in the quoted rates.
(ii) In case of space is not available/ provided at work site by GE, in such cases contractor has to
arrange the same on his own at nearby location in civil area without any additional cost to the
department.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Works under this contract shall be carried out as detailed in different parts of Schedule À’ and in
accordance with Particular Specifications, Drawings including notes thereon, Special Conditions,
provisions given in General Summary and General rules and Specifications/Provisions given in
MES SSR Part I-2009 as well as General rules, Special conditions and preambles to various
rates given in MES SSR Part II- 2020. (MES SSR Part I-2009 and Part II-2020 hereinafter called
as MES Schedule).
1.2 The term `General Specifications’ referred to in these documents as well as referred to in IAFW-
2249(General Conditions of Contracts) shall mean the specifications contained in the MES
Schedule Part I.
1.3 General Rules, Specifications, Special conditions, method of measurements and all preambles in
the MES Schedule shall be deemed to be applicable to the work under this contract, unless
specifically stated otherwise in these documents. In case of variance between provisions in these
documents and those given in MES Schedule, the provisions in these documents shall take
precedence over the aforesaid provisions in the MES Schedule.
1.4 The term “as specified” wherever appears in tender documents and drawings, relates to relevant
particular specifications and in its absence General specifications.
1.5 Particular specifications in this section given hereinafter shall be generally applicable to all works
covered under all parts of Schedule ‘A’s. The particular specifications are in brief and are only to
particularize, amend and emphasize the specifications given in MES Schedule, which are not
repeated.
1.6 Where specifications for any item of work are not given in these particular specifications or in
MES Schedule, specifications as given in relevant Indian Standard or Code of Practice shall be
followed.
1.7 Reference to any drawings which is mentioned on the drawings forming part of the tender or
mentioned in these particular specifications but not specifically mentioned in the list of drawings
shall be deemed to be forming part of the tender. The tenderer shall refer such drawings/ details
in the office of Accepting Officer /concerned CWE/ GE before quoting his tender.
1.8 The tenderer shall not take cognizance of note (s) appearing on drawing regarding the bearing
capacity of the soil taken into consideration while designing the foundation, as it is for
departmental purpose only.
2. SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work consist of PROVISION OF HANGER WITH APRON LINK TAXI TRACK AND
EARTH FILLING AT JUHU MUMBAI including all connecting items as given in Schedule À' Part
I and BOQ Item No 18.00 to 21.00 all as described & specified in drawings and these particular
specifications.The scope also includes internal/ external and other services as enumerated in
Schedule À' Part II to XVII complete all as shown on drawings and as specified in the particular
specification Hereinafter.
3 DIMENSION
In laying out building the centre line dimensions mentioned in the drawings or deduced there
from shall be strictly followed
4 MATERIALS
4.1 All materials to be supplied by the contractor for incorporation in work shall confirm to relevant
specifications / IS.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS (Contd…)
4.2 In case specifications of materials needed for incorporation is not contained anywhere in
thecontract documents, the specifications of such materials proposed to be incorporated in
workshall be got approved in writing from the GE before incorporation in the work. Contractor is
advised to check availability, lead, time of procurement from these suppliers before quoting.
4.3 As far as practicable all manufactured articles other than those manufactured in
contractor’sworkshop at site shall bear ISI certification mark and which are readily available in
the market and are given in Special Conditions. It is mandatory for the contractor that ISI
certified marked items/articles as listed therein shall only be incorporated in the
work.Names of manufactures/suppliers of certain items/materials are given in Appendix ‘B’ to
Particular Specifications. The Contractor is advised to check availability / lead time of
procurement fro these suppliers before quoting
4.4 Local materials such as stone aggregate, sand, lime etc shall generally conform to the sample
kept in GE’s office in addition to their conformity with relevant specifications given in the tender
documents. The samples of such materials shall be got approved from GE in writing before the
materials are brought at site in bulk. The contractor shall submit samples of materials to GE
through Engineer-in-Charge for approval.
4.5 Letters conveying approval of samples/materials by GE will interalia mention source of

supply/name of manufacturer, trade name/brand (if applicable) and reference to clause of the
tender documents containing specification of particular materials.
4.6 The contractor and executives will ensure that the materials incorporated in the work are
identical with the approved samples.
5 TESTING OF MATERIALS
5.1 All the materials to be incorporated in the work shall be subject to quality control tests as per the
testing procedure and frequency as laid down in relevant IS and or as specified in the tender’.
5.2 Irrespective of whatever is indicated elsewhere in the tender documents the modalities of
testing arrangements shall be as given here in after,
5.3 The contractor shall set-up a site laboratory fully equipped to the satisfaction of GE to carryout
the À’ type tests as given in Appendix ‘D’ to these specifications. The laboratory shall be set up
in all respects before any activity requiring tests as indicated above is physically commenced.
Contractor shall employ a competent person technically qualified as approved by the GE to
carryout the testing activities. All the tests shall be carried out in the presence of Engineer –in-
Charge and records shall be jointly signed with the contractor.
5.4 Entire cost of laboratory and its functioning including cost of samples will be borne by the
contractor in all respects and no separate recovery for testing charges shall be effected for
tests/retest carried out at site laboratory. If in the opinion of GE (Whose decision in this regard
shall be final and binding)
5.5 Any of the tests as given in Appendix (D) to these specifications cannot be satisfactorily carried
out in the site laboratory at any stage due to any reason, the same shall be got done in Zonal
lab / Govt approved lab/Engineering college as approved by GE in respect of which all
expenditure there of shall be borne by the contractor.
5.6 Any tests marked as type À’,`B’ or `C’ in Appendix `D’, if got done at Zonal lab / SEMT wing
Pune, testing charges as indicated against them will be recovered from the contractor. In
addition to this the contractor shall arrange for samples and its handing/transportation to the
concerned labs at his own cost.
5.7 The tests marked as type `B’ and `C’ will not be carried out in the site laboratory. These tests
shall be carried out only in zonal lab / SEMT wing / Govt. approved lab/National test House /
Engineering College as approved by the GE. Incase type `B’ and `C’ testing is done in zonal lab
/ SEMT wing the testing charges recoveries shall be as indicated in the Appendix ‘D’ to these
PS against each test. However if testing is done in other places as given above the actual cost
will be directly borne by the contractor.
5.8 The list of tests given in Appendix ‘D’ to these PS contains only a few common tests. However
all other tests required in the work but not covered in the appendix shall also be got done in
Govt. approved lab/Engineering College/National Test House as approved by GE and entire
cost of sample, handling, transportation and actual testing charges will be borne by the
contractor directly.
6 EXCAVATION AND EARTH WORK
6.1 PREPARATORY WORK

6.1.1 Before setting out the buildings/structure and commencing the construction, the contractor shall
carry out the preparatory work, such as removal of grass, vegetation etc. trimming/surface
dressing of the area as per Clause 3.6 and 3.10 of SSR PART-I 2009, to the entire satisfaction
of Engineer-in-Charge.
6.1.2 The Àrea’ referred to implies the entire building/structure plot extending up to 3m all around the
outer edge of plinth protection/ramp of the building/structure. The cost of preparatory work as
necessary, shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor's lump sum for Schedule ‘A’ Part-I
6.2 SURFACE EXCAVATION

6.2.1 Before starting excavation work, the contractor shall carry out surface excavation in soft
disintegrated rock’ not exceeding 30 cm deep and averaging 15cm deep over the entire area
covered by the Buildings/ Works under Schedule À' Part-I. The site shall be dressed to slope
away from the structure.
6.2.2 All spoils obtained from surface excavation shall be disposed off to a distance exc 1.5Km but n.
exc 5 Km as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
6.2.3 Surface excavation shall be carried out before the excavation for foundation is started.
6.2.4 Depth of foundation shown in drawings for the buildings is the depth after surface excavation.
GL marked on drawings shall be average GL as fixed by GE after surface excavation.
6.3 EXCAVATION - GENERAL
6.3.1 Unit rates for buildings in Schedule À' Part-I shall include for excavation and earthwork in any
type of soil/soft disintegrated rock. Any change in strata during excavation other than
mentioned hereinbefore shall be regularized through a deviation order.
6.3.2 Excavation shall be done to the depth as shown on drawings/as required at site and as directed
by Engineer-in-Charge.
6.3.3 Decision of the Garrison Engineer shall be final, conclusive and binding as regards
classification of soils and rocks met during excavation.
6.4 Quoted cost of all items of Schedule À' Part-I as well as subsequent parts shall also be
deemed to include for bailing, pumping, dewatering from foundation trenches if water is met
with or accumulated from any source or cause or working in water or liquid mud. No additional
payment as stipulated in Clause 3.11 of MES Schedule Part II will be admissible. In the event of
Deviations, no adjustment shall be made for cost of bailing, pumping and dewatering, specified
hereinbefore. The Contractor shall be deemed to have acquainted himself with the sub-soil water
table at site before submitting his tender.
6.5 Stone obtained from excavation in hard rock (if met with during excavation) (other than by
chiselling) shall become property of the contractor. The contractor shall pay Rs. 1193.13 per
Cum of measured quantity of stone obtained without deduction of voids in excavation and
shallremove it off the site with prior permission of GE/ Engineer-in-Charge. No lead shall be
payable for the removal of stone from site. The contractor may use the stone obtained from
excavation in filling under floors or road work if permitted by the GE. In cases the excavation in
hard rock is carried out by chiselling then the excavated material shall be used in filling as
specified hereinafter in floors or road work. The recovery of Rs. 1500.57 per cum of stack
measurement (without any deduction for voids) of hard rock shall be effected from the contractor
to the extent of material used in filling. Surplus excavated material shall be disposed off as
directed without any extra cost to Govt.
6.5.1 Blasting of rock is prohibited. Excavation in hard rock (if met with during excavation) shall be by
chiselling or any other agreed method.
6.6. In case timbering to excavation is required and specifically ordered by the GE in writing, it shall
be paid as deviation.
6.7 TRENCHES FOR FOUNDATION AND PIPES

6.7.1 The excavation shall be restricted to dimensions shown on the drawings and as specified in MES
Schedule. Excavation made, if any, in excess of required depth/width shall be made good by the
Contractor with cement concrete 1:7:12 type F2 without extra cost to the Government
6.7.2 The beds of the trenches shall be watered and well rammed and any depressions thus formed
shall be filled with approved earth as required to the level and slopes as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge.
6.8 FILLING IN TRENCHES/UNDER FLOORS

6.8.1 The approved soil obtained from excavation (except earth/ spoil obtained from surface dressing )
shall be used for returning, filling in trenches, under floors or any other situation after removing
big stones, grass, roots and vegetables and other organic matter. Earth mixed with small
stones/pebbles (if approved by GE) is permitted for use in filling around pipes after the pipes are
laid and tested. Any additional earth required for the purpose of filling shall be arranged by
contractor at no extra cost to the Department from outside the Defence Land.
6.8.2 Filling under floors / sides of trenches shall be in layers not exceeding 250mm and each layer
shall be watered, compacted and rammed as approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
6.8.3 Surplus soil/ spoil shall be removed out side MD land. For the purpose of omit part of deviation
order, it shall be considered as 5 KM.
6.8.4 Contractor shall provide levelling instrument ‘Auto level’ with operator for taking the existing and
final levels by without any extra cost to Government.
6.9 METHOD OF MEASUREMENTS FOR EXCAVATION AND EATH WORK

(a) The area of cutting and /or filling in each cross section shall be separately computed by
Simpson’s rule as described here in after. The volume {cubic contents} of cutting and/or filling
shall be separately computed by Prismoidal formula all as described here in after. For computing
area of cross section the interval between two ordinates shall be as described by the Engineer-
in-charge to suit the site conditions but in no case it will exceed 3.0 metre.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS Contd…)
(b) Computation of areas (Simpson’s Rule)
Simpson’s rule given below shall apply for the computation of areas where the total number of
ordinates is odd and the ordinates are spaced at equal interval.
A = d/3[ (h1 +hn) + 2 (h3 +h5 + …….) +4 (h2 + h4……) ] where
A – Area of the cross section in Square metre.
d – Common distance between successive ordinates in metres.
h 1 – Height of the first ordinate in metres.
hn – Height of the last ordinate in metres.
(h3 + h5 + ……) – Sum of the heights of odd ordinates in metres in

between h1 and hn.
(h2 + h4 + ……) – sum of the heights of even ordinates in metres in

between h1 and hn.
(c) In case of odd number of divisions (i.e. where the number of ordinates is even), the area of
end division shall be computed as per the formula given below and added to the area of the
other divisions computed by Simpson’s Rule. Similarly where the distance between any two
parallel ordinates is different, then the area between these ordinates shall be computed by the
formula given below and added to the rest of the area computed by the Simpson’s Rule.
Ax = d/2 [ (hx + (hx + 1) ]

Where
Ax – Area to be computed between any two ordinates in square metres.
hx, (hx+1) = are heights of two ordinates respectively.
(d) Computation of Volume (Prismoidal Formula)
V = d (a1 + an) + 2 (a3 + a5 + ……… + an-2) + 4 (a2 + a4 + ……… + an-1 ) where

3
V Volume in cum
D Distance between successive ordinates in m
a1 Area of the first cross section in sqm
an Area of the last cross section in sqm
a3 + a5 + …. + an-2 Sum of the areas of odd cross section in sqm between a1 and an
a2 + a4 + …. + an-1 Sum of the areas of even cross section in sqm between a1 and an
(e) The formula shall be applicable only in case where number of cross section is odd. In case
where the number of cross sections is even, volume covered by last two sections shall be
calculated by applying the formula (given here-in-after) and added to the volume of the
remaining sections calculated by application of Prismoidal Formula.
Vx = d ( ax+ ax+1)
3
Vx Volume to be computed between any two cross sections in cum

ax Area of the first cross section in sqm
ax+1 Area of the other cross section in sqm
d Distance between the two cross sections in m
6.10 DRESSING AROUND BUILDINGS

After constructions and before handing over any building the area around as defined in Clause
6.1.2 above shall be dressed without extra cost to the Govt. spoil obtained from
surfacedressing shall be removed out side Defence land. Rubbish shall be removed from site
time to time as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Nothing extra shall be admissible on account
of any extra lead, if required, due to inadequate space for keeping excavated soil at sides of
trenches.
6.11 FOUNDATION AND PLINTH
6.11.1 The lump sum cost for works under Schedule À’ Part-I shall be for the construction of buildings
as per the contract drawings & specifications. Any change in foundations and plinth,
necessitated, which may have to be carried out as per the decision of the GE, shall be adjusted
through a proper deviation order.
6.11.2 For the purpose of reckoning the depth of the foundation the average level of the ground after
surface excavation shall be considered.
6.11.3 Site plan shows location of buildings, should it be found necessary to vary the siting of these
buildings, no claim for additional expenses, if any, will be entertained on this account by the
Department.
6.11.4 Quoted cost of all items of Schedule À' Part-I as well as subsequent parts shall also be deemed
to include for removal of roots of the trees if met during excavation.
6.11.5 Excavation for foundation of building / structure under Schedule ‘A’ Part-I includes for
excavation in sand dunes also. Contractor will not have any extra claims to make the side of
trenches stable for and/ or to have wider width of trenches.
6.11.6 FILLING OF APPROVED EARTH:-
(i) Earth for filling shall be approved granular soil/earthmoorum obtained from out side MD land and
shall be free from vegetation and other organic substance and spread in layers not exceeding 30
cm and rolling as specified and as directed. Filling of soil shall be carried out at optimum moisture
content (OMC) to 95% modified proctor density all as specified in relevant IS code (IS-2720).
Watering shall be done before or during the rolling and completed as directed by Engineer-in-
Changes so as to achieve the desired field density. Before the earth is obtained shall not be
changed without prior approval of GE Granular soil shall be obtained from the source as approved
by GE.
(ii) The filled up earth shall be compacted with power roller of minimum 80-100 KN Static weights with
plain drum all as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
(iii) Each layer shall be rolled till the 95% density is achieved of the maximum dry density of material
determined as per IS-2720 Part-8.
(iv) The tests shall be carried out all as per the requirement of IS-2720, the cost of testing including all
arrangements for testing and provision of testing equipments shall be responsibility of contractor
without any extra cost to Govt.
(v) Before commencement of filling work initial levels of the construction site area shall be taken jointly
by contractor and Engineer- in- Charge and after completion of filling and after proper completion
work again finished levels shall be taken jointly by Engineer-in- Charge and contractor. Qty of earth
filling shall be computed by applying Simpson rule and prismoidal formula as specified
hereinbefore. Quantity of compacted earth only shall be considered for the payment purpose. The
decision CE with regard to the Qty and leveling of earth shall be final and binding. All these levels
shall be recorded in level books and signed by contractor & Engineer-in-Charge.
(vi) Earth filling in traverse wall shall be done in layers not exceeding 30cm each and watered and well
compacted to required shape and gradient all as specified in SSR Part-I, clause 3.22.
(vii) Moorum filling in foundation of buildings and moorum filling under floors shall be deemed to include
in lumpsum unit rate of the buildings.

6.12.1 HARD CORE
Hard core shall be hand crushed or broken trap / basalt / granite stones of gauge not exceeding
63mm well graded to provide dense and compact sub grade all as specified in Para 3.27.1 and
3.27.6 of MES Schedule Part I. The finished consolidated thickness of hard core shall be as
shown in drawings or 150mm unless otherwise specified. Thickness shown on drawings /
Schedule of finishes shall be treated as consolidated thickness. The crushed or broken stones
shall be brought from the source(s) approved by GE.
7. PRECONSTRUCTION ANTITERMITE TREATMENT
7.1 Pre-construction antitermite chemical treatment shall be carried out for buildings, covered in
items of Schedule À' Part I (Item No 1) & BOQ item No 18.00 to 21.00 all as described in
Clause 3.26 of MES Schedule Part-I to bottom and sides of Structures coming in direct contact
with soil upto 500mm below the ground, plinth protection, below floors, junctions of walls and
floors, external perimeter of building(s) and surroundings of conduits/pipes and below plinth
protection.
7.2 In the event of deviations, the rates given in the MES Schedule Part II for the treatment with
emulsion using chlorophyriphos shall be applicable.
7.3 The above preconstruction antitermite treatment work shall be executed through an approved
agency which should be member of Indian Pest Control /Post Control or pest control
Association of India holding valid license as per Column 13 of Insecticide Act 1968 and persons
employed to do the antitermite treatment shall be qualified as per rules framed under
Insecticide Rules,1971. Specialist firm shall be approved by the GE and the work shall be done
to the entire satisfaction of the GE. The defects liability period of antitermite treatment shall be
10 years and the contractor shall be responsible to keep the entire buildings free from termite
infection for a period of 10 years after the certified date of completion. The main contractor shall
produce paid vouchers along with necessary certificates from the Pest Control specialist firm
giving TEN years guarantee (from certified date of completion of contract) to keep the building
fully free from termite infestation during guarantee period. This guarantee does not however
absolve the main contractor from his responsibility in respect of this specialist work as per
contract conditions. The main contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the buildings are
kept free from termite infestations during guarantee period.
7.4 A amount at the rate of 2.5% of the Antitermite treatment work done amount shall be retained
out of the final bill amount as security deposit for antitermite treatment work. The amount shall
be released to the Contractor after satisfactory expiry of ten years guarantee period. The GE
may accept Bank Guarantee Bond from Scheduled Bank or a fixed deposit receipt (pledged in
GE's favor) from an approved Bank for the said sum for a period of ten years, in which event no
further amount will be recovered from the final bill on this account. Defects liability period under
Condition 46 of General conditions of Contracts (IAFW-2249) shall be deemed to be amended
to the extent mentioned above for antitermite treatment works.
7.5 If at any time during the guarantee period it is found by the GE that the buildings or any parts
thereof are affected by termites, the Contractor shall at his own cost provide post-construction
antitermite treatment to such affected portions to the entire satisfaction of Garrison Engineer.
The decision of the GE as to the extent to which such post construction treatment is to be
provided shall be final, conclusive and binding.
7.6 The chemical for use in antitermite treatment shall be emulsion of chlorophyriphos 20 EC
chemical directly purchased from the original manufacturer or his authorized agent as specified
in Appendix `B' attached. Chemical should be brought in sealed container(s).
7.7 If necessary GE shall carry out frequent checks after at least one mandatory test with regard to
composition of chemical in an approved laboratory and a record shall be kept incorporating the
laboratory results. The cost of the laboratory tests will be borne by the Contractor if the same is
got done by the Department despite production of test certificates by the contractor to satisfy
that spurious materials are not being used. A copy of ISI 6313 (Part-II) should be made
available at site by the contractor.
7.8 Chemicals shall be stored carefully at site, seals of the containers shall be broken only in the
presence of the Engineer-in-Charge. Empty containers should be got removed off the site
promptly. If on any particular day the contents of full containers could not be used in the work,
the containers should be got sealed at the end of the day in the presence of the Engineer-in-
Charge and opened when required, also in the presence of the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.9 The Contractor shall provide a plate of adequate dimensions, 20mm thick in cement and sand
mortar (1:4) indicating the CA NO, name of the specialist firm and the date of expiry of the
antitermite treatment guarantee rendered to the respective blocks of accommodation at place
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Height of letters shall not be less than 10 cm and shall be
engraved in plaster. The plaster plate shall be painted with three coats of synthetic enamel
paint (including the priming coat) of tint as decided by the GE. The unit rates inserted in
Schedule À’ Part-I for the respective buildings are deemed to be inclusive of the cost of
antitermite treatment and guarantee period specified above.
8 CONCRETE WORK
8.1 CEMENT
8.1.1 Cement shall be procured from the manufacturers /main producers as mentioned in Appendix
`C. Cement shall be of tested quality and shall comply with the requirements mentioned in the
drawings, SSR, IS Specifications as amended and as specified in Appendix `C' to Particular
Specifications given hereinafter.
8.1.2 Type of cement for the subject work shall be ordinary Portland cement grade 43 (forty three) in
accordance with IS 269 - 2015 unless otherwise mentioned in structural drawings forming part
of the tender documents.
8.2 FINE AGGREGATE

8.2.1 Fine aggregate for concrete works shall be natural sand/ manufactured sand (M-sand) and
grading within the limits of Grading Zones II to III all as specified in Clause 4.4 of MES
Schedule. Sand conforming to grading zone IV of IS-383 shall not be used for RCC work. In the
alternative manufactured sand / manufactured fine aggregate conforming to grading and other
characteristics Zone I to III and other requirement in all respect as per IS 383-2016 and IS-2430
may also be used without any price adjustment. The manufactured sand shall be from clean
hard stone / aggregate to required grading and shall be free from all deleterious materials. Sand
obtained from quarry dust by washing and screening method shall not be used.
8.2.2 The sand shall be Hard, dense, strong, durable, clear and free from veins and adherent
coatings and free from injurious amount of disintegrated pieces, alkali, vegetable matters and
other deleterious substances. As far as possible flaky and elongated pieces should be avoided.
8.2.3 Natural river sand/crushed stone sand shall be obtained from the sources as approved by GE.
8.3 COARSE AGGREGATE

Coarse aggregate for all cement concrete work shall be graded broken/ crushed trap stone
/basalt/granite stone obtained from approved quarries as specified in Clause 4.4 of MES
Schedule. Mixture of the two types shall however not be used.
8.4 GRADING OF COARSE AGGREGATE

Graded Aggregate of nominal sizes given hereunder, shall be used, unless specified otherwise,
in the specifications hereinafter:
(a) Plain or reinforced cement concrete except in foundation of brick or stone walls/pillars,
floors and sub base to floors.
(i)For structural elements of depth/thickness 100mm and more: 20mm.
(ii) For structural elements of depth/thickness less than 100 mm: 12.5 mm
Note: However, in no case the nominal size of aggregate shall be greater than one
fourth the minimum thickness of the member.
(b) Plain concrete in foundation of brick or stone walls, pillars, floors and sub-base to floors.
(i) Under 30mm thickness : 12.5mm
(ii) 30mm to 80mm thickness : 20mm
(iii) Exceeding 80mm thickness : 40mm
8.5 WATER
Water shall conform to the requirement stipulated in IS-456 and as per Clause 4.9 of MES
Schedule.
8.6 MIX OF CONCRETE:-

8.6.1 Mix of cement concrete in various situations shall be as stated in Schedule ‘A’ or hereinafter in
Particular Specification / structural drawings. Unless otherwise specified, mix of cement
concrete in various situations shall be as under :-
Situation Type of Concrete

(a) Foundation concrete for all buildings, M 10 Nominal Mix
under Brick / Stone walling and lean
concrete under plinth/grid/toe beam and
steps, in gaps between plinth/column
under footing.
(b) Foundation concrete under column M 15 Nominal Mix
footing if not shown in drawings.
(c ) PCC in sub floors ( base concrete) for M 7.5 Nominal Mix
PCC / tiles floor
(d) PCC in plinth protection, drain and M 10 Nominal Mix
channel, PCCCills, and plugging for
scaffolding holes.
(e) All RCC work M 30 (Design mix as per
IS 456).
(f) PCC in bed plate, benching, splash M-15 (Nominal mix )
stones, coping, DPC and pre-cast articles
and PCC block for holdfast.
(g) Cement concrete in any other situation M-15 (Nominal mix )
not mentioned above.
Note : All concrete mixes shown in Sch of finishes as M-5, M-7.5, M-10 and M-15 shall be read as
M-5 (1:5:10 Nominal mix), M-7.5 (1:4:8 Nominal mix), M-10 (1:3:6 Nominal mix) and M-15 (1:2:4
Nominal mix)
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS Contd…)
8.6.2 Projects shall be dealt with as under:-

(a) Concreting in this project shall be carried out by following ways at the option of
contractor. However, no financial adjustment will be done if the contractor uses any of
the following two methods.
(i) By procurement from an approved RMC plant (except for PQC)
(ii) By installing RMC plant at site confirming to IS 4925/4926 as approved by GE.
(b) The mix design shall be arrived at as per IS 10262-2019 after three trial mixes and
shall be approved by the GE before the start of the work.
(c)Sampling of concrete shall be as per IS: 456-2000.
8.7 Minimum average slump for reinforced cement concrete and maximum water cement ratio for
RCC M-30 (design mix) and above grades shall be as specified in IS-456-2000. Design mix of
RCC for various grades shall be all as per provisions catered for in IS-456-2000 duly
considering the above requirements and minimum cement contents shall be as per relevant
clauses in IS 456-2000. The exposure condition shall be considered as `Severe ' unless
otherwise specified in structural drawings. Accordingly the tenderers are advised to verify the
quality of various ingredients available for incorporation in the subject work and quote
accordingly. The tenderers are advised to note that if the cement contents works out to be less
than the above specified minimum cement contents as mentioned hereinbefore, then the above
specified minimum cement contents have to be incorporated and in case cement contents
works out to be more than the above specified minimum cement contents ,then the cement as
per design mix shall be provided without any extra cost to the department. The contractor shall
have no claim in this regard due to misunderstanding of above provisions and decision of GE in
this regard shall be final and binding.
8.8 READY MIX CONCRETE (RMC)) (Applicable for complete works including PQC)
8.8.1 RMC as specified shall confirm to IS : 4926-2003.
8.8.2 The contractor shall procure concrete from RMC manufacture as listed hereinafter RMC plant if
specifically set up from one of the listed manufacturer shall conform to IS 4926:2003.
8.8.3 Mix of the two types i.e. RMC and concrete in situ shall not be permitted for the same element
of structure.
8.8.4 The contractor shall obtain a written approval from GE for the specific manufacturer from whom
he intends to procure the RMC. GE shall verify the suitability of the plants for the particular
project after considering all provisions given in IS:4926-2003. Following are of the some
aspects may be verified by GE:-
(i) Output capacity of plant. Min output capacity for RMC plant shall be 30 CUM per hour or
as specified in CA.
(ii) Pollution Under Check Certificate. The relevant and valid PUC certificate from government
agency shall be available for the plant.
(iii) Calibration Certificate :- Relevant and valid calibration certificate shall be checked for
the plant as well as for the testing machine.
(iv) Transit Mixers:- The number and the condition of the transit mixers shall be satisfactory.
(v) Vicinity of the plant with respect to the site:- The distance between the plant and the site
shall be such as it may satisfy the transportation time as allowed in the IS code.
8.8.5 For projects at locations where movement of transit vehicles are restricted during day time
contractor shall carry out the concreting work during night or late hours after obtaining
necessary approval from the GE.
8.8.6 The contractor shall forward an information note as shown in Annex ‘D’ of IS : 4926 – 2003, duly
countersigned by GE to the RMC supplier. A copy of the same shall be kept at site for
verification.
8.8.7 MIX DESIGN

(i) The mix proportions intended to be used for the demanded mix shall be obtained from
the manufacturer in writing and shall be verified by GE to ensure that these are complying with
the provisions of IS:456-2000 and IS:10262.
(ii) The contractor shall also produce copies of the test certificate for the materials being
used by the RMC manufacturer for the verification by the GE. GE shall give a provisional
approval for the mix proportion based on this and work can commence accordingly. Final
approval will be given only after verifying the 28 day cube strength of the first batch brought at
site, as stated herein after at clause 8.8.9 (ii). However the contractor shall render undertaking
to redo the work at “No extra cost to Govt” in the event of unsatisfactory results after 28 days
test.
(iii) The use of admixture shall be as per the provisions of clause 5.5 of IS:456 and the
amount shall be based on the provisions of IS:10262. The details of the admixture shall be
clearly spelt out at serial no (c) and (d) of Part ‘B’ of the delivery ticket. In no case amount of
extra admixture shall be added at site to regain lost workability.
(iv) Admixtures shall be charged to the mixer at the same time in the mixing sequence for
every batch. Liquid admixtures shall be charged with the water. Powdered admixture shall be
sprinkled into the mixer with other dry ingredients. When more than one admixture is used, they
shall be batched separately and they shall not be premixed before entering the mixer.
(v) The department executive shall have right to visit the RMC plant and collect raw
materials being used for testing the same. Such test shall be conducted at least once in three
months or after every 200 cum of concrete whichever is earlier.
(vi) The agreement between the RMC manufacturer and the contractor should ensure
deployment of a qualified supervisor at plant site and random check by MES supervisor /
executives
8.8.8 SAMPLING
(i) The sampling criteria for testing of concrete received from the RMC plant shall be as per
clause 6 of IS : 4926. One sample containing 9 cubes shall be prepared from each truck mix or
50 cum whichever is less. Out of this one specimen of 3 cubes shall be tested for 7 day
strength. The min strength at 7 days shall be at least 2/3 of the specified strength as per
clause16 of IS: 456, acceptance criteria for concrete. The second set of 3 cubes shall be tested
for 28 days strength. The third set of three cubes shall be kept for records and any further
testing as required. It may be noted that the sampling criteria for concrete based on volume of
concrete as specified in clause 15.2.2 of IS : 456 is not applicable for concrete procured from
RMC plants.
(ii) However the first batch of concrete of a particular grade received from a particular
manufacturer shall be sampled by taking at least 12 cubes. These cubes shall be tested in the
presence of the GE for confirmation before the final approval of the RMC manufacturer. These
cubes shall be tested as follows:-
(a) Specimen of 3 cubes – for 7 days strength. In case these test report does not
rd
satisfy the requirement of 2/3 of the acceptance criteria for 28 day strength, further
supply and use of concrete from the particular manufacturer shall be suspended till the
28 day strength are available.
(b) Specimen of 6 cubes shall be tested for 28 day strength. The manufacturer shall
be approved for supply if these values are acceptable as per clause 16 of IS : 456,
(even if the cubes have failed during 7 day testing). If the reports are not satisfactory the
supply from the manufacturer shall be suspended forth with. All the members already
cast with these mixes shall be subjected to suitable NDT tests as specified and further
corrective measures or demolition of such members and recasting shall be taken. The
rates quoted by the contractor shall be deemed to be inclusive of the above and nothing
extra shall be payable.
8.8.9 The concrete procured from Ready Mix concrete Plants should meet the requirements specified
at the time of placing. Cost of admixture required for retardation of setting time and plasticizers
for increasing workability and cost of transportation etc. shall be deemed to be included in the
lump sum cost quoted by the Contractor .In case of his own plant established at site contractor
has to submit mix design (for approval) from approved Labs such as IIT / NIT / SEMT Pune /
Any NABL approved lab, which will be approved by GE. In all other cases when RMC is
procured from the manufacturer listed or approved as hereinafter. Mix design shall be approved
as specified in relevant clause hereinbefore. However contractor owes responsibility to get the
required results after testing and will not have any claim whatsoever if the concrete from these
listed makes are procured.
8.8.10 List of Approved RMC manufacturer’s is given below:-
(i) Lafarge India Pvt Ltd
(ii) ACC Ready Mix concrete
(iii) RMC, Ready Mix (India) Pvt. Ltd,
(iv) Ultratech RMC Plant – Verna
(v) HI Tech infra
(vi) Navalai Infra
(vii) Any other plant as approved by Accepting Officer
8.8.11 In the event of deviation involving price adjustment, though the contractor have used RMC in
lieu of design mix, the rate applicable for RMC shall be as per SSR rate for RCC design mix
concrete of corresponding grade adjusted with contractor’s quoted percentage.
8.8.12 When required, the RMC plant selected by the contractor shall provide information about the
ingredient in the making RMC including admixture, used for RMC to GE. Admixtures for
improving workability of concrete and extension of setting time shall be conforming to IS
6925 and IS 9103.
8.8.13 Placing and compaction of concrete shall conform to IS: 4926-2003
8.9 LABORATORY MIX DESIGN AND TESTS(Only if RMC installed at site)

As soon as possible, after receiving the order to commence work, the contractor shall procure
sufficient quantities of required type of aggregates, cement and water and find their
characteristics to suitability of the specifications in the laboratory approved.
8.9.1 The contractor shall get the design mix, from approved Institution IIT / NIT / SEMT Pune / Any
NABL approved lab, and shall produce the design for approval of GE(Independent) The
contractor shall submit the approved materials along with the required information as per clause
9.1.2 of IS 456-2000 through Engineer-in-Charge to the institution carrying out the mix design.
The mix design be carried out on the basis of laboratory trial mixes using approved materials
and methods as per IS: 10262 (Recommended guide lines for Mix design) or on the basis of
any other method in consultation with Garrison Engineer. The aggregate cement ratio and
water cement ratio once decided based on Trial mix design shall not be changed without
reference to GE. Any change in sources of coarse and fine aggregate and cement shall be
informed to GE and accordingly a fresh mix design is to be submitted for approval. Calculation
Details in support of mix design shall also be provided.This design should be reverified at RMC
plant installed at site.
8.9.2 For design mix, it is an express condition that only weigh-batching shall be followed and no
conversion of weights into volumes shall be permitted.
8.9.3 Adequate number of tests at regular intervals shall be carried out to ascertain the properties of
materials. In case of variation in grading of aggregate noticed at any point of time the same
shall be made good by suitably blending of different sizes of aggregates wherever possible. If
this is not feasible the mix design shall be changed immediately before carrying out further
work. Incase of change in source or quality of cement, fine aggregates or coarse aggregates,
the design mix shall be revised as specified hereinabove.
8.9.4 SAMPLING
(i) The sampling and testing of concrete batched and mixed at site shall be carried out as
per IS: 456 – 2000.
(ii) The on site tests for workability, cube strength tests etc. as specified shall be carried
out.
8.10 RECORD OF ACTUAL CONSUMPTION OF CEMENT

Engineer-in-Charge shall maintain a record of actual consumption of cement in proper register
(other than the cement register mentioned in special conditions) and initial the entry for every
change in quantity of materials. The register maintained is solely for the purpose to cross
check that the quantity consumed in the work and does not mean any proof for additional
quantity of cement, if any, incorporated in the work due to site requirement or for any other
reason and no claim of whatsoever nature will be entertained on this account.
8.11 MIXING FOR SMALL QUANTITY
8.11.1 In case of small quantity of concrete (i.e. the quantity of concrete required being less than one
half the batch of mix), the contractor may, after obtaining written permission of the Engineer-in-
Charge, be allowed mixing with miller (concrete mixer) . Where hand mixing is permitted,it shall
be carried out on a water tight platform and care shall be taken to ensure that mixing is
continued until the concrete is uniform in colour and consistency. However hand mixed
concrete shall not be used for critical structural members such as shear walls, columns, beams,
slabs, retaining walls etc.
8.11.2 Mixer performance checks shall be made at regular intervals to ensure uniformity of the
concrete. Visual examination of the concrete shall be one of the aid for maintaining and
checking mixer performance.
8.12. TRANSPORTING: Transportation of concrete generally shall be carried out as specified in

Clause 4.11.9 of SSR Part I 2009.
8.12.1 RMC: Concrete from RMC plant shall be transported as specified here-in-below:-
(a) The concrete shall be transported only in agitating type truck mixer. The concrete shall be
discharged from the truck mixer within two hours after the concrete at the plant. The time of
adding water to the cement at the batching plant shall be taken as the time of mixing the
concrete. Further the concrete thus discharged shall be placed in position and compacted
within 30 minutes, after delivery at site.
(b) Each truck arriving at site shall be accompanied with delivery ticket as specified is IS : 4926
Annexe ‘G’ clause 9.4. The following shall be recorded at site:-
(i) The locations where the particular batch is used.
(ii) The workability of the concrete as measured at site.

(iii) The designation / Marking of the cubes prepared for testing from the batch.
8.12.2 AUTOMATIC BATCHING PLANT INSTALLED AT SITE
(a) The concrete shall be placed within 30 minutes after discharge from the automatic plant.
(b) In case, the contractor’s automatic plant is located away from the location where
concrete is to be placed and require mechanical transportation, the same shall be done
in agitating type truck mixer as specified-in-before for transporting concrete from RMC
plant.
8.13 PLACING AND COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
(a) Placing and compacting generally shall be carried out as specified in Clause 4.11.10
and 4.11.11 respectively of SSR Part I 2009.
(b) All concrete for RCC work shall be consolidated / compacted by mechanical vibrators
approved type. Precast / cast-in-situ, plain cement concrete less than 100 mm
thickness shallhowever, be rammed and consolidated by tamping and rodding as
specified in MES Schedule.
(c) Concrete shall be transported using transit mixers/tippers without delay and
incorporated in works at the position of laying within 30 minutes from the time of
discharge from the mixer. Concrete shall be deposited and spread to such depths that
when compacted and finished, it shall conform to the grade and cross section required
and to ensure the thickness required.
(d) Concrete shall be deposited in such a manner as to require as little handling as

possible. In case of dry and hot weather, this time shall not exceed 45 minutes.
8.14 PROTECTION AND CURING OF CONCRETE
This shall be carried out in accordance with specifications, given in clause No. 4.11.13 and
4.11.14 of MES Schedule Part I 2009.
8.15 FORM WORK
a) Form work shall comply with requirements of Clause 4.11.6 of MES Schedule and shall
be of steel. Wooden/Plywood formwork will not be allowed.
b) Props shall be of steel of adequate length and strength. Formwork using steel props
depending upon the provisions in the contract shall be designed by contractor’s site engineer
and approved by GE keeping in view the following guidelines:-
(i) Deadweight of concrete and steel.

(ii) Load carrying capacity of the props.
(iii) Sequence and schedule of concrete pours.
(iv) Number of vibrators to be put in service.
(v) Any other criteria as considered necessary by GE.
c) Form work shall be of steel of adequate strength. However deformed steel sheet shall
not be used or permitted for use as formwork.
d) Props shall be straight and placed in true vertical position. Vertical props shall be
provided with braces in both directions. Number of vertical intervals at which braces are to be
provided shall be decided and approved by GE depending upon height of the structure and
horizontal loading. Bracings and supports may be of steel at the option of the Contractor and
shall be properly and adequately tied to form firm joint.
e) Moving loads in the form of workers on the top of the form work shall be minimized by
pumping the concrete and restricting the number of workers. The impact and horizontal loads
due to movement of workers shall be minimized by keeping them stationery and just moving
concrete containers from one person to other up to the place of pouring. It shall be ensured that
sub base of the floor is completed and cured after consolidating the earth underneath so that it
gives firm base to the props. Vertical props shall be provided with braces in both directions.
Number of vertical intervals at which braces are to be provided will depend upon height of the
structure and horizontal loading.
(f) Steel props used for beam, slab and other supports shall be screw type height
adjustable with steel base. All connections shall be with forged steel couplers. The props shall
be properly braced together at 3m intervals of height. Steel shuttering of appropriate thickness
and strength shall be used for soffit of all beams, slabs and side of walls. Shuttering shall be
supported on suitable adjustable steel spans. However, prefabricated steel box type form work
with proper clamping arrangement shall be used for all columns.
g) Safety of the workmen and structure shall be ensured by through checks that scaffolds
are safe, the spacing of verticals, horizontals and braces are carefully designed, making safe
access arrangement, preferring steel scaffolds to wooden scaffolds, no bamboo scaffolds shall
be used, taking adequate measures against fire, use of safety helmets and safety belts,
providingsufficient illumination of work area if work is in progress at night, special attention of
female workforce for loose garments etc. The decision of GE in this regard shall be final and
binding.
h) The ready made steel walk board shall be provided by the contractor for movement of
labours and materials on each slab while concreting. No pedestrian/ machinery movement shall
be allowed on base reinforcement.
j) In case of any deviation involving form work the pricing shall done at the rates of timber
formwork for fair finished surface.
8.16 Cover blocks for slabs, beams and columns shall be of factory made as approved by GE. The
cover blocks for slabs and beams shall be made of fiber reinforced concrete of strength not less
than 50 MPa or shall be of polypropylene with throating to hold the reinforcement bars in place.
For columns and vertical members such as RCC walls/shear walls / vertical drops/ fins etc. PVC
ring type / Polypropylene blocks shall be used.
8.17 EXPOSED SURFACE OF CONCRETE

a) All the exposed RCC/plain cement concrete surfaces except exposed surfaces of shear
walls, and lift shaft walls which are to be finished as mentioned hereafter, which are ultimately
required to be finished by application of white/colour wash, distemper, cement based or oil paint
etc, shall be provided with 5mm thick plastered in cement mortar 1:3 and finished even and
smooth without using extra cement.
b) Exposed surfaces of lintels, beams, columns, shear walls etc. which are continuous with
plastered surfaces of walls and exposed surfaces of shear walls shall be plastered, in the
manner specified for the walls.
c) Ceiling Plaster: Ceiling plaster shall be provided as indicated. All ceiling including
exposed beams ceiling to be finished with 3mm thick white cement putty before application of
finishes.
8.18 STRIPPING TIME FOR FORM WORK

The contractor’s attention is invited to the stipulation in Clause 4.11.6.3 regarding stripping of
form work. The periods stipulated therein are for concrete using ordinary Portland cement.
8.19 LEAVE/FORM HOLES AND CHASES

The contractor as the work proceeds should Leave/form holes/chases in concrete/masonry and
RCC where and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and make good in cement and sand
mortar (1:3) when ordered to do so.
8.20 PRECAST CONCRETE ARTICLES

Cement concrete lintels with or without integrally cast chajjas up to 1.5m clear span, shelves,
bed blocks/plates, cover slabs, fencing posts, fins and jalli and the like may either be precast or
cast in situ at the contractor's option, unless otherwise shown on drawings. If precast, these
shall be set in cement mortar (1:3). In case of deviation involving these items, pricing shall be
done on the basis of cast-in-situ work.
8.21 RCC CHAJJAS

a) RCC chajjas shall be provided as per details shown on drawings. Thickness of the
finished fin after application of rendering in CM (1:3) on both sides shall be 80mm unless
otherwise shown on drawings.
b) RCC chajjas (whether cast integral with the lintel or Precast embedded in the wall) shall
be provided with a coved fillet of radius 80mm in PCC (1:2:4) type B-0, mixed with integral
water proofing compound, preferably casted on green concrete.
c) The top surface of chajjas / fins and the coved fillet shall be finished with 10mm thick
cement plaster in CM 1:3 with mixture of approved water proofing compound as per
manufacturer's instructions while the concrete is yet green viz. just after the initial setting has
taken place.
8.22 THROATING/WEATHERING
Throating to projections or RCC/PCC beyond external faces of the walls where shown on
drawings, and where RCC chajjas are not provided with downward facia shall be formed in the
concrete while casting, by planting fillets/bar of 12mm diameter in the form work and finished
smooth.
8.23 FITTINGS AND FIXTURES

All fittings / fixtures, sockets, pipes, sleeves etc. shown in RCC members shall be placed in
position at the time of casting. Structural RCC members shall not be broken after hardening for
passing of pipes or for fixing fixtures.
8.24 BEARINGS OF RCC STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

a) Bearings to all roof/floor slabs on masonry walls shall comprise of 20mm thick bearing
plaster in CM (1:3) finished even and smooth with one coat of white wash applied and two
layers of laminated water proofing building paper type - I conforming to IS-1308 weighing not
less than 100 Gms/sq.m. Each layer laid over it. However, in case floor/roof slab rests on RCC
beams/bands, this provision does not apply.
b) All RCC beams / lintels/ bressumers resting on masonry work shall be provided with
PCC bed blocks cast in PCC (1:2:4) type B-1. Bed blocks shall be twice the width of beams in
length covering the entire thickness of wall and of depth 150mm, unless otherwise shown on
drawings.
c) The bearing of lintels shall be 15 cms or effective depth, whichever is more, unless
otherwise shown in drawings.
d) No treatment shall be provided under bearing of RCC bands.
8.25 PLINTH PROTECTION:-

Plinth protection in all situations as shown on drawings shall be provided with 75mm thick PCC
(1:3:6) type C-1, 750mm wide and over 100 mm thick consolidated bed of hard core (stone
aggregate) grouted with fine sand over well consolidated sub grade. The width of the plinth
protection shall be as shown on drawing. In the absence of width on drawing the same shall be
considered as 750mm. PCC shall be laid in alternate bays (not exceeding 2 square meters) and
finished fair on top without using extra cement. 10mm wide joints shall be provided throughout
the thickness of plinth protection in concrete bays, at every 3 metres interval, corners and
turning points and also in between walling and plinth protection. All joints in bay, as well as
between walling and the concrete in plinth protection shall be filled-in with mastic filling
comprising 1 part of heated bitumen 85/25 or 90/10 grade and 3 parts of sand (all by weight).
8.26 CONCRETE PADDING

Where the required height of walls, openings, is not obtained with adequate size of bricks the
same shall be obtained by providing PCC 1:3:6 type C-1.
8. 27 RCC BANDS:-
Irrespective of whether shown in drawings or not RCC bands shall be provided at lintel level of
entire length of all 100mm thick (i.e. half brick thick) brick walls or 10 cm thick Precast solid
masonry wall with full bearing at end walls/columns and the same shall be constructed with 4
Nos 8mm dia TMT bars with 8mm dia stirrups @ 150mm C/C. The bands shall be cast in
continuation with the lintels. Bearing plaster and water proof building paper shall not be
provided below RCC band. Bands shall be cast over the masonry as the work progresses. The
bands shall be suitably anchored to the structural members such as column, beam etc. as
shown in drawings. Thickness of RCC Band shall be 100mm thick.
8.28 PCC COVING

PCC coving with PCC (1:2:4), type B-0, mixed with integral water proofing compound shall be
provided at junction of RCC chajjas with wall/lintel/beam to the radius of 50mm.
8.29 CILLS WITH BLACK GRANITE STONE SLAB

Irrespective of whatever shown on drawing black granite stone slab 19mm thick shall be
provided in cill. Both side the cill shall be flushed to wall and shall have 50mm offset into both
the ends.
8.30 RCC LINTELS
a) The bearing of lintels shall be 15 cms or effective depth (whichever is more) unless
otherwise shown in drawings.
b) Lintels (without chajjas) for openings not exceeding 1.50 metre clear span may be
Precast at contractor’s option. However, these shall be priced as cast-in-situ lintels in
the event of deviation if any. All other lintels and band shall be cast-in-situ
8.31 DRIP MOULDING

Irrespective of whether shown on drawing or not, drip moulding in cement mortar (1:4) of size
50mm wide x 15mm deep shall be provided on all projection of chajjas, RCC roof slabs etc.
8.32 CRUMPLE SECTION

50mm wide crumple shall be provided in RCC structure having length all as shown on drawings
at change in geometry in plan or at the locations and as per details shown in relevant drawings
as specified. The top surface of plastered RCC slab shall be plastered with cement mortar
(1:4), 10mm thick mixed with water proofing compound.
(a) Crumple section shall be covered with 2mm thick stainless steel sheet with cadmium
plated screws or factory made extruded aluminium cover plates.
(b) Internal wall and RCC structure surfaces of crumple section shall not be plaster or pointed.
(d) Non Bituminous filler – The crumple section shall be filled with non-bituminous PE
form filler boards complying with the requirements of IS 1838.
9.0 PRECAST PCC SOLID BLOCKS FOR MASONRY
9.1 MATERIALS
9.1.1 SOLID PCC BLOCKS: - Solid PCC blocks shall be grade C (5.0) as per IS-2185( Part-I) 2005
locally factory made. Size of PCC solid blocks shall be 400x200x200mm /300x200x200mm for
200mm thick walls & 400x200x100/300x200x100mm for 100mm thick walls. Min average
compressive strength shall be5N/mm2 and minimum compressive strength of each individual
unit shall not be less than 4 N/mm2. The manufacture of Block, surface texture and finish,
physical requirements of blocks, testing of PCC blocks, sampling etc shall be all as per IS 2185-
2005 and proper record shall be maintained. Density of block shall be not less than 1800
Kg/Cum . Water absorption shall be not more than 10% by weight of block. The cost of blocks
including transportation of block from work site to an approved laboratory for testing and cost of
testing shall be borne by the contractor.GE may approve any other size of blocks.
9.1.2. The initial mix design particulars along with all the connected documents shall be submitted to
the GE for approval. The work on ground shall not be progressed until the approval of design
mix is accorded. Subsequent design mix due to change in source / grading of aggregates or
source/batch of cement shall also be approved by GE.
9.1.3 CEMENT :- Cement refer clause 8.1 to 8.1.2 herein before.
9.1.4 SAND :- Fine aggregate for PCC block shall be of natural river sand as specified hereinbefore
and as approved by GE. Manufactured sand/ manufactured fine aggregate shall be allowed to
use if it meet the technical / contractual requirements.
9.1.5 COARSE AGGREGATE : Coarse aggregate shall be 12.5 mm to 20 mm graded stone

aggregate with ratio 3:1 and shall be of broken granite stone.
9.1.6 WORKMANSHIP:-
9.1.7 Irrespective of whatsoever is shown on drawing following types of concrete block masonry shall
be adopted at different location. (a)Exceeding 100 thick walls: Solid concrete block masonry in
CM 1:6 (b) 100 mm thick walls above plinth level: Solid concrete block masonry in CM 1:4 all
as shown on Drawings. Concrete block masonry shall be carried out all as specified in clauses
4.23.1 to 4.23.15 of MES Schedule Part I
9.1.8 10 cm thick solid block masonry wall shall be built from top of plinth beam where plinth beams
are provided and where plinth beams are not provided, the same shall be provided from the top
of concrete sub base floor without any foundation. 2 Nos of 8 mm dia mild steel high strength
corrosion resistant deformed bars shall be provided in 10 cm thick concrete block masonry at
every fourth course and anchored 20 cm into the wall.
9.1.9 In case of deviation the precast solid block masonry manufactured out of 16 mm graded
aggregate and with 12.5 mm graded aggregate will be considered as costing same.
9.1.10 PCC block shall not be cut to under sized dimensions, and used to make up the required
height. Padding under bearing of lintels, slabs and beam etc to make up the height in walls
where required shall be done with cement concrete (1:3:6).
9.1.11 Toothing and bonding to all internal walls shall be provided with solid block masonry and no
hollow block masonry shall be used for toothing / bonding from external wall to internal wall.
9.1.12 Masonry work shall be kept constantly moist for a minimum of 7 days.
9.1.13 Where cills are not provided below opening, one layer of walling below opening shall be built in
solid concrete block. The solid course shall be executed for at least 20 cms beyond the opening
of either side.
9.1.14 In working drawing wherever brick masonry shown to be read as PCC solid block masonry.
PCC block shall be Kept Flush with the outer line of wall shown on drawing and the centre line
shall be kept for internal walls. Wall thickness shown on drawing shall be amended as 200mm
thick in lieu of 220mm thick and 100mm thick in lieu of 110mm thick.
9.2.1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCE
9.2.2 The dimensions of concrete solid blocks shall be as in clause 9.1.1

9.2.2 The nominal dimensions of the units are designed to cover the thickness of mortar joints so that
they produce wall length which will conform to principle of modular coordination. The maximum
variation in the length of units shall not be more than + 5 mm and maximum variation in height
and width of unit shall not be more than +3 mm. Sizes other than specified above may also be
used with the approval of GE without any price adjustment.
9.2.4 MANUFACTURE OF BLOCKS

(a) The blocks shall be machine made. The process of concrete mixing, fabrication/casting of
blocks, curing and drying shall be in accordance with IS-2185 and all as specified in MES
Schedule.
(b) Faces of the blocks shall be flat and rectangular. Wherever minor defects are observed in
PCC blocks, surface finish shall be rendered smooth with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement,3
coarse sand).
9.2.5 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENT.

(a) General
All blocks shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects which interfere with proper placing
of the block or impair the strength or performance of the construction. Minor chipping resulting
from the customary methods of handling during delivery shall not be deemed ground for
rejection.
(b) Tolerances
The maximum variation in the dimension shall be not more than + 3.0 mm in height & breadth
and + 5 mm for length.
(c) Block density

The block density shall be as per IS-2185, (Part-I, 2005) for solid PCC block. It will not be less
than 1800 Kg/Cum.
(d) Compressive Strength

The Average compressive strength of eight blocks when determined in the manner described in
IS-2185 shall not be less than 5.0 N/Sq mm of the gross area. The strength of the lowest
individual block shall not be less than 80 percent of the average compressive strength of eight
(8) blocks.
(e) Water absorption

The water absorption shall be as per IS-2185.
(f) Drying shrinkage

The drying shrinkage on the blocks shall be as per IS-2185.
(g) Moisture movement

The moisture movement shall be as per IS-2185.
9.2.6 TESTS
Tests as described in ANNEX `B' to `G' of IS-2185 shall be conducted on samples of blocks
selected according to the sampling procedure as per Para 11 of IS-2185 to ensure conformity
with the physical requirement laid in IS 2185.
9.2.7 SAMPLING & CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY
The blocks required for carrying out the tests laid down in the standard shall be taken by one of
the methods given in Para 10 of IS- 2185 and shall be considered as conforming to the
requirements of the specifications if the conditions mentioned in IS-2185 are satisfied.
9.2.8 PRECAST PCC SOLID BLOCK WALLING
(a) Mortar for walling
20 cm thick PCC solid block wall shall be in cement mortar 1:6 and 10 cm thick PCC solid Block
walling shall be built in cement mortar 1:4.
(b) Laying
The blocks shall be slightly wetted before and/or during laying in the wall. The blocks shall be
laid with joints completely filled without any void left in the masonry. The thickness of the
horizontal and vertical joints shall not exceed 1cm. The 1/2, 1/3 and 2/3 block shall be used for
breaking the joints. The face joints shall be raked to a depth of 1 cm by raking tool during the
progress of the work when the mortar is still green, so as to provide proper key for plaster or to
facilitate pointing to be done later. Where plaster or pointing is not required, the joints shall be
struck flush and finished side by side.
(c) Curing of walling :- Masonry work shall be kept constantly moist on all the faces for a minimum
period of 7 days.
(d) Scaffolding for walling :-Only double scaffolding shall be used. The scaffolding shall be
strong and sound. No holes in the masonry for supporting scaffolding shall be allowed.
9.2.9 Unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings, all 10 cm thick partition walls on ground floor
shall rest on sub base of the floor and on first floor shall rest on RCC slab. 10 cm thick partition
walls/columns shall be properly bonded at ends into adjoining walls/columns Irrespective of
whether shown in drawings or not, 10 cm thick partition walls shall be provided with the
following :-
(i) 2 No 8mm dia MS bars at every fourth course.
(ii) RCC band at lintel level for the entire length (including over openings)- Unless
otherwise shown on drawings, the RCC band shall be 100mm x 100mm size reinforced
with 4 No 8mm dia TMT bars as longitudinal bars and 8 mm dia TMT bar stirrups at
150mm c/c.
9.2.10 DAMP PROOF COURSE

(a) The damp proof course, where shown on drawings/specified, shall consist of 40mm
thick layer of PCC M-15 (Nominal Mix) using aggregate of size 12.5mm and below, mixed with
water proofing compound and one coat of blown bitumen 85/25 at the rate of 1.5 kg / Sqm
applied over top of concrete to form thick layer and laid as specified in Para 5.42 of MES
Schedule.
(b) Water proofing compound for damp proof course, shall conform to IS-2645. It shall be
mixed with cement concrete in the proportion and manner as given in manufacturer's
instructions. Deviations, if any, shall be priced at the rate of 3% by weight of cement.
(c) Damp proof course shall be provided in all the walls including dwarf walls where masonry
starting from below the plinth level and is in touch with the soil layer from either out side or in
the filling under floors.
(d) Damp proof course shall also be provided under door/openings below floor by providing a
vertical DPC along the sides of the drop.
(e) Damp proof course shall be provided in all the cases where top of the plinth beam is
below the FFL. Even in the cases where top of the plinth beam is above the normal GL but
below the FFL, DPC is required. DPC shall not be provided in cases plinth beam is at par with
the FFL and the top of the filling under the floors is at least 150mm below FFL.
9.2.11 CURING OR WATERING: Masonry work shall be kept constantly moist for a minimum period of
7 days.
9.2.12 Deviation:- In case of deviation the rates of PCC solid block masonry shall be Rs. 6264.00 per
cum for 20cm thick walling and Rs. 898.00 per Sqm for 10cm thick walling subject to
percentage quoted by the contractor for Schedule ‘A’ Part-I.

10.0 WOOD WORK AND JOINERY
10.1 TIMBER
(a) Timber for all joinery and wood work shall conform to specifications given in Clause 7.3 of
the MES Schedule and shall be within the permissible limits of defects defined in Clauses 7.4
and 7.5 of the MES Schedule.
(b) Timber shall be well seasoned, whether air or kiln dried at the discretion of the contractor
but without any price adjustments. The moisture content of timber shall not exceed the limits
laid down vide Clause 7.7 of the MES Schedule. Adequate number of test shall be carried out
by the Engineer-in-Charge to determine the moisture content in the timber to be used in the
work and the contractor shall provide necessary facilities for test as required by Engineer-in-
Charge without any extra cost to Government. Testing charges shall also be deemed to be
included in lumpsum quoted by the contractor for Schedule “A” Part-I.
10.2 PRESERVATION OF TIMBER
(a) Preservative antitermite treatment shall be carried out to all wood work and joinery
fabricated by the Contractor at site. Factory made ply/boards are deemed to be provided with
antitermite treatment.
(c) Chemical used for antitermite treatment to wood work and joinery shall be copper
NAPTHANATE, ASCU or any other chemical specified in IS-401, applied in any one of the
manners specified in ibid IS.
(c) The species of timber for joinery/furniture items fabricated at site and prefabricated wood
products i.e. particle board etc. shall be as specified hereunder:-
(i)Fully panelled or partly panelled / glazed Factory made shutters with styles / rails
/ wire gauzed shutters. of second class hard wood as per IS-
1003 (Part-I) of species LAUREL/
BIJASAL/ BENTEAK/ VENTEAK/ SAL,
to be obtained from list of approved
manufacturers given in Appendix `B'.
(ii) Frames of built-in cupboards /cabinets IInd class Hard wood (Sal)
and furniture items, if indicated of timber.
(iii) Wooden pelmets Pelmets of particle boards shall be
provided as specified hereinafter.
(iv) Edging/beading for particle/ Teak/Shisham wood.
block/medium density fibre board exposed
to view in shutters, shelves and tops of
built-in furniture, cupboards and cabinets.
(v) Gutties plugs, cleats/ stoppers, Second class hardwood (Sal/
beading and fillets for shutters and Kalasiris/ChaplashHollock)
frames.
(vi) All other woodwork and joinery not Second class hardwood (Sal/ Kalasiris/
Other wise specified. Chaplash/ Hollock).
(vii) Door frames Second Class Hard Wood.(Sal)
10.3 FACTORY MADE PANELLED / FLYPROOF DOOR SHUTTER

10. 3.1Panelled shutters shall be factory made of 35mm thickness confirming to IS-1003 (Part-I) made
of kiln seasoned ASCU treated as per IS with second class hard wood for styles and rails.
Panels shall be of 12 mm thick particle board exterior grade with solid core, general purpose
bonded with phenol formaldehyde resin, with commercial veneered faces both sides confirming
to IS-3097.
10.4. FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS:-
10.4.1 Flush door shutters shall be of 35 mm thick solid core wood based block board (BWP) having
1.0 mm thick decorative veneer lamination on both sides, shade of choice as approved. On
edges bonded with synthetic resin with second class “Teakwood” E shape or ‘T’ shape
beading (fixed with stainless steel (SS 304) 4 hinges of 100 mm size). Teakwood beading shall
be with teakwood 6mm thick all-round. Flush door shutters shall be of factory made, All doors
of CCR, Pump house, Battery charging buildings except toilets and bathroom shall be provided
with flush door unless aluminium doors shown in drawings/sch of finishes, IS marked/
confirming to relevant IS. Flush door shutters shall be obtained from approved manufacturer
10.5 Factory made panelled / skeleton shutters 35mm thick shall be obtained from any one of the
manufacturers specified here-in-after. Sample of shutters alongwith test certificates shall be
produced to the GE for inspection and approval. Sample shutters shall be got approved from
the GE before placing bulk order.
10.6 Factory made panelled / skeleton shutters may be obtained from any other manufacturer,
provided the same fulfil the following requirements:-
(a) Shall conform to the specification given above.
(b) Standard and quality are equal or superior to that of the products mentioned above.
(c) Is approved by the Accepting Officer in writing before incorporation in the work.
10.7 Factory made shutters shall be brought to site before applying the primer and the shutters shall
be got passed by the Engineer-in-Charge before application of the primer.
10.8 PARTICLE BOARDS
10.8.1 Plain Particle board wherever shown on drawing or specified hereinafter shall be BWP grade
(Exterior grade) bonded with BWP quality phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin adhesive and
confirm to IS 3087. Pre laminated Particle board wherever indicated on drawing or specified
hereinafter shall be of decorative type provided with laminated decorative surfaces on both side
and shall conform to IS-12823. Thickness if not specified shall be 12mm in doors and 18mm in
built in cupboards /other locations.
10.8.2 Edges of shutters where indicated on drawing of particle boards, shall be provided with 4mm
edging of wood specified hereinbefore.
10.9 PLYWOOD
All plywood where indicated on drawings shall be BWP grade conforming to IS-303. Decorative
lamination where indicated in drawings shall conform to IS-1328. Irrespective of tender
document all built in furniture shutters shall be provided with 19mm thick IS marked marine ply
having both sides decorative lamination 1.0mm thick.
10.10 WORKMANSHIP
10.10.1 Joinery shall be wrought all over Timber surface exposed to view shall be wrought and for
surface not exposed to view shall be clean sawn. The workmanship and fixing of joinery shall
be as per Clauses 8.15 to 8.19.4 of MES Schedule Part I (2009).
10.10.2 The dimensions of the various components of joinery (other than block board shutters) shown on
drawings, wherever at variance, shall supersede the standard dimensions mentioned in the MES
Schedule. However for pricing deviations involving any joinery work, the rates in the MES Schedule for
the corresponding joinery shall be applicable.
10.10.3 Unless otherwise specified, all work both carpenter's and joineries shall have full dimension
shown on drawings except that an allowance of 1.5 mm shall be allowed for each wrought face.
Wooden beads and fillets shall however, hold the full dimensions as shown on drawings. The
contractor shall also maintain the overall sizes of the doors and windows etc., as shown on
drawings.
10.10.4 Timber member’s upto 3.00 metre length shall be in one piece.
10.10.5 Plugging to walls shall be done with wooden plugs as per Clause 7.29 of the MES Schedule
and specified hereinbefore.
10.10.6 2mm thick PVC sheet to a height 200mm shall be provided to both sides and also at bottom
edge of all door shutters of kitchen, unless other material is indicated on drawings.
10.10.7 Vertical members of wooden doorframes shall be embedded 40mm deep below FFL.
All door shutters shall have 2 to 3mm clearances above FFL.
10.10.8 Chowkats/Frames of doors shall be second class hardwood.
10.11 FRP DOORS FOR WC & BATH

10.11.1 All door shutters and frames of WCs, Wash and toilets shall be of FRP with 30mm thick FRP
shutter irrespective of what is shown on drawing.
10.11.2 FRP door specifications shall be as per IS 14856- 2000 and one door shall be tested at
random from Govt. Approved laboratories, cost of the same shall be borne by the Contractor.
10.11.3 The thickness of FRP shall be as shown in drawing. Shutters shall be in depressed panel
design and colour as approved by GE and shall include extra reinforcement on edges. The core
of Shutter in styles and rails area shall be of polyurethane foam. The panel area shall have ply-
FRP sandwich construction having 4mmthick ply to have embedded wooden blocks for taking
fixtures. Shutter shall have recesses to take hinge to fix frame. The whole shutter shall have
resistant to mild acid /alkali. Stainless steel (SS 304 grade) iron mongery to FRP shutter shall
be fixed as per manufacturer’s instructions. Any tenderer offering FRP shutter with more
thickness of FRP will not be paid anything extra Cost to dept.
10.11.4. Irrespective of what is shown in drawing, all fittings (Butt hinges /handle/sliding door bolts etc)
for FRP doors shall be stainless steel grade 304 confirming to relevant BIS specifications.
10.12 ALUMINIUM DOORS / WINDOWS / VENTILATORS (IN ALL BLDGS OTHER THAN ANNEX
BUILDING)
10.12.1 Irrespective of whatever shown on drawings or described in PS, all windows & ventilators shall
be of extruded aluminium section. Aluminium doors / windows / ventilators shall generally
conform to clause 10.37 of MES Schedule Part I and shall be provided at locations and as per
the details shown on drawings. Aluminium doors / windows / ventilators shall be made out of
extruded aluminium sections and shall be powder coated of thickness not less than 50 micron
of colour approved by GE. Sections of Aluminium doors / windows / ventilators shall be
obtained from any of the firm as listed in Appendix `B'.
10.12.2 Unless otherwise shown on drawing Glazing of aluminium windows / ventilators shall be with
sheet glass ordinary quality conforming to IS-2835 -1977 and thickness of sheet glass shall be 4
mm for panes not exc.0.5 Sqm each and panes exceeding 0.5 Sqm shall be provided with 4.80
mm. Glazing for WC/ toilet shall be figured glass conforming to IS-5437, 1969 & thickness shall
be 4.80mm and for Aluminium door sheet/float glass confirming to IS-2835 and of thickness 5.5
to 6.0mm. Section thickness of aluminium windows shall be 1.5 mm, if not shown any where in
drgs. Irrespective of what is shown/mentioned on drawing, all aluminium sections shall be powder coated
of thickness not less than 50 micron and colour approved by GE.
10.12.3 All fittings to aluminium doors / windows / ventilators shall be as per the manufacturer’s
instructions.
10.12.4 (a)Aluminium sections shall be powder coated 50 micron “Jindal Aluminium Company” as
mentioned in drawing for aluminium doors and aluminium windows and ventilators as per
drawings and dimensions shall be as mentioned in Architectural drawings. Contractor may
procure the Aluminium sections from the other manufactures as given in Appendix ‘B’
equivalent to sections of Jindal Aluminium Company. In case the weight of sections is more
than that of ‘Jindal Aluminium Company ’, No extra cost shall be paid on this account. However
in case of less weight of sections minus price adjustment will be done.
10.12.5 Where shown on the drawings, Aluminium windows and ventilators shall be provided with
Aluminium grills. Size of grills unless shown on drawing shall be DG (104) of size (10X5.2)
mm of make Deco grill or equivalent.
10.12.6 All other specifications for these aluminium doors/ windows/ ventilators shall be as per the
relevant drawings mentioned in the list of drawings.
10.13 Timber Frames and Chowkats

Timber for cupboard frames used shall be teak wood as mentioned in clause No 10.2 herein
before. All members of the timber frames shall be straight without any warp or bow and shall be
exactly at right angles, which shall be checked from the inside surfaces of the respective
members. Frames shall have smooth, well planed surfaces except the surfaces touching the
walls, lintels, cills etc. which may be left clean sawn, unless it is required for straightening up or
to obtain the overall sizes. Rebates, roundings and moulding etc. shall be done before the
members are jointed into frames.
10.13.1 Timber frames shall have dovetail joints. The jamb post shall be through tenoned into the
mortices of the transom to full width and the thickness of the tenon shall be not less than
15mm. The tenons shall be closely fitted into the mortices without any wedging or filling
andshall be pinned with hard wood or bamboo dowels not less than 10 mm dia. The depth of
rebate in the frames for housing the shutters shall be 15 mm. The joints before being put
together shall be glued with a synthetic adhesive conforming to IS 851-1978 or to IS 4835-
1979 or animal glue conforming to IS 852-1994.
10.13.2 All articles / builders hardware shall be stainless steel grade 304 irrespective of what is shown
on drawings/ written in PS anywhere. The contractor shall produce the samples of each article
of builder’s hardware which he proposes to use and get the same approved in writing by the
Garrison Engineer. Articles of builder’s hardware shall bear ISI mark, wherever available.
10.13.3 All door, window and ventilator frames shall be clamped together so as to be square and flat
before being built in. Each assembled door frame shall be fitted with temporary cross battens..
10.13.4 The faces of frame abuting the wall, lintel, cill etc., shall be given two coats of hot tarbefore
fixing, unless otherwise indicated.
Fixing of Chowkats and Frames
10.13.5 Timber frames of door, window, ventilator etc., shall be installed by ‘built in method’ unless
indicated to be installed by ‘prepared opening method’. Precautions shall be taken to fix the
door frames so as to take care of the final floor level and whether the shutters open inside or
out side.
10.13.6 Built in Method
Masonry or concrete in the wall shall be built after installation of the frames so that the holdfasts
and pins, if any, at the bottom are well anchored into them. Suitable arrangements shall be
made to hold the frame in rectangular shape and to prevent warping and distortion of frames
during construction. Usually one cross batten at the middle, one cross batten at the bottom
(where no cill is provided for door) and two cross battens diagonally will be necessary to hold
the frame rectangular.
10.13.7 Prepared Opening Method

The clearance between the frame and opening shall be kept depending on whether the
opening is externally rendered or fair faced. The frame shall be checked before fixing in position
that the same is square and in the proper position. The holdfast opening and the bottom pins
shall then be grouted or frames fixed as indicated. Plastering of the sides shall be done and
allowed to dry before the shutters are fixed.
10.13.8 Clearing:- After the plaster and grouting have dried, all splatter and marks of cement shall be
removedand the frames cleaned.
10.13.9 In the case of frames without cill the vertical members shall be buried in the floor for the full
thickness of the floor finish.
10.13.10 The holdfasts shall be tightly fixed to the frame by means of bolts or wood screws as
indicated; the bolt hole in the frame being plugged suitably and finished neat unless otherwise
indicated.
10.13.11 Adhesive
Adhesive used for bonding shall be BWP type synthetic resin conforming to IS: 848.
10.13.12 Thickness and Tolerance

Particle boards are available in thickness ranging from 6 mm to 40 mm. Tolerance in thickness
shall be + 5 % for boards upto and including 25 mm thick, and + 2.5% for boards above 25 mm
thickness . Each board shall be of uniform thickness.
10.13.13 Testing
One sample for every 100 Sqm or part thereof shall be taken and testing done as per IS:3087.
However testing may not be done if the total requirement of particle boards in a work isless than
30 Sqm. All the samples tested shall meet the requirement of physical and
mechanicalproperties of particle boards specified in relevant IS code.
10.13.14 Thickness of particle boards and adhesive used for bonding shall be as specified. Unless
otherwise stated, only Type I particle boards bonded with BWP type synthetic resin adhesive
shall be used.
10.13.15 Hold fast

These shall comply with IS 7196-1974 specification for hold fast. These shall be of minimum5
mm thick mild steel flats conforming to IS 1731 and shall be given a coat of bitumen
andsanded. Size and dimensions shall be as indicated.
10.13.16 Hinges
Irrespective of what is shown in Drg/PS, all butt hinges shall be stainless steel.Hinges shall be
well made and shall be free from flaws and defects. All hinges shall be cut clean and square.
The hole for the hinge pin shall be central and square to the knuckles/boss. All sharp edges and
corners shall be removed. The sides of the knuckles shall be straight and at right angles to the
flap. The movement of the hinges shall be free, easy and square and working shall not have
any play or shake. The hinge pin shall fit inside the knuckles firmly and riveted in the case of
steel hinges, and riveted or firmly notched in the case of non-ferrous metal butt hinges and
properly finished. Rivet bead shall be well formed so as not to allow any play or shake. All
screw holes shall be clean countersunk, suitable for countersunk head wood screw.
10.13.18 Stainless Steel Butt Hinges

SS butt hinges shall be of cold rolled mild steel and shall comply with IS 1341-1992,
Specification of steel butt hinges. Steel butt hinges are classified as light weight, medium
weight; broad type, square type; and heavy type I and II. Hinges shall be of medium weight,
unless otherwise indicated. The pins shall be of mild steel wire. Hinges shall be finished bright
with smooth surface.
10.13.19 Hasps and Staples

These shall conform to IS 363-1993 Specification for hasp and staples shall be stainless steel
SS 304. These shall be of the following types as indicated:-
(a) Stainless steel hasp and staple- wire type
(b) Stainless steel hasp and staple-safety type
(c) Brass hasp and staple- safety type
(d) Stainless steel hasp and staple- safety type
10.13.20 Hasp and staples shall be well made and free from defects. The hinge pin shall be of
Stainless steel of Stainless steel hasp and staples, and of mild steel or brass in the case of
brass or aluminium hasps and staples, as indicated. The movement of the hinge shall be free,
easy and square and shall not have any play or shake. The hasps shall fit the staples correctly.
The staple, except in the case of cast one, shall be riveted properly to its plate. The hinge pin
for the safety type hasp shall be riveted and rivet head properly formed and finished. Screw
holes shall be clean and counter sunk to suit countersunk head wood screws.
10.13.21Stainless steel hasps and staples shall be stove enamelled black. Brass hasps and staples
shall be finished bright and covered with clear lacquer. Aluminium alloy hasps and staples shall
be anodised.
10.13.22 Handles
These shall be in SS 304conform to IS-208-1996, Specifications for door handles. These shall
be of Stainless steel, as indicated in drawings. Continuous plate shall be provided in handles.
10.13.23 Door handles shall be finished smooth. When the grip portion of handle is joined with base
piece by mechanical means, the arrangement shall be such that assembly handle shall have
adequate strength. And Stainless steel 304 grade
10.13.24 Tower Bolts

Stainless Steel 304 tower bolts shall comply with relevant IS The type and size of the tower
bolts shall be as indicated.
10.13.25 Barrel and skeleton tower bolts, wherever possible, shall have the knob integral with bolts. In
case it is not possible to provide a single piece construction of bolt, the knob may preferably be
fitted to the bolts with a pin or alternatively screwed and riveted to the bolts, and its shape may
be round, half round spherical or conical as directed, and of robust construction.
10.13.26 Where diameter of bolt for particular size of tower bolts is stated in the IS as 10 or 12 mm,
the bolt shall be of 10 mm dia upto size 125 mm and 12 mm dia for sizes 150mm and above.
10.13.27 All Stainless steel tower bolts made with steel 1.2 mm thick steel sheet and above shall have
counter sunk screw holes.
11.0 BUILDERS HARDWARE
11.1 The contractor shall produce the samples of each article of builder’s hardware which he
proposes to use and get the same approved in writing by the Garrison Engineer. Articles of
builder’s hardware shall bear ISI mark, wherever available.
11.2 The type of builder's hardware shall be as follows:-
(a) Butt hinges shall be of stainless steel (with stainless steel pin) and shall be of bright finish
with smooth surface. The butt hinges shall be of size 101 mm length, open width 76 mm
and thickness 1.80 mm.
(b) Double / single action spring hinges and catches shall be of mild steel.
(c) Coat hooks/pegs shall be of Stainless steel 304 grade.
(d) All other articles / fittings of builder's hardware shall be of extruded sections, Stainless
steel 304 grade unless superior specification than above has been mentioned in
drawings.
(e) All hardware shall be fixed with steel cadmium plated Stainless steel 304 grade screws.
11.3 The type pattern and size of Stainless steel fittings shall be as follows:-
(a) Aldrop bolts (sliding door bolt) shall be provided to doors where indicated on these shall
be with hasp and staples (bolt type) and fixing clips etc. complete and shall conform to
IS-2681. Aldrop bolts shall be fixed with nuts and bolts only.
(b) Hasp and staples shall be of safety pattern plate type.
(c) Hooks and eyes shall be plate type and the hooks shall be out of extruded section.
(d) Door handles shall be of plain pattern with back plate. The diameter of the bars shall be
10mm.
(e) Barrel bolt/tower bolts shall be provided with 10mm dia shoot upto 150mm and
12mm dia shoot above 150mm.
(f) Sliding latch shall be 200mm long of 15.5 x 9mm flat slide.
(g) Wherever shown on drawing, magic eye shall be provided in the main entrance door of
each quarter as approved by GE.
(h) Screws for all fittings shall match the respective fittings, both in materials and finish
except that screws for anodised aluminium fittings shall be of steel cadmium plated.
(i) Piano type hinges shall be continuous type and shall be of stainless steel, bright finish.
(k) All Aluminium Doors shall be provided with Self closing system of Hydraulically
regulated exposed type door closure all as specified in Para 9.16.1, Section 9 of SSR Part-I-
2009.
12.0 STEEL AND IRON WORK

12.1 All steel required for the work under the Contract shall be procured, supplied and in the work by
the Contractor under his own agreement.
12.2 GRADES & QUALITY

Steel supplied by the Contractor shall conform to the following grades and quality:
(a) Steel for concrete reinforcement shall be provided at locations as shown on drawing and as
specified here-in-after :-
(i) CRS TMT steel of grade Fe 500D manufactured by SAIL, TISCO, RINL or from Primary
Producers all as specified in para 12.3 (b) here-in-after conforming to IS-1786 shall be
incorporated. If bars of above grades are not available due to manufacturing status next higher
grade may be used without revising the design and without any price adjustment.
(ii) Where indicated as HIGH YIELD STRENGTH DEFORMED BARS, it shall be high strength
deformed steel bars conforming to IS-1786-1985 (Reaffirmed 1990) & grades Fe 500D.
(iii) Irrespective of whatsoever is specified elsewhere, all steel for reinforcement shall be
corrosion resistant steel of grade SAIL 500D HRC/TATA TISCON CRSD (Fe 500D)/ RINL CRS
Fe 500D or equivalents of other manufacturer as specified.
(b) Structural steel

(i) Structural steel standard quality shall be of grade E 250 (Fe 410W quality)
conforming to IS 2062-2006. This type of steel shall be provided in the locations
mentioned in clause 10.4.1 of MES Schedule Part I.
(ii) Structural steel ordinary quality shall be of grade E 165 (Fe 290 quality) conforming to IS
1977. This type of steel shall be used for structure not subjected to dynamic loading. This type
of steel will not be used where welding is used in fabrication and in the areas falling in the earth
quake zone where severe damage is expected and design of structure is based on plastic
theory. This type of steel shall be provided in the locations specified in clause 10.4.2 of MES
Schedule Part-I.
(c) Hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement:
Fabric reinforcement shall conform to IS-1566, 1982.
Note: Any items of steel specified in clause 12.2 (a) to (c) above not conforming in grade and quality
shall be rejected and the rejected steel items under the particular consignment shall be removed from
the site by the Contractor at his own cost within 7 (seven) days. The Contractor will have no claim
whatsoever on this account.
12.3 SOURCE OF PROCUREMENT

(a) Structural Steel/Plates
The contractor shall procure structural steel from the main producer viz., (i) SAIL (ii) TATA
TISCON (iii) RashtriyaIspat Nigam Ltd/Primary Producers viz (iv) M/s Jindal Steels and Power
Ltd, Plot No. 2, Sector – 32, Gurgaon – 122001, Haryana, Tele: 0124 661 2000, Fax: 0124 661
2125, Website: www.jindalsteelpower.com.
(b) CRS TMT Steel: Steel required for the work shall be procured by contractor from Primary
Producers viz.
APPROVED LIST OF MAKES / MANUFACTURES OF B/R ITEMS TO BE INCORPORATED OF ALL

MES FMNS & ITS SUBORDINATE
(a) Structural Steel/Plates
SI Company Name & Address Type of Steel
No Brand
1. Rashtriya Ispat Nigam Visakhapatnam Steel Plant
Limited Visakhapatnam - 530 031, India Structural Steel
(RINL) Tel: (91 891) 518226, 518376 (Angle, Beam,
Fax: (91 891) 518316 Column,
Brand: "RINL" Email: cmdvsp@itpvis.ap.nic.in Channel, Plate)
2. Tata Iron & Steel Bombay House, 2, 4 Homi Modi Street

Company (TISCO, Mumbai - 400 001, India
or Tata Steel) Tel: (91 22) 204 9131 -Do-
Fax: (91 22) 204 9522, 287 0840
Brand: "TATA" Email: corpcomm@jsr.tatasteel.com
(Br office for North : Jeevan Tara Bldg, Patel
Chowk , New Delhi)
3. Steel Authority of India Central Marketing Organization, -Do-

Limited Northern Region
(SAIL) 17th Floor, scope Minar,
Laxmi Nagar Distt. Centre,
Brand: "SAIL" Delhi — 110092
4. M/S Jindal Steels and Jindal centre, -Do-

Power Ltd. Plot No 2, Sector- 32,
Gurgaon-122001, Haryana
Brand: "JINDAL" Tele - 0124 661 2000
Fax - 0124 661 2125
Website: www.jindalsteelpower.com
(b) TMT- CRS Steel for Reinforcement: Reinforcement Steel required for the work shall be
procured by contractor from Primary Producers viz.
Sl Firm Name & Brand Address Size / Dia and

No Type
(i) Steel Authority of India Central Marketing Organization, For all types &
Limited (SAIL) Northern Region, 17th Floor, dia of TMT bars
Brand: “SAIL” Scope Minar, Laxmi Nagar Distt.
Centre Delhi – 110 092
(ii) Tata Iron & Steel Company Bombay House, 2, 4 Homi Modi -do-
(TISCO or TATA steel) St Tel: (91 22) 204 9131,
Brand: “TATA” Fax :(91 22) 204 9522, 287 0840,
Email:corpcomm@jsr.tatasteel.com
(Br office for North : Jeevan Tara Bldg,
Patel Chowk , New Delhi)
(iii) Rashtriya Ispat Nigam Visakhapatnam Steel Plant, -do-

Limited (RINL) Visakhapatnam – 530 031, India,
Brand: “RINL” Tel: (91 891) 518226, 518376,
Fax: (91 891) 518316,
Email : cmdvsp@itpvis.ap.nic.in

No Type
(iv) M/s SRMB Srijan Ltd SRMB House, 7, Khetra das TMT Bars of
Brand: “SRMB” Lane, Kolkata – 700 012, Tel : GdeFe 500,Fe
033 – 6600 6600, Fax 500D, Fe 550
: 033 –2211 0483 &Fe550D
(8mm to 32mm)
(v) M/s Jindal Steels & Power OP Jindal Road, Hissar, Haryana, TMT Bars of Gde
Ltd Pin-125 005, Fe
Brand: “JINDAL Tel : +91 1662 222471-84, 500, Fe 500D, Fe
PANTHER” Fax : +91 1662 220476 550 & Fe 550D
(vi) M/s Steel Exchange India My Home Laxminivas Apartments, TMT Bars of Gde
Ltd Ameerpet, Hyderabad – 500 016, Fe
Brand: “SIMHADRI TMT” A.P, Tel : 040-23403725, 500 & Fe 500D
Fax : 040-23413267,
E-mail :info@seil.co.in
(vii) M/s Jai Balaji Industries Ltd 5, Bentek Street, Kolkata -700 TMT Bars of Gde
Brand: “JAI BALAJI” 001, Delhi Office 510, Block-b, Fe
Navraung House 21, Kasturba 500 & Fe 500D
Gandhi Marg, New Delhi- 110
001, 011-43620219, 43620220,
Mob: 7838272772/9958936103,
E-mail- info@jaibalajigroup.com
(viii) M/s Shyam Steel Industries Shyam Towers EN-32, Sector-V, TMT Bars of Gde
Ltd Salt Lake, Kolkata – 700 091, Fe 500, Fe 500D
Brand: “SHYAM” Tel : 033-40074007, & CRS
Fax : 033-40074010,
E-mail:
marketing@shyamsteel.com
(ix) M/s Gallent Metal Ltd Ward 10BC, Plot No 123, TMT Bars of Gde
Ground Floor, Gandhi Dham Fe 500
Brand: “GALLENT TMX” Kutch, Gujarat-370201 Fe 500D
Tel: +91-2836-228164 CRS
Fax: +91-2836-235787 (Size 8-32mm)
E-mail: gml@gallantt.com
Website: www.gallantt.com
(x) M/s Rashmi Metaliks Ltd Premlata Building,39, TMT Bars of Gde
Shakespeare Sarani, Fe 500
Brand: “RASHMI TMX” 6th Floor, Kolkate-700017 (Size 8-32mm)
Tel: 033-22894255/56 Fe 500D, Fe550D
Fax: 033-22894254 (Size 8-25mm)
E-mail:
mkt.domesticdip@rashmigroup.com
Website: www. rashmigroup.com
(xi) M/s Real Ispat & Power Ltd Vrindavan, Near IDBI Bank TMT Bars of Gde
Civil Lines Fe 500
Brand: “G K TMT” Raipur-492001, C.G. Fe 500D
Tel: + 91-771-4224000 (Size 8-36mm)
Fax: + 91-771-4224010
E-mail: real@realispat.com
Website: www. Realispat.com
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS(Contd…)

No Type
(xii) M/s Super Smelters Ltd, Premlata, TMT Bars of Gde
Kolkata. 39, Shakespeare Sarani Fe 500
3th, Kolkate-700017 Fe 500D, Fe 550
Brand: “SUPER SHAKTI” Tele/Fax: + 91-33-2289-2734/36 (Size 8-32mm)
E-mail: info@supershakti.in
Website: www. Supershakti.in
NOTE:-
(a) Any primary producer not included above but already approved by E-n-C Branch and also
approved during execution shall be deemed to be included without any price adjustment.
(b) The steel shall conform to the requirements as stated in clause 12.2 above. The documents in
support of the purchase of steel shall be verified by the site staff and GE. The particulars of the
manufacturer/supplier of steel shall be obtained from the contractor for every lot of steel
separately. The form given at Appendix `F` will be used for this purpose.
(c) The Contractor shall place their demand/requisition of steel with adequate lead-time. The steel
shall be purchased from the storage depots of the main producers and not from their authorized
agents/dealers as the authorized agents/dealers deal with the steel manufactured by more than
one manufacturer. It is therefore necessary and mandatory to be ensured by the GE that steel is
not purchased by the Contractor directly from the “Authorized Conversion Agent” or from the
“Authorized Dealer/Agent” of the Main producers.
(d) However, non structural steel as for hold fast railing and the structural steel where total
requirement under the contract in less than 5.0 tonnes may be procured locally after obtaining
permission of the GE in writing.
(e) The name of manufacturer of steel if has been added/deleted by E-in-C’s branch are also
deemed to be added/ deleted in the approved list.
(f) The Contractor shall submit original vouchers from the manufacturer for the total quantity of
steel supplied under each consignment to be incorporated in the work. All consignments
received at the work site shall be inspected by the GE along with the relevant documents before
acceptance. The original test certificates and vouchers shall be defaced by the Engineer-in-
Charge and kept on the record in the office of the GE duly authenticated and with cross
reference to the control number recorded in the Steel Acceptance Register. The Steel
Acceptance Register, as given at Appendix-‘F’ shall be signed by the JE, Engineer-in-Charge,
the GE and the Contractor. The Accepting Officer may order a Board of Officers for random
check of steel and verification of connected document. The entire quantity of all steel items shall
also be suitably recorded in the Measurement Book for record purposes as ‘not to be
Abstracted’, before incorporation in the work and shall be signed by the Engineer-in-Charge and
the Contractor.
12.4 MINIMUM FREQUENCY OF TESTING FOR EACH SOURCE & EACH CONSIGNMENT:
Steel for concrete reinforcement

(i) Bar size less than 10mm One sample (3 specimens) for each test for
every 25 Tonnes or part thereof
(ii) Bar size 10mm to 16mm One sample (3 specimens) for each test for
(inclusive) every 35 Tonnes or part thereof
(iii) Bar size over 16mm One sample (3 specimens) for each test for
every 45 Tonnes or part thereof
Structural Steel
(i) Tensile Test One Test for every 25 tonnes of steel or Part
thereof
(ii) Bend Test One Test for every 25 tonnes of steel or part
thereof
.
(a) For high strength deformed bars tensile, bend test &rebend test shall be done as per IS-
1786 of 1975. For MS bars tensile & bend test shall be carried out as per IS-432 of 1982.
(b)Testing by the GE as per above frequency is mandatory before payment is released to the
contractor or steel is incorporated in the work. However, tests will not be insisted upon for the
steel required for guard bars, holdfasts, grills and such other allied items. Any items of steel, not
meeting the requirements, shall be rejected and the particular consignment removed from the
site by the contractor at his own cost. The contractor will have no claim on this account. The
cost of tests and test samples as per above frequency.
(c) Cost of transportation of samples to the approved laboratory/test house and all testing
charges shall be borne by the contractor.
12.5 Storage:- Steel supplied by the contractor shall be stored in accordance with the requirement
ofBIS. Each grade and quality of steel shall be stored separately & have identification tags
indicating the source, quality & grade.
12.6 Preservation and Maintenance of Steel:- The steel brought by the contractor shall be
preservedto ensure that no rusting takes place till it is incorporated in the works.
12.7 Schedule of Supply:- The contractor shall procure the steel sections, timely as required
inaccordance with CPM chart, agreed between GE and the contractor. The contractor will have
no right to demand extension of time if the supply of steel got delayed due to his failure in
placing order in time to the manufacturers/suppliers.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS Part-II(Contd…)
12.8 Payment:- Receiving payment of steel shall be governed by in accordance with condition 64
ofIAFW- 2249. Payment shall be allowed after production of test certificate & original
paid/purchase vouchers by the contractor.
12.9 Measurement: The entire quantity of steel brought to the site shall be recorded in
measurementbook ‘Not to be Abstracted’ indicating the reference to manufacturer, source of
supply, voucher No. & test certificate before incorporation in the work & shall be signed both by
the Engineer-in-Charge & the contractor. Proper documentation/record shall be maintained as
per the instructions on the subject.
12.10 Weight Conversion: Weight of steel supplied by the contractor shall be calculated at unitweights
given in Appendix ‘A’ of MES Schedule 2020 Part II. For section not listed in MES Schedule,
the ISI conversion table shall be followed or manufacturers certificate if the weights are not
available in MES Schedule/ISI tables.
12.11 Normal waste & off cuts shall be stacked neatly which shall be the property of the contractor.
Contractor shall be allowed to remove such cut pieces after inspection & certification by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
12.12 Advance on account payment made towards these cut pieces shall be recovered from advance
on account of payment immediately falling due & before removal of such cut pieces from site.
12.13 Bending & fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement including mild steel wire for binding shall be
carried out all as specified in MES Schedule.
12.14 Hooks shall be provided only for mild steel bars. In case of cold twisted / deformed /TMT steel
bars ends shall be bent instead of hooks as shown on drawings.
12.15 Binding wire for reinforcement shall be mild steel wire (annealed) of size not less than 0.9mm.
12.16. FIELD TEST ON RING FORMATION USING NITRIC ACID AND METHANOL FOR
DIFFERENCIATIONG TMT FROM TOR STEEL
12.16.1 A field test of ring formation using Nitric acid and Methanol shall be carried out to differentiate
TMT from TOR steel. The test shall be conducted in the presence of Engineer-in –Charge/ MES
rep and the contractor / his authorized representative and the test results shall be recorded and
duly signed by the Engineer-in Charge and the contractor and countersigned by GE.
12.16.2 The test shall be carried out as mentioned below:-

a) Solution of Nitric acid and Methanol is prepared by using 2% of Nitric acid and 98% of
Methanol
b) Steel rod to be checked is cut into small pieces of 200 mm length and cross section
is smoothened by sand paper.
c) Rod is kept in contact with above solution for 24 hours.
d) Annular ring is visible on cross section in case of TMT. If the ring is not visible, then steel is
not TMT steel.
12.17 STEEL SUPPLY/ACCEPTANCE FORM:

For each consignment of steel supply/acceptance form (Refer Appendix ‘F’) will be filled in &
jointly signed by the department representative (AGE / JE (CIVIL)) and contractor and
accepted/rejected by GE before incorporation in the works. (Note: - Steel supply/acceptance
form will be issued by GE.)
12.18 STEEL REINFORCEMENT:

Reinforcement shall be fabricated, placed in position all as shown on drawings and specified in
Clause 10.17 to 10.22 of MES Schedule (Part I) without application of heat.
12.19: VENETIAN BLINDS

Venetian blinds shall be provided to all windows except toilets. Venetian blinds shall be of fabric
base vertical type, selected type and colour shall be provided in window width.
12.20 Woven wire cloth/wire gauze, wherever indicated on drawings shall be amended to read as
aluminium anodized XPM jalli. Aluminium anodised XPM jalli shall conform to IS-665, and shall
be of 24 gauge with 1.40mm average width of aperture.
12.21 FAN HOOK BOX
Fan hook box shall be provided where fans and fan hook boxes are indicated in the drawing.
Fan hook box shall be of PVC with stainless steel hook as per details in drawing. Surfaces of
steel shall be painted as specified hereinafter.
12.22 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
12.22.1 All Structural steel work in trusses, purlins, braces etc. shall be carried out all as shown on
drawing and specified in clause 10.4 to 10.16 of MES SSR Part- I. Structural steel work shall
be conforming of 410- S as per IS 226 and 2062 and shall have yield stress more than 250 N/
Sq.mm.
12.22.2 Bolts, nuts and washers except purpose made bolts shall be all as specified in clause 10.7 of
MES SSR Part- I and conforming to IS- 2016 and IS – 6610. Spring washers shall conform to
IS- 3063.
12.22.3 All structural steel members shall be treated with one shop coat of red oxide primer after
fabrication but before assembly and erection and one under coat and one finishing coat of
synthetic enameled paint after erection all as directed by Engineer in Charge.
12.22.4 Sizes of gusset plates for the trusses and bracing shall be as shown on drg. and shall be within
parameters of IS- 800. All gusset plates and steel members shall confirm to high strength bolts
as per IS clause 4000 of 1992
12.22.5 All anchor plates shall conform to high strength bolts as per IS clause 4000 of 1992
12.23 WELDING :
12.23.1 Welding wherever shown on drawings shall be by metal arc process in accordance with IS-
816 and IS-823.
12.24 HOLD FASTS/ LUGS
12.24.1 Flat iron hold fasts/lugs shall be provided by welding as and where shown on drgs,
(however minimum thickness shall not be less than 5mm) except those chowkats which shall be fixed
with bolts/nuts as per details shown on drawings. Holes in wooden chowkats shall be plugged with
hard wood plugs. The hold fasts/lugs shall be embedded in PCC 1:2:4 blocks (Type B) for one brick
thick and over shall be of size 230x230x150mm and that for half brick wall shall be 230 x 115 x 150mm
for doors and 100x100x100mm for windows/ventilators respectively. However, GE may allow to use
adequate number of approved DASH THRIUGH fasting bolts in case of steel windows/doors to be feed
with RCC columns where not shown on drawing without any price adjustment.
12.25 STAINLESS STEEL RAILING

Provide Stainless steel railing all as shown on drawing and as directed of grade SS-316. The minimum
thickness of pipe/square shall be 2 mm for above 25mm dia and 1.5 mm thickness for pipes/square
25mm dia and below.
Note for clause No 12.25

The above sections shall be as per Appendix ‘B’. The contractor is at liberty to choose section
from approved makes with minor variation in sizes and weights on higher side as approved by GE.
However, nothing extra shall be paid for over size and over weight sections. The plain glass sheet of
thickness 5.5mm to 6 mm for doors and 4mm to 5mm for windows shall be provided. Make of Glass
and fabrication of aluminium door shall be as mentioned in Appendix ‘B’.
12.26 ALUMINIUM SOUND PROOF WINDOWS(For Annexe buildings)
All windows in Annexe buildings shall be aluminium windows with double glazed sound proofing fixed
glazing (6mm thick clear glass) type with central/ side 600mm openable. The windows shall be so
designed to maintain noise level in the range of 60 decibels in the rooms. Noise level due to air craft
operations is 85 decibels and above. Thickness of End and Middile mullion profiles shall not be less
than 1.5mm. Thickness of double glazed shutter shall not be less than 1.3mm. Thickness of inverse
profile shall not be less than 1.4mm. Thickness of DGU clip shall not be less than 1.1mm. All
necessary EPDM gaskets, sealant, PVC packings and bracket rods to be provided as per requirement
to achieve the desired noise level.
12.27 DOUBLE SKINNED GI DOOR (For Annexe buildings)

Double skinned GI doors with 0.8mm thick GI sheet for shutter (confirming to IS 277) 1.2mm thick GI
sheet for frame of profile 100mm x58mm (confirming to IS 4351-2003. Overall thickness of door is
46mm with honeycomb craft paper filling, with circular vision panel, without louvers coated with epoxy
polyster/Pure polyster/ Polyurethene) complete with hinges, door closure complete with stainless steel
ball bearing butt hinges (4 Nos per shutter), Hydraulic door closure (01 No) Mortise sash lock with
lever handles and flush bolts for double shutter doors to be provided.
12.28 ROLLING SHUTTERS: (Except Hangar)
(a) Steel rolling shutters shall be factory made conforming to IS-6248, self coiling (push pull)
type or reduction gear type (as described in clause 10.23 of MES Schedule Part I) and shall be
provided wherever indicated in the drawings.
The steel rolling shutters shall be with top cover and fixed on lintel/beam as indicated on drawing.
Specifications for shutters shall be as given in clause 10.23 of MES Schedule Part I. Rolling shutters
shall be of design to withstand a wind pressure of 100 Kg/Sqm. The thickness of steel slats shall be
1.25mm may be fabricated with hot rolled black sheet in lieu of cold rolled as given in IS. Three number
ball bearings per shutter and ratable mild steel pulleys in lieu of CI pulleys shall be provided. Hood
cover shall be of 1mm thick MS sheet fixed to brackets. Thermal insulation rubber gaskets shall be
provided to the sides and bottom rolling shutters wherever shown on drawings.
(b) Rolling shutters and fittings shall be treated with one coat of approved anticorrosive paint (shop
coat of paint) before fixing and two coats of approved aluminium paint after fixing, all as specified for
painting to steel surfaces in SSR Part I.
(c) For the purpose of deviation, the rates given in relevant items of SSR (Part II) shall be applicable.
These rates shall however be subject to contractor’s percentage given in relevant section of Schedule
‘A’.
13.0 RCC ROOF(SLOPING): - RCC roof slabs shall be laid to the slope as shown in drawings. Slab
surfaces shall be roughened and 15 mm thick plaster in CM 1:4 mixed with water proofing admixture
shall be applied on roof slab when the concrete is still green to bring it to level and grade as specified.
After RCC slab is laid, plastered as above and fully cured and set, ponding shall be done over RCC
slab by filling water which shall be kept there for 48 hours. In case a slightest indication of seepage/
leakage is noticed, the same shall be rectified by grouting the affected portion at no extra cost.
Thereafter ponding test shall be repeated till these is no indication of seepage/leakage. A proper
record for ponding Test of RCC slabs shall be maintained by GE.
13.1 WATER PROOFING TREATMENT: The contractor shall carryout water proofing work over roof
to ensure the entire roof water tightness during the guarantee period of 10 years and he will be
responsible to keep the entire surface of roof water tight for a period of 10 years from certified date of
completion of work. The security Deposit at the rate of 2.5% of the waterproofing treatment work done
amount towards the guarantee for water proofing treatment shall be retained from the RAR/final bill
amount. The amount shall be released to the contractor after the satisfactory completion of TEN
YEARS guarantee period. During the guarantee period if any leakage is found out same shall be got
rectified by the contractor without any extra cost to the Government. In any case during the guarantee
period the contractor who executed the WPT works should inspect and examine the treatment once in
every year and make good any defects observed. Defects liability period of one year as laid down
under condition 46 of IAFW-2249 is not applicable for water proofing work covered under this contract
and shall be deemed to be amended to the extent mentioned above for WPT work. Garrison Engineer
may accept Bank Guarantee Bond from Schedule Bank or fixed deposit receipt (pledged in favour of
GE) from any approved Bank for the above said amount for a period of 10 years in which case no
further amount will be recovered from the final bill on this account.
13.2 Tenderer shall submit 10 years guarantee certificate (as per Performa enclosed herewith) duly
undertaking and accepting the responsibility to carryout all required rectifications at his own risk and
cost. In case of contractor’s failure to carryout the rectifications, the Government shall be at liberty to
get all such rectifications carried out at his risk and cost from security amount. Tenderer is required to
visit the buildings in which the water proofing treatment is to be done in order to ascertain the exact
nature and extent of work involved. His quoted rate in the Schedule ‘A’ Part I Item No 1 against the
respective items shall be deemed to include for the following aspects for effective water proofing
treatment and no extra claim on whatever account will be entertained from the contractor.
13.3 WATER PROOFING MEMBRANE

APP modified water proofing membrane incorporate in the work for WPT shall be obtained from one of
the following manufacturers:-
(a) SUPER THERMOLAY: Manufactured by: STP limited (Formarly Shalimar

Products, B-46, Hind Road Extension, Calcutta -08
(b) CHEMSTIK Chemisol Adhesives Pvt Ltd, 7/10 Botawala Building,
2nd floor, Hormiman Circle, Fort, Mumbai-23 (Ph
2661936, 2625389 & 2625520)
(c) MOPLY Manufactured by TEXSA INDIA LTD A-418, 1st floor,
DLF City, GURGAON -02
d) HYPER PLAST Manufactured by IWL Ltd
e) Dr Fixit Torch shield P4160 Manufactured by Pidilite Industries
SUPREME BITUMEN Manufactured by SUPREME BITUMEN PVT LTD
Block No. 13/14, Sevasadan Square, Central
Avenue, Nagpur PIN-440 018 Tel: 0712-2777833,
Cell:7875000100
E-mail: customercare@upremebituchem.com
13.4 APPLICATION AND WATER PROOFING OVER ROOF
13.4.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
After rectification is completed, top surface of the RCC roof slabs shall be thoroughly cleaned of
any dust, loose materials, grease etc with wire/coir brushes. The surface shall than be
thoroughly washed with fresh water.
13.4.2 FIVE LAYERED WATER PROOFING TREATMENT WITH ATACTIC POLYPROPYLENE

POLYMER MODIFIED PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE
(i) Atactic Polypropylene Polymer modified prefabricated five-layer water proofing membrane shall be
of 3 mm thickness with non-woven polyester matt.
(ii) The prefabricated five layered black finish water proofing membrane comprises of centre core of
170 gsm nonwoven polyester matt sandwiched on both sides by APP polymer modified bitumen
which is protected on both sides by 20 micron thermofusible polyethylene sheet. Composite
thickness of the membrane including all five layers shall be 3 mm with non-woven polyester matt.
(iii) Primer:Bitumen primer for bitumen membrane shall have density at 25°C in the range of 0.87 - 0.89
kg/litre and viscosity of 70-160 CPS primer shall be applied @ of 0.40 litre/sqm.
(iv) Laying:
Bitumen primer @ 0.40 lts/sqm shall be applied to the prepared roof, drain and all other surfaces where
polymer modified membrane is to be laid.
a) The five layered water proofing membrane shall be laid using Butane torch and sealing all joints
and preparing the surface complete.
b) Drain outlets shall be given same treatment as specified for the roof in the description of the
item in the manner specified for the flat roof surface.
c) Water proofing treatment shall be carried into the drain pipe or outlets by at least 10 cm.
d) The water proofing treatment laid on the roof surface shall overlap the upper edge of the water
proofing treatment in the drain outlets by at least 10 cm.
e) The APP polymer modified prefabricated water proofing membrane shall be cut to the required
length.
f) Water proofing membrane shall normally be laid in length in the direction of the slope and laying
shall be commenced at the lowest level and worked upto crest.
g) APP water proofing membrane shall be laid in 6 to 8 m lengths.
j) The roof surface shall be cleaned and bitumen primer shall be applied in the correct quantity,
over this specified water proofing membrane shall be laid with butane torch after allowing 24
hours for primer to dry.
k) Each strip shall overlap the preceding one by at least 10 cm. at the longitudinal edges and 15
cm. at the ends.
l) All overlaps shall be firmly bonded with bitumen primer and levelled by heating the overlap with
butane torch.
m) APP water proofing membrane shall be laid as flashing wherever junction of vertical and
horizontal surfaces occurs.
n) Longitudinal laps shall be 100 mm.
o) The upper edge of flashing membrane shall be well tucked into the flashing grooves in the
parapets, chimney stack etc. to a depth of not less than 6.5 cm; corresponding applications of
primer coat shall also be made.
p) The flashing treatment shall be firmly held in the grooves and it shall be sealed with the
approved sealant after terminating the membrane.
q) Where parapet walls are of height 45 cm or less APP water proofing membrane flashing shall be
provided in the same manner as for splashing in the case of high parapet walls except that
upper edge shall be carried out to the full height of the wall and taken right across the top of the
parapet and down on the external vertical faces to a minimum distance of 5 cm.
r) Finishing surface with solar reflective bituminous aluminium paint, @ 100 gm/ Sqm. The materials
used in water proofing treatment shall be eco-friendly and shall be any one of the make listed in
List of approved materials here in after.
(v) FINISHING LAYER FOR INACCESSIBLE ROOF : In case of non accessible roof, the APP
membrane shall be finished with solar reflective bituminous aluminium paint @ 0.1kg/sqm,
over the above specifications.
(vi) FINISHED LAYER OF WATER PROOFING TREATMENT: In case of accessible roof ,

provide PCC tile of size 300x300x22mm thick over 15 mm thick cement mortar (1:4)
bedding layer , jointing & pointing of tiles in neat cement slurry over APP membrane.
13.5 Wherever junction of vertical and horizontal structures occur a groove of size 75 x 65mm shall
be formed at a height of 15 cm above roof level for tucking in edge of water proofing treatment
in case of brick wall etc. The groove shall coincide with the horizontal joint of brick course and
shall be shaped with cement and sand mortar (1:3). In case of junction between RCC beam/
parapet etc. PCC 1:2:4 coving with 75mm in radius shall be provided. Cost of aboveprovision
shall be deemed to include in the quoted rate against respective Items of Schedule ‘A’ Part I.
13.6 TESTING OF MEMBRANE
The following tests shall be carried out in approved Government Laboratories and necessary
test reports shall be submitted to Garrison Engineer for the materials before incorporation in the
work
a) Thickness of membrane b) Weight of membrane
c) Tensile strength (Longitudinal/Crosswise) d) Tear Resistance
e) Softening point f) Weight of Carrier (Polyester).

Apart from above tests contractor shall also produce manufactures test certificate. Test
certificate shall be produced with every consignment of material brought at site by the
contractor.
13.7 TEMPLATE (LABEL)

Template (Label) made of 15mm thick plaster in CM (1:3) of size 60 x 60 cm showing the
following particulars shall be provided on each bldg before the final completion of work without
any extra cost to the Department: -
(a) Name of Contractor

(c) Date of completion
(b) CA Number
(d) Guarantee period
The above information shall be written with white paint with 5 cm size letters and numbers. The entire
quantity of materials such as water proofing membrane bitumen primer, bitumen and bituminous
aluminium paint etc required for the whole work shall be brought at site in sealed position and shall be
entered in the MB as ‘NOT TO BE ABSTRACTED’ showing the date, total quantity brought. Each seal
shall be opened in front of Engineer-in-Charge only. Paid vouchers from authorized dealer shall be
submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge immediately after every consignment and copy of such paid
voucher shall be forwarded to Garrison Engineer by Engineer-in-Charge duly endorsed
13.8 GUARANTEE TO BE EXECUTED BY CONTRACTOR FOR REMOVAL OF DEFECTS AFTER

COMPLETION IN RESPECT OF WATER PROOFING WORKS.
This agreement made this ___day of ______ two thousand_________between
___________of_______________(sonof_________________
of________________________ (hereinafter called guarantor on the one part) and the
PRESIDENT OF INDIA (hereinafter called the Government on other part).
WHEREAS THIS agreement is supplementary to a contract hereinafter called the contract)

dated ________________ and made between the GUARANTOR of the one part and the
GOVERNMENT on the other part where by the contractor interalia, undertook render the
buildings and structures in the said contract recited completely water and leak proof.
AND WHEREAS THE GUARANTOR agreed to give a guarantee to effect that the said
structures will remain water leak proof for ten years from the certified date of completion.
NOW THE GUARANTOR hereby guarantees that water proofing treatment given by him will
render the structures completely leak proof and the minimum life of such water proofing
treatment shall be Ten years to be reckoned from the certified date of completion.
Provided that the guarantor will not be responsible for leakages caused by earthquakes or
structural defects or misuse of roof and sunken floor slabs or alterations and for such purpose.
a) Misuse of and sunken floor slabs shall mean by operation which will damage roofing
treatment, like chopping of firewood and things of the same nature which might cause
damage to the roof.
b) Alteration shall mean construction of any additional storey or any part of roof or
construction adjoining to existing roof, where by roofing treatment is removed in parts.
And removal of finishes of sunken portion of slabs.
c) The decision of the Garrison Engineer with regard to cause of leakage shall be final and
binding. During this period of guarantee the guarantor shall make good all defects and in
case of any defects being found, render the building water proof and finish the disturbed
surfaces as existed to the satisfaction of Garrison Engineer at his cost and shall
commence the work for such rectification within seven days from the date of issue of the
notice from the Garrison Engineer calling upon him to rectify the defects, failing which
the work shall be got done by the department by some other contractor at the
GUARANTOR’S risk and cost. The decision of the Garrison Engineer as to the cost,
payable by the Guarantor shall be final and binding. That if the Guarantor fails to
execute the water proofing or commit breach there under then the Guarantor will
indemnify the Principal and his successors against all loss, damage, cost expense or
otherwise which may be incurred by him by reason of any default on the part of
GUARANTOR in performance and observing of this supplementary agreement. As to
the amount of loss and/or damage and/or cost incurred by the Government, the decision
of the Garrison Engineer will be final and binding on the parties.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF these presents have been executed by the obligator

____________and by _________for and on behalf of the PRESIDENT OF INDIA on the day
month and year first above written.
SIGNED sealed and delivered by OBLIGATOR in the presence of :-
1.
2.
SIGNED ON BEHALF OF THE PRESIDENT OF INDIA BY ________________ .
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS Part-II (Contd…)
14.0 WATER PROOFING TREATMENT TO SUNKEN SLAB/PORTION
14.1 The water proofing treatment to sunken slab /portion shall be provided as mentioned below:-
(a) The sunken slab shall laid to a slope of 1:40 outwards with GI pipe (MG) spout as
shown on drawing, projecting atleast 150mm beyond outer face of wall. A coving of 75mm size
shall be provided using PCC M-15 type B0 at the junction of vertical and horizontal surface of
the sunken floors.
(b) 15mm thick plaster in cement sand mortar (1:4) mixed with water proofing compound
(conform to IS 2645-Specifictions for integral cement water proofing compound) as approved as
per manufacturer’s instructions shall be applied both on floor and wall. The surfaces then shall
be cured and allowed to dry. All the joints of pipe shall be sealed properly as per the instruction
of agency who is carrying out water proofing treatment.
(c) Apply a coat of Moisture Cured High Tensile Elastomeric Modified Poly Urethane Based
Liquid Membrane on floor as well as on wall as per manufacturer’s instructions of
make/manufacturers as specified in clause 10.2 here-in-before. After the treatment is over,
sunken portion shall be kept full of water for atleast one week to check that no seepage is seen
from the external surface.
(d) Sunken floor then shall be filled with PCC M-10 (Nominal mix) using 20mm graded
crushed stone aggregate complete all as specified to receive floor toping as specified after
carrying out the required tests of water proofing.
15.0 SOIL, WASTE, RAIN WATER PIPES AND ACCESSORIES
15.1 Where ever soil,waste,rain water pipes shown on drawings, the same shall be of UPVC (SWR)
pipes Type ‘A’ conforming to IS:13592 and fittings conforming to IS:14735 of makes as specified in
Appendix ‘B’. The diameter of rain water pipe shown/indicated on drawings as 100mm and 150mm, the
same shall be amended to read as 110mm and 160mm respectively. The pipes and fittings shall be
secured to walls below all joints with mild steel holder bat clamps as specified in clause 11.34.5 of the
MES Schedule Part-I. The colour of pipes shall be as decided by GE. The pipes and fittings shall be
jointed with rubber rings and fixed to walls as indicated.
15.2 Wherever pipe as indicated ‘PVC’, the same shall be read as ‘UPVC (SWR)’. In case of any
deviation in ‘UPVC’ pipe, rate of MES schedule for PVC (SWR) shall be applicable subject to deviation
percentage.
15.3 Where the pipes have been encased in masonry/brick work/concrete works, bracket/holder bat
clamps etc need not be provided for fixing the pipes. Bends will be acceptable in lieu of shoe or nose,
without any price adjustment. Irrespective of what is shown on drawing, the gap between shoe/bend &
plinth protection/splash stone shall be packed with PCC M-10 (Nominal mix). Sealing compound “M”
seal or equivalent shall be provided around rain water pipes passing through RCC chajjas/roof
projections as shown on drawings.
15.4 The grating shall be of CI round type weighing not less than 0.5 Kg each, provided and fixed of
the inlet of rain water pipe.
15.5 Splash stones as specified here-in-before shall be provided below the rain water pipe.
15.6 Spouts and pipe outlet where shown on drawing shall be of GI tubing medium grade as per IS-
1239. Size and length shall be as shown on drawing, wherever, the same is not shown on drawing it
shall be 50mm bore, projecting 250mm beyond outer face of walls. Spout/GI Pipe/Conduit wherever
passed through beam/RCC, it shall be put in position at the time of casting of beam/RCC.
16.0 To 20.0 BLANK

21.0 FLOORING :
21.1 GENERAL :
21.2 Floors of various types shall be provided as specified here-in-after and as shown in drawings.
Floors shall be laid to levels or to falls as shown on drawings/directed by Engr-in-Charge. Floor shall be
sunk below the general floor level to the required depth where shown in drawings, by suitably sinking
the slabs at the time of casting them.
21.3 Floor finish shall be carried over throughout all openings and dwarf walls.
21.4 Surface of concrete floors unless otherwise specified shall be finished even and smooth using
extra cement with steel trowels.
21.5 The dividing line between the floors of different type where ever they so met between adjoining
rooms shall be determined on the basis of finish visible when the doors are closed and the applicable
finish shall accordingly be provided. Exposed edges of floors shall be finished to match with top
surface finish.
21.6 Sub base shall not be laid in panels.
21.7 Cement concrete sub base or sub base floor and wearing coat shall be laid separately and not
monolithically.
21.8 PCC floor topping shall be laid in square or rectangular panels with each side not exceeding 1.2
m.
21.9 If any extra thickness of concrete is required to provide slope in the floor as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, the same shall be provided by the Contractor at no extra cost to the department
21.10 Where floor finish is to be laid over RCC slab, the top surface of RCC slab shall be cleaned with
hard brushes and given a coat of neat cement slurry using 3 Kg of cement per square metre just before
laying the floor finish.
21.11 The lump sum quoted by the tenderer shall also include for cement concrete floors at location
which are obviously and fairly intended and which may not have been specifically referred to in the
tender documents but which are essential for the execution and completion of the work in a workmen
line manner and sound construction.
21.12 Marble aggregate (Chips) shall be of size 7mm to 10mm for terrazzo floors. The colour of
marble chips be as shown on drawings or as approved by GE, when not indicated in drawings but in no
case black marble aggregates (black chips) shall be used.
21.13 MATERIALS
21.13.1 NON SKID CERAMIC TILES
21.13.1.1 Non skid ceramic tiles (Light coloured) shall be vitreous ceramic tiles of Ist quality and of
shade as decided by GE. The make of tile shall be as per Appendix 'B'.
21.13.2 VITRIFIED TILES
21.13.2.1 Irrespective of whatever is shown elsewhere, the Vitrified tiles 8 to 10mm thick shall be of
light coloured of first quality and all as specified in CL 13.5 of SSR part I, 2009 print. Vitrified tiles shall
be of size 600mm x600mm/800mmx 800mm (where specified) fixed with cement sand screed 1:4 and
minimum uniform joint thickness of 3mm. Joints grouted with Epoxygrout “ Ezy grout from Somany”,
“Ferro102 from Ferrous Crete”, Bal Endura,Fevimate TG from Dr Fixit.
21.14 TYPE AND COMPOSITION OF FLOORS
21.14.1 The flooring for all buildings shall be provided in situation as shown on drawings for
Schedule of finishes and specified hereinafter.
21.14.2 Base/Sub base/Sub floors/floors:-
Base/sub base/sub floors/floors shall be provided as per drawing for Schedule of finishes and as
specified below:-
21.15 PCC FLOOR FOR RAMP
100mm thick PCC M-20 (Nominal mix), spike rolling to surface or making impressions of expanded
metal (Chequered finish), whilst the concrete is green over 75mm thick PCC (1:4:8) Type D-2 over
100mm thick hardcore over approved earth filling .
21.16 BLANK
[
21.17 NON SKID TILE FLOORING
(a) Refer Clause 13.40 on Srl page Nos 306 of SSR Part-I
(b) GROUND FLOOR
Non skid ceramic vitreous tile flooring shall be laid after applying neat cement slurry @ 3Kg of
cement per Square meter over bedding 15mm thick screed in CM (1:4) over 30mm thick PCC
M-15 (Nominal mix) 1:2:4 type B-0 using 12.5mm graded stone aggregate over 100mm thick
PCC M-10 (Nominal mix) over rammed earth. The tiles shall be pointed with white cement with
pigment to match the colour of tiles. Colour & design shall be approved by GE.
(c) OTHER THAN GROUND FLOOR

Non skid ceramic vitreous tiles shall be laid after applying neat cement slurry @ 3Kg of cement
per Square meter over bedding 15mm thick screed in CM (1:4) over 30mm thick PCC M-20
(Nominal mix) using 12.5mm graded stone over neat cement slurry as specified over RCC slab.
The tiles shall be pointed with white cement with pigment to match the colour of tiles. Colour &
design shall be approved by GE.
21.18 KOTA STONE FLOORING
Wherever shown on drawing/ Sch of finishes, 18 to 22 mm thick kota stone shall be laid on 20mm thick
screed in Cement Mortar 1:4 over 30mm thick PCC M-15 (Nominal mix) over 100mm thick M-10
(Nominal mix) over rammed earth in floors where indicated in sch of finishes. The size of kota stone
shall not be less than 55cm in length and 55cm in width. The situation where the minimum size of kota
stone does not adjust in that case size of kota stone will be decided by GE whose decision in this regard
shall be final and binding. The type and laying of kota stone shall be as specified in clause No 13.47,
13.47.1 to 13.47.4 of SSR Part-I. In other than ground floor kota stone shall be laid on 20mm thick
screed in Cement Mortar 1:4 over 30mm thick PCC 1:2:4 after applying neat cement slurry @ 3 Kg per
sqm of RCC slab. Kota stone flooring shall be mirror polished to the satisfaction of GE/Engr-in-Charge.
Notes : (i) 100mm wide marble (white/coloured) shall be provided in border of Kota stone flooring as
per pattern directed by Engg-in-Charge. The size (length) of marble strips shall be equal to the size of
kota stone flooring.
(ii) In case of any deviation, pricing of mirror polish shall be done at the net rate of Rs 80/Sqm. No
deviation percentage will be added in rate as mentioned here-in-before. The rate is net and inclusive
of all overhead charges.
21.19 GRANITE STONE FLOORING

Wherever shown on drawing/ Schedule of Finishes, Granite stone 20-25mm thick superior quality shall
be laid on 20mm thick screed bed in cement mortar 1:4 over 30mm thick PCC M-15 (Nominal mix) over
100mm thick PCC M-10 (Nominal mix) over rammed earth in ground floor. In other location other than
ground floor granite stone shall be laid on 20mm thick screed bed in cement mortar 1:4 over 30mm
thick PCC 1:2:4 after applying neat cement slurry @3 Kg/Sqm on RCC slab/ brick steps. The edge of
granite to be bull nosed. The shade of granite should be as decided by GE.
21.20 VITRIFIED TILE
(a) Refer Clause 13.41 on Srl page Nos 306 & 307 of SSR Part-I
(b) GROUND FLOOR
(i) Vitrified tile shall be laid after applying neat cement slurry @ 3Kg of cement per Square
meter over bedding 15mm thick screed in CM (1:4) over 25mm thick PCC M-15 (Nominal mix)
using 20 graded stone aggregate over 100mm thick PCC M-10 (Nominal mix) over rammed
earth.
(c) OTHER THAN GROUND FLOOR
(d) Vitrified tiles shall be laid after applying neat cement slurry @ 3Kg of cement per Square
meter over bedding 15mm thick screed in CM (1:6) over 25mm thick PCC M-15 (nominal (Mix)
over neat cement as specified over RCC slab. The tiles shall be pointed with white cement with
pigment to match the colour of tiles.
21.21 ESD-EPOXY ANTISKID FLOOR COATING SYSTEM:
ESD-Epoxy antiskid floor coating system shall be 5.3 mm thick and provided/applied after
surface prepration by cleaning surface from dust,dirt,muck,moisture and all forgen material and
cleaning by mechanical means using mechanical scrubbing/grinder,chemical treatment for
cleaning oil if required followed by application of primer Nitoprimer 25 of fosroc or equivelant of
sika/Bostic which shall be a two component, Epoxy based system. The pre packed and factory
weighed two component shall be mixed for a 3 min using a low speed drill and applied at 5.5 -
6.5 m2/ltr@ 200 microns thick.Then providing and applyning the screed layer with nitoflor EU5
of Fosroc or equivelant of sika/Bostic at minimum thickness of 3000 microns @ 7.5 m2/pack
@ 2mm thickness . The self levelling screed shall consist of low viscous epoxy system and
graded aggregate (special silica/filler). The pre packed components shall be mixed as per the
paking ratio and applied.The Epoxy underlay shall achieve a minimum compressive strength of
60 n/mm2, flextural stength of 20 n/mm2 and tensile strength of 10N/mm2, 7 days. The
underlay shall have nil water absorption when tested as per BS 1881 Part 122-1983. Over the
screed, apply copper tape of 100 microns thick and 25 mm width,connected to existing eart pit
having spacing 10m both directions, then conductive primer coat Nitoflor SL of Fosroc or
equivalent of Sika/Bostic. Conductive base coat shall be applied at a thickness of 100 microns
and then top coat of 2000 microns- Nitoflor Sl conductive of Fosroc or quivalent in sika/bostic
shall be applied to provide approx 3x103 - 9x103 ohm surface resistance.which shall be applied
in pre-weighed packs and ready to mix and use which will consist of resin, hardner,EPI (colour
concentrate) formulated aggregate and carbon fiber+ special anti skid silic sand /filler.all these
to be mixed in pre wighed ratio,add EPI colour(colour concrete) formulated aggregate + special
antiskid silica sand/Filler to agitate the mixture by an electrically driven motor and lay the
mixture to the thickness of 2000 microns then deaerate by using spika roller and to allow to
cure for a minimum period of 48 hours before trafficking is commenced. Over top coat
demarcation paint with flourescwnt will be applied. ESD/Epoxy antiskid floor coat system shall
be carried out from authorized applicator of manufacturers like FOSROC/SIKA/BOSTIC or
equivalent’
21.24 INTERLOCKING TYPE PAVER BLOCKS

(a) The paver block shall be of PCC 80mm thick, M-40 Grade [as mentioned in Sch-’A’]
reflective & inter locking type factory made as per sample kept in the office of the GE.
The paver block shall be brought from the manufacturer mentioned hereinafter and as
approved by the GE.
(b) The compressive strength of paver block shall be equivalent to M-40 grade given in
relevant IS and of colour as approved by the GE.
(c) The top layer of paver blocks shall not be less than 6 to 8mm thick and should have
antiskid groove finish (vermicular finish). Paver block should have 1mm spacer to
provide minimum gap between paver unit to allow joint filling send to go in it and
establish complete interlocking between blocks. Paver blocks should be lacquer coated
to seal the micro porosity and give glossy finish.
(d) The paver block shall be laid dry over 50mm thick (compacted thickness) sand cushion.
Joints shall be filled with sand as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(e) The sand shall be free from clay and alkaline particles and conform to relevant IS.
(f) The edges of the paver block shall be neatly trimmed to fit within kerbs along the
periphery of the paved area.
(g) The unit rates quoted shall be inclusive of laying of paver block of different colour
for making the Anchor pattern of size 4x6m and other pattern as directed by the GE/
Engineer-in-Charge.
(h) Before incorporating the paver block in the work the paver block shall be got tested for
compressive strength and record maintained signed by the Contractor and the
Engineer-in-Charge.
(i) 80mm Interlocking paver on 50mm thick sand cushion above 100mm PCC 1:4:8 over
100mm Hardcore.
21.24.1 SAND CUSHIONING / FILLING
(a) Sand for filling in trenches where specified shall be free from foreign matters and shall
be natural river sand from the sources approved by the GE.
(b) Sand shall be stacked at site before incorporation and the entire quantity of sand shall
be recorded in measurement books marked suitably as ‘Not to be abstracted’ before
incorporation and shall be signed by the Engineer-in-charge and the Contractor. Consolidated
thickness of sand as specified shall be recorded for payment purpose.
(c) Sand filing shall be done as specified in Clause 3.21.2 of SSR Part-I 2009.
21.24.2 STONE AND BOULDER PITCHING

Stones shall be carefully hand packed in a manner to ensure a reasonably smooth surface and uniform
thickness; spaces between the stones shall be minimized. Such spaces shall be wedged with spalls of
suitable size, immediately following the packing of stones. 6.18.1 Ribs shall be provided at the junction
of the slope with the ground and at the upper extremity of the slope. Ribs shall be rectangular in cross
section with width equal to dimensions of stone along its longer axis and depth equal to depth of lining.
21.25 ROLLING AND CONSOLIDATION OF FORMATION SURFACES
The earth formation for pavements of controlled quality concrete shall be compacted with power roller
suitable compacting plants/machineries to the required gradient and camber and thorough compaction.
Depressions which occur during rolling shall be filled in by the contractor with approved earth at his
own expense. Watering shall be done before or during the rolling as directed by Engineer-in-Charge,
whether the formation surface is in filling or in cuttin
21.26 DRY LEAN CONCRETE (DLC) : Refer clause 20.B.6.1 to 20.B.6.14 on serial page No 556 to
560 of SSR Part – I 2009 ( Specification).
21.26.1 VARIATIONS IN QUANTITIES OF CEMENT
(a) The minimum cement content in the lean concrete shall not be less than 150 Kg/ cum of concrete
specified. If this minimum cement content is not sufficient to produce concrete of the specified
strength, it shall be increase as per actual mix design without any plus price adjustment
(b) As a result of the mix design, if the quantity of cement required, in order to obtain the desired
properties of concrete, exceeds minimum quantity of cement specified then the cement content
as per design mix shall be provided but no adjustment shall be made in the prices in all
relevant items of work.
21.26.2 SAMPLING
The sampling procedure and the frequency of sampling shall be as per clause 15.2 of IS-434.
21.26.3 TEST SPECIMENS

21.26.3.1 All test specimens shall be 150mm cubes for each sample, six cubes shall be cast out of
which, three cubes each shall be tested for 7 days and 28 days compressive strength. The
specimens shall be tested as described in latest IS-516.
21.26.4 TEST STRENGTH OF SAMPLE

21.26.4.1 The test strength of the sample shall be the average strength of three specimens. The
individual variation should not be more than + 15 percent of the average.
21.26.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

21.26.5.1 The acceptance criteria of the test results shall be as laid down in clause 16 of IS-456-2000.
21.26.5 WORKABILITY
21.26.5.1 The workability of the concrete shall be checked frequently as per IS-1199. (Methods of
sampling and analysis of concrete). Slump i.e. workability of concrete shall be controlled by properly
accounting for moisture of aggregates. Records for moisture content and slump shall be kept duly
verified by GE.
21.26.5.2 CHANGE OF MIX DESIGN
21.26.5.2.1 During the progress of the work, if mix design will have to be changed due to changes in
the qualities of the ingredients of the concrete. Decision of GE in the regard shall be final and binding.
21.26.5.3 PACKING AND TRANSPORTATION OF SAMPLES
21.26.5.3.1 The contractor shall bear the cost of material, testing and transportation of the samples
required to be tested from site of work to the laboratory of CE/CWE/GE or any other laboratory.
21.26.6 GRANULAR SUB BASE :

Granular sub base shall be provided as specified in Sch ‘A’ and as specified in SSR Part 1 clause
20.A.22
21.27 WET MIX MACADAM (WMM)
21.27.1 This work shall consist of supplying, laying and compacting clean crushed graded aggregates
as specified in respective item of schedule ‘A’ and granular material like graded coarse sand
are mixed with water in mixing plant and rolled to a dense mass on a prepared sub base in
accordance with the requirements & these specifications. The material shall be laid in one or
more layers as specified in Schedule -À’ and as directed by the GE. Wet mix macadam shall
be carried out all as specified in BOQ and as per Clause No. 20.B.5 to 20.B.5.9.4 of MES
Schedule Part – I in respect of specifications for as Construction Operation such as weather
and seasonal limitation, preparation of base, provision of lateral confinement of aggregates,
mixing, spreading of mix, compaction, setting and drying, opening to traffic, surface finish &
quality control of work, quality control, rectification of surface irregularity. Also refer MORTH
para 406.3 and quality control as per MORT&H table 900-3 Ser No.4.
21.27.2 MATERIAL
21.27.3 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF COARSE AGGREGATE
Coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone obtained from approved quarry. It shall be hard, strong,
dense and durable, clean and free from soft, friable, thin, flat, elongated or laminated, flaky pieces and
shall be roughly cubical in shape. It shall be clean and free from dirt and other foreign matter. The
aggregate shall conform to the physical requirements as specified in Clause No. 20.B.2.5.2 of
SSR Part - I as under: -
Srl Test Test Method Requirements

No
1. Log Angles Abrasion value IS: 2386 (Part IV) 40 percent (Max.)
or
Aggregate Impact value IS: 2386 (Part IV) or IS: 5640 30 percent (Max.)
2. Combined Flakiness and IS: 2386 (Part I) 35 Percent (Max.)

Elongation Indices (Total)
Note: -The water absorption value of the coarse aggregate should be less than 2%.
21.27.4 FINE AGGREGATE/ COARSE AGGREGATE
21.27.4.1 Grading requirements: -Grading requirement of aggregates for Wet Mix Macadam
IS Sieve designation Percent by weight passing sieve

53.00 mm 100
45.00 mm 95 – 100
22.40 mm 60 – 80
11.20 mm 40 – 60
4.75 mm 25 – 40
2.36 mm 15 – 30
600 micron 8 – 22
75 micron 0-5
Note: Material finer than 425 micron shall have plasticity Index (PI) not
21.27.5 SEPARATION MEMBRANE

A separation membrane shall be used between the concrete slab and the sub base. Separation
membrane shall be polythene sheeting 400 microns thick laid flat without creases. Before placing the
separation membrane, the surface shall be swept clean of all the extraneous materials using air
compressor and screen sand layer shall be laid over cleaned surface. Wherever overlap of plastic
sheets is necessary, the same shall be at least 300 mm joined together with 50mm wide tape adhesive
and any damaged sheeting shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense. The separation membrane
may be nailed to the lower layer with concrete nails. Polythene sheet shall be transparent and meet
requirement of IS 2508.
21.27.6 SAND FILLING

Sand filling (Layer) below polythene film and shall conform to following grading: -
Sieve designation % passing % Retained

2.36mm 100% -
600 micron - 100%
21.28 PAVEMENT QUALITY CONCRETE (PQC) / RIGID PAVEMENT
21.28.1 CEMENT OPC 43 grade cement to be used to give flexural strength 4.5 Mpa with minimum
cement content as 400 Kg/Cum .Refer appendix ‘C’ to Particular Specification.
21.28.2 COARSE & FINE AGGREGATES
21.28.2.1 Aggregates for pavement concrete shall be natural material complying with IS: 383 but with
a Los Angeles Abrasion Value not more than 35%. The limits of deleterious materials shall not exceed
the requirements set out in IS: 383.
21.28.2.2 The aggregates shall be clean, hard, strong, dense, non porous and durable crushed stone
free from dirt and shall not be alkali reactive. In addition, the total chlorides content expressed as
chloride ion content shall not exceed 0.06 per cent by weight and the total sulphate content expressed
as sulphuric anhydride (SO3) shall not exceed 0.25 per cent by weight. Table 1 and 2 may be referred
for combined gradation of fine and coarse aggregate) in case of DLC (Dry Lean Concrete) and PQC
(Paving Quality Concrete) respectively.
Table 2
Aggregate Gradation of Pavement Quality Concrete
Sieve Designation Percentage by weight passing the

Sieve
31.50 mm 100
26.50 mm 85-95
19.0 mm 68-88
9.50 mm 45-65
4.75 mm 30-55
600 micron 8-30
150 micron 5-15
75 micron 0-5
Note : The grading given in Table-1 and Table -2 above are applicable both for natural river sand and
crushed stone sand aggregate
21.28.1.2 Coarse aggregate:
a) Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, strong, dense, non-porous and durable pieces of
crushed stone or crushed gravel and shall be devoid of pieces of disintegrated stone, soft, flaky,
elongated, very angular or splintery pieces. The combined flakiness and elongation index shall not be
more than 35 per cent. The aggregate may be used conforming to IS: 383. The maximum size of
coarse aggregate shall not exceed 31.5mm in PQC and 26.5 mm in case of DLC.
b) Continuously graded aggregates may be used, depending on the combined grading of the coarse
and fine aggregate. No Aggregate which has water absorption more than 3 per cent shall be used in
concrete mix. The aggregates shall be tested for soundness in accordance with IS: 2386 (Part V). After
5 cycles of testing, the loss shall not be more than 12 per cent if sodium sulphate solution is used or 18
per cent if magnesium sulphate solution is used.
21.28.1.3 Fine aggregate: The fine aggregate shall consist of clean natural sand or crushed stone
sand ( M sand) or a combination of the two shall conform to IS: 383. Fine aggregate shall be free from
soft particles, clay, shale, loam, cemented particles, mica and organic and other foreign matter.
Aggregates which have water absorption of more than 3 percent shall not be used. The fine aggregate
shall not contain substances more than the following:-
(a) Clay Lumps : 1.0 per cent
(b) Coal and lignite : 1.0 per cent

(c) Material passing IS sieve No. 75 micron:-
(i) Natural sand : shall not exceed 3 per cent by weight of natural sand.
(ii) Crushed Stone sand: shall not exceed 15 per cent by weight of crushed stone.
(iii) Blend of natural sand: shall not exceed 8 per cent by weight of crushed stone dust natural
sand and crushed stone dust.
Cautionary Note : Although IS:383 permits fines passing 75 microns up to 15 percent in the case of
stone crushed sand, this provision should be used with caution when crushed stone dust is used as
fine aggregate and when the mix produced in the Laboratory and the field is satisfactory in all respects
and complies with the requirement of Specification. The grading of fine aggregates as per IS: 383 shall
be within the limits given in Table 3.
TABLE 3
Fine Aggregate Requirements
lS Sieve Percentage passing for
Grading Zone I Grading Zone II Grading Zone III
10 100 100 100

4.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100
2.36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100
1.18 mm 30-70 55-90 75-100
600 micron 15-34 35-59 60-79
300 micron 5-20 8-30 12-40
150 micron 0-10 0-10 0-10
Note :-
1. Where the grading falls outside the limits of any particular grading zone of sieves other than 600
micron IS: Sieve by a total amount not exceeding 5 per cent, it shall be regarding as falling within that
grading zone. This tolerance shall not be applied to percentage passing the 600 micron IS: Sieve or to
percentage passing any other sieve size on the coarse limit of grading zone I or the final limit of
grading zone III.
2. For crushed stone sands, the permissible limit on 150 micron IS: Sieve is increased to 20 per cent.
21.28.2 HANDLING OF AGGREGATES
21.28.2.1 Stockpiles shall be made immediately on receipt of aggregates. Aggregates shall be stacked
separately according to be nominal sizes of the single sized coarse aggregates. For fine aggregates
separate stacks should be made for different grading zones, if required.
21.28.2.2 Aggregates shall be stacked on a hard surface so as to exclude the possibility of soil or
grass being mixed up. When stacks are in close proximity the stockpiles shall be separated by the
baulk heads to prevent the aggregates from mixing together. Special care will be taken to clean and
wash the last layer of aggregate in contact with ground surface before use.
21.28.2.3 Before batching, the aggregates shall have been stockpiled for at least 24 hours to allow for
draining of water, if any. Contractor shall make adequate provisions for stock piling aggregates to an
extent sufficient to meet the needs of the work taking into account the availability of supplies and rate
of delivery, etc, and he shall include in his tender for necessary double handling and transportation of
materials from stock piles to mixing plant etc.
21.28.2.4 Load Transfer Device. Dowel bars and tie bars are not being provided since single slab
design is being followed. However same will be provided if specified in design.
21.28.2.5 Pre-molded Joint Filler. The joint filler shall be pre-moulded, compressive filler board, with
high performance closed-cell material available in board form (HD 100)and shall comply with the
requirements of ASTM –D3575 /IS Standards(latest revision), Premoulded joint filler shall be of the
thickness as stated within a tolerance of ± 1.5 mm. It shall provided for the full width of slab between
form-work.
21.28.2.6 Joint Sealing Compound. Poly-urethane/poly-sulphide cold joint sealant to be used
conforming to BS 5212 (Part 2)/IRC SP-57 2010 having movement accommodation factor ±30%,
flexible, resistance to age hardening, fuel resistance, heat resistance and durable with 10 years
warranty. The hot applied sealing compound shall comply with the requirements of IS: 1834(latest
revision). Fuel and heat resisting joint sealing compound complying with grade ‘B’ of the IS Code
should be used. Before filling the sealant, polyethylene backup rod of suitable size shall be placed
mechanically. Masking tape should be fixed on the sides to avoid spillage.
21.28.2.7 Polyethylene Back Up Rod. Alkali resistant and non staining polythene Back Up Rod shall be
used in the joints. The diameter of rod should be ¼ times more than the joint width. It should be placed
mechanically so that the depth is uniform. The bar should conform to ASTM C 1016-1994A, ASTM D
3575-1993 and ASTM D 5249-1992. Before placing the backup rod it should be free from moisture,
dampness, oil stains paint and any type of loose aggregate.
21.28.2.8 Synthetic Fibre. Non circular synthetic fibre of length 12 mm, specific gravity 1.31 to 1.41, UV
stable and alkali resistant ( as per ASTM C 1116-02 and ICAO AC 32) to be used as per manufacturers
specification, if specified in the design. Design mix to be prepared after incorporating fibres.
21.28.2.9 Curing Compound: Curing compounds shall contain sufficient flake aluminium in finely
divided dispersion to produce the complete coverage of the sprayed surface with a metallic finish. The
compound should become stable and impervious to evaporation of water from surface of the concrete
within 60 min of application and shall be of approved type. The curing compound should have a water
retention efficiency index of 90% in accordance with BS specification No 7542 and conformation with
ASTM c 309-74. The curing compound shall not react with the concrete and the film or membrane shall
not crack, peel or disintegrate within three weeks after application. Immediately prior to application, the
curing compound shall be stirred thoroughly in its containers. The rate of spread should be as per
manufacturer’s instructions (approx. 3-5 m2 / litr depending on the concrete surface)and shall be
checked during the construction of trial length and subsequently whenever required by the engineer.
Mechanical sprayer should be used for continuous agitation and mixing of compound during spraying.
21.28.2.10 INDEPENDENT TESTING / THIRD PARTY TESTING/ SITE LAB
The further tests listed in table hereinafter will be carried out in site lab and independent testing in
NIT/IIT/SEMT/CRRI through department as mentioned against each. In case method of tests is at
variance with the classes mentioned hereinbefore the relevant IS shall super cede in this regard. The
charges for getting the tests done in independent lab through department including transporting the
testing material shall be deemed to be included in the rates quoted and no extra claim on this account
shall be admissible.
Ser Name of Test Frequency No of test in No of tests in NIT/IIT/
No site lab SEMT/ CRRI/ NABL
Approved Lab
1. CEMENT
(a) Physical tests
(i) Setting time (initial & final) Once for each
(ii) Soundness consignment 100% 5%
(iii) Compressive strength
(iv) Fineness
(b) Chemical tests (Chemical Once for each - 5%
composition) consignment
(c) Specific gravity test One for each bulk - 100%
supply
Ser Name of Test Frequency No of test in No of tests in NIT/IIT/

No site lab SEMT/ CRRI/ NABL
Approved Lab
2. COARSE AGGREGATE (For rigid pavement)
(a) Specific gravity One for each source 100% 5%
and whenever there
is a change in
source.
(b) Water absorption One for each source 100% 5%
and whenever there
is a change in
source.
(c) Soundness One for each source 100% 5%
and whenever there
is a change in the
quality of aggregate.
(d) Organic impurities One for each source 100% 5%
and whenever there
is a change in the
quality of aggregate.
(e) Crushing value One test per (each 100% 5%
size) for every 100
cum
(f) Impact value One test per (each 100% 5%
size) for every 50
cum
(g) Los angeles Abrasion test One test per (each 100% 5%
size) for every 50
cum
(h) Deleterious materials One test per (each 100% 5%
size) for every 15
cum
(j) Sieve analysis One test per (each 100% 5%
size) for every 50
cum
(k) Flakiness & elongation index One test per each 100% 5%
size for every 50
cum or part thereof
(l) Moisture content Regularly one test 100% -
per day. Once for
source.
(m) Stripping value of aggregates Initially for aggregate 100% 5% (Min once for
from each quarry each quarry)
and subsequently
whenever change in
quality of aggregate/
quarry noticed.
(n) Gradation test. One test for 15Cum 100%
Ser Name of Test Frequency No of test No of tests in NIT/IIT/

No in site lab SEMT/ CRRI/ NABL
Approved Lab
3. FINE AGGREGATE (For rigid pavement)
(a) Specific gravity One for each source 100% 5%
and whenever there is
a change in source.
(b) Organic impurities One for each source 100% 5%
a change in source.
(c) Sieve analysis One test per each size 100% 5%
for every 15 cum
(d) Moisture content Regularly at every one 100% -
hour interval during
batch mixing
(e) Clay and silt impurities One test per each size 100% 5%
for every 15 cum
(f) Bulking of fine aggregates As required 100% -
(g) Deleterious constituents One test for 15 Cum 100% 5%
4 WATER Initially then quarterly - 100%
5 ADMIXTURE Min one test per lot - 100%
6 CURING COMPOUND Min one test per lot - 100%
7 FILLER BOARD Min one test per lot - 100%
8 POLYURETHANE SEALANT. Min one test per lot - 100%
9 PRIMER JOINT Min one test per lot - 100%
10 POLYTHENE SHEET Only independent test 100% 100%
one test per lot
11 TEST ON EARTH/MOORUM FOR SHOULDERS/EMBANKMENT
(a) Sieve Analysis (Gradation) 1 test per 250 cum 100% 5%
soil.
(b) Sand Content 2 test per 3000 cum of 100% 5%
soil.
(c) Plasticity Test 2 test per 3000 cum of 100% 5%
soil.
(d) Density Test 2 test per 3000 cum of 100% 5%
soil
(e) Deleterious Content Test As and when required 100% 5%
by GE
(f) Moisture Content 1 test for every 250 100% 5%
cum of soil
12 TEST ON GRANULAR SUB BASE
(a) Grading One test per 200 Cum 100% 5%
(b) Atterberg limits of portion of aggregates One test per 200 Cum 100% 5%
passing 425 micron sieve plasticity.
(c) Natural moisture content One test per 250 Cum 100% 5%
(d) Moisture content prior to compaction One test per 250 Cum 100% 5%
(e) Density of compacted layer One test per 500 Sqm 100% 5%
(f) Deleterious constituents As required 100% -
(g) Control of grade, camber thickness and Regularly 100% 5%
surface finish.
(h) CBR. As required 100% 5%
13 TEST ON CEMENT CONCRETE
(a) Slump test One test per 10 cum 100% -
(b) Compacting factor One test per 10 cum 100% 100%
(c) Compressive strength 3 cube/beam sample 100% 2%
for 7 days and 28 days
for every 30 cum
(d) Flexural strength 3 cube/beam sample 100% 2%
for 7 days and 28 days
for every 30 cum
(e) Core strength for hardened concrete 2 core / slab of 100% 100%
concrete
21.28.3 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN AND PLACING OF CONCRETE

21.28.3.1 Mix Design. A mix will be designed based on flexural strength as given in design after
taking into account the type of aggregates, plant and method of laying to give the desired workability,
which will enable the concrete to be properly compacted to its full depth and finished to the surface
tolerance specified. Details of concrete mix design, for rigid pavements are given in TI 12/87 and
should be as per SP 23. Design mix shall be different for different type of cement and for use of
admixtures in hot climate.
21.28.3.2 Water/ Cement Ratio. The term water /cement ratio means the ratio by weight of water to
cement in the mix expressed in decimal terms. The water to be taken into account for this purpose is
that which is free to combine with the cement in the mix, including free water in the aggregates. This is
over and above the water, which may be absorbed by the aggregates. The actual quantity of water to
be added in the mix at any time will depend on the water cement ratio adopted as well as the
difference between the actual and the saturation moisture content of the aggregates used. Site
document shall be maintained for use of different w/c ratio on daily basis.
21.28.3.3 Cement content
Cement shall be OPC (43 Grade) as per Appendix-C on Sl. Page No. 287 with minimum content for the
mix corresponding to 4.5 MPa flexural strength in the field at 28 days. The minimum quantity of cement
(OPC) shall not be less than 400Kg/Cum. If the said cement (OPC) content is not sufficient to produce
concrete of the specified strength, it shall be increased as necessary by Contractor at his own cost and
no claim of extra cement consumption shall be entertained.
21.28.3.4 Trial Mix. Trail mixes should be made and beams tested for their flexural strength. For
each trial mix, nine preliminary test beams should be made and tested in accordance with IS: 516. For
compaction in the moulds of beams, Appendix ‘B’ of TI 10/2011 will be followed. Three of these beams
shall be tested for seven days and three 28 days flexural strength. If the differences between the
highest and lowest values at 28 days strength from any trial mix is more than 15% of the average
strength of three beams, the test is to be discarded and a further trial mixes shall be prepared. The mix
giving the design flexural strength will be approved. Nine preliminary test cubes will also be made of
the same approved mix used for casting beam. Three cubes will be tested to find the corresponding
crushing strength of the concrete at seven days and three others at 28 days. The remaining three
beams and three cubes, if the mix is finally approved, will be preserved carefully for one year from the
completion of work for test or any subsequent check. Crushing strength of concrete arrived at
thereafter be specified for testing and acceptance of concrete in field. For testing and acceptance of
quality concrete for airfield pavements, refer TI 16/87.
21.28.4 Preparation of Base.
21.28.4.1 Before fixing the form works for laying concrete, the base shall be checked for proper
compaction density and levels and record of the same shall be kept. Base shall be laid using paver
with sensor. Whenever specified, approved standard water proof, wrinkle free craft/polyethylene
sheeting (minimum 400 micron thick) without puncture shall be laid to prevent absorption of water for
the concrete mortar. Before placing the membrane, the surface shall be cleaned of all the extraneous
material using air compressor. Where-ever overlap is required, minimum overlap shall be 300mm. The
damaged/punctured sheet should be replaced. In case of overlays, the existing surface shall be kept
moist in saturated condition. Important aspects about sub-grade, sub-base and base have been
discussed at Appendix ‘G’ of TI 10/2011.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS(Contd/---)
21.28.5 Trial Bays/Trial Lengths.

21.28.5.1 Trial Bays. Before commencement of the work, where paver cannot be used a trial bay
of 3.5X3.5 meter square, of the approved concrete mix shall be laid at suitable place as soon as
possible before the actual concrete pavement work is to start. The method of mixing, spreading, curing
and compacting shall be the same as laid down in the specification for work. At-least three cores shall
be cut when the concrete is seven days old, in order to determine the degree of compaction achieved.
Alternately the concrete shall be broken and cut by pneumatic hammer or a pick-axe and a saw.
Should any of cores or the cut portion show honey-combing in the concreting, a further trial bay shall
be laid after improving the techniques of spreading and compaction and shall be tested as before.
Needle vibrator, screed type of vibrator and paver to compact the pavement concrete shall be used as
planned for the actual execution. On no account should the cut portion of the sample concrete exhibit
honey–combing. When the water cement ratio for the mix has been worked out for achieving the
definite strength, it will result in reduced aggregate/ cement ratios and reduce the unit yield of the
concrete. However extreme care shall be exercised not to exceed the specified Water Cement Ratio.
This will be done by forbidding use of under-graduated receptacles and preventing spillage. The
frequency of the vibrator plays an important role in the efficiency of compaction and it shall be checked
at frequent intervals. Further trial bays shall be laid and degree of compaction tested as before until the
method of spreading and compaction has been so improved that the cores or cut portions do not show
honeycombing.
21.28.5.2 Trial Length. The trial length shall be constructed at least 14 days in advance of the
proposed date of commencement of work. At-least 30 days prior to the construction of the trial length,
the contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval a detailed Method Statement giving description
of the proposed material, plant, equipment and construction methods. All the major equipment like
paving train, batching plant, tippers, etc., proposed in the construction are to be approved by the
engineer before their procurement. The trial length should be constructed away from carriage way. The
Engineer-in-charge shall also approve the location and length of trial construction which shall be a
minimum of 60 m length and for full paver width of the paver. The trial length shall contain the
construction of at least one transverse construction joint involving hardened concrete and freshly laid
subbase. The construction of trial length will be repeated till the contractor proves his ability to
satisfactory construct the pavement in subsequent trials. The hardened concrete shall be cut over 3 m
width and reversed to inspect the bottom surface for any segregation taking place. The length shall be
constructed after making necessary change in the gradation of the mix to eliminate segregation of the
mix. The lower surface shall not have honey-combing and the aggregate shall not be held loosely at
the edges.
21.28.5.A All PQC to be manufactured at site by installing RMC plant confirming to IS 4926/4925
and to be approved by GE
21.28.6 Form Work.

21.28.6.1 Steel Forms
a) All side forms shall be of mild steel except for curves having a radius of less than 45 meters, which
may be of wood. The steel forms shall be of M.S. Channel section. Depth of side form shall be equal to
the thickness of the pavement.
b) A side form shall have a length of at-least 3 meters in case of longitudinal joints except on curve of
less than 45 meters radius where short length may be used. In case of transverse joint, a full length of
bulkhead shall a ct as form work. When set to grade and stacked in place, no deviation of the top
surface from the specified level shall be allowed.
c) The method of connection between the two lengths of forms shall be such that the joints formed are
free from play or movement in any direction. Use of bent, twisted or worn out forms shall not be
permitted. At least three stake pickets for bracing pins or stakes shall be provided for each 3 meters of
the forms. The bracing and support must be adequate to prevent springing of the forms under the
pressure of the concrete or weight or thrust of light machinery (like vibrator screed) operating on the
forms. Separate rails are to be provided with adequate fixing arrangements if mechanical paver is used
for laying the pavement slab. While removing the steel forms, care should be taken to withdraw them
gradually so that edges of the slabs are not damaged. In no case, the
form will be nailed to existing/adjacent concrete surface
21.28.6.2 Wooden Forms.
a) Wooden forms may be used only for curves having a radius of less than 45 meters. Wooden
forms shall have smooth surface on inner side and shall have a minimum base width of 10 cm thick for
slabs upto 20 cm thick and a minimum base width of 15cm for slabs over20 cm thick and their depth
shall be equal to thickness of the pavement at the corresponding edges.
b) Forms shall be held by stakes set at intervals not exceeding 2 meters and by placing two stakes,
at each joint. The forms shall be firmly nailed or secured to the side stakes. And shall be securely
braced as necessary to ensure that no movement results from the pressure of the impact of the
vibrator or temper during finishing of the surface. The forms shall be caped along the inside upper
edge with 5 cm angle iron. The edge shall be suitability recessed so that the outer face of the angle
iron is flush with the upper and inner face of the wooded forms. It is recommended to prepare angle
iron and MS steel form specific to curve rather than using wooden forms.
21.28.6.3 Setting of Forms.

a) Setting of forms shall be done according to the slab plan and concreting shall not commence
until the setting of the forms is approved.
b) Forms shall be set in advance to a length sufficient for at least one day’s concreting and shall not
be removed until at least 12 hours after the laying of the concrete. Care must be taken in setting out
the side forms to ensure that the bar width shown in the drawing are strictly adhered to. The trueness
of the formation shall be checked by the means of 3m straight edge and precision level equipment and
any deviation greater than 1.5mm shall be rectified. No deviation from straight edge shall however, be
permitted at the joints. Proper shuttering oil shall be applied to the form toget good finish. For more
details refer IS: 14687.
21.28.7 Batching and Mixing.

21.28.7.1 All the ingredients of concrete shall be batched by weight by combined batching and mixing
plants. Power driven mechanical concrete mixers of adequate capacity with water measuring devices
as per IS: 1791 and IS: 12119 in conjunction with weigh batchers shall be used. Standby plant will be
catered for to avoid disruption of the works.
21.28.7.2 A small quantity of water will be added before loading of aggregate and cement. The
remaining water shall be added during the mixing operation. The mixing will be done for atleast two
minutes and until a uniform colour and consistency is achieved. The method of batching should be
made fool proof. Batching of water by buckets, drums or tins shall be strictly prohibited.
21.28.7.3 Quantity of concrete mixed in any one batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the
mixer. The drum of the mixer should be completely emptied before ingredients for the next mix are
charged into it. Concrete mix as above shall not be modified by addition of water or otherwise in order
to facilitate handling or for any other purpose.
21.28.7.4 On cessation of work and during other stoppages exceeding 20 minutes, the mixer and the
other equipment/accessories used for handling wet mix shall be thoroughly washed with clean water.
Blades in the drum of the mixer which are worn down 20 mm or more in depth shall be replaced with
new blades.
21.28.8 Hauling Placing and Compaction of Concrete.

21.28.8.1 Hauling/Transportation of concrete
Freshly mixed concrete from central batching plant shall be transported to the paver site by means of
tippers or transit mixers of sufficient capacities of approved design in sufficient numbers to ensure a
constant supply of concrete. Tarpaulin covers shall be used for protection of concrete against weather.
The tippers shall be capable of maintaining mix concrete in a homogeneous state and discharging the
same without segregation and loss of cement slurry. The feeding to the paver is to be regulated in such
a way that paving is done in an uninterrupted manner with uniform speed
throughout the day’s work.
21.28.9 Placing of Concrete.

21.28.9.1 Concrete shall be transported without delay and incorporated in the works before initial
setting time as per clause 13.2 of IS: 456- 2000 from the time of discharge from the mixer unless
special transportation devices are employed. Temperature of concrete must be below 35⁰C. Concrete
shall be placed and spread to such a depth that when compacted and finished, it shall conform to the
grade and cross section specified in the plan to ensure the minimum slab thickness shown on the
drawing to be obtained at all points.
21.28.9.2 In order to obtain adequate compaction, the concrete shall be spread so as to stand proud
of the finished level and produce a surcharge of 20% of the required slab thickness.
21.28.9.3 Concrete shall be placed in such a manner as to require as little handling as possible.
Spreading, compacting and finishing (except final boom/belt finishing) operations shall be completed
within a period not exceeding initial setting time from the time the mixing starts. In case of dry and hot
weather, this time will not exceed 35 minutes. Concrete shall be placed around
21.28.10 Compaction of Concrete.

21.28.10.1 Compaction shall be carried out by electrically operated needle and screed vibrators as
stipulated hereafter. Needle vibrators should be used all over the area for obtaining initial compaction
of the concrete. These should be of diameter not less than 4.5cm. If the vibrators are pneumatic, the
pressure must not be below 4kg/cm2. If electrically operated, they should have minimum frequency of
3500 impulses per minute. Minimum number of petrol driven vibrators as specified by the Engineer-in-
Charge with minimum frequency of 3500 impulses per minutes shall be provided at each work site as a
standby arrangement. The vibrator shall conform to IS: 2505/1968, 2506/1968 and IS:
4656.
21.28.10.2 There should be at least three needle vibrators working in one day. Vibrating screed
consisting of a steel section or timber section of not less than 7 cm width and with a vibrator mounted
thereon shall follow needle vibrators to obtain full compaction. The face of wooden tampering edge of
the screed shall be lined with an M.S plate rigidly fixed by means of counter sunk screws. Where
screed vibrator are used for compaction, a stand by unit shall always be maintained ready for use,
should the other one go out of order. Where electrically driven vibrators are employed, a standby
pneumatic unit shall be kept ready for use in case of power failures. Under no circumstances,
honeycombing
of concrete at joints or elsewhere shall be permitted.
21.28.10.3 When using vibrating screed for compaction, it should not be dragged over the concrete.
During the initial passes, it shall be lifted to the adjacent forward position in short steps. Subsequently,
it shall be slowly slide over the surface with its axis slightly tilted away from the direction of sliding and
the operation repeated until a close, dense surface is obtained. Concreting shall be carried out in one
operation between the expansion joints and construction joints without any break at the dummy joints.
21.28.10.4 Use of slip form pavers with independent units designed to spread, consolidate, screed,
float finish and texture the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine is mandatory
for large works. Paver shall be equipped with electronic sensors and controls to grade from either side
of machine. Slip form/fixed form paver to be used as per the guidelines given in MORTH(Road Wing)
Specifications clause no 602.9.5 and 602.9.6.
21.28.11 Finishing of Concrete.

21.28.11.1 Surface Finish.
Immediately after the compaction of concrete but before the concrete has hardened (within 90 min of
placing concrete) and while the concrete is still in a plastic state, the pavement surface shall be
inspected for irregularities with a profile checking template and any needed correction made by adding
or removing concrete by means of long handled floats and scraping straight edge followed by further
compaction and finishing. The long-handled floats may be used to smoothen and fill in open-textured
areas in the pavement surface but the final finishing is to be made with scraping straight edges.
21.28.11.2 The scraping straight edges are to be 3 meters long with flexible handles long enough to
reach the other side of slab when operated from inside of pavement. They are to be placed parallel to
the form at the side of the pavements and worked backwards and forward uniformly across the width of
the slab. After this operation has been completed and the surface has been brought up to the required
finish, the straight edges are to be moved forward by not more than half their length and this process
repeated. The straight edge testing and re-floating is to continue until entire surface:-
(a) Is free from observable departure from the straight-edge.

(b) Conforms to the required levels and cross section.
(c) When the concrete has hardened, it shall conform to the specified surface
levels.
21.28.11.3 The foregoing work is to be carried out while the concrete is still plastic and workable and
in such time sequence as to ensure the removal of water of laitance from the surface. After the
concrete has sufficiently hardened to about 12 hours and not later than 24 hours, the surface shall be
tested again for high spots. All high spots shall be marked and those exceeding 3 mm shall be ground
down immediately. Care shall be taken to ensure that the grinding does not in any way damage the
concrete surface.
21.28.11.4 The final surface finish is to be such that when tested with 3 meters long straight edge
placed anywhere within the same or adjoining slab in any direction on the surface, there is no gap
greater than 3 mm between the bottom of the straight edge and the surface of the pavement. This will
not be required if slip form paver with guide wires is used at appropriate paving speed and sensors.
21.28.11.5 Belting. Just before the concrete becomes non plastic, the surface shall be belted with a
two –ply canvas belt not less than 20 cm wide and at least 1 meter longer than the width of the slab.
Hand belts shall have suitable handles to permit controlled uniform manipulation. The belt shall be
operated with short strokes transverse to entire line of pavement and with a rapid advance parallel to
the centre line. This will smoothen the marks of straight edge.
21.28.12 Brooming.
21.28.12.1 After belting and as soon as surplus water, if any has arisen to the surface, the pavement
shall be given a broom finished with an approved steel or fiber broom not less than 45 cm wide. The
broom shall be pulled gently transversely and in straight strokes over the surface of pavement from
edge to edge. Adjacent strokes shall be slightly overlapped. Brooming shall be perpendicular to the
centre line of the pavement and so executed that the corrugation thus produced will be uniform in
character and width and not more than 1.5 mm deep. No pressure will be applied to the broom and
scoring will be done under the weight of the broom head without tearing the surface.
21.28.12.2 Brooming shall be completed before the concrete reaches such a state that the surface is
likely to be torn of or unduly roughened by the operation. The broom surface shall be free from porous
or rough spots, irregularities, depressions, and pot-holes which may be caused by accidental disturbing
of particles of course aggregate embedded near the surface.
21.28.13 Edging. Immediately after belting/brooming has been completed, the end edges of the slab
and edges of expansion joints should be carefully finished with an edging tool of 6 mm radius and the
pavement edges shall be left smooth and true to line.
21.28.14 Honey-Combing. As soon as the side form are removed, any minor honeycombed areas
shall be filled with mortar composed of one part of cement to two parts of fine aggregates. Major
honey-combed areas or segregated concrete or other defective work or areas damaged by removal of
the forms of concrete, damaged by rain or any other reasons whatsoever will be considered as
defective work and shall be removed and replaced. The total areas of honey-combed surface more
than 2.5 sq cm each shall not exceed 4%area of the slab side. Honey-combing exceeding 300 sq cm in
area at any one location shall be considered as major honey-combing.
21.28.15 Marking on Slabs. Every slab shall bear an impression not exceeding 3mm in depth with
text size of min 40mm in height comprising the number allotted to the slab and the date on which it was
laid. This impression shall be formed when concrete is green so as to leave permanent mark of setting.
In case paver is used one or all these action are done by a separate attachments. However checks as
specified must be carried out and reasons for defects be found before the work is progressed further.
21.28.16 Curing and Protection of Concrete.

21.28.16.1 Initial Curing.
a) Immediately after the surface texturing, the surface and sides of the slab shall be cured by the
application of approved resin-based aluminized reflective curing compound which hardens into
impervious film or membrane with the help of a mechanical sprayer. Curing compound shall contain
sufficient flake aluminum in finely divided dispersion to produce a complete coverage of the sprayed
surface with a metallic finish. The compound shall become stable and impervious to evaporation of
water from the surface of the concrete within 60 minutes of application and shall be approved type. The
curing compounds shall have a water retention efficiency index of 90 percent in accordance with BS
Specification No. 7542 or ASTM-C-309-81, Type II/ relevant IS/IRC code.
b) The curing compound shall not react chemically with the concrete and the film or membrane shall
not crack, peel or disintegrate within three weeks after application. Immediately prior to use the curing
compound shall be thoroughly agitated in its containers. The rate of spread shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions and should be checked during the construction of the trial length and
subsequently whenever required by the Engineer-in-charge. The mechanical sprayer shall incorporate
an efficient mechanical device for continuous agitation and mixing of the compound during spraying.
To give continuous covering curing compound may be spread in two layers.
c) In addition to spraying of curing compound, the fresh concrete surface shall be protected for at least
three hours by covering the finished concrete pavement with tents as described in Clause 602.7.2 of
MORTH (Road Wing) during adverse weather conditions as described by the Engineer-in-charge. After
three hours, the edges of pavement shall be covered by moist hessian cloth in two layers and the
same then be kept moist for entire period of curing. All damaged/torn hessian shall be removed and
replaced by new hessian cloth on regular basis. The hessian shall be so placed that the entire surface
of the edge of the slab are completely covered. It shall be placed and weighed down as to cause them
to remain in intimate contact with the surface covered. If it becomes necessary to remove hessian for
any reason, the concrete slab shall not be exposed for a period more than half an hour. If hessian is
obtained in strip, the strip shall be laid to overlap at least 150 mm.
21.28.16.2 . Final Curing

a) Shall be After Initial curing and joint cutting a system of transverse and longitudinal dykes of clay
about 50 mm high shall be laid and shall be immediately covered with blanket of sandy soil free from
stones to prevent the drying up and cracking of clay. The rest of slab shall then be covered with
sufficient sandy soil so as to produce a blanket of earth not less than 37 mm deep, after wetting. The
earth covering shall be thoroughly wetted while it is being placed on the surface and against the side of
the slab and kept thoroughly saturated with water for 28 days and then covering shall be removed and
the pavement shall be cleaned and swept. If the earth covering becomes displaced during the curing
period, it shall be replaced to the original depth and restarted.
b) . Concrete shall not be subjected to any load or weight of any plant until at-least 14 days after laying.
Concentrated loads or sharp objects like iron wheels of concrete mixer and any vehicular traffic
including construction traffic will not be allowed on the concrete surface for 28 days. Contractor will
appoint chaukidars at his own expenses to prevent workmen, cattle etc straying on the pavement
concrete for a minimum of three days from the date of laying. For extreme weather conditions IS: 7861
Part I and Part II should be referred.
21.28.16.3 Concreting During Monsoon. When concrete is being placed during monsoon and
when it may be expected to rain, sufficient supply of tarpaulin or other water proof cloth shall be
provided along the line of the work. Any time when it rains, all freshly laid concrete which had not been
covered for curing purpose shall be adequately protected. Any concrete damaged by rain shall be
removed and replaced. If the damage is limited to texture, it shall be retextured in accordance with
directives of the engineer.
21.28.16.4 Concerting in Hot Weather. No concerting shall be done when the concrete
temperature is above 350 C. Besides, in adverse conditions like high temperature, low relative
humidity, excessive wind velocity, imminence of rains etc., if so desired by the Engineer, tents on
mobile trusses may be provided over the freshly laid concrete for a minimum period of three hours as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The temperature of the concrete mix on reaching the paving site
shall not be more than 300 C. To bring down the temperature, if necessary chilled water or ice flakes
should be made use of.
21.28.16.5 Concreting in Extreme Cold Climate. No concreting shall be done when the
concrete temperature is below 50C and the temperature is descending. However, where concrete is to
be deposited at or near freezing temperature, precautions shall be taken to ensure that at the time of
placing, it has a temperature not less than 5 0C and that the temperature of the concrete shall be
maintained above 40C until it has thoroughly hardened. When necessary, concrete ingredient shall be
heated before mixing but cement shall not be heated artificially other than by the heat transmitted to it
from other ingredients of the concrete. Stock piled aggregate may be heated by the use of dry heat or
steam. Aggregate shall not be heated directly by gas or on sheet metal over fire. In general the
temperature of aggregate or water shall not exceed 650C. Salt or other chemicals shall not be used for
the prevention of freezing. No frozen material or material containing ice shall be used. All concrete
damaged by froth shall be removed. It is recommended that concrete exposed to freezing weather
shall have entrained air and the water content of the mix shall not exceed 30 liters per 50 kg of cement.
21.28.17 JOINTS IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT
21.28.17.1 Joints in Concrete Pavement.: Joints shall be of the types and dimensions specified
and shall be located in all cases as indicated on the drawings. Location of joint should be transferred
accurately on site as per stipulated dimension. The sawing of joints shall be carried out with diamond
studded blades soon after the concrete has hardened to take load and vibration of the sawing machine
and working personal without damaging texture of the pavement and without disturbing edges. Sawing
operation may commence as early as 12 hours from the placing of concrete but after the concrete is
suitably hardened. The various types of joints in concrete pavement are described in the following
paragraphs.
21.28.17.2 Dummy joints. The dummy joints shall be 8 mm wide and shall extend vertically from the
surface of the slab to a depth equal to 1/3 of the thickness of the slab. The initial slot of 3mm to be
formed by sawing the concrete with a diamond bit, high rotation frequency joint cutting machine of
approved design as early as 12 hours of placing under moderate climatic conditions and when the
concrete has sufficiently hardened. Under extreme cold condition, this period may be suitably
increased based on experience. Joint to be widened to specified width, in increments of 2mm. In all
cases, except where cutting is done with saw, the joint edges shall be bull nosed. Care shall be taken
that the edges of the joints are not damaged. The edge will not stand proud of the concrete slab. In
case of rain or sudden storm, the work can be concluded at the location of the dummy joint but the joint
then will be formed as a construction joint.
21.28.17.3 Construction Joints. The construction joints shall be straight and vertical through full
thickness of the slab. The vertical edge of the concrete on the side of the joint shall be treated with a
coat of lime wash or bituminous paint before the adjacent bay is laid. Joints should be cut to its width of
10mm and up-to depth of 200 mm to receive the sealing compound and backup rod. The groove will be
formed in the same manner as that for a dummy joint. The edges of the groove shall be bull nosed and
will not stand proud of the concrete surface.
21.28.17.4 Expansion Joint.

a) The expansion joints shall be straight, extend through the full thickness of the slab and shall be of
the shape and dimensions shown on the drawings. The slab edges adjacent to the joint shall be
formed truly vertical. The joint shall be filled with 25mm thick approved joint filler board as specified,
shall be placed in position and properly supported.
b) The groove to receive the sealing compound may be formed by placing suitable wooden or metal
strip of specified width and required depth coated with soft soap or other suitable lubricant over the
joint filler board and shall be kept in position when concreting the adjoining slab. The top of this strip is
to be flush with the finished concrete surface. The edge of the groove shall be bull-nosed when it is
withdrawn after approximately half an hour. Care shall be taken that the edges of the grooves are not
damaged and that no bridging or plugging of the joint with concrete occurs; also that the joint is of
uniform width from top of slab to top of the joint filler. Alternatively, in place of metal/wooden strip, joint
filler board of full depth with pre cut at specified depth be placed while concreting adjacent slab and top
pre cut portion -+be subsequently removed to form groove for receiving joint sealing compound and
backup rod.
21.28.17.5 Sealing of Joints.

a) All joints shall be sealed as soon as practicable after 28 days of placing of the slabs. The joints shall
be finished flush with finished concrete surface, if the sealing of the joints is done in winter. Level of
sealant should be 3-5 mm below the concrete surface if filling is done during summers. After the
sealing compound has hardened the excess sealing compound, if any adhering to the slab outside the
joints shall removed by scraping or otherwise and the surface left clean. The pavement shall be
opened to the traffic only after completion of joints sealing over the entire pavement.
21.28.17.6 Joint Sealing Compound.

a) Polyurethane joint sealant from approved source shall be used in new rigid pavement. The criteria
for selection of the joint sealant will depend on the minimum performance guarantee of ten years
offered by the firm. The technical specification of the cold applied joint sealants (irrespective of whether
polysulphide or polyurethane) should meet the requirement mentioned in BS-5215, BS4254 and EN-
141875-2003 (for hydrolysis/water resistance test). In addition, the movement accommodation factor
(MAF) of the sealant should be minimum ± 30 %.
b) In old pavements with residual life more than 5 years, the existing sealant compound should be
raked out of the existing joints by special tools like cutting blades / machines (use of hammers is
prohibited as it damages the edges) and joint cleaned thoroughly with application of compressed air.
Any polysulphide/polyurethane joint sealant, which offers minimum ten years performance guarantee
and conforming to specifications, shall be incorporated in works.
c) Where the edges of the joint are not damaged, the dummy and construction joints should be
widened by 2 mm (from present 10 mm to 12 mm in case of construction joints) by using joint cutting
blades of appropriate size in order to have straight, clean and smooth edges to achieve proper bond
between sealant and the concrete surface. If width of the dummy and construction joints is more than 6
mm and 8 mm respectively, widening is still required by at least 2 mm to achieve proper bond.
d) When the quantity of application is more than three thousand (three thousand) running meter of joint
sealants (either polysulphide or polyurethane), the same will be done only by mechanical means. No
manual application will be permitted and the same shall be incorporated in the tender documents.
e) The selection and application of joint sealant should be on a ‘Supply and Apply’ basis. i.e. the firm
shall supply the material and employ their trained applicators to apply it. Quality tests as specified will
be done for every five MT/for each lot from a reputed testing laboratory who has the NABL
accreditations.
f) The joint shall be made dry, free of dirt and vacuum cleaned by a mechanical device, as well as free
of oil, vegetation and other debris. Two coats of primer should be applied with a thin brush by the
forward and backward movement at an interval of 30 minutes before pouring the sealant. (i.e. one side
will be brushed twice, forward and backward) with adequate quantity of primer.
g) The application temperature of the sealant should be strictly adhered to as per manufacturer’s
instruction. The pneumatic pressure, while application should not be too high which causes a high
speed flow and results in over filling of joints. Too low pressures forms small bubbles, which can be
starting point for cohesive failures. Every air bubbles that appear on the surface should be immediately
popped with a levelling tool.
h) In case of old pavements with residual life less than 5 years, hot applied Joint sealing compound
may be used. Hot applied joint sealing compound shall conform to grade ‘B’ of IS: 1834-1984
‘Specification for Hot Applied Sealing Compound for Joints in Concrete’. Recommended brand of the
primer shall be obtained from the firm supplying the joint sealing compound so that sealing adheres
properly to the concrete surface. Before commencing joint sealing operations, the following shall be
ensured:-
(i) The groove extends fully across the bay between consecutive longitudinal joints in the case of
transverse joints, and continuous in case of longitudinal joints.
(ii) No concrete or foreign matter is left in the groove.
(iii) In case of expansion joints, the filler board is exposed to the full depth of the joints. All joints shall
be thoroughly cleaned out of dust and pebbles by compressed air or hand tools.
(iv) Cutting saw of suitable size should be used to clean the side of the joints.
(v) Backup rod/bond breaker has been inserted to the even and appropriate depth.
(vi) Masking tape has been fixed on the sides.
j) The cleaned and prepared joints shall be primed with primer conforming to IS: 6509-1972 at the rate
6 liters per 10 sqm and filled with approved sealing compound in accordance with the manufacturer
instructions. Great care will be taken to ensure thatsealing compound is not over heated beyond
specified temperature, and there is no spilling on the slab outside the joints while filling them. Any
deteriorated sealing compound observed after pouring due to over heating or any cause attributable to
negligence or bad workmanship, shall be removed and refilled. Before applying hot or cold applied joint
sealant, masking tapes should be fixed on the sides to avoid spillage on concrete surface.
21.28.18 PLANTS AND MACHINERY

21.28.18 Plants and Machinery.
21.28.18.1 Batch mixing Plant. The batch plant shall include minimum four bins, with automatic
weighing hoppers, and scales for the fine aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate. If cement
is used in bulk, a separate scale for cement shall be included. The weighing hoppers shall be properly
sealed and vented to preclude dust during operation. Approved safety devices shall be provided and
maintained for the protection of all personal engaged in plant operation, inspection and testing. The
batch plant shall be equipped with a suitable non resettable batch counter which will correctly indicate
the number of batches proportioned.
21.28.18.2 Mixers.
a) Mixers shall be pan type, reversible type or any other mixer capable of combining the aggregate,
cement and water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specific mixing period and
discharging the mixer, without segregation. Each stationary mixer shall be equipped with approved
timing devices which will automatically lock the discharge lever when the drum has been charged and
release it at the end of the mixing period. The device shall be equipped with a bell or other suitable
warning device, adjusted to give a clearly audible signal each time the lock is released. The mixer shall
be equipped with a suitable non-resettable batch counter which shall correctly indicate nthe number of
batches mixed.
b) The mixers shall be cleaned at suitable intervals. The pickup and throw over blades in the drum
shall be repaired or replaced when they are worn down 20 mm or more. The Contractor shall have
available at the job site, a copy of the manufacturer design showing dimensions and arrangements of
blades in reference to original height and depth and provide permanent marks on blades to show
points of 20 mm wear from new conditions. Drilled holes of 5 mm diameter near each end and at
midpoint of each blade are recommended. A water tank with suitable control should be fitted with the
mixer to strictly ensure W/C ratio. Batching Plant shall be calibrated in the beginning an thereafter at
suitable interval not exceeding one month. An air conditioned centralizedcontrol cabin shall be
provided for automatic operation of the equipment.
21.28.18.3 Transportation. Freshly mixed concrete from the central batching and mixing plant shall
be transported to the paver site by means of transit mixers of suitable capacity and approved design in
sufficient number to ensure a constant supply of concrete. The feeding of the paver is to be regulated
in such a way that the paving is done in an uninterrupted manner with a uniform speed throughout the
day’s work.
21.28.18.4 Paving Equipment. The concrete shall be placed with an approved slip form paver with
independent units designed to spread, consolidate, screed, float finish, texture and cure the freshly
placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine in such a manner that a minimum of hand
finishing will be necessary and so as to provide a dense and homogenous pavement in conformity with
the plans and specification. The paver shall be equipped with electronic controls to control/sensor line
and grade from either or both side the machine.
21.28.18.5 BLANK
21.28.18.6 Construction by Slip Form Paver.

a) The slip form paving train shall consist of power machine which spreads, compacts and finishes the
concrete in a continuous operation. The slip form paving machine shall compact the concrete by
internal vibration and shape it between the side forms with either a conforming plate by vibrating and
oscillating finishing beams. The concrete shall be deposited without segregation in front of slip form
paver across the whole width and to a height at all times in excess of the required surcharge. The
deposited concrete shall be struck off to the necessary average and differential surcharge by means of
the strike off plate or a screw auger device extending across the whole width of the slab. The
equipment for striking-off the concrete shall be capable of being rapidly adjusted for change of the
average and differential surcharge necessitated by change in slab thickness or cross fall.
b) The level of the conforming plate and finishing beams shall be controlled automatically for the guide
wires installed by sensors attached at the four corners of the slip form paving machine. The alignment
of the paver shall be controlled automatically from the guide wire by at least one set of sensor attached
to the paver. The alignment and level of ancillary machines for finishing, texturing and curing of the
concrete shall be automatically controlled relative to the guide wire or to the surface and edge of the
slab.
c) Slip-form paving machines shall have vibrator of variable output with a maximum energy output of
not less than 2.5 KW per meter width of slab per 300 mm depth of slab for a laying speed up to 1.5 m
per minutes or pro data for higher speeds. The machines shall be of sufficient mass to provide
adequate reaction during spreading and paving operations on the traction units to maintain forward
movement during the placing of concrete in all situations.
d) If the edges of the slip formed slab slump to the extent that the surface of the top edge does not
comply with the requirements of clause 602.14 of MORTH orange book, then special measures
approved by the Engineer-in-charge shall be taken to support the edges to the required levels and
work shall be stopped until such time as the contractor can demonstrate his ability to slip from the
edges to the required level
21.28.18.7 BLANK
21.28.18.8 Use of guide wires. Where slip form paving is proposed, a guide wire shall be provided
along both sides of the slab. Each guide wire shall be at a constant height above and parallel to the
required edges of the slab as described in the contract/drawing within a vertical tolerance of ± 3 mm.
Additionally one of the wires shall be kept at a constant horizontal distance from the required edge of
the pavement as indicated in the contract/drawing within a lateral tolerance of ±10 mm. The guide
wires shall be supported on stakes not more than 8 m apart by connectors capable of fine horizontal
and vertical adjustment. The guide wire shall be tensioned on the stakes so that a 500 gram weight
shall produce a deflection of not more than 20 mm when suspended at the midpoint between any pair
of stakes. The ends of the guide-wire shall be anchored to fixing point and not on the stakes. The
stakes shall be positioned and the connectors maintained at their correct height and alignment from 12
hours on the day before concreting takes place until 12 hours after finishing of the concrete. The guide
wire shall be erected and tensioned on the connectors at any section for at-least 2 hours before
concreting that section. The contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval of line and level of
the stakes and connectors which are ready for use in the length of pavement to be constructed by 12
hours on the working day before the day of construction of the slab.
21.28.18.9 Surface Texture Equipment. After the final regulation of the slab and before
the application of the curing membrane, the surface of concrete slab shall be brush textured in a
direction at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway. The brushed surface texture shall
be applied evenly across the slab in one direction by the use of wire brush not less than 450 mm wide
but longer brushes are preferred. The brush shall be made of 32 gauge tape wires grouped together in
tufts spaced at 10 mm centers. The tufts shall contain an average of 14 wires and initially be 100 mm
long. The brush shall have two rows of tufts. The rows shall be 20 mm apart and the tufts in one row
shall be opposite the centre of the gap between tufts in the other row. The brush shall be replaced
when the shortest tuft wears down to 90 mm long. The texture depth shall be determined by the Sand
Patch Test as described in Clause 602.12 of MORTH (Roads Wing) Specification for Roads and
Bridges. This test shall be performed at least once for each days paving and wherever the Engineer
considers it necessary. At times after constructions, five individual measurements of the texture depth
shall be taken atleast 2 m apart anywhere along a diagonal line across a lane width between points 50
mm apart along the pavement. No measurements shall be taken within 300 mm of the longitudinal
edges of a concrete slab constructed in one pass. Texture depths shall not be less than the minimum
required when measurements are taken as given in Table 600-2 of MORTH nor greater than a
maximum average of 1.25 mm. After the application of the brushed texture, the surface of the slab
should have a uniform appearance.
21.28.18.10 Concrete Saw. The Contractor shall provide adequate number of concrete saw with
sufficient number of diamond edge saw blades. The saw machine shall be either electric or
petrol/diesel driven type. A water tank with flexible hose and pump shall be made available for this
activity on priority basis. The Contractor shall have at least one standby saw in good working condition.
The concreting work shall not commence if the saws are not in working condition. Contractor shall have
concrete saw capable of cutting full depth of slab.
21.28.19 TESTS AND QUALITY CONTROL
Testing of pavement concrete shall be in accordance with relevant IS Codes as mentioned hereinafter.
The following tests shall be carried out during the progress of works:-
a) Workability. Compacting factor tests and slump tests should be carried out as per IS: 1199(latest
revision). In case concrete is being machine laid, then only compacting factor tests should be carried
out other-wise either of the two can be carried out at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Compacting factor/slump test should be carried out for every 10 cum of concrete mixed. The concrete
should not be laid unless the appropriate test has been carried out and the authority given for start of
lay. Any batch of concrete giving a compacting factor or slump which does not comply with the laid
down values + 0.02 (in case of compacting factor only) should be rejected and removed from the site.
b) 7-day strength. Concrete will be accepted on 28 days strength. However, 7-day strength gives an
early indication of the strength likely to be achieved. 7-day strength should be determined at least 8 to
10 days prior to laying of concrete. At least three beams should be casted and tested for flexure as per
IS: 516 of 1959. The strength should be 70 to 75% of the 28 days strength. If it is less, then the
concrete mix should be redesigned and retested.
c) 28-day Strength. At least three beams for every slab (100 ft x 12.5 ft x 1ft) will be cast and tested
for flexure as per IS: 516. After at least 30 sample have been cast for slab laid in similar conditions
their results should be tabulated and LCL determined as follows:-
LCL = x̄ - t σ
Where LCL = Local Control Limit
(Minimum flexure strength)
x̄ = Mean flexural strength from the sample tested
ť = Tolerance level factor
σ = Standard deviation of the sample tested
LCL so determined should not be less than flexural strength specified in the design. Along with the
beams, cubes will also be cast and tested for compression as per IS: 516. The compressive strength
will be tabulated alongwith the corresponding flexural strength to establish correlation between flexural
and compressive strength.
d) Honeycombing. For slabs where honeycombing is expected, at least two cores per slab each of
10 cm dia (D) and 20 cm height (L) should be cut from slab which are at least 28 days old for visual
inspection. The position of the cores will be decided by the Engineer-in-Charge. If any core shows
honey-combing then, at least two more cores should be cut as directed, to determine the extent of
unsatisfactory concrete. The entire unsatisfactory portion should be cut and replaced.
e) Size of mould for testing purpose should not be less than 3 to 4 times the maximum size of course
aggregate. Standard mould sizes of 15x15x70 (cm) and 15x15x15 (cm) are used for beams and cubes
respectively. If the maximum size of the aggregate bigger than 50 mm does not exceed 15%, the same
standard moulds shall be used for testing. If the aggregate bigger than 50 mm exceed 15%, the mould
size will be 20x20x90 (cm) and 20x20x20 (cm) for beams and cubes respectively. The results with this
increased size of beams/cubes may show lower values and they are to be correlated with the values
obtained with 15x15x70 (cm) beams /15x15x15(cm) cubes by actual tests at sites. 15.0 Acceptance of
Concrete.
Concrete will only be accepted if it satisfies the following main conditions:-

(i) LCL of every lot (at least 30 samples) is not less than specified strength.
(ii) Co-efficient of variation is not greater than 10%.
(iii) Tolerance level factor is 1.5.
(iv) There is no honeycombing in the concrete.
f) Critical Examination of Test Data. In case the LCL of lot is less than specified strength, then
the following procedure will be adopted before core tests are undertaken:-
(i) Omit the slab having lowest average strength and revaluate the remaining test data of the
sample.
(ii) If the revaluated data confirms to the above acceptance criteria, accept the lot less the slab
omitted.
(iii) In case of unsatisfactory result repeat the process by omitting the next lowest till all
weak slabs are segregated for further testing by core cutting and the lot gets accepted.
g) Core Tests. In case the concrete fails in flexure test i.e. the LCL is less than specified for the
particular lot, then concrete will not be rejected unless it also fails in core test. In core test, at least two
cores of the dia not less than 150 mm shall be cut per slab. The crushing strength of this core is then
determined. The crushing strength should not be less than 0.8 times the corresponding strength of 15
cm cube. The crushing strength determination will as per IS: 516. In case the L/D ratio of the core is
between 1 and 2,then the crushing strength of the cube will be reduced. The correction will be carried
as per the formulae given below:-
f = 0.11n + 0.78, Where f = Correction factor, n = L/D ratio

In case the concrete fails the flexure (LCL) test, but is found satisfactory in core test, it will be accepted
as the core test takes the precedence over the flexure test. However in case the concrete fails both in
flexure as well as core test, then it will be rejected and replaced. All holes from which core have been
cut, will be filled with same concrete with which original slab was laid i.e. concrete of the same design
mix. While filling the concrete, due care should be taken to ensure proper bond between old and new
concrete.
21.28.20 BLANK
21.28.21 Mix Proportion and Strength (Design parameters/criteria)
Mix proportion and strength shall be all as per TI 10/2011 and SP-23. Batching and mixing of
PQC shall be done at plant installed at site conforming to IS 4925 /4926 as approved by GE.
Works test beams flexural strength Not less than 4.5 MPa at 28 days based on “Works test”
(designed flexural strength) conducted in the field or in a laboratory or the specimen made on
the works site out of the concrete being used there.
Aggregate/cement ratio by weight As per mix design
Water cement ratio by weight As per mix design
Minimum cement content 400KG/Cum
Degree of control ‘VERY GOOD’
Compaction factor 0.75-0.80
Coefficient of variation Not more than 10%
Exposure Severe
Slump for concrete Not more than 2.5 cm or as recommended for Slip form paver use.
Type of aggregate Crushed stone aggregate
Maximum size of Aggregate 31.5 mm
Type of cement As per appendix ‘C’ to Particular Specification.
NOTE: Design Mix of PQC and DLC shall be got done from any of the Government Engineering
college/IIT/SEMT as per IRC-44. The design mix shall be approved by Accepting officer. The cost of
tests including transportation charges of sample material to the Government Engineering
college/IIT/SEMT shall be borne by the contractor and no extra claim on this account shall be
admissible.
21.28.21.1 WATER CEMENT RATIO

a) The actual and designed quantity of water shall be used in the mix. The adjustment of water for
moisture content of aggregate on daily basis shall be carried out as per IS 456 and record shall be
maintained thereof.
21.28.22 GUARANTEE FOR POLYURETHANE JOINTS:

The contractor will give furnish guarantee for polyurethane joints free form defects for a period of ten
years after certified date of completion of the work. The contractor shall obtain similar guarantee from
the manufacturer and submit the same to the GE.
21.28.22.1 PRECAUTIONS
(a) Some people are sensitive to resins, hardeners, vapour etc. Therefore it is
advisable to use hand gloves/goggles and suitable protective clothing.
(b) Avoid application below 10oC temperature.
(c) Avoid application on damp or Moist surfaces.
(d) Do not expose primer to naked flames or other sources of ignition.
(e) Materials to be kept in no smoking area.
(f) Containers should be tightly sealed when not in use.
(g) In the event of fire, extinguish with carbon dioxide or foam.
(h) Should accident skin contact occurs, remove immediately with a resin removing
cream, followed by soap and water. Do not use solvent.
(j) In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of clean water and
seek medical advice.
(k) Use only in well ventilated areas.
(l) All consumables (masking tape, empty cartridges etc) should be removed and
disposed off safely.
21.28.22.2 Handing over in part /on completion : During the execution of contract, part completed work
shall be handed over after filling the joints, marking etc for the use as decided by GE. Due to wear and
tear defects may develop during the period until actual completion of whole work. All these defects
shall be rectified by the contractor without any extra cost to the Govt. Contractor has to hand over the
complete work to the specification at the time of completion and contractor will not have any claim on
this account. Defects liability period shall commence from the date of completion of the entire contract
irrespective of whatever has been completed and handed over earlier.
21.28.22.3 Rolling and Compaction in Narrow Spaces/Widths

Contractor will employ and use necessary rolling and compaction equipments for rolling and
compaction in narrow widths and spaces, where other bigger size rolling and compaction equipments
can’t be used due to paucity of space. The contractor shall ensure that necessary compaction
requirements, as specified here-in-before, are strictly met in such narrow spaces and widths also. The
contractor’s quoted rates shall be deemed to include for these provisions and nothing extra shall be
21.28.23 All testing of PQC materials shall be done as per PS clause of the tender ,conforming to
relevant IS code/ MORTH(popularly known as Orange book)/ TI 10/2011.Testing shall be performed
either at field Lab / SEMT /National test house/ NABL approved Lab. The lab shall be approved by GE
and the cost shall be borne by contractor. All test at site lab shall be carried out by qualified lab
technician of contractors in the presence of Engineer in charge
21.29 STEPS AND LANDING OF STAIR CASE
STEPS AND LANDING OF STAIR CASE (Kota Stone finish):

Unless shown on drawing/Schedule of finishes, treads of steps & landing of stair case shall be
provided with Kota stone, 16mm to 18mm thick machine cut Kota stone slab set over 20mm thick CM
(1:4) and jointed with grey cement slurry mixed with pigment to match the shade of the slab including
rubbing/grinding and polishing to achieve mirror polished surface. Riser shall be finished with 16mm
thick Kota stone slab on 10mm thick CM (1:3) and jointed with grey cement slurry mixed with pigment
to match the shade of the slab including rubbing/grinding and polishing to achieve mirror polished
surface over RCC steps and landings. For steps, Kota stone slab shall not be more than two pieces in
full length and shall be of equal width of Risers and Treads. Kota stone flooring shall be all as
described in clause 13.47 on Page 309 of SSR Part-I. Kota stone skirting shall also be provided on the
adjoining wall.
21.30 STEPS
21.30.1 STEPS (Kota Stone finish):

Wherever Kota stone finish is shown in drawing/Schedule of finishes, RCC/brick steps shall be
provided with Kota stone, 16 to 18mm thick machine cut Kota stone slab set over 20mm thick CM (1:4)
treads and 16mm thick Kota stone on 15mm thick CM (1:3) on risers shall be provided and jointed with
grey cement slurry mixed with pigment to match the shade of the slab including rubbing/grinding and
polishing to achieve mirror polished surface. For steps, Kota stone slab shall not be more than two
pieces in the full length and shall be of equal width of Risers and Treads. However, the sides of the
steps shall be finished with 5mm thick plaster in CM (1:3) finished even and smooth without using extra
cement.
22.00 PLASTERING AND POINTING:
22.1 GENERAL:
22.1.1 Plaster and skirting/dado shall be returned in jambs, soffits of lintels and windows etc.
22.1.2 Where plaster on concrete surface is shown to match the adjacent wall surface, the mix of
plaster shall be same as for the wall surfaces.
22.1.3 All plastered surfaces shall be towelled to even and smooth surfaces without using extra
cement.
22.1.4 All external finishes shall be carried out upto 15cm below ground level except where plinth
protection etc is provided.
22.1.5 Thickness of cement plaster mentioned in Sch of finishes shall be finished thickness
exclusive of dubbing. Dubbing may, however, be done in one operation with plaster.
22.1.6 All corners, angles, junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be and shall
be carefully finished. Corners around joints openings and junction of walls shall be rounded to
minimum radius of 5mm.
22.2. MATERIALS:
22.2.1 CEMENT - Refer clause 8.1 here-in-before.
22.2.2 SAND - Refer clause 8.2 here-in-before.

22.3 GROOVES AT THE JUNCTION OF MASONRY AND RCC
22.3.1 No grooves shall be provided at the junction of brick wall and RCC work on the external
surface of buildings. A strip of chicken wire mesh 15 cm wide having aperture approximately 12.5 mm
in least dimension with a weight not less than 0.40 Kg per Sqm shall be fixed over the junction of RCC
and brick work on the external surfaces of buildings before plastering. The chicken wire mesh shall be
fixed on the wall surface with the help of nails of suitable size. The chicken wire mesh shall be fixed in
a manner that it covers 7.5cm of brick work and 7.5 cm of RCC work. However in case of lintel band,
chicken wire mesh shall be fixed covering whole width of lintel band and projecting 7.5 cm each on
either side of brick work. After fixing of chicken wire mesh, 10mm thick plaster in CM (1:4), finished fair
and even shall be applied as mentioned in Clause 22.4.2 here-in-after. However no such provision
shall be required where columns,/beams/slabs are projecting from external faces of wall.
22.3.2 Irrespective of what is specified and shown on drawing, 10mm wide and 5mm deep continuous
groove shall be provided in plaster throughout, at the junction of brick wall and RCC works on the
internal surfaces of buildings and edges shall be properly made up. However no groove shall be
provided at the junction of lintel band and brick masonry.
22.4. CEMENT PLASTERING
22.4.1 BLANK.
22.4.2 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL PLASTERING

Internal/external plaster shall be done all as per Sch of finishes with Polymer modified readymix
plaster. Preparation of surface, application of mortar etc shall be done as per manufacturer instructions
and as directed.
22.5 POINTING
22.5.1 Pointing wherever indicated/shown on drawing, the same shall be carried out as specified in
clause 14.29 of MES Sch Part-I.
22.5.2 Raised pointing in cement mortar (1:3) shall be projected from the wall facing as shown on
drawing.
22.5.3 Unless otherwise indicated/shown on drawing, the size of groove in plaster shall be 10x5mm or
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
22.6 GLAZED TILES DADO

22.6.1 Where glazed coloured ceramic tiles dado is indicated in drawings/Schedule of finishes, the
same shall be with Glazed tiles of size 450mmx300mm and 7mm thick all as specified in clause 13.14
of MES Schedule Part-I and shall be provided as specified in clause 13.40 of MES schedule Part-I.
Glazed tiles shall be laid over 10mm thick screed in cement mortar 1:3. Unless otherwise indicated or
shown on drawing, the height of the dado shall be 2100mm. The tiles shall be glossy and shade shall
be as approved by GE. Make of tiles shall be as mentioned in Appendix ‘B’.
22.7 KOTA STONE SKIRTING

22.7.1 Where Kota stone skirting is indicated in drawings/Schedule of finishes, the same shall be with
18 to 20mm thick mirror polished Kota stone laid over 10mm thick screed bed in cement mortar (1:3)
and jointed with grey cement slurry mixed with pigment to match the shade of the slab including
rubbing/grinding and polishing all as specified in MES schedule Part-I. The colour and shade of Kota
stone in skirting shall be same as for floors as decided by GE. Height of skirting shall be 100mm. Kota
stone skirting shall be laid in such a manner that it is flush with cement plaster. For this purpose, the
brick work upto skirting height to the required depth shall be cut and washed thoroughly with water
before applying cement screed.
22.8 NON SKID CERAMIC TILES SKIRTING

Where non skid ceramic tiles skirting is indicated in drawings/Schedule of finishes, the same shall be
with Non skid ceramic tiles of shade, colour and texture as per flooring, shall be laid over 10mm thick
screed in cement mortar (1:3), jointed & pointed in white cement with colour pigment (suitable to match
with the colour of tiles). Irrespective of whatever is shown on drawings, the height of skirting shall be
100mm. Non skid ceramic tiles skirting shall be laid in such a manner that it is flush with cement
mortar. For this purpose, the brick work upto skirting height to the required depth shall be cut and
washed thoroughly with water before applying cement screed.
22.9 VITRIFIED CERAMIC TILE SKIRTING

Where vitrified tiles skirting is indicated in drawings/Schedule of finishes, the same shall be with
Vitrified porcelain tile of shade, colour and texture as per flooring, shall be laid over 10mm thick screed
cement mortar (1:3). After fixing the tile, the joints will be filled up with polymer bases tile grout of
colour matching with tile as per manufacturer’s recommendations. The height of skirting where not
indicated on drawing shall be 150mm.
23.0 WHITE/COLOUR WASH/DISTEMPER/CEMENT BASE PAINT :
23.1 WHITE/COLOUR WASH
23.1.1 White [lime] wash or colour wash shall be provided as indicated in drawings, all as specified in
clause 15.2 & 15.12 of MES schedule Part-I. For white washing on `ceiling adequate quantity of zinc
oxide shall be added to lime wash for achieving egg white shade. Skirting and dado are not to be
white/colour washed. Where number of coats are not indicated in Schedule of finishes, it shall be as
under:-
a) White wash : Three coats of white wash over prepared surfaces.
b) Colour wash : Two coats of colour wash over one coat of white wash over prepared
surfaces.
23.2. DRY/OIL BOUND DISTEMPER
23.2.1 Oil bound distemper (Oil emulsion distemper)/ Dry distemper, shall be applied in two coats over
a coat of primer after preparation of surfaces. Plastered surfaces shall be prepared smooth by using
white cement putty before applying distemper of make JK White/Birla White/Tata pigment.
Makes/brand of Distemper shall be as specified in Appendix ‘B’.
23.3 CEMENT BASE PAINT
23.3.1 Cement base paint shall be provided in two coats over a coat of primer computable to the
cement base paint as per manufacturer’s instruction at location as indicated in drawings, all specified in
clause 15.7 and 15.15 of MES Schedule Part-1. Shade shall be approved by Garrison Engineer.
Cement base paint shall conform to IS-5410-1992 as approved by GE. Makes/brand of cement base
paint shall be as specified in Appendix ‘B’.
23.4 WEATHER PROOF PAINT/COATING

23.4.1Weather proof paint/coat on external plastered surfaces, where indicated in Schedule of
finishes/drawing shall be applied in two coats over a coat of primer after preparation of surfaces. The
weather proof coat and primer shall be applied as per manufacturer’s instructions. The brand of
weather proof coat shall be of following manufacturer’s :-
(i) WEATHER COAT SMOOTH - Berger Paints

(ii) APEX - Asian Paints
(iii) XTRA - Shalimar Paint
(iv) AXCEL - Nerolac Paint
24 TOUGHENED GLASS DOOR AND PARTITION WALL WITH FITTINGS
All glazing shall be with of selected sheet glass/ toughened/tinted glass conforming to relevant IS all as
shown on drawings. Glass shall be free from all defects viz bubbles, waviness etc. and shall be of
uniform thickness. The thickness of toughened glass for door shall not be less than 12mm thick and
for fixed glazing it shall not be less than 10mm thick. Make : SAINT GOBAIN/NAVKUSH
ENTERPRISES/JK INTERNATIONAL, JALANDHAR/RIDHI SIDHI
25.0 PAINTING
25.1 All synthetic enamel paints and emulsion paints shall be of 1st quality manufactured by the
standard firms as per B'F'.
25.1.2 The contractor shall inform the GE, with in three weeks of the acceptance of the tender, the
brand/ names of the manufacturers of paint proposed to be used in the work and submit samples
thereof to GE before their use in work and obtain prior approval of GE.
25.1.3. The contractor shall, when required by the GE, produce certificate from the manufacturer or
their authorised agents to establish that the brand of paints purchased by the contractor from them
satisfy the requirements of the relevant IS.
25.1.4. Paints for priming coat, under coat and finishing coat shall be of the same brand.
25.1.5. Tint of paint, if not mentioned in drgs/schedule of finishes, will be as approved by the GE.
25.2. WORKMANSHIP
25.2.1 All wood work required to be painted shall be smoothened size and knotted and then applied
with priming coat, stopping and filling [filler coat] shall be done after priming coat and surface rubbed
down to a level and smooth surface and thereafter under coat and finishing coat shall be applied all as
specified in clause 17.6 of MES Schedule Part-I. Steel and iron work shall be painted in the manner as
specified in clause 17.8 of MES Schedule Part-I.
25.2.2. The surfaces of all wooden and steel or iron, where indicated in schedule of finishes to be
painted, shall be given two coats [under coat and finishing coat] of synthetic enamel paint over a coat
of pink primer/red oxide zinc chrome primer respectively.
25.2.3. The surfaces indicated in schedule of finishes to be aluminum painted shall be given two
coats of aluminum paint conforming to IS-2339 over a coat of appropriate primer.
25.2.4. No treatment shall be given to reinforcement and galvanised fittings such as , GI tubing for
hand rails, aluminum doors and windows etc.
25.2.5. All other steel surfaces, exposed to view but not covered in schedule of finishes or their
finishing is not specifically indicated in any other drgs or specified elsewhere shall be given two coats
of synthetic enamel paint over a coat of red oxide Zinc chrome primer of tint as directed by the GE.
25.2.6 Bottom of door shutter shall be given one coat of primer only.
25.2.7 All exposed cast iron soil/waste/vent/anti syphonage pipes, PVC RWP and fittings thereto
shall also be painted with synthetic enamel paint (one under and finishing coat) external matching in
colour with the adjoining surfaces.
25.2.8 If the under coat of the paint is not executed within six months after applying the priming coat of
paint, the priming coat shall be redone by the contractor at no extra cost to the govt.
25.3 TARRING
25.3.1 The back of wooden/steel chowkats in contract with stone/brick work/plaster etc. shall be given
two coats of tar. Hold fast shall be given two coats of tar and sanded it.
25.4 FRENCH POLISH

25.4.1 French polish, where indicated on drgs, shall be all as specified in clause 17.7.4 of MES
Schedule Part-I. Unless otherwise specified in drawing, wooden surfaces of built-in furniture shall be
french polished.
25.5 CEMENT SLURRY
25.5.1 Portions of MS bolts, lugs, anchor bolts etc. embedded in concrete or masonry shall be
treated with neat cement slurry.
25.6 ALUMINIUM PAINT
25.6.1 Aluminium paint, where indicated on drgs, shall be provided in two coats over a coat of primer.
25.7 Irrespective of what is specified in drawings wire gauge fixed in doors/windows shall be painted
with one coat of blue synthetic enamel paint.
25.8 FALSE CEILING
25.8.1 False ceiling shall be provided with Gl frame work size of grid 605 x 605 mm for seamless
ceiling comprising of Gl perimeter channnel 0.55 mm thick with two unequal flanges of 20 and 30 mm
and web of 27 mm fixed to surrounding wall using nylon sleeves and screws at 450 mm centre to
centre/intermediate channel 0.9 mm thick having two equal flanges of 15 mm each and web of 45 mm
suspended from soffit at approx 900 mm centre to centre with Gl cleat and steel expansion fasteners
with and including ceiling section (not exc 1.2 m length) of 0.55 mm thickness having kurled web of 50
mm and flange of 26 mm each with lips of 10.5 mm fixed to the intermediate channel with connecting
clips across the intermediate channel at 457 mm centre to centre.
25.8.2 Hangers shall 6 mm dia. G.I. (upto1200mm length) adjusting level fixed to roof slabs by means
of ceiling cleats made out of G.I. flat 40 x 3 mm size 60mm long and expansion hold fasteners 12.5mm
dia. 40mm long complete all as specified
25.8.3 Ceiling shall be calcium silicate ceiling made out of 1800 x 1200 mm size board (8 mm Thick)
of siliceous and calcareous material reinforced with cellulose fibre fixed to the ceiling section with 25
mm long self drilling and tapping screws having phillips head with under head cutter at 200 mm centre
to centre, including finshing the joint of face board with specially formulated jointing compound and 48
mm wide fibre tape to provide seam less finish including two coat of oil bond distemper over one coat
of primer including preparation on ceiling surface
26.0 STATIC WATER TANK shall be provided all as shown in drawing as specified in Schedule 'A'
with following brief specifications :-
(a) PCC in other PCC (1:2:4) type B-1(using 20mm graded crushed stone
situations aggregate).
(b) RCC Work. RCC M-30 (Design Mix) as specified here-in-before. A layer
of bitumen paper shall be provided over PCC Foundation
before laying the RCC Base slab.
(c) Steel and iron work All steel and iron work shall be of Fe-410-O grade. Steel
for steel gate gate shall be fabricated from angles, flat iron and other steel
sections all as per details shown in the drawings.
(d) Plastering (a) Internal plaster: 20 mm thick in cement mortar 1:4 using
water proofing liquid admixtures as per manufacture’s
instruction.
(b) External plaster: 10 mm thick cement mortar (1:3) from
15 cm below ground level as specified.
(e) Finishes (i) All exposed surface shall be finished with two coats of
acrylic emulsion (exterior grade ) paint.” over a coat of
primer including preparation of plastered surface.
(ii) All steel surfaces shall be painted with two coats of
synthetic enamel paint coat of primer including preparation
of plastered surface.
27. SEPTIC TANK

Septic tank of capacity 50 users with suitable up flow filter shall be constructed all as shown on drawing
28 BLANK
29. HDPE WATER STORAGE TANKS
29.1. HDPE water storage tanks where indicated in the drawing shall be as per IS-12701 and shall be
of make as mentioned in Appendix ‘B’. Rotational moulded, three layered polyethylene water storage
tanks shall be of capacity as shown in the drawings. Following accessories shall be provided with each
water tank:-
a) 20mm bore wash out Pipe (PP-R Pipes) 10cm long with plug.
b) 20mm bore overflow pipe (PP-R Pipes) fitted with brass anti mosquito rose coupling at
end extended upto 150mm above the finished roof level.
c) Ball valve with polythene float and fly nut ISI Marked, suitable for bore size of inlet pipe.
d) Inlet and outlets of GI pipe 10cm long each of bore to suit the riser/down take pipe.
30.0 NUMBERING OF BUILDINGS/ BLOCKS

Numbering of all blocks [at both end walls] shall be done by the contractor by engraving and painting
[black] the requisite letters/figures on a cement plaster [1:3} plate [format] of size and shape as shown
on drgs.
31.0 All windows cills shall be provided with 19mm thick dark Black granite slab.
32.0 STAINLESS STEEL SINK WITH DRAINING BOARD
Sink with draining board shall be on unit made out from non magnetic stainless steel sheet 1.00mm
thick of specified make of overall size 915mm x 460mm with bowl size of 410 mm x 330mm x 160mm.
Make of sink with draining board shall be as mentioned in Appendix ‘B’. If size of sink and draining
board as specified are not available in the market then next (higher) nearest size available shall be
provided with following accessories/fittings:-
(i) Waste fittings bras chromium plated, screwed with fly nut and washer suitable for
50mm bore pipe.
(ii) 50 mm bore GI light grade waste pipe from basin to trap.
(iii) A pair of cast iron brackets.
33.0 COOKING PLATFORM AND SHELF WITH BLACK GRANITE TOP:
33.1 18 to 20 mm thick polished black granite slab (machine cut) of approved quality shall be
provided over 15 mm thick CM (1:4) bedding layer over RCC platform. Granite stone slab
shall also be provided on front face over 10 mm thick screed in CM(1:3).
34.0 TOWEL RAILS

34.1 Towel rails shall be tubular of brass chromium plated with CP brass brackets. It shall be of
19/20mm dia and 60cm long (between flanges) in case length is not indicated on the
drawings. Minimum thickness of towel rails shall be 1mm.
35 &36 BLANK
37.0 SAUCER DRAIN
37.1 The saucer drain shall be provided as per details shown in drawings. PCC in foundation
shall be PCC (1:4:8) type D-2 (using 40mm graded crushed stone aggregates). Drain shall
be made to shape in PCC (1:2:4) type B-0(using 12.5mm graded crushed stone aggregate)
finished fair using extra cement.
38.0 COUNTER WHB/OVAL TYPE WASH HAND BASIN ON COUNTER (With Mirror)
(a) Oval type WHB of size 51cm x 45 cm vitreous china glazed ware as specified in Appendix ‘B’ of
colour as approved by GE, shall be fixed in 18 to 20 mm thick polished black granite slab (machine cut)
of approved quality over RCC shelf and with following fittings:-
(i) Waste fittings brass chromium plated screwed with fly nut and washer suitable
for 32mm bore pipe.
(ii) 32mm dia PVC waste pipe of approved quality from WHB to trap.
(b) Mirror of size as shown in the drawing shall be of polished sheet glass 5.5mm thick fixed on
6mm thick plywood, BWR grade conforming to IS-303 (duly ISI marked). Ist class hard wood Teak
wood frame of size 20mm wide and 10mm thick shall be provided alround the mirror. Mirror shall be
hung by key slots on screws fixed to plug embedded in walls. All exposed wooden surfaces shall be
French polished. In case size of mirror is not shown, the same shall be 900mm x 450mm.
39.0 BLANK
40.0 SANITARY AND TOILET FITTINGS
40.1 GENERAL
40.1.1 All sanitary appliances shall be of vitreous china (white) first quality and shall conform to IS-
2556 for General requirements and the specific requirements as mentioned in clause 18.32 to 18.40 of
MES Schedule Part-I. These shall be of an approved as specified in Appendix 'B'.
40.1.2 All waste pipe and fittings upto floor/nahani trap shall be galvanised steel tubing medium
grade all as specified in clause 18.4 of MES Schedule Part-1.
40.1.3 Flush pipe and socket of flushing rim of WC shall be jointed with white cement and red lead
(white cement and red lead in equal proportion by weight) and linseed oil to form paste.
26.1.4 'P' or 'S' trap shall be jointed to WC pan with cement joints as specified in clause 18.48.5 of
MES Schedule Part-I. Irrespective of whatsoever shown on drgs, cast iron 'P' or 'S' trap shall be
provided.
40.1.5 Cast iron brackets (for the relevant sanitary and toilet fitting shall be given two coat of
aluminium paint over a coat of primer.
40.1.6 Cast iron brackets shall conform to IS-775.
40.1.7 The sizes, given here-in-after are approximate sizes. The sizes of sanitary fittings to be
provided shall be the nearest size as per manufacturer's catalogue.
40.2 WATER CLOSET (SQUATT PATTERN ORISSA TYPE)
40.2.1 Water closet squat pattern shall be Orissa type and conform to IS-2556 Part-III of size 580mm
x 440mm shall be provided with 'P' or 'S' trap and the following fittings/items irrespective of whatsoever
is shown on drawings :-
a) Flush pipe of polyethylene of low or high density or PVC, 32mm dia, for low level cistern.
b) 15mm dia polythene overflow pipe upto 75mm above from floor level with polythene anti
mosquito rose.
c) 10 litters discharge capacity polyethylene low level flushing cistern solid moulded with valve
less symphonic fitting, manual operated with one pull ball valve horizontal plunger type with
polyethylene float valve.
NOTE : Where flushing cistern cannot be fixed in wall due to window/lintel as per sanitary plan,
the same shall be fixed in the side wall with additional bend, the cost of which shall be deemed
to be included in the lump sum cost of building given in Sch 'A' Part-I.
d) The pan shall be set in lime concrete (1:2) at least 25cms around and finished just below
the rim to receive the specified thickness of floor finish.
40.3. WATER CLOSET PEDESTAL PATTERN
40.3.1 EWC or English type WC or European type WC indicated in the plan or resembles the above
types of WC, in such locations, water closet pedestal pattern shall be provided and shall consist of the
followings : -
(i) Water closet wash down pattern of height 40 cm with vitreous china ‘S’ trap in ground floor
and providing with long arm CI ‘P’ trap so that joint is avoided inside sunken portion as well as
in walls and outlet straight away come out of wall in intermediate floors all as per IS-2556 (Part-
II 1981.
(ii) Plastic seat and cover with flat underside solid moulding closed form pattern with cover
shall be as per IS:2548 (Part-I). Seat and cover shall be white in colour with chromium-
plated hinging device.
(iii) 10 litre discharge capacity low level PVC flushing cistern with all accessories and a pair of
the brackets.
(iv) 32-mm dia flush pipe of chromium plated brass tube bent to required shape including
chromium plated brass coupling.
(v) The closet shall be screwed with brass screws to First class hard wood (teak) wood plugs
embedded in floor.
(vi) Provision of jet shall be made in all EWC.
40.4. SOAP NICHE

40.4.1 Unless otherwise specified in drawings, Glazed Ceramic tiles, of colour as per surrounding
dado, for soap niches shall be 5mm thick conforming to relevant I.S. Tiles shall be set and jointed in
neat cement slurry and pointed with white cement to match the colour of tiles.
40.5. NICHE WITH WASH HAND BASIN

40.5.1 Where glass or vitreous china shelf not indicated with wash hand basin, a niche of size 450mm
× 200mm × 100 mm shall be provided. All sides of niche shall be lined to match with adjoining
surfaces.
40.6. URINALS : Urinal shall be white, vitreous, china, half stall type, flat back large of size
37.5cmx32cmx68cm or 39cmx37cmx60cm with CP urinal spreader with grating and union including the
following fittings :-
i) 20mm bore medium grade galvanised iron flush pipe.
ii) 15mm polythene over flow pipe upto 75mm above FFL or outlet drain.
iii) Chromium plated brass coupling to connect urinal pan with waste pipe and chromium plated
adopter to connect pan with flush pipe.
iv) The pan shall be fixed with brass screws on sheesham wooden plugs embedded in the wall in CM
(1:2).
v) Urinal partition shall be of 18 to 20mm thick Polished granite stone as shown on drawing. In case,
nothing is mentioned on drawing it shall be of 18 to 20mm polished marble stone slab with MS channel
at bottom and set in cement mortar 1:3. The width of partition wall shall be as shown in drawing and
shall be in one piece. In case, no size is mentioned on drawing, it shall be of 450mm x 600mm.
40.7. WASTE PIPE AND COUPLING

40.7.1 In all locations where waste pipe is to provided e.g for WHB, Sinks etc., 32mm dia, GI, medium
grade, waste pipe of required length shall be provided with brass chromium plated waste coupling with
perforated grating 32mm dia.
40.8. MIRROR
40.8.1 Wherever shown on drawings, mirror shall be polished sheet glass 5.5mm thick on 12mm thick
commercial plywood BWR grade, mitred at corners and provided with wooden/polythene moulding
frame. Mirror shall be hung by key slots on screws fixed to plug embeded in walls unless otherwise
shown on drawings. Size of mirror where not shown on drawings shall be 60cmx45cm.
40.9. WASH HAND BASIN

40.9.1 Wash hand basin shall consist of:-
i) Wash hand basin of size 55cmx40cm vitreous china glazed ware, flat back pattern as
mentioned in Appendix ‘B’ with waste union and perforated grating (both fittings of brass
chromium plated).
ii) A pair of cast iron brackets.
iii) 32mm dia galvanised steel medium grade waste pipe fitted with brass chromium plated
waste coupling outlet complete, length of waste pipe shall be as indicated on drgs/as directed
by Engineer-in-Charge.
40.10. TOILET PAPER HOLDER

40.10.1 Irrespective of whatsoever is shown on drawings, one toilet paper holder shall be provided with
each WC (Pedestal type). Unless otherwise specified in drawings, toilet paper holder shall be 150mm x
150mm recessed roll type as per catalogue No. 4008 of Hindustan Sanitary Ware & Industries Ltd.
and fixed all as directed.
41.0. INTERNAL ELECTRIFICATION

41.1 SCOPE OF WORK
41.1.1 The work consists of items as described in Sch 'A'.
41.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

41.2.1 Refer clause 19.2.1. to 19.2.8 of MES Sch 'A' Part-1.
41.3 TYPE OF WIRING

41.3.1 The type of wiring (batten or concealed conduit) shall be as shown on drawings and directed
by the Engineer-in-Charge. Point wiring for light/power/ fan/bell or buzzer point(s) includes all works
mentioned in preambles to the rates in MES Schedule part-II for point wiring unless otherwise
indicated in these tender documents. In case of conduit wiring, colour coding for phase, neutral and
earth cable shall be followed as per clause 19.25(b)(ii) of MES Schedule Part-I.
41.4 INTERNAL ELECTRICAL WORK

41.4.1 Cable for internal wiring for light, power and sub main cables shall be with copper conductor
and shall be of following type :-
a) WIRING WITH PVC CONCEALED CONDUIT

(i) Single core, copper conductor (flexible) FR-LSH PVC insulated cable unsheathed) of suitable
size, 1.5/2.5/4.00 Sqmm copper conductor upto 1100 Volts grade conforming to IS-694-1990 shall be
used.
b) FLEXIBLE CORDS, TWISTED COPPER CONDUCTOR

(i)Flexible cords, twin core, each with tinned annealed stranded copper conductor elastomer insulated
and textile braided twisted together, size, nominal cross sectional area 0.5 Sqmm shall be as per IS-
9968 part-1.
c) WOODEN BLOCK, BOARDS AND ROUND BLOCKS

(i) These shall be in accordance with clause 19.28 of MES Schedule part-1. Conduit and conduit
fitting shall be in accordance with clause 19.29 of MES Schedule Part-I.
d) PLUG/GUTTIES, SCREWS AND FASTENINGS

(i) These shall be in accordance with clause 19.30 and 19.31 of MES Schedule part-1.
e) CEILING ROSE, SHADES AND BULK HEAD FITTINGS

(i) These shall be in accordance with clause 19.32, 19.33 and 19.34 of MES Schedule part-1 and
as specified and as shown on drawings.
f) SUNK TYPE BOXES

(i) These shall be in accordance with clause 19.38 of MES Schedule part-1.
g) SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS

h) LAMP HOLDERS
i) MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

(i) These shall conform to IS-8828 (specification for MCBs for AC circuit for voltage not exceeding
1000 Volts). All MCBs shall be housed in suitable size standard sheet metal enclosure of 16 gauge
MS Sheet supplied by the manufacturer of MCBs.
j) LIGHT FITTINGS
(i) All light fittings shall be provided in accordance with the description of the items given in
Sch. 'A' and as shown on the drawings.
k) Particular attention is drawn to the neatness as in appearance which is to be achieved by judicious

planning of run of the cable, the locations of the light fittings, fans, switches, socket outlets, main
switches etc.
l) Due regard shall be given to doors, windows, opening etc. in fixing of runs of cables, position of
fittings, control switches and outlet points. The workmanship shall comply strictly with the rules
contained in latest Indian Electricity rules.
m) Samples of all electric fittings shall first be got approved from GE in writing before incorporation in
work and shall conform to relevant IS. Utility light fittings shall be of the best quality available and
conform to sample kept in GE/CWE office.
(n) Types of Light Fittings shall be provided at the locations as mentioned in drawings/as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge. However generally Mirror optics fittings are to be fitted in CO, 2ICs room in Adm
Block and Anti room, Mess Room in Offrs Mess. T-5 Box type fittings are to be fitted in single offrs
accn, offrs mess, adm block (except passage). Channel type (Patti type) fittings are to be fitted in
Remaining all accn, including passage of Offrs mess and Adm block.
41.5 EARTHING AND TESTING

41.5.1 Earthing shall be carried out as described in clause 19.137 to 19.146 and as shown in electric
plate No.5 of MES Schedule part-1.
41.6 SITING OF ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT

41.6.1 The siting of cable, conduit run controls, distribution boards, fittings and accessories etc. shall
be as laid down in IS-4648. "Guide for electrical layout in residential building" or as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The location of fittings etc shall be marked in advance on walls etc and approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
41.7 SYSTEM OF WIRING

41.7.1 Wiring shall be carried out with PVC insulated cable. All conductors as far as possible shall
run near walls and ceiling so as to be easily accessible and capable of being thoroughly inspected.
Power wiring shall be kept separate and distinct from light wiring. In all type of wiring due
consideration shall be given for neatness, good appearance and safety. Diagonal runs will not be
permitted.
41.8 CONTROL AT POINT OF ENTRY OF SUPPLY

41.8.1 These shall be linked with main switch gear (Isolator) with MCB on each live conductor of the
supply mains at the point of entry. The wiring through out the installation shall be such that there is no
break in the neutral wire except in the form of a linked switch gear. No fuses shall be inserted in the
earth neutral.
41.9 TYPE OF SWITCH BOARDS

41.9.1 Hinged type metal boards for mounting the MCB and electrical meters shall be as per clause
19.105.1 of MES Schedule part-1. Meter box shall be made of 16 gauge MS Sheet with provision of
locking arrangement and glass window.
41.10 JOINTS AND LOOPING BACK

41.10.1 These shall be as per clause No. 19.109 of MES Schedule Part-1.
41.11 PASSING THROUGH WALLS AND FLOORS

41.11.1 Refer clause 19.111 of MES Schedule part-1 for passing the conductors through walls and
floors. The rate for surface wiring against internal electrification shall deemed to include the provisions
mentioned in clause 19.111 of MES Schedule part-1.
41.12 RECESSED CONDUIT WIRING

41.12.1 System of conduit wiring wiring shall be as per clause No. 19.102 and 19.132 of MES Sch
Part-I.
42. INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY
42.1 WATER TUBING

42.1.1 All water tubing shall be PPR and fittings shall comply with the requirement of relevant IS.
Laying of PP-R pipe shall be in accordance with Clause 18.114 of MES Schedule. The pipes (for
supply of water), with all fittings, shall run concealed in the walls except where otherwise specified.
Where PP-R pipes crosses the wall, PP-R sleeve piece of suitable dia/length shall be provided to
accommodate the pipe and cost of same shall be deemed to be included in the lumpsum cost of
building. The contractor shall use proper bends, elbows, tees etc at turning corners. Contractor shall
provide screwed plugs to all open ends of pipe on completion of days work.
42.1.2 BIB TAPS AND STOP VALVES Bib taps and stop valves shall be as mentioned in schedule ‘A’
and specified in Clause 18.14 and 18.15 of MES Schedule.
42.2 LAYING AND JOINING OF POLYPROPYLENE RANDOM PIPES AND FITTINGS
42.2.1 Laying , joining of PP-R shall be done all as specified in clause No 18.114.3 of SSR Part I.The
pipes for supply of water to all fittings inside the buildings/toilets shall be run on the walls except
otherwise as specified in these tender documents or shown on drawings, connected to various fittings
and shall be brought in the room at point/position approved by the Engineer-in-Charge at site.
42.2.2 Where pipes are laid underground, the trenches shall be excavated as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge. The pipes running along face of the walls/concealed in walls shall be clamped in
the walls as specified in SSR. Where pipe is passing through a wall, a mild steel tube sleeve shall be
fixed all as specified in clause 18.51.1 of SSR part-1.
42.3 PVC PIPE CONNECTION
42.3.1 Ready made PVC connection pipes of standard make shall be 450mm long suitable for 15mm
bore GI pipe complete with brass chromium plated coupling nuts and rubber washer. The weight of
brass coupling nuts shall not be less than 40 grams. The weight of PVC pipe 450mm long shall not be
less than 40 grams.
42.4 WORKMANSHIP
42.4.1 Laying of PP-R pipes (internal works) shall be in accordance with clause 18.114.3 of MES
Schedule part-1.
42.4.2 The contractor shall use proper bends, elbows, unions etc at turning corner. Bending of pipes
shall not be allowed in any case.
42.4.3 Pipe shall not run diagonally.
42.4.4 Contractor shall provide screwed plugs to all open ends of pipes on completion of days work.
42.5 TESTING
42.5.1 Testing of pipes shall be carried out all as per clause 18.114.5 of MES Schedule Part-1.
42.6 RECORD DRAWINGS
42.6.1 Three copies of line plan of complete work indicating the line of pipes, position of fittings etc.
shall be submitted by the contractor to the Engineer-in-Charge on completion of work.
43.0 PLUMBING WORK
43.1 GENERAL
43.1.1 Plumbing work shall be carried out as specified in clause 18.13 to 18.23, 18.40 and 18.62 to
18.67 of MES Schedule part-I.
43.2 All plumbing works in Hanger and Annexe Building shall be executed by licensed plumber only
43.3 FIXING OF PIPES TO WALLS
43.3.1 CI pipes and fittings shall be fixed to wall with mild steel clamps as specified in clause 18.67 to
18.67.6 of MES Sch Part-1.
43.4 NAHANI/FLOOR TRAPS
43.4.1 Nahani/floor traps shall be provided in situations as shown on drawings. These shall conform
to IS-1729. Floor traps shall be provided with CI grating.
43.4.2 Where Nahani/floor traps of 22.5cm depth can not be accommodated in sunken floor, a
300mm x 300mm portion of the RCC slab shall be sunk to the extent it accommodates the Nahani trap
without any additional cost
43.5 SHORTER LENGTH

43.5.1 Except for WC connections, the contractor may use pipe pieces without sockets in shorter
lengths (less than one pipe length), where approved by the GE and connect these to pipe fittings with
double sockets/collars including additional joints as specified above without extra cost to the
Government.
43.6 GULLY TRAPS

43.6.1 Gully traps shall be salt glazed stone ware complying with the requirements of IS-651. These
shall be set in PCC M-10 (Nominal mix) block measuring 450 x 450mm and 100mm thick. Jointing to
drain pipe shall be done in cement mortar (1:1).
43.6.2 Cast iron perforated grating shall be 150mmx150mm bituminous coated and fixed as directed
by Engineer-in-Charge. PCC M-10 (Nominal Mix) in kerb and RCC cover slab reinforced with XPM
weight not less than 4Kg/Sqm and shall be provided all as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
43.7 TRENCHES FOR PIPE LINES
43.7.1 Excavation for trenches shall be done as per the width given in clause 3.2.3 of MES Schedule
Part-II and as specified hereinbefore and depth as required at site. The trenches shall be back filled
after testing of pipes with excavated earth in layers not exceeding 250mm and surplus spoil disposed
off to a distance not exceeding 50 metres.
43.8 TESTING
43.8.1 All soil, waste and vent pipes shall be tested as specified in clause 18.79.1 to 18.79.5 of MES
Schedule part-1.
44.0 ROAD / PATH / CULVERT / HARDSTANDING (SCHEDULE-‘A’ PART- V)
44.1 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK
44.1.1 Excavation and earthwork shall be carried out all as described in clause 20-A.15 of MES SSR
Part I.
44.1.2 Before commencement of excavation or earth filling, the representative of the GE and the
contractor shall take the levels jointly, of the existing ground surfaces at intervals as decided by
the GE (the decision of the GE will be final and binding) and cross sections to be prepared by
the Engineer-in-Charge. These cross sections shall also show the proposed formation levels
after consolidation and shall be signed by the GE and contractor in token of their acceptance
and sent to CE office for record within 2 months from the date of commencement.
44.1.3 For the purpose of filling/cutting, the entire area where filling/cutting activity is to be done shall
be divided into grids of suitable sizes and quantities shall be computed by using Simpson’s rule
for areas and prizmoidal formula for computing volumes.
44.2 RCC PIPE :

RCC NP3/ NP2 ( dia 300mm, 450mm, 600mm) pipe shall conform to IS 458-1971.Refer MES
Schedule clause No 18.29 and18.68.The make shall be as approved by GE.Reinforced concrete pipes
for drains and culverts shall be non-pressure type, class NP3/NP2 .The ends of concrete pipes shall be
suitable for butt end joints. The butt ends shall be prepared for collar joint with grooves. The pipe joints
shall be capable of withstanding the same pressure as the pipe. Concrete pipes shall be straight and
free from cracks excepting craze cracks. The ends of pipes shall be square with their longitudinal axis
so that when placed in a straight line in the trench, no opening between ends in contact shall exceed 3
mm in pipes upto 600 mm diameter and 6 mm in pipes greater than 600 mm in diameter. The outside
and inside surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth dense and hard and shall not be coated with cement
wash or other preparation. The pipe shall be free from defects resulting from imperfect grading of the
aggregate, missing or moulding. Pipe shall be free from local dents or bulges greater than 3 mm in
depth and extending over a length in any direction greater than twice the thickness of barrel.
44.2.1 Reinforced concrete pipes including fittings and accessories shall conform to the specifications
laid down in clause 18.29 of MES Schedule part-1
44.2.2 Laying and jointing of Reinforced concrete pipes shall be done all as specified in clause 18.74
of MES Schedule Part-1.
45.2.3 PCC in bedding and haunching shall be of the type and mix given in relevant part of Schedule
'A'. The thickness of bed below barrel pipe shall be as specified in preamble (a) (i) on Srl Page No.
356 & 357 of SSR 2009 Part-II.
45.2.4 Filling of spoil in trenches and ramming of earth shall be carried out in layers not exceeding
25cm thick and surfaces left slightly proud of the adjacent ground.
45.0 MANHOLES
45.1 Manholes shall be constructed as per description given in the respective part of Sch 'A' and as
shown on drgs. or as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
45.2 RCC MANHOLE COVER AND FRAMES

45.2.1 RCC manhole covers and frames, circular, medium duty, factory made, conforming to IS-
12592 suitable for openings as per description of item of Sch. 'A' shall be provided.
45.3 TESTING
46.3.1 Salt glazed stone ware pipes shall be subjected to a water test specified in clause 18.79 of
SSR Part-I. The test shall be carried out twice, once after the pipes are laid and jointed second time on
completion of the work. No extra payment on such account shall be admissible to the contractor.
45.4 RECORD DRAWING

45.4.1 The contractor shall submit dimensional layout drgs of sewage executed at site after
completion giving the invert levels of each manholes and size of pipe in triplicate duly signed by the
contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge.
46.0 AREA DRAINAGE

46.1 The Works pertaining to Area drainage shall be carried out as described in relevant items of
Schedule 'A', as specified here-in-before for the relevant trades of works , as per details shown on
drawings and as directed.
47.0 SEWAGE DISPOSAL (SCHEDULE-‘A’ PART-VI)
47.1 Excavation and earth work: Irrespective of the width of trenches for the pipes excavated, the
width for the purpose of payment shall be the authorized width as defined in clause 3.2 of SSR (Part
II). Other requirements specified hereinbefore in the MES Sch as applicable shall be complied with.
47.2 Sewer pipes
47.2.1 NP2 RCC pipe shall be laid all as specified in schedule ‘A’/ BOQ.
47.2.2 Concrete Foundations, Beds, etc. Concrete Foundations to the drain and sewer pipes and
the haunching or encasing to the pipes shall be provided as indicated. No work shall be covered
over or surrounded with concrete until it has been inspected and approved by the EIC after testing
as specified.
47.2.3 Bedding. The thickness of concrete bed below the barrel of the pipe where indicated shall be
10 cm for pipes 100 mm and 150/160 mm dia and 15 cm for pipes 200 mm dia and over. Width of
concrete bedding shall extend laterally 15 cm beyond either side of the pipe i.e. outer diameter of
drain pipes (not of sockets/collars). Where bedding only is provided, the concrete shall be brought
up at least to the invert level of the pipe to form a cradle.
47.2.4 Haunching shall consist of concrete bed as described for bedding with full width of bed
carried upto the level of horizontal dia of the pipe and splays from this level carried up on both sides
of the pipe from the sides of the bed to meet the pipe barrel tangentially.
47.2.5 Loweringand l a y i n g of Pipes
47.2.5.1 The laying a n d j o i n t i n g of pipes shall conform to IS 783-1985, pipes shall be joined
by collar joints.
47.2.5.2 The trench shall be checked for proper level, gradient and alignment before lowering the
pipes.
47.2.6 Lowering
The pipes shall be lowered cautiously to prevent disturbance of the bed and side of the
trench. The heavy pipes shall be lowered by means of proper legs chain pulley blocks as
directed by Engineer-in-charge. Great care should be taken to prevent sand etc. From
entering the pipes.
47.2.7Laying
38.2.7.1 Laying of pipes shall proceed up-grade of slopes. The error of grade shall not be
rectified by packing up earth u n d e r n e a t h the pipes. If required, concrete shall be used f o r
packing.
47.2.7.2 The ends o f the pipes s h a l l be kept c l o s e d t o keep d i r t , m u d and f o r e i g n

m a t e r i a l s out. Adequate provision shall be made to prevent floating of pipe in the event of
flooding of trenches.
47.2.7.3 The body of the pipe for its entire length shall rest on an even bed in the trench a nd
places shall be excavated to receive the collar for the purpose of jointing.
47.3 Jointing of pipes

47.3.1 A few skeins of spun yarn soaked in neat cement wash shall be inserted in the groove at the
end of the pipe and the two adjoining pipes put against each other. The collar shall then be slipped
over the joint covering equally both the pipes. Spun yarn soaked in neat cement wash shall be
passed round the pipes and inserted in the joint by means of caulking tools from both ends of the
collar. More skeins of yarn shall be added and well rammed home. The objects of yarn are to center
the two ends of the pipes within the collar and to prevent the Cement mortar of the joint penetrating
into the pipes should be fully served.
47.3.1.1 Cement mortar 1:2 shall be slightly moistened and must on no account be soft or
sloppy and shall be carefully inserted by hand into the joint. The mortar shall then be punched and
caulked into the joint and more cement mortar added until the space of the joint has been filled
completely with tightly caulked mortar. The joint shall be finished off neatly outside the collar on both
sides at angles of 45º.
47.3.1.2 Any surplus mortar projecting inside the joints is to be removed and to guard against
any projections; sack or gunny bags shall be drawn past each joint after completion.
47.3.2 Curing: The cement mortar joints shall be cured at least for seven days.
47.3.3 Covering pipes
No work shall be covered over or surrounded with concrete until it has been inspected and
approved by the EIC after testing as specified.
47.4 Testing: Drains and sewers shall be tested as per clause 18.79.2 and 18.79.3 to 18.79.5 of
MES Schedule Part I.
47.5 Manhole: Manhole shall be built as per the relevant items given in the respective section of
Sch ’A’ and as shown on drawings and as per Clause 18.78 of MES Schedule Part I.
47.6 RCC MANHOLE COVERS AND FRAMES

47.6.1 Frames shall be of mild steel angle made to shape, embedded in concrete/masonary and
flinched as shown in drawings. Cover shall be with CI RCC all as described in item in Schedule ‘A’.
Handle and frame shall be painted with a coat of black bituminous paint.
48.0 DG SETS (SCHEDULE A PART- XV)

48.1 GENERAL Particular specifications given hereinafter are in brief and are only to particularise,
amend and emphasize the specification given in MES Schedule, which are not repeated hereinafter.
The clauses in these particular specifications shall take precedence over the provisions in the MES
Schedule if there are any varying ad conflicting provisions.
48.2 CLASS OF WORK

The entire work shall be carried out in accordance with modern electrical engineering practice and
shall be of highest class and of approved design. The entire installation shall be with materials
conforming to relevant IS specification or BS specifications. Where IS Specifications are not existing
the work shall be strictly in conformity with latest edition of India Electricity Act and Rules IEE
Regulations and IS-732-1989 incorporating latest amendment where applicable.
48.3 MATERIAL
All materials to be incorporated in the work shall be of standard make and shall strictly comply with
current and appropriate Indian standards specifications. Samples of all materials to be incorporated
shall be approved by the GE in writing before use in the work.
48.4 WORKMANSHIP
The work of electrification shall be carried out only by the licensed wiremen under the supervision of
qualified Engineer.
48.5 TESTS
The Contractor shall carry out the following tests at site in the presence of the Engineer-in-Charge
and results will be recorded in triplicate, signed by both parties.
(a) Tests on cables for IR, earth resistance, continuity and cross Phasing.
(b) Earth test for the earthing and the entire installation as per IS-732.
(c) The Contractor shall arrange the testing equipment and the labour required for test
without any cost to the Government. If the tests are not satisfactory, the contractor shall rectify the
defect and retest the installation.
48.6 DIESEL ENGINE STANDBY GENERATING SET
(a) The work of DG set under this contract shall be carried out in accordance with Sch ‘A’
description, particular specifications and drawings, which shall be read in conjunction with the
specification, general rules, special conditions and preambles contained in SSR Part-I & II. Where at
variance, the provisions in the Schedule-‘A’ shall take precedence over the aforesaid provisions of
SSR.
(b) The work to be carried under this schedule comprise of supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of Diesel Engine driven generating set on PCC foundation with anti-vibration
pads, Common base plate, instrument panel board. Fuel tank with fuel line and accessories
manually operated, fuel pump and pipe, starting battery with cable lead, terminals, exhaust
pipe, pipe connection with suitable insulation all as specified in Sch-‘A’
(c) Coupling of diesel engine with alternator should be through authorized original equipment
manufacturers.
(d) The DG set will be initially inspected by the Rep of Accepting officer in factory premises
before despatch at work site.
(a) Fuel Tank

(i) Fuel level indicator to indicate level of diesel in the tank
(ii) Drain pipe with 2m piping
(iii) Fuel pipe for inlet, out let with connections
(iv) Fuel strainer
(v) Air vent
(vi) Angle iron floor mounting bracket including minor civil works
(b) SEMIROTARY PUMPManually operated fuel pump for filling diesel in the tank of
adequatecapacity with inlet connection to the tank. (semi rotary pump size and duty shall be
intimated by tenderer in his offer)
(c) BATTERIES Starting batteries heavy duty 2Nos of 12Volts 180AH of EXIDE /
AMRONmake connected to the system fully charged and ready for use. All batteries shall be
supplied with leads and terminals.
(d) BASE PLATE: Shall be MS structural channel fabricated base plate of rigidly
weldedconstruction duly ribbed suitable for receiving engine, alternator alongwith flexible
coupling. It shall include foundation bolts, washers, nuts anti-vibration pads, drip tray and
protective guards
for coupling.
48.6.2 FOUNDATION
Generating set shall be installed in accordance with latest engineering practiceand adequately
designed for vibration proof. The tenderer shall submit details and drawings of PCC foundation
immediately after acceptance of tender for approval of the Engineer-in-charge. Necessary anti-
vibration rubber device of adequate size and standard shall be provided.
Notes
(i) Voltage variation permissible is 415Volts +2.5%
(ii) The alternator shall be self excited and self regulated.
(iii) Frequency variation permissible is 50Hz +1%
(iv) Generator Set shall be provided with radio interference suppressor and surge arrestor.
(v) Diesel, engine oil, grease etc required for commissioning and testing shall be supplied by
the contractor at his own cost.
(vi) Fuel tank (service tank) MS tank of 990litres capacity shall be mounted with feed line to the
engine including all supports, foundation etc.
(vii) Exhaust piping with silencer shall be provided with asbestos rope insulation of appropriate
size and the insulation extended upto 30cm away to the external face of the wall.
48.6.3 Scope of work shall also include for submission of list of spares and tools required for
normalmaintenance and repair of generating set, fast moving spares for normal maintenance of
the set for a period of two years as recommended by the manufacturers. The tenderer is
specifically required to note that the unit rate quoted shall not include the cost of these spares
and tools.
48.6.4 The tenderer shall include in his quoted rate for all the connected work which are required
forinstallation of generating set, viz. providing suitable opening on wall, wiring and other
incidental works which are essential for the entire completion of the work
48.6.5 Diesel engine for generating set shall conform to BS 5514, IS-10002 and shall be of make
asmentioned in Sch-‘A’. The engine shall be 4 stroke vertical and stationery design, water
cooled and shall develop suitable BHP at 1500RPM at NTP conditions. The diesel engine shall
be rated for continuous operation and shall be able to operate 10% over load for a period of
12hours operation reliability.
48.7 ALTERNATOR Under normal condition the voltage regulation will be+2.5% of rated
voltage+2.5% and that of frequency regulation with in alternator of suitable capacity to give
50Hz 3phase, 4 wire output of 160 KVA, 0.8 PF lagging 415 Volts supply at 1500 RPM. It shall
be of make as specified in Sch-‘A’ . The alternator shall be self excited and self regulated with
automatic voltage regulation within +2.5% and the alternator will have class-‘H’ insulation. The
alternator shall be screen protected drip proof and single shaft extension type with damper
winding in pole faces and self ventilated. The alternator shall be supplied with standard
accessories and shall be fixed in common base plate/frame with nut, bolt and shall be coupled
with diesel engine through flexible coupling. The cost of set shall include the cost of foundation
bolts, nuts etc.
48.8 ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE (CANOPY)

(a) The acoustic enclosure (canopy) shall be suitable for 160 KVA DG set to reduce noise level
to 75dB measured at 1.0m distance for audible frequencies as approved from ARAI for
emission compliance as per Central Pollution Control Board norms and manufacturer’s
specification. The Acoustic Panels shall be tubular in section fabricated out of cold rolled steel
sheet sheets filled with high density rock wool of 100mm thickness (64kg/cum density) retained
in the inner surface by perforated cold rolled sheets specially designed for optimum sound
attenuation.
Outer body: 1.6mm thick CRCA
Door: 1.6mm thick CRCA
Inner surface : 1.6mm thick CRCA
Base frame: ISMC 300
Inside illumination: 1 X 40 watts FTL fitting
Control panel: Suitable size.
(b) FEATURESThe construction and design of the Acoustic Enclosure shall be very
ruggeddurable and virtually maintenance free. All materials used for acoustic treatment will be
fire resistant/fire retardant grade. For effective sealing necessary gasket material will be
provided. The sheet steel treatment will consist of de-rusting followed by two zinc coats of
synthetic enamel paint in the shade approved by the GE.
(c) PERFORMANCENoise level from the outer surface of the enclosure, when measured at
adistance of 1.0m will be maintained at not more than 75dB (A) under free field condition.
48.9 The type of POL (diesel, engine oil, grease) etc. to be used for running the set as
permanufacturer’s instructions shall be indicated with consumption per unit time.
48.10 The POL (diesel, engine oil, grease) etc. required for the commissioning, testing shall be
supplied by the Contractor at his own cost. The unit rate quoted in Sch-‘A’ shall be deemed to
include this aspect.
48.11 The Contractor shall ensure that the complete equipment to produce the least noise level. For
this purpose the contractor shall provide all necessary insulatory arrangement, vibration
proofing and such other arrangement required to reduce the noise level.
48.12 PERFORMANCES
(a) The entire plant shall be guaranteed for one year from the date of taking over the plant.
The installation shall be taken over after the system has been commissioned and the Accepting
Officer or his authorized representative is satisfied of tests specified hereinafter.
(b) The test shall be carried out by the Contractor in presence of the Accepting Officer or his
representative in accordance with IE rules and regulations. IS-732. The Contractor shall
submit three copies of the test results duly signed by the Engineer-in-charge and the
Contractor and the same shall be kept on record.
(c) The test shall comprise of the following:
(i) Trial test
(ii) Generating set shall run for no load, full load and overload (10%) test
(iii) Regulation test shall be carried out in accordance with BS-649-1958.
(iv) The generating set shall run for total 12 hours for conducting above test and the
performances of the plant as a whole shall be recorded in test sheet.
(v) Efficiency test
(vi) IR and earth test of cable, generator.
(d) If the performance or the test result of the test as detailed above are not found
satisfactory, the contractor shall on his own cost rectify/ replace the defective installation or
part thereof as directed by the Accepting Officer or his representative before the installation is
taken over. The decision of the Accepting Officer in this regard shall be final and binding in
this regard. The test results shall be recorded in triplicate and signed by both the parties.
(e) The Contractor shall submit the following after completion of work:
(i) Complete literature in English/catalogue giving technical information of compon
(ii) Complete literature on maintenance and operation and installation of generating set
- 6 sets.
(iii) Spare part catalogue
(iv) Maintenance chart of the installation duly framed with glass -1set
(v) Shock treatment chart (In English & Vernacular) framed with glass-1 set
(f) Artificial water load shall be arranged by the contractor at his own cost for full load and
overload test. The Contractor shall arrange a decibel meter to measure sound level during
test.
(g) Rubber matting of full length of LT panel against Sch - ‘A’ item shall be provided by the
Contractor and rate quoted for the LT panel board is deemed to be inclusive of the cost of
rubber matting.
48.13 The Contractor shall submit a copy type Approval certificate for Gen set from the authorized
dealer /manufacturer from one of the following five agencies:
(a) Automotive Research Association of India (Pune)
(b) National Physical Laboratory (New Delhi)
(c) Naval Science and Technology Laboratory (Visakhapatnam)
(d) Fluid Control Research Institute (Palghat)
(e) National Aerospace Laboratory (Bangalore)
49.0 COMPOUND WALL

Work under this schedule shall be carried out all as shown on drawings and as described in
Schedule-À’ Part-XVI items and as specified in this Particular Specifications. Earthwork &
excavation shall be measured and paid under Sch ‘A’ Part II.
50.0 EXTERNAL ELECTRIFICATION
50.1 SCOPE OF WORK
50.1.1 The extent of work is as per items given in schedule 'A'. All references to clause in the
succeeding paragraphs pertain to MES Schedule part-1.
50.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
50.2.1 Materials, execution, testing and record of installation shall conform to relevant IS
certifications and as given in clause 19.2.1 to 19.2.6 of MES Schedule part-1 and as also in
accordance with Indian Electricity Rules 1956.
50.2.2 The location and distribution of various items in the drawing is tentative. The GE as per the
site requirements can make alternations and there shall be no price adjustment on this account.
50.2.3 On completion of entire work, the contractor shall submit in triplicate to the Engineer-in-
Charge layout plan showing actual position of poles, routes, cable run, and all other information’s
and details as directed by the GE that will be necessary for record of maintenance and operation.
50.3 SAMPLE AND MATERIALS

50.3.1 All materials, fittings and appliances etc. to be incorporated in this work shall be of highest
standard and unless otherwise specified here in after shall strictly comply with the
relevant IS specifications. The contractor will supply the samples of the following
items/materials to GE for approval.
(a) All types of insulators
(b) PCC cable cover
(c) Danger Notice Boards
(d) Stay assembly and stay wire and anti climbing device.
(e) All type of conductors
(f) Earthing plates/electrodes
(g) MCCB/MCB
(h) Distribution boards
(j) Cable Route Indicator
In addition to the above, other material as mentioned below, required to be incorporated in the work,
shall be invariably got approved in writing from GE:
(a) Pre-stressed steel poles.

(b) Set of lightning Arrestor HT/LT.
(c) LT Panel Board.
(d) Voltmeter and Ammeter.
(e) Transformer
(f) Any other item as directed by GE.
50.3.2 The material and the equipment to be supplied and installed under this contract shall be of
indigenous make. In case tenderer offers any imported materials, he may do so out of his
existing stock. No foreign exchange will be given by the department to the tenderer for
importing any equipment for this job.
50.3.3 Steel incorporated in work need to be of tested quality and the contractor shall procure all
steel required to be incorporated in the work from market.
50.3.4 The contractor after obtaining written approval of samples from the GE shall purchase
material and equipment from the approved firms or through their authorised agents only all as
specified in these tender documents and as directed the GE. As a proof that a particular
materials have been purchased from the firm/their authorised agents, the contractor shall
produce such evidence to the satisfaction of GE when asked for. With regard to quality the
materials shall be brought to the site with maker’s original packing with seal intact.
50.3.5 All electric works shall be carried out in conformity with the requirements of the Indian
Electricity Act 1910 and Indian Electricity Rules 1956 framed there under and fire insurance
act as applicable and else the relevant regulations of electric supply authorities concerned as
amended from time to time.
50.3.6 Unless otherwise exempted under the rules of the Indian Electricity Rules, all electrical works
shall be carried out under the supervision of person holding a certificate of competency
issued by the recognized authority. The workman shall also hold certificate of competency.
50.3.7 Good workmanship is an essential requirement for compliance with their specifications. The
work shall be executed in the manner as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
50.4 MAKING GOOD
50.4.1 The contractor is deemed to have included in his lumpsum cost of cutting holes/making
chases when required through roads/bricks or concrete work for taking in cables, conduits and
conductors etc and making good the same to match with the existing work.
50.5 EXCAVATION AND EARTH WORK
50.5.1 The contractor shall excavate to the specified depths as indicated on the drawings and as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Excavation made to depths more than the required levels shall
be made good by the contractor at his own expense with approved earth by ramming, watering in
250 mm thick layers. No extra payment shall be made for extra depth excavated and filled by the
contractor. The cost of any shoring/boarding and de-watering shall be deemed to be included in the
cost of excavation and no extra payment shall be made.
50.6 FILLING OF PITS AND DISPOSAL
50.6.1 After laying of the foundation and erection of poles & stay, the pit shall be filled with the spoil
obtained from excavation, watered, rammed and consolidated and brought to the level of the
surrounding ground level as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. All surplus spoil obtained from
excavation shall be removed to place at a distance as specified, spread and leveled in the manner
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
50.7 MATERIALS
50.7.1 STEEL TUBULAR POLES
50.7.1.1 These shall be as specified in Clause 19.3 of SSR Part-I. The poles shall be numbered
and painting shall be done as specified in relevant item of Schedule ‘A’. Poles shall be of make as
specified in Appx ‘F’.
50.7.1.2 The steel tubular swaged poles can be brought to site in one piece for LT poles and two
pieces for HT poles which shall be included at site at the discretion of the contractor.”
50.14 ‘D’ CLAMPS, STEEL CROSS ARMS AND BRACING
50.14.1 Refer clauses 19.9 and 19.53 of MES Schedule Part-I. ‘D’ clamps; MS cross arms, bracing
and MS brackets shall be of steel section shown on drawings. Where size of any section of steel is
not indicated, this shall be as directed the Engineer-in-Charge. These shall be painted with one coat
of aluminium paint over a coat of red oxide primer after fixing in position.
50.15 UNDERGROUND CABLES
50.15.1 These shall be laid in trenches and shall conform to clauses 19.75 to 19.82 of MES
Schedule part-1 and as given in Schedule 'A'. However, cable protection shall be by means of old
size sub class ‘B’ bricks. Sand cushioning in trenches shall provided as specified in clause 19.75 of
MES SSR part-I 2009. Cables shall not be laid in ashes and organic refuses or any other materials,
which may injure the cable. Cables shall be brought in standard drum length. No straight through
joints shall be permitted except where length of the cable is more than the standard drum length or
where considered inescapable.
50.15.2 The portion of cables running under roads, poles or on walls through nallah shall pass
through galvanized pipe all as described in the item of Schedule ‘A’ and as directed by the Engineer-
in-Charge.
50.15.3 The seal of cables shall not be removed until preparations for jointing are complete.
50.15.4 Trenches for cables shall be as per clause 19.74 and 19.74.1 of MES Schedule Part-I.
Trenches will be filled in after the cable has been tested by the Engineer-in-Charge satisfactorily. IR
test for all under ground cables shall be conducted during and after physical completion. Testing
shall be done as specified in clause 19.93, 19.95 & 19.96. The tests should be recorded and signed
by the contractor and Engineer-in-Charge and kept on record.
50.16 GI PIPES AND FITTINGS
50.16.1 GI pipes and fittings shall be laid in trenches, fixed to walls/floor/ceiling/poles and jointed all
as specified in clause 18.50 and 18.50.3 and 18.51.1 to 18.51.5 of MES Schedule Part-I.
50.17 LIGHTNING ARRESTOR
50.17.1 Lightning arrestor shall be non-liner type conforming to IS-3070, Part-I. Refer Clause 19.12
& 19.13 of MES Schedule, Part-I. All fittings shall be hot dipped galvanized.
50.18 BUS BAR
50.18.1 Bus bar shall be of appropriate sizes Electric grade aluminium for phases and neutral
having suitable holes for incoming cables/out going cable having provision for cables connections
with thimbles of suitable size. The width shall be accordingly changed as per site requirement of the
feeder switches. Provision shall be made to install KWH meter, Voltmeter, Ammeter at incoming and
outgoing.
50.19 EARTHING
50.19.1 Earthing shall be provided as per IS regulations, electrical plate No 3 of SSR Part-I and as
per description of respective items of Sch ‘A’. The contractor shall take approval of layout of earthing
before commencement of work and earthing shall be executed in the presence of authorised MES
representative. The earthing shall generally conform to IS-3043/1987 and clause 19.137 to 19.146.3
of MES Schedule Part-I.
50.20 STREET LIGHT FITTINGS
50.20.1 Refer clause 19.42 of MES Schedule Part-I. This shall be of cast housing and shall comply
to IS: 2149 of 1970 for street light all as detailed in Schedule ‘A’ and shown on drawings.
50.21 DANGER NOTICE BOARD
50.21.1 Refer clause 19.18 of MES Schedule Part-I. It shall be all as specified in the relevant item
of Schedule ‘A’. Unless otherwise specified in Schedule ‘A’, the plate for danger notice board shall
be of mild steel 1.6 mm thick.
50.22 TESTING OF INSTALLATION
50.22.1 On completion of the work, following tests will be conducted in the presence and to the
entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. Contractor shall give prior notice in writing to this effect
at least 7 days in advance: -
(a) Insulation resistance test sectional and overall.
(b) Continuity resistance test sectional and overall.
(c) Conduction and earthing
(d) Earth tests.
(e) Full load tests.
50.22.2 Insulation resistance tests shall be conducted between each conductor and the earth.
Contractor shall supply necessary apparatus, labour and instruments required for testing. Results of
testing shall be recorded in triplicate and signed both by the Engineer-in-Charge and contractor or
his authorised representatives.
50.23 BLANK
50.24 DISTRIBUTION BOXES :- Refer clause 19.21 of MES SSR-2009, Part I.
50.25 TO 50.35 BLANK
50.36 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHING AND DISTRIBUTION PANEL:- Refer clause 19.23 of MES
SSR-2009, Part I.
50.37 LT PANELS
50.37.1 LT panels shall be all as specified in Sch ‘A’. The contractor shall produce and get the
detailed drawings of LT Panel approved from GE before fabrication and placing the order to the
manufacturer.
50.37 CABLE ROUTE INDICATOR
50.37.1 These shall be fixed along the route of cable at 30 metre interval & on every turning & cable
joint.
50.38 ANTI CLIMBING DEVICE
Refer Para 19.72.1 of SSR-2009, Part I (specifications). The anti climbing device shall be provided
to prevent un-authorised climbing if HT line supports as per IE Rules-1991. The anti climbing device
shall be provided as per details shown on drawing, as specified in Schedule ‘A’ and SSR-2009, Part
I.
50.39 LIGHTNING ARRESTOR
50.39.1 Lightning arrestor shall be provided as specified in Para 19.12, 19.13 and 19.67 of SSR-
1991 Part I (specifications) and as per IE, Rules-1992. The earth lead for any lightning arrestor shall
not pass through any iron steel pipe but shall be taken as directly as possible from lightening arrestor
to a separate earth electrode. Lightning arrestor shall be manufactured by any one of the
manufacturers given in Appendix ‘B’. Lightning arrestor shall be procured by the contractor either
directly from the manufacturers or from authorised distributor/authorised dealer, as directed by GE.
50.40 MCCB
50.40.1 MCCBs shall be provided of various capacities as described in Sec ‘A’. MCCB shall be
conforming to IS-8828-1996, IEC-60898, as applicable. MCCBs shall be manufactured by any one
of the manufacturers given in Appendix ‘B’. MCCBs shall be IS marked. MCCB shall be procured
either direct from the above manufacturers or their authorised distributors/authorised dealers.
50.41 VOLTMETER, AMPERE METER
50.41.1 These shall be provided of the shape and size as described in Sch ‘A’ and directed by GE.
Ampere Meters and Volt meters shall conform to specifications of IS-722 Volt Meter and Ampere
Meters shall be ISI Marked.
50.42 SELECTOR SWITCH
50.42.1 Selector switch shall be provided as per Sch ‘A’. Selector switch shall be conforming to
specifications of IS-6875 and ISI marked.
51.00 INDICATING LAMPS
51.1 Indicating lambs shall be provided of size and shape as described in Sch. ‘A’. Indicating lambs
shall be LED type. The contractor shall procure indicating lamps either directly from the above
manufacturer or their authorised distributor/ dealer.
52.00 LT PANEL BOARD, SINGLE PANEL SWITCH BOARD
52.1.0 SCOPE: These specification cover the detailed requirements of medium voltage L.T Panel
to be fabricated, supply, installations, its testing and commissioning. Any other material required for
the successful completion of the work is not included in these specifications if other wise not
mentioned herein the same shall be provided by the contractor with out any cost to Goverment.
52.2.0 ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS:- Suitable for 415 volts rated voltage 3 Phase , 4 wire 50Hz
AC supply.
52.3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
(i) The LT Panel shall be indoor/out door type having incoming and outgoing as specified
in schedule 'A'. The degree of protection shall be IP-54 as per IS-2147-1962
(ii) LT Panel shall be of in door /out door type type, free standing type totally enclosed
and compact.
(iii) The LT Panel shall be rain, dust and vermin proof and shall be suitable for climatic
conditions of the station.
(iv) The LT Panel shall be fabricated out of MS sheet steel of thickness as specified in
Sch ‘A’ and foundation frame fabricated out of MS angle iron 40x 40x 6mm.
(v) The design shall include all provisions for safety of operating and maintenance
personal. The general construction shall conform to IS-5039 of 1983 for factory
assembled LT Panel.
(vi) All incoming and outgoing cable entries shall be from the bottom as directed by
Engr-in charge.
(vii) General construction shall employ the principle of compartmentalization for safety
consideration
(viii) The LT Panel shall be painted with 7 tank process for treatment of degreasing,
pickling and two coats primer, before being given the stove epoxy finish. Final color
shade shall be 631 as per IS-5.
(ix) The LT Panel shall be suitably double earthed as per standard engineering practice.
(x) The dimensions of the LT Panel shall be as on required basis for incorporating the
electrical accessories / switchgear as specified in schedule and these particular
specifications.
(xi) The front and back side of the LT Panel shall be provided with hinged double doors
with locking arrangement. The lock shall be built in flush type of superior quality as
directed by Engineer in Charge. The hinged shall be of such construction that the door
can swung open by not less than 150 degree. The fixing of the doors shall be such that
the doors should automatically come to closed position if not kept open with effort.
(xii) CANOPY: The top of the LT Panel shall be fitted with a sloping canopy, design of
which shall be such that rain water shall not accumulate on the top.
(xiii) VENTILATION: Adequate ventilation shall be ensured by providing ventilation for the
inlet and exhaust of air.
(xiv) BUS BARS : The Bus Bar of suitable size and as specified shall be provided. The
bus bar for neutral shall be half the size of the phase bus bar. The bus bars shall be
insulated with PVC sleeve / tape. One No. GI earth bus shall be 25mmx 4mm and shall
be fixed at the bottom of the LT Panel for earth connections.
(xv) BUS BAR SUPPORT: The bus bar shall be firmly fixed on the supports constructed
from suitable grade of insulating material such as laminated sheet or porcelain lane
insulators of suitable size confirming to relevant ISS. The supports shall be sufficient
rebuts in withstanding electro mechanical force produced during the short circuit. The
nuts, bolts shall be either of GI or cadmium plated. Bus bar chamber will be
manufactured of not less from 2mm thick MS Sheet. Connections between bus bar and
MCCBs will be made either with solid copper strip of adequate capacity duly insulated or
by adequate capacity copper cable with copper lugs, provided for making the
connections. As per site requirement the aluminium links duly insulated with PVC sleeves
or paints shall also be provided for connection with bus bar chamber and incoming or out
going onwards.
(xvi) Danger Plate: Danger plate shall be provided on the front and back doors of the LT
Panel . No or other distinguished mark shall also be written on the LT Panel as directed
by the Engineer -in-charge.
(xvii) Installation: The LT Panel shall be installed on a suitable plinth and grouted
in the foundation with cement concrete and finished neatly with plaster as per
manufactures recommendations. An apron will be provided below the door level
of the LT Panel on the four sides.
(xviii) Earthing: The LT Panel shall be earthed with two distinct earths to electrode (to
be measured and paid separately). The earth connections from the electrode shall be
done with 8 swg GI wire drawn through 1/2" dia GI pipe from mechanical protection. The
earth electrodes shall be erected at least one metre away from LT Panel, but on the
opposite side. The earthing terminals shall be identified by means of the sign marked in
legible and indelible manner on or adjacent the terminals.
(xix) Testing: All necessary tests such as insulation / earth test etc shall be carried out
before connecting the LT Panel with the supply system and will be recorded duly signed
by contractor and Engineer -in- Charge.
(xx) The panel shall be designed to operate under the ambient temperature 0o C to 50o C,
upto 95% RH humidity.
(xxi) Engraved aluminium sheet level shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing
feeders. Single line ciruit diagram showing the arrangements of circuit inside the
distribution borad.
54.0 BLANK
55. EXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY
55.1 GENERAL
55.1.1 Materials, workmanship and testing required to be incorporated in these works shall be as
given under specification and workmanship in the trade section of MES Standard Schedule Part-I
duly modified by these particular specifications and notes on the drawings.
55.1.2 Layout of water supply pipelines including fittings and locations of valves, valve chambers as
shown on drawing are tentative. The exact layout/alignment of water supply pipe lines including their
fittings and location of valves, valve chambers shall be as directed and approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge in writing before the contractor takes the work in hand and nothing extra shall be paid due to
any change in layout/location
55.1.3 On completion of entire work, the contractor shall submit layout plans drawn to a suitable
scale on tracing cloth, showing actual routes/alignment of various pipelines, indicating the size of
pipes and distance of pipelines from the main buildings and roads to the Engineer-in-Charge. All
sizes and dimensions shall be shown in the above plans in metric units (i.e. in CGS system) only. All
work shall be carried out by plumber/fitters/skilled labours. Nothing extra shall be paid due to above
for preparation of final layout plan etc.
55.1.4. Before commencement of excavation, the contractor shall mark the proposed pipe route on
ground along with the alignment as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Exact position of valve
chamber, pipe supports etc. which are to be considered on each route shall similarly be marked
thereon.
55.2 SCOPE OF WORK
55.2.1 The work consists of work described in Sch 'A'. All references to clauses in succeeding
paragraphs pertaining to MES Sch Part-1.
55.3 MATERIALS
55.3.1 MILD STEEL GALVANISED TUBES (PIPES) AND FITTINGS

These shall conform to the clause 18.4.1 to 18.4.5 and shall bear ISI certification mark.
55.3.1.1 DI PIPE.
55.3.1.2 DI pipes shall conform to IS-8329-2000 Centrifugally cast (spun) Ductile Iron Pressure
pipes for water, gas and sewage. Spigot and socket pipes shall be of class K-7 or K-9 and flanged
pipe shall be class K-7 or K-9 as indicated.The pipes shall withstand the hydrostatic test pressure
after installation, without showing leakage, sweating or defects of any kind as laid down in IS.
Note : IS covers flanged pipes only up to 1000 mm diameter.
55.3.1.3 Ductile iron Fittings for Pressure Pipe shall conform to IS 9523-2000, Specifications of DI
fittings for Pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage. The fittings shall withstand hydrostatic test
pressures without showing any leakage, sweating or defects of any kind as laid down in IS.
55.3.1.4 Laying and jointing of Ductile iron pipes shall be laid, jointed and tested all as per IS –
12288-1987: Code of practice for use and laying of DI pipes. Laying of pipe shall be done all as per
clause No 18.95.1 of SSR Part I
55.3.2 RUBBER GASKET FOR JOINTING
55.3.2.1 It shall be as specified in clause 18.11 of MES Schedule part-1.
55.3.3 SLUICE VALVE
55.3.3.1 It shall be of cast iron class PN-1.6 with flanged ends. It shall bear IS certification mark
and shall comply with the requirements of IS-14846 of 2000. Sluice valve shall be long body type
non rising type loaded with tin bronze sheet and stainless steel stem.
55.3.4 VALVE PITS
55.3.4.1 Valve pit of size as mentioned in BOQ (internal dimensions) shall be constructed complete
as shown on drawings with the following specifications:-
(a) Excavation & earth work - As specified here-in-before
(b) Lean concrete - M-10 (Nominal mix)
(c) Brick work - Fly ash brick set in CM (1:4)
(d) PCC benching/bedding - M-15 (Nominal mix)
56.0 FIRE FIGHTING

56.1 FIRE HYDRANT & SPRINKLER SYSTEM
56.2 General Requirements
56.2.0 Contractor shall execute the fire fighting work through OEM or OEM approved vender specialist in fire
fighting system. Contractor shall submit the complete scheme to GE for approval before executing the
fire fighting work.
56.2.1 The scope shall cover the design, engineering, manufacture, shop testing, assembly, painting,
forwarding delivery, unloading and storage at site, local transportation, erection, testing,
commissioning, performance demonstration at site and handing over the Hydrant/ Wet Riser
System etc.
56.2.2-Approval of the installations shall be obtained from the Directorate of Fire Services (DFS),
CEIG and relevant fire regulation authorities before commissioning. Contractor shall be
responsible for preparation of documents/ applications/ drawing(s) and follow up action from
DFS/ Local authorities.
56.2.3-The MES Operators shall be trained during the testing and commissioning period for efficient
operation and maintenance of the systems.
56.2.4 The contractor shall prepare detailed working drawing Showing the routing of the Hydrant
piping showing the location of the Risers for approval before starting the work. All drawings
are to be Prepared for Piping, Pump room layout, Sprinkler System etc.
56.3 Yard Hydrant/Wet Riser System

56.3.1-The Yard Hydrant/ Wet Riser System shall consist of the following:-
(a) Electrically Driven Main Pump set.
(b) Diesel Engine Driven Main Pump set.
(c) Electrically Driven Jockey Pump set
(d) Water tank
(e) The Hydrant valves
(f) Fire brigade Inlet provided near the entrance
(g) The entire system capable to be either put in Auto / Manual mode.
56.3.2-Fire Pumpset
56.3.2.1-The pump shall be of horizontal end suction, centrifugal pump.
V.3.2.2-Pump shall preferably be designed to have the best Efficiency at the specified duty
point. The pump shall be suitable for continuous operation at any point within the “Range of
Operation” i.e., 0% to 150% of rated capacity.
56.3.2.3 Pump shall preferably have a continuously rising head capacity characteristics from the
specified duty point towards shut-off Point, the maximum being at shut-off to enable parallel
operation.
56.3.2.4 Pump motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced And designed with critical speed
substantially above the operating speed.
56.3.2.5-The pump shall be driven by drive unit directly coupled. A heavy duty coupling along with
coupling guard shall be Provided between the pump and drive unit.
56.3.2.6 Pump shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150% of rated capacity at a head of not
less that 65% of the rated head.
56.3.2.7-The shut-off head shall not exceed 120% of rated Head.
56.3.2.8-The drive unit power rating shall be the maximum of the following requirements, (i) 15%
margin over the pump shaft input power at the rated Duty point. (ii) 5% margin over the pump
shaft input power required to drive the pump at 150% of its rated discharge.
56.3.2.9-The pump set shall be of securely mounted on a robust base frame and shall be free from
vibration at all variations of load.
56.3.2.10 The pumps shall also be linked to recirculation pipe Line required for minimum flow
through the pump during its operation without any discharge through headers.
56.3.2.11-Pump shall be provided with a name plate indicating delivery head, capacity and RPM.
56.3.2.12 The material of construction of pump shall be as under :
(i) Casing:- Cast Iron, IS 210, Gr.20
(ii) Impeller: Bronze IS: 318, Gr.L TB 1
(iii) Wearing Rings: Bronze.
(iv) Shaft Sleeve : S/S Type AISI10.
(v) Stuffing Box: Cast Iron. IS: 210, Gr.20
(vi) Gland: : Cast Iron. IS: 210, Gr.20.
(vii) Gland packing Teflon asbestos with mechanical seal
(viii) Shat: : Stainless Steel AISI 40.
(ix) Base Frame: Fabricated M.S.
56.3.3-Jockey Pumpset
56.3.3.1-The pump shall be horizontal end suction, centrifugal Pump.
56.3.3.2-The pump shall be directly coupled to the motor and proper coupling guard shall also be
used.
56.3.3.3 The pump base frame shall be fabricated out of M.S. Channel section and shall be very
rigid.
56.3.3.4 The base frame shall accommodate both the pump
56.3.3.5 The pump shall be suitable for automatic operation And the motor.
56.3.3.6-Jockey pump shall have non-overloading type power characteristics.
56.3.3.7-Jockey pump drive motor shall be suitable for frequent start/stop operations as required by
the system.
56.3.3.8-Pump shall be provided with a name plate indicating Delivery head, capacity and RPM.
56.3.4-Motors
56.3.4.1-The motors for the Main and Jockey Pumps shall be of general purpose, constant speed,
and sized for the maximum output at an ambient temperature of 40° C.
56.3.4.2-The motor for the Main Pump shall be of TEFC. (Totally enclosed fan cooled) 56.3.4.3-The
motor for the Jockey pump shall be of TEFC (Totally enclosed Fan Cooled).
56.3.4.4 The motor shall be wound for Class ‘B’ Insulation. The windings shall be vacuum
impregnated with heat and moisture resisting varnish and preferably glass fibre insulated to
withstand tropical conditions.
56.3.4.5 The motor shall be rated for continuous duty. These shall also be suitable for long period of
inactivity.
56.3.4.6 The operating speed for the Main Pump and Jockey Pump Motor shall be 2900 RPM.
56.3.4.7-The motors shall be suitable for electric supply/D.G. set of 440 V, 3 Phase, 50 Hz. and shall
run continuously at rated input over the entire range of voltage and frequency variations as under:
(i) Voltage :- 10%
(ii) Frequency: 5%
(iii) Combined Voltage Frequency: 10% (Absolute Sum)
56.3.4.8 Motors shall be designed for direct on line starting at full voltage. The starting current shall
not exceed 6 times full load current.
56.3.4.9 Motors shall be effectively grounded and shall be provided with two separate and distract
grounding pads, each complete with tapped hole galvanised bolt and washer for connection. To
station ground conductors.
56.3.5-Control Panel for the Main Pumpsets and Jockey Pumpset

56.3.5.1-The starting switch gear for the main pumpsets shall Be of Star Delta type and for the
Jockey shall be suitable for direct on line starting.
56.3.5.2 The control circuit for the main pumpsets shall be designed for automatic operation i.e.,
whenever the pressure reduces in the system, the main pump shall automatically start. The
stopping of The Main pump is ‘Manual’.
56.3.5.3 The control circuit for the Jockey pumpset shall be designed that whenever pressure
reduces the pump shall start automatically and when pressure reaches rated system
pressure then it should automatically switch OFF
56.3.5.4 Auto / Manual switch shall be provided for both the Main & Jockey pump set so that the
pump sets can be started/ stopped Manually also. Provisions shall be made for receiving
power supply From both EB/Gen set.
56.3.5.5 The panel shall be provided with the Voltmeter and Ammeter with indicating ‘R’ Y ‘B’ Lamps.
56.3.5.6 The control panel shall be of welded construction, fabricated from sheet metal having 2.03
mm (14 SWG) thickness and shall be dust and vermin proof.
56.3.5.7 The panel shall be completely factory wired absolutely ready in all respect for installation at
site and termination of external cables for which undrilled bottom gland plate shall be
provided. The internal wirings of the panel shall be carried out with 650 V grade stranded
copper wire of size rated for the current in the corresponding circuit. The minimum size of the
wire shall not be less than 1.5 sq.mm. stranded copper. The wiring termination shall be done
using ferrules having indelible marking at the termination to reduce the possibility of short
circuit between various wires.
56.3.5.8 Neoprene or equivalent rubber gaskets shall be provided at all openings.
56.3.5.9 All the components used in the panel shall be of reputed makes.
56.3.5.10 Name plate shall be provided at the panel.
56.3.5.11-Isolating switch fuse units shall be provided in the panel for incoming A C power supply /
D.G. set supply.
56.3.5.12-Two numbers diametrically opposite earthing connection shall be provided for the panel.
The earthing of the panel shall be done as per the rules and regulations.
56.3.6 Diesel Engine

56.3.6.1-The engine shall be of the compression ignition mechanical direct injection type, capable of
starting without the use of wicks, cartridges, heater plugs or either at an engine room
temperature 7° C and shall accept full load within 15 seconds from the receipt of the signal to
start.
56.3.6.2 The engine shall be naturally aspirated, supercharged or turbo charged and either air or
water cooled. In the case of charge air cooling by means of a belt-driven fan or of a belt
driven auxiliary water pump there shall be multiple belts such that should half the belts break,
the remaining belts would be capable of driving the fan group.
56.3.6.3 The engine shall be provided with an adjustable governor to control the engine speed within
10% of its rated speed under any condition of load upto the full load rating. The governor Shall be
set to maintain rated pump speed at maximum pump load. 27.3.6.4 Engines, after correction for
altitude and ambient temperature shall have bare engine horse power rating equivalent to the
higher of the following two values.
• 20% in excess of the maximum brake horsepower require to drive the pump at its duty point.
• The brake horse-power required to drive the pump at 150% of its rated discharge.
The coupling between the engine and the pump shall allow each Unit to be removed without
disturbing the other.
56.3.6.5-Starting Mechanism
56.3.6.5.1-Provision shall be made for two separate methods Engine starting viz,
(a) Automatic starting by means of a battery powered electric starter motor incorporating the
axial displacement type of pinion, having automatic repeat start facilities initiated by a fall in
pressure in the water supply pipe to the sprinkler and/or hydrant installation. The battery
capacity shall be adequate for ten consecutive starts without recharging with a cold engine
under full compression.
(b) Manual starting by :

I. Crank handle, if engine size permits.
II. Electric starter motor.
56.3.6.6-Battery
56.3.6.6.1-Battery, Battery charger and DC DB shall be housed in a metal enclosed, free standing
compartmentalized, sheet steel panel.
56.3.6.6.2 Batteries Shall be housed in The Bottom Compartment with the Battery Charger in the
middle and the DC DB housed in the top compartment.
56.3.6.6.3 The Panel shall be fabricated out of adequate thickness mild steel of not less than 2.0 mm
thickness.
56.3.6.6.4 All retaining catches, screws and bolts shall be Cadmium plated.
56.3.6.6.5 The Battery shall be maintenance free, sealed,Lead Acid type.
56.3.6.6.6-The Cell containers shall be heat resistant, shock Absorbing and shall be of hard rubber
or polypropylene.
56.3.6.6.7 The complete batteries shall include the cells, intercell connectors, terminal lugs, etc.,
56.3.6.6.8 The batteries shall have an adequate capacity to Supply power to steady state loads for
eight (8) hours. At the end of the Three (3) hours, the voltage shall not have fallen under 95%
of the Rated voltage.
56.3.6.6.9 The discharge capacity shall be so determined that at the end of the discharge period of
the eight (8) hours the voltage is not less than that nominal discharge voltage. The battery
capacity shall be adequate for 10 consecutive starts without re-charging.
56.3.6.6.10-All connections except inter-cell connections, shall Be made with copper rod supported
on insulators of approved type. The copper rod, as well as the cable connections, shall be
protected from corrosion by painting with two coats of anti sulphuric enamel or other
approved means.
56.3.6.6.11-Intercell connections shall be of low resistance and shall be in a clean condition hen
bolted and shall be protected by Petroleum jelly, alternatively, intercell connections may be
soldered.
56.3.6.7-Battery Charging
56.3.6.7.1-The means of charging the batteries shall be by a 2 rate trickle charger with manual
selection on boost charge and the batteries shall be charged in position. Where separate
batteries are shall be capable of trickle charging both the batteries simultaneously. Provided
for automatic and manual starting, the charging equipment The charging equipment shall
charge the batteries.
56.3.6.8-Fuel System
56.3.6.8.1-The diesel engine will run on Light Diesel Oil.
56.3.6.8.2-Engine shall be provided with a fuel oil tank fitted with a level indicator and having
adequate capacity to hold sufficient fuel oil for minimum two (2) hours on full load run. The
fuel oil tank shall preferably be mounted on the engine. The level indicator shall be of float
type and not PVC tube type.
56.3.6.8.3-The fuel oil tank shall be constructed of As per relevant IS Code. The tank shall be above
the inlet of fuel injection pump of the diesel engine to ensure adequate pressure at suction of
injection pump.
56.3.6.8.4-The fuel oil tank shall be provided with a sludge and welded steel Sediment trap, so that
the same is not carried to the injection pump. Adequately sized inspection and cleaning hole
shall be provided to Facilitate maintenance.
56.3.6.8.5 Pipe line carrying fuel oil shall be independent for each engine and gradually sloped from
the tank to the injection pump. Any valve in this line shall be placed adjacent to the tank and
kept locked in open position. A filter shall be incorporated in the fuel oil system and shall be
mounted in an accessible position for cleaning.
56.3.6.8.6 Pipe joints shall be welded and shall not be soldered. No plastic pipes shall be used.
56.3.6.8.7-The design of complete fuel oil system shall be free of air pocket in any part of the pipe
work, fuel pump, sprayers/injectors, filter system, etc., Use of screwed plugs shall be
permitted where air relief is essential.
56.3.6.9-Air Filteration
The air Intake shall be fitted with a filter of adequate size to prevent foreign matter entering the
engine.
This shall be of manual operation to bring the engine to starting Position after use.
56.3.6.10-Exhaust System
The exhaust shall be fitted with a suitable silencer to keep the total back pressure within the
engine maker’s recommendation. The exhaust system shall also be free from any
condensate flowing into the engine.
56.3.6.11-Engine Shut-down Mechanism
56.3.6.12-Accessories
56.3.6.12.1-The engine shall be mounted on a frame of fabricated steel construction. Adequate
access shall be provided to the big end and main bearings, camshaft and governor drives water
jacket,Etc.
56.3.6.12.2-Indicator cocks shall be mounted directly on the cylinder head and located in such a
manner as to permit preparation of the indicator cards without removing the valve operating gear
covers.
56.3.6.13-Tools
56.3.6.13.1-A standard tools kit shall be provided with the Engine.
56.3.6.14 Spare Parts
56.3.6.14.1-The following spare parts shall be supplied with The engine
(a) Two Sets of fuel filters, elements and seals.
(b) Two sets of lubricating oil filters elements and seals.
(c) Two sets of belts (where used).
(d) One complete set of engine joints, gaskets and hoses.
(e) Two injector nozzles.
(f) One complete set of piston rings for each cylinder.
(g) One Inlet valve and one exhaust valve.
(h) Scraper rings.
56.3.6.14.2-Yard Hydrant/Wet Riser system (Pumps) (Spares Are for each type of pumps)
(i) Impeller - 1 set.
(ii) Shaft - 1 no.
(iii) Shaft sleeve - 2 nos.
(iv) Glands - 2 nos.
(v) Latern Rings - 2 sets
(vi) Bearings - 2 Sets
56.3.6.15-Auto Start Control Panel for Diesel Engine
56.3.6.15.1-The Auto-start control panel shall have the Following:

(i) Auto/Manual selector switch for pumpset.
(ii) Manual start/stop push button (iii) Indicating lamps showing power on and run/stop.
(iii) Voltmeter/Ammeter in battery charging circuit.
56.3.6.15.2 The control panel shall be welded construction, fabricated from sheet metals having 2.03
mm (14 SWG) thickness and shall be dust and vermin proof.
56.3.6.15.3 The maximum and minimum height of the operating equipment on the panel shall be
1800mm and 750mm respectively from the floor level. If the control panel height is small then it
should be mounted on a separate support, so that the operating height of the equipment comes
within the above limit. The proper supporting arrangement shall be provided for the control panel.
56.3.6.15.4 The panel shall be completely factory wired. Absolutely ready in all respect for
installation at site and termination External cables for which undrilled bottom gland plate shall be
provided. The internal wirings of the panel shall be carried out with 650 V grade stranded copper
wire of size rated for the current in the corresponding circuit. The minimum size of the wire shall not
be less than 1.5 Sq.mm stranded copper. Wiring shall be of switchboard type, single core, stranded,
annealed copper wire with PVC Insulation. All the wirings to be hooked up with external cables shall
be terminated in suitable terminal blocks complete with washers, terminal screws etc. 10% spare
terminals shall be provided on the terminal blocks. The wiring termination shall be done using
ferrules having indelible markings. Insulated sleeves shall be provided at the terminations to reduce
the possibility of short circuit between various wires.
56.3.6.15.7-The Auto Start panel shall have both trickle & Boost charger to charge the batteries.
56.3.6.15.5 Neoprene or equivalent rubber gaskets shall be provided at all openings.
56.3.6.15.6-All necessary relays, contactors, indicators, alarm push buttons, shall be housed the
panel.
56.3.6.15.8-The panel should be designed and compatible with the make of the diesel engine
offered.
56.3.6.15.9-All the components used in the panel shall be Reputed makes Of
56.3.6.15.10-Name plate of approved design shall be furnished for panel and for each instrument or
device mounted on the panel.
56.3.6.15.11-The panel shall have provision of cable entry from Bottom/top. Arrangement shall be
provided to make entry dust-tight And vermin proof.
56.3.6.15.12-The panel shall have provisions for fixing the multi-core cable glands. The cable gland
support plate 4 mm thick shall be mounted not less than 200mm above floor level (for bottom entry).
56.3.6.15.13 Two numbers diametrically opposite earthing connection shall be provided for the
panel. The earthing of the panel shall be done as per the rules and regulations. 27.3.7 MS Pipes and
Fittings The use of M.S. Pipes in the execution shall be as follows 27.3.7.1-Buried and Overground
Pipes-Mild Steel ERW Pipes as per IS:1239 (Part-1) medium grade (for pipes of sizes 150 mm NB
and below) or IS:3589 (for pipes of sizes 200 mm. and above) with IS mark in both the cases.
56.3.7.1.1 Minimum thickness of steel pipes shall be as per IS:3589.
56.3.7.1.2-All fittings to be used in connection with steel pipelines upto a size of 80 mm. shall be as
per IS: 1239, Part 1, ‘MildSteel tubulars and other wrought steel pipe fittings. Heavy grade Fitting
with sizes above 80 mm to 150 mm. shall be fabricated from heavy grade pipes conforming to IS:
1239 (Part 1) having thickness not less than those of IS: 1239 (Part 2) heavy grade pipes. Fitting
with sizes above 150 mm shall be fabricated from pipes conforming to IS:3589 or steel plates having
thickness not less than those specified in the IS:3589. All fittings shall be of forged steel for Sprinkler
System.
56.3.7.1.3 Welded construction shall be adopted for steel pipelines unless specified otherwise.
56.3.7.1.4 Hangers and supports shall be capable of carrying the sum of all concurrently acting
loads. They shall be designed to provide the required supporting effects and allow pipelines
movement as necessary. All guides, anchors, braces, dampers, expansion joint and structural steel
to be attached to the building / structure / trenches etc., shall be provided where required.
56.3.7.1.5 All piping system shall be capable of withstanding the maximum pressure arising from any
condition of testing (as stipulated) and operation, including water hammer effects..
56.3.7.2-Coating and Wrapping
Steel pipelines to be laid underground buried in the soil shall have protection against corrosion by
means of coating & wrapping as per IS 10221.
56.3.7.2.1-The above coating and wrapping shall be carried out In systematic manner so that
uniform thickness of coating is obtained As per IS specification.
56.3.7.2.2-Pipeline thus coated and wrapped shall be tested for Holiday detection by means of high
voltage Holiday Detector (10,000 Volts). Any defects observed during such test shall be suitably
rectified.
56.3.7.2.3-Buried pipelines shall be laid in general with top of pipe 1 (one) metre below the ground
level. Where soil conditions are not satisfactory, masonry or equivalent supports shall be provided at
regular intervals.
56.3.8-Priming Tank and Accessories
56.3.8.1-The Priming Tank shall be of M.S. Tank.
56.3.8.2-The capacity of tank shall be atleast three times than that of the suction pipe from pump to
the foot valve. However, the minimum capacity of the tank shall not be less than 1000 litres.
56.3.8.4 The priming tank shall be connected to the delivery side of the pump by a steel pipe having
a minimum internal diameter of 100 mm with a stop valve and a non return valve therein of the same
size.
56.3.8.5-The priming tank shall be provided with a dependable independent filling arrangement and
a level indicator.
56.3.8.6 Priming tank shall also be provided with overflow Arrangement, drain pipe, venting, man-
hole cover, and water inlet Connection.
56.3.9-Valves
56.5.9.1-Only Butterfly Valves shall be used.
56.3.9.2-Non-return Valves
56.3.9.2.1-Only Wafer Type slim non return valves shall be used.
56.3.9.3-Foot-valves
56.3.9.3.1-Foot Valves shall be as per IS:4038-1986. It shall be cast Iron body with leather flap
sealing clamped on cast iron disc plates.
56.3.9.3.2-Foot Valve shall be with a strainer which will have Cored holes / slots with straining
equivalent to two and half times the area of the pipe bore.
56.3.9.3.3-Valves below 50 mm size shall have screwed ends While those of 50 mm and higher
sizes shall have flanged end. Connections with drilled holes conforming to IS: 1538.
56.3.10-Hydrant Components
56.3.10.1-Hydrant Valve
56.3.10.1.1-Hydrant Valve shall be of single headed with 75 mm NB angled Inlet, 63 mm Oblique
outlet as per IS:5290.
56.3.10.1.2 The material of construction shall be as follows:
(i) Body Gunmetal

(ii) Trim Leaded tin bronze as per IS: 318 Grade-2
(iii) Hand wheel Cast Iron FG 200 as per IS:210.
(iv) Washer, Gasket Rubber as per IS 638
(v) Quick coupling Leaded tin bronze as per IS:318,Grade-2.
connection
(vi) Spring Phosphor Bronze as per IS:7608
(vii) Male Blank Cap. Leaded tin Bronze as per IS:318, Grade-2.
(viii) Chain G.I.
56.3.10.1.3-Hydrant Valve shall be of approved make and with IS mark.
56.3.10.2-Branch Pipe-Branch Pipe shall be of gunmetal short, 63 mm made instantaneous inlet,

made threaded outlet, 15 mm bore nozzle with IS Mark and TAC approval.
56.3.10.3-Hoses-Hoses shall be of Synthetic fibre, circular Woven jacketed, treated against rot,
Working Pressure 12 kg/sq cm. Burst pressure, 36 kg/sq cm .Coupling shall be male and female
parts, gunmetal, 63 mm. (21) size, heavy quality bearing conforming to IS.903 with IS Mark and TAC
approval.
56.3.10.4 Hose Reel

(i) Hose reel shall be type A, wall mounting type, swinging complete with 19 mm. bore, high
pressure braided rubber hose. 36 m long, 6 mm bore shut off nozzle and 25 mm inlet
valve, IS: 884 mark.
(ii) The material of construction for various components be as per IS:884-1985.Shall
(iii) Piping connecting for the hose reel shall be taken from the Main riser above the landing
valve.
56.3.10.5 Hose Boxes-Hose Boxes shall be made of 18 gauge MS sheet 800 mm x 600 1x 250 mm
size with double door with glasses, lock, 2 keys and a break glass, recess for keys, painted in fire
red. The door frames shall be of 16 gauge MS sheet. The hose box shall be painted fire red outside
and brilliant white inside.
27.3.10.6 Fire Brigade inlet for the risers shall have two instantaneous pattern of 63 mm dia valve,
complete with non-return valve, manifold etc., mounted in a suitable MS enclosure with glass fronted
lockable doors.
56.3.10.7-All the hydrant components i.e. hydrant valve, hoses with coupling, branch pipe, hose
reels shall have IS marking.
56.3.11-Instrumentation
56.3.11.1-Pressure Gauge
56.3.11.1.1-Pressure Gauge sensing elements shall be of Continuous C bourdon type and duly
glycerine filled.
56.3.11.1.2-Gauges shall be of 150 mm diameter dial stored enamel black finish case.
56.3.11.1.3-Normal processor pressure shall be gauged within 70% of full scale reading of the scale
range.
56.3.11.1.4 All gauges shall be with stainless steel bourdon Having rotary geared S/S movements.
56.3.11.1.5 Accuracy shall be within ±1.0% of full scale range.
56.3.11.1.6-Gauges shall have internal and external stop pegs for cover range protection of 125% of
maximum range and zero point respectively
56.3.11.1.7-All gauges shall have bottom connection for local mounting.
56.3.11.2-Pressure Switch
Pressure Switches shall be used to control the operating of the main fire pump and the jockey pump.
The pressure switches shall be of bellows type with required differential as per the system (Scheme
offered and the range shall be adjustable and suitable for the operationof the pumps).
56.3.11.3-Flow Switch
Flow Switch shall be used to monitor the flow of Sprinkler System and it shall be connected to the
annunciation panel.
56.3.12-Execution
56.3.12.1-General
56.3.12.1.1-For Steel pipelines, welded construction shall adopted unless specified otherwise be
56.3.12.1.2-Hangers and supports shall be capable of carrying the sum of all concurrently acting
loads. They shall be designed to provide the required supporting effects and allow pipelines
movements as necessary.
56.3.12.1.3 All piping system shall be capable of withstandingthe maximum pressure arising from
any condition of testing (asstipulated) and operation, including water hammer effects.
56.3.12.1.4 While erecting field run pipes, the contractor shall check the accessibility of valves,
instrument tapping points, and maintain minimum head room requirement and other necessary
clearance from the adjoining work areas.
56.3.12.1.5 Modification of prefabricated pipes, if any, shall have to be carried out by the contractor
at no extra charge to the Govt.
56.3.12.1.6 All pipelinesshall be given proper slope towards the drain point.
56.3.12.1.7-External and internal attachment to piping shall bedesigned so as not to cause flattering
of pipes of excessive localisedstresses.
56.3.12.1.8 All pipelines shall be identified by means of colourbands and direction arrows.
56.3.12.2-End Preparation
56.3.12.2.1-For steel pipes, end preparation for butt weldingshall be done by machining / flame
cutting.
56.3.12.2.2-Socket weld end preparation shall be sewing/ machining.
56.3.12.2.3 For tees, laterals, mitre bends and other irregulardetails cutting templates shall be used
for accuracy.
56.3.12.3-Pipe Joints
56.3.12.3.1-In general, pipes having sizes 50 mm and over shall be joined by butt welding and pipes
having size 40 mm or less shall be jointed by socket welding / screwed. Joints shall have tapered
threadsand shall be assured of leak tightness without using any sealingcompound.
56.3.12.3.2-Flanged joints shall be used for connection to vessels, equipment, flanged valves and
also on straight lengths of pipelines at strategic points to facilitate erection and
subsequentmaintenance work.
56.3.12.4 Above Ground Piping

Piping to be laid above ground shall be supported on supports. Support details shall have to be
approved by the GE.
56.3.12.5 Painting-
Above ground pipes shall be coated with one coat of red oxide primer and 2 (two) coats of synthetic
enamel of Fire Red' colour. The pipe line surfaces shall be manually cleaned of rust / millscales by
wire brush, carborandum tips etc. Use of whipping hammer, emery paper shall be done to clean
pitted areas.
56.3.12.6-Welding
56.3.12.6.1-Before welding, the ends shall be cleaned by wire brushing, filling or grinding. Each
weld-run shall be cleaned of slag before the next run is welded.
56.3.12.6.2-Welding at any joint shall be completed uninterrupted. If this cannot be followed for some
reason, the weldshall be insulated for slow and uniform cooling.
56.3.12.6.3 Welding shall be done by manual oxy-acctylene ormanual shielded metal arc process.
56.3.12.6.4 As far as possible welding shall be carried out inflat position. If not possible, welding
shall be done in a position as closeto flat position as possible.
56.3.12.6.5 The root of butt joints shall be such as to achievefull penetration with the complete fusion
or root edges. The weld projection shall not exceed 3 mm inside the pipe.
56.3.12.6.6-On completion of each run crater, weldirregularities, slag etc., shall be removed by
grinding or chipping.
56.3.12.6.7-During the process of welding, all movements, shocks, vibration or stresses shall be
carefully avoided in order to prevent weld cracks.
56.3.13-Testing
56.3.13.1 Piping- After the entire pipeline is erected, the pipeline shall be subjected to a hydrostatic
test at 1.5 times the working pressure for a period of 2 (Two) hours. The test should be done in the
presence of and to the satisfaction of the EIC. Defects noticed in the test should be repaired or if
necessary, defective work should be replaced with new work. Tests shall be repeated until work is
done satisfactorily.
56.3.13.2 Hydrant System -After erection at site the complete system shall be subjected to tests to
show satisfactory performance in line with the requirements of specification and as per instruction of
GE. The following tests shall be under taken in particular. (a) Automatic starting of all fire pumps by
operating the test valves.
(b) Operation of yard hydrant / internal hydrants and Sequential starting of all the fire pumps.
(c) Testing of the complete system / equipment.
56.3.14 Manuals
Three copies of manuals shall be submitted duly indexed with complete technical data sheet of each
piece of equipment installed. The manuals shall be well bound and shall contain the following:
(i) Table of Contents.
(ii) Design data / standards.
(iii) As built drawings.
(iv) Manufacturers catalogues, installation and maintenance Brochure.
(v) Spare parts list.
56.4 APPLICABLE TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
56.4.1 GENERAL
Specifications of materials and workmanship in these Fire Alarm System shall be as specified in
MES Schedule Part-I except where specifically mentioned in these documents. General rules,
preamble to various section rates, special Conditions, methods of measurements) etc. given in
SSR shall apply to this contract unless otherwise specified in these documents.
Particular specifications given here-in-after are brief and are only to particularize, amend or
emphasize, the aforesaid specifications which are not repeated here. In case of any discrepancy
between the two, specification mentioned herein shall take precedence over MES Schedule Part-
I.
The tenderer shall be responsible for supplying, installing, laying, connecting, testing and
commissioning of the item covered in the tender all as specified and directed by Engineer- in-
Charge. The work shall be of high standard and executed as per sound engineering practice as
per MES Schedule part-I/E Rules/IS/National Electrical code.
During the currency of work and also on completion of work, testing shall be carried out for all
items/the installation, as a whole as per SSR/IE Rules/IS to the entire satisfaction of GE and a
record shall be maintained duly signed by the Engineer-in-Charge and the contractor.
56.5 INSPECTION,TESTING AND COMMISSIONING:

The Contractor shall arrange for the complete commissioning of the fire alarm system by the
specialist fire alarm supplier.
Commissioning must be carried out in the presence of the EIC and a certificate issued to
this effect.The whole of the fire alarm installation should be inspected, tested and commissioned
in accordance with clause 26 of BS 5839 part 1 and as further described.
56.5.1 Commissioning shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 26.5 of BS 5839 part
1which shall include:-
(i) An audibility test of the alarm devices. Audibility level readings shall be taken in each
room. Any sound levels found to be lower than 65 dba shall be reported to the Engineer in
charge in writing
(ii) All trigger devices i.e. manual call points, heat and smoke detectors shall be tested or
correct operation,
(iii) A mains failure test shall be carried out to verify correct operation of the backup
battery system.
56.5.2 Prior to commissioning, the Contractor shall provide a certificate of installation and
cable test certificates of the system to the EIC.The equipments for testing and arrangements for
testing shall be made by the contractor without any extra cost.The contractor shall employ
services of the designated Fire Alarm Specialist supplierfor installation of Fire Alarm System.
56.6 Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning and fire alarm system be confirming to
the following IS standards and other international code of practices:-
(i) IS-2189-2008 (Selection, installation and maintenance of Automatic Fire detection &
Alarm System).
(ii) IS-2175-1988 (Specification for heat sensitive fire detectors for usingautomatic Fire Alarm
System).
(iii) IS-8757-1999 (Glossary of terms associated with fire safety).
(iv) IS-11360-1985 (Specification of smoke detectors for using automatic electrical FireAlarm
System).
(v) IS-12456-1988 (Code practice for Fire protection of electrical data processing
installations).
(vi) The Fire detectors marked in the drawing are tentative and therefore contractor shall
verify and provide detectors as per IS-2189-2008.
(vii) The entire Fire Alarm system shall be tested and commissioned by contractor in the
presence of user as well as MES & contractor’s rep. Rep of the specialist supplier shall
visit site for 100% inspection with MES and Users rep once in a quarter during defect
liability period. Any defect noticed shall be rectified by the Contractor on Priority at no
extra cost. Contractor shall also arrange training for operation of system by user’s after
satisfactory testing & commissioning.
56.7 TIMELY PLANNING/PROCUREMENT ACTION BY CONTRACTORS

Within two week after acceptance of tender the contractor shall produce documentary
evidence to the effect that he has placed orders for various equipments of makes
specified in the tender on the manufacturer or his authorized dealers, to the GE/AGE(I)
and the Accepting Officer”.
56.8 SAMPLES AND MATERIALS

All materials (equipments, accessories etc) to be incorporated in the work shall invariably
be ISI marked and of the make specified herein and approved by GE. In case any ISI
marked items is not available in the country, this shall be conforming to BIS and of the
make approved by GE/AGE(I).
Amendments to IS issued till the date of receipt of tender are deemed to be included. In
case IS does not exist for any item, it shall conform to current BS/DIM/ASTM, specifications
in which case a copy of relevant standard shall be submitted by tenderer.
The contractor after obtaining written approval of makes and samples shall obtain the
materials and equipments from an approved firm or through their authorized agents and
shall ensure that the materials are brought to site in the manufacturer’s original packing with
seal intact.
The contractor is required to submit the original purchase vouchers duly machine
numbered and dated in respect of purchase of the articles showing all taxes, makes and
numbers as required. The purchase vouchers shall be produced to the Engineer-in-
Charge for his verification of materials/equipments and obtaining the
approval/permission of GE for release of payments/incorporation in works. On approval,
the Engineer-in-Charge shall deface the purchase vouchers etc and the defaced original
with two Xerox copies thereof shall be submitted by the contractor to the Engineer-in-
Charge for reference and record. The original purchase vouchers shall be released to
contractor after technical check and payment of final bill.
No foreign exchange shall be made available by the Department.
Manufacturer’s test certificate as per IS test procedures for items to be incorporated in
works shall be submitted by the contractor. The manufacturers test certificate shall
also be defaced and verified by the Engineer-in-Charge in token of genuineness.
56.9 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

Scope: Furnish a complete 24V DC Microprocessor based addressable, electrically
supervised, zone annunciated, fire detection and alarm system as specified herein. The
system shall include but not be limited to, a control panel or panels with integral power
supply to provide the 24V DC, signal initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices,
and all accessories required to provide a complete andoperating system.
The fire alarm system shall be wired as 2 core signal loops. 24V DC power wiring shall
be installed to alarm sounders via addressable sounder modules or via conventional
monitored sounder outputs within the control panel. Loop powered sounders shall be
connected directly to the signal loops.
56.10 CODE AND STANDARDS & PRODUCT APPROVAL

The following codes and standards shall apply to work of this section. EN54-2
and EN54-4 - Fire Alarm System (Standard)
VDS and FM - Quality control
BS 5839: Part 1 - Fire Detection and Alarm Systems for Buildings
(Standard)
Product Approval - VDS and FM
56.11 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
56.11.1 Functional Description

The fire alarm control panel (FACP) shall be the central processing unit of the system
receiving and analyzing signals from fire sensors, providing audible and visual
information to the user, initiating automatic alarm response sequences and providing the
means by which the user interacts with the system.
The FACP shall be certified as meeting the requirements of EN54-2 and EN54-4 by a
suitable, notified body. A certificate and test report shall be made available for
inspection as evidence of certification.
The FACP shall be easily configurable to meet the exact detection zone and output
mapping requirements of the building.
Fire Alarm panel shall be provided at locations as directed by the Engineer-in- Charge.
The panel board shall be provided all as specified in Schedule ‘A’ and as specified in
clause No 27.5.1 and its sub clauses of SSR Part-I (2009).
56.11.2 THE FACP SHALL BE MICROPROCESSOR BASED AND OPERATE UNDER

AMULTITASKING SOFTWARE PROGRAM.
Operating programs and configuration data shall be contained in re- configurable non-
volatile memory. Retention of the memory shall not rely on any form of battery or capacitor back-
up device. The FACP shall incorporate separate processors for loop processing and central
processing.
Provision shall be made for each addressable loop to be sub-divided into geographical zones.
The section of wiring corresponding to each zone circuit shall be protected from faults in other
sections by line isolator modules.
In order to facilitate re-configuration and system extension, the allocation of addresses to
devices shall be independent of their physical arrangement on the loops.
Up to 99 individually addressed standard devices shall be configured on each addressable
loop.Loop powered sounders and beacons incorporated as sensor bases shall be available.
The FACP shall have the capability to support sub-addressing of addressable modules.
It shall be possible to fit a 40-column printer to the FACP which will print system events
automatically and logged data upon request.
The FACP shall incorporate a real time clock to enable events.
56.11.3 ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS

It shall be possible to fit the FACP with a network board to allow up to four control panels to
communicate with each other. The network shall be fully fault tolerant and shall continue to
function normally under any single fault condition.
It shall be possible to fit the FACP with a modern board to allow remote interrogation and
monitoring of a network of control panels.
It shall be possible to fit up to thirty-two, sixteen way input/output modules, eight way relay
modules, six way sounder modules or four way conventional zone modules or any combination
thereof to each control panel. Modules shall connected to a separate serial bus but shall be
programmable in the same manner as devicesconnected to the addressable loops.
56.11.4 CONFIGURATION
It shall be possible to perform configuration updates on site using a portable personal computer
and a Windows ® based configuration utility. This facility shall allow the following
parameters to be set:-
56.11.5 SYSTEM
a) Produce a configuration file which contains data for up to 64 controlpanels
connected together as a network.
b) Set cause and effect tables for any device to operate devices or functions on any
panel or panels connected to the network.
c) Upload and view graphically the configuration from a single panel or entire
network o panels.
56.11.6 CONTROL PANEL
a) Panel name (network identity, fifteen characters minimum)

b) Panel text (comfort message or service company forty characters minimum)
c) Change code numbers for access levels two and three.
d) Select sounder ringing mode as common, zonal or two stage
e) Select first and second stage delay times for each sounder output to between
zero and five minutes.
f) Set number of loops on panel as one, two or four.
g) Set number of zones on panel as 0,16,48 or 96.
h) Set loop sounder volume globally.
i) Set start and end times for day night mode for each day of the week.
56.11.7 DETECTORS
a) Allocate a zone
b) Set a delay before the panel responds to a fire signal
c) Indicate pre-alarm
d) Set day sensitivity and night sensitivity separately
e) Allocate a forty character location text message
f) Address loop powered base sounders.
56.11.8 CALL POINTS

a) Allocate a zone
b) Allocate a forty character location text message
56.11.9 SWITCH UNITS(INPUT)

a) Allocate a zone for each input and the device itself
b) Define input action as fire, fault, pre-alarm, technical alarm, evacuate, alert,security
alarm, silence alarm, reset, transparent, disablement or test mode.
c) Change the input action message from the default to any one of the above or to anyone
of a user defined library of 10 additional action messages.
d) Set a delay before the panel responds to a fire signal.
e) Select whether the input requires the control panel to be reset or is self clearingupon
removal of the input.
f) Allocate a forty character location text message
56.11.10 RELAY OR SOUNDER UNITS (OUTPUT)
a) Allocate a zone for each input and the device itself

b) Define whether the device responds to evacuate inputs, as a sounder (default
ringing), is silenceable, needs to be reset or produces a single pulsed operation of
between one and five seconds (programmable)
c) Has a delay before operating (zero to five minutes)
d) Allocate a forty character location text message.
56.11.11 LOOP POWERED SOUNDERS AND BEACONS

a) Allocate a zone
b) Define whether the device responds to evacuate inputs, as a sounder
(default ringing), is silenceable or needs to be reset.
c) Has a delay before operating (zero to five minutes)
d) Allocate a forty character location text message.
56.11.12 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

The housing containing the FACP shall be of metal construction and shall be capable of
being surface or semi-flush mounted. It shall be complete with cable knocks-outs in
sufficient quantity to accommodate all likely cabling requirements.
The housing shall afford a minimum ingress protection to IP30 and it shall not be
possible to open the FACP without the use of a special tool or key.
56.11.13 PANEL INDICATIONS

a) The FACP shall monitor the status of all devices on the addressable loops for fire,
short-circuit fault, open-circuit fault, incorrect addressing, unauthorized device
removal or exchange, pre-alarm condition and contaminated detector condition.
b) The FACP shall also monitor the status of internal connections and interfaces
including charger and batteries.
c) The FACP shall provide the following discrete visual indications:
POWER ON Green LED indicator

FIRE ALARM Red LED indicator
PRE-ALARM Yellow LED indicator
ON TEST Yellow LED indicator
BUZZER SILENCED Yellow LED indicator
DELAY ACTIVE Yellow LED indicator
MORE EVENTS Yellow LED indicator
GENERAL DISABLEMENT Yellow LED indicator
GENERAL FAULT Yellow LED indicator
POWER FAULT Yellow LED indicator
SYSTEM FAULT Yellow LED indicator
SOUNDER FAULT/DISABLED Yellow LED indicator
56.11.14 DISPLAY
In addition to the indications above, the FACP shall have an integral 240X64-pixel graphic LCD
display.
The display shall incorporate a backlight which will illuminate upon any event (excluding mains
failure) or button press.
The display shall be capable of simultaneously indicating the number ofoutstanding events and their
types as well as the current event.
56.11.15 PANEL CONTROLS
The panel shall be provided with at least the following manual controls:-
(A) SILENCE BUZZER
(B) ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM
(C) RE-SOUND ALARM
(D) RESET
(E) LAMP TEST
(F) FUNCTION 1
(G) MORE FIRES
(H) MORE EVENTS
(I) HELP
(J) MENU NAVIGATION PAD (UP, DOWN, LEFT, ENTER, EXIT)
56.11.16 REMOTE MONITORING SIGNALS

56.11.16.1 The FACP shall contain at least three programmable inputs to allow
interconnection to other systems.
56.11.16.2 The FACP shall contain at least two programmable outputs to allow
interconnection to other systems.
56.11.16.3 The FACP shall be capable of monitoring and controlling remote site devices,
suchas relays for the control of plant and dampers directly from the addressable loops.
56.11.16.4 The FACP shall be capable of monitoring fire doors such that, in the event of a
firealarm condition, an event is generated to warn of the failure of a fire door to close.
56.8.1 SOFTWARE
56.8.1.1 The FACP shall have, as a standard software enhancement the ability to annunciate apre-
alarm condition designed to give the earliest possible warning of potential firecondition
without raising the full alarm condition.
56.8.1.2 The FACP shall have as a standard software enhancement, the ability to automatically
adjust the alarm threshold levels to compensate for changes in detector sensitivity due to
contamination over a period of time.
56.8.1.3 The FACP shall have, as a standard software enhancement, the ability to provide an
indication that a detector is nearing a level of contamination, which requires that it be
replaced or serviced.
56.8.1.4 The FACP shall have, as a standard software enhancement, the ability to provide
automatic warning that a detector has reached a level of contamination, which
requires thatit be replaced or serviced.
56.8.1.5 The FACP shall have, as a standard software enhancement, the ability to synchronise
loop data transmission to eliminate the possibility of data corruption due to cross-talk
or similar effects.
56.8.1.6 The FACP shall have, as a standard software enhancement, extensive, context sensitive
help screens to offer additional information on system status at all times.
56.8.2 SOUNDERS
56.8.2.1 The FACP shall provide the necessary outputs to separately operate a minimum of two
monitored circuits of common system sounders. Each output shall be capable of driving a sounder
load of up to 1A.
56.8.2.2 The FACP shall also be able to monitor the integrity of and control standard sounder
circuits, via a suitable addressable module.
56.8.2.3 The FACP shall be capable of providing a two-stage alarm sounder facility that can be
programmed, either on a zonal basis or common system basis, to meet the requirements of the fire
authority. Sounder outputs shall be available as follows:
a) Alert, intermittent pulsed tone
b) Evacuate, continuous tone
56.8.2.4 The FACP shall have the facility to change, on a per sounder zone basis, thesound output
dependent upon whether the source of alarm is: an automatic detector, e.g. smoke, heat. a manual
call point.
56.8.2.5 The FACP shall have the facility to generate a slow pulsed output to all sounder
circuits in response to a security alert input.
56.8.3 FAULT REPORTING
The FACP shall monitor all critical system components and interconnection, internal and external,
such that a failure, which would prevent the correct operation of the alarm functions, causes the
FAULT indicator to light and a message to be given on the alphanumeric display within 60 seconds
of occurrence. The following faults shall be reported in the manner described above:-
a) Loop Short Circuit
b) Loop Open Circuit
c) Unconfigured Device
d) Device missing
e) Addressable Device Failure
f) Incorrectly Configured Device
g) System fault (processor)
h) Low battery
i) Charger failure
j) Earth fault monitoring
k) Battery Fault
l) Mains Failure
m) Sounder Wiring Open Circuit (per circuit)
n) Sounder Wiring Short Circuit (per circuit)
To help fault finding and repair, the FACP shall provide text messages toindicate the location
of where a fault has occurred in the system.
56.12 SYSTEM MANANGEMENT

The FACP shall incorporate the following system management facilities:-
(a) Isolate/re-connect individual outputs or inputs of addressable points.
(b) Isolate/re-connect individual zones
(c) Isolate/re-connect individual loops
(d) Isolate/re-connect all or individual sounder circuits
(e) Isolate/re-connect all volt-free contacts individually
(f) Isolate/re-connect panel inputs
(g) Walk-test of a selected zone to verify detectors and sounders
(h) View system status
(j) Print event log
(k) Print point status
(l) Set time
(m) View contamination status
56.12.1 The FACP shall have an event log capable of storing the last 500 events that have
occurred. It shall be possible to view the content of the log via the alphanumeric display.
56.12.2 Events shall be displayed in chronological order with the newest events first. It shall be
possible to scroll through the events.
56.12.3 The FACP shall be designed so that, for each type of analogue addressable detector,
the overall response time including the sensor, the signal transmission system and the
fire decision algorithm, meets the requirement of European Standards.
56.12.4 The FACP shall be capable of isolating a group of selected detectors in areas of the
building where maintenance work is carried out.
56.13 AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTORS (GENERA) GENERAL

The manufacturer shall have available the following types of analogue addressable
automatic sensors, for direct connection to the system addressable loops:
a) Ionisation smoke sensors
b) Photoelectric smoke sensors
c) Heat sensors
d) Multi-sensors
56.14 ADDRESSABLE UNITS

The manufacturer shall be capable of offering two-state addressable versions of the
following units, taking only one address from the loop:
a) Photoelectric smoke detectors
b) Heat detectors
c) Photoelectric beam smoke detectors
d) Ultra-violet flame detectors
e) Addressable sounder modules
f) Addressable relay interface modules
g) Addressable switch monitoring modules
h) Short circuit isolator modules (no address required)
i) Loop powered sounders
j) Manual call points for indoor use
k) Manual call points for outdoor use
l) Multiple inputs/outputs
m) Radio interfaces to detectors and call points
56.14.1 Analogue Addressable and addressable detectors and modules must be able totransmit to
the FACP an address to be used in the system configuration.
56.14.2 It must be possible to connect and mix automatic detectors, addressable manual
call points and addressable modules within the same zone sub-division of an addressable
loop. All equipment connected to the system addressable loop, either directly or via
interfaces, shall be proofed against electrical noise, high frequency pulses and
electromagnetic influences from other equipment.
56.14.3 The manufacturer shall have available suitable equipment to test and remove or
exchange all three main types of automatic point-type detectors when installed.
56.15 MULTI-SENSORS- ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE
56.15.1 The multi-sensor should be capable of monitoring two different sensing elements:
a) Photoelectric
b) Thermal
56.15.1 The design of the point-type multi-sensor photoelectric smoke detector sensing chamber
shall be optimized to minimize the effect of dust deposit over a period of time. The chamber
cover shall be removable for ease of cleaning or replacement. The point-type multi-sensors shall
incorporate screens designed to prevent all but the very smallest of insects from entering the
sensing chamber, (50 holes per square centimeter or more).
56.15.2 The multi-sensors shall be designed to have high resistance to contamination and
corrosion and shall include RFI screening to minimize the effect of radiated and conducted
electrical interference. The sensor should be able to operate in the following modes:
56.16 COMBINATION MODE

The sensor should be able to operate as a photoelectric sensor but when the ambient
temperature reaches 40oC or above, the thermal elements should be capable of sensing the
‘Rate of Rise’ and adjust the sensitivity of the photoelectricelement automatically.The sensitivity
of the photoelectric should be increased via an internalalgorithm.
56.17 PHOTOELECTRIC MODE

The sensor should be able to return the analogue value for the photoelectric element during a
normal polling sequence.
The sensor should also be able to signal to the FACP if the thermal sensing element exceeds a
fixed temperature threshold.
56.18 THERMAL MODE

The sensor should be able to return the analogue value for the thermal element during a normal
polling sequence. The sensor should also be able to signal to the FACP if the photoelectric
sensing element exceeds a pre-defined threshold.
The multi-sensor shall incorporate LED’s, clearly visible from the outside, to provide indication
of alarm actuation, The LED’s should be controlled fromthe FACP if the LED’s flash during
the normal polling sequence.
The modes of the multi-sensor should be controlled by the FACP, when the FACP changes
from one mode to another the FACP should re-calibrate the multi- sensor.
In locations where the detector is not readily visible, remote indicator units shall be provided.
The multi-sensor should have the capability of monitoring both sensing elements, if either or
both of the elements fail it should be reported and displayed at the FACP. The Detector shall be
Optical and thermal Sensors, Microprocessor controlled with internal algorithms, enhanced
signal processing stability, high immunity to unwanted alarms, 02 auto clean sensitivity photo
thermal settings,Thermal only detection mode, Twin LEDs for 360 degree visibility Built in
Test,and third party certified to CEA 4021. EN 54-7: 2000 and EN-54 5:2000.
56.19 DETECTOR BASE

The automatic point-type fire detectors shall be fixed to the installation by mean of plug- in bases.
Analogue addressable bases, sounder bases and conventional detector bases shall be available.
The three types of bases specified above shall incorporate the optional feature of being able to
lock the detectors in place once plugged in. Termination facilities shall be available for earthing.
Standard conventional and Analogue Addressable bases shall not contain any electronic
circuitry. This shall enable insulation and continuity checks to be completed on the wiring with
the detector heads removed.
56.20 OTHER DEVICES

ADDRESSABLE MANUAL CALL POINTS
The addressable manual call points shall monitor and signal to the FACP the status of a switch
operated by a “break glass” assembly. They shall be red in colour and suitable for surface or
flush mounting. The addressable call points shall be provided with an integral red LED to indicate
activation. One version of the addressable call point shall be available mounted in a weather
proof housing, affording protection to IP 66.
The addressable call points shall be capable of operating by means of thumb pressure and not
require a hammer. They shall be capable of being tested using a special ‘key’ without the
need for shattering the glass.
The addressable call points shall incorporate a mechanism to interrupt the normal addressable
loop scan to provide an alarm response within 3 seconds and shall be field programmable to
trigger either an alert or an evacuate response from the FACP.
Addressable manual call point shall have Unique plug & play insulation concept, resettable
operating element option, analogue addressable communications, fully compliant with EN 54 Part
11, backward compatibility, Integral LED and integral loop isolation.
56.21 ADDRESSABLE SOUNDER MODULE

The addressable sounder module shall be capable of monitoring and controlling two independent
circuits of alarm sounders using loop address. 24 V DC power to drive the sounders shall be
derived independently from the FACP.
The addressable sounder module shall be capable of operating both sets of sounders in a
pulsing or continuous mode as determined on the module. Each circuit shall be individually
programmable. Sounder circuits shall be capable ofsynchronization.
The addressable sounder module shall provide the facility to monitor the wiring to the sounders
for open or short-circuit and transmit the necessary fault signal to the FACP. Each sounder
circuit shall be separately fused.
The addressable sounder module shall provide the facility to monitor for failure of the power
supply for the sounders and transmit the necessary fault signal to FACP.
The addressable sounder module shall provide a green LED indication when the FACP is polling
it.
56.22 REMOTE INDICATOR UNIT

The remote indicator unit shall provide a remote indication for any detector that may be located in
an enclosed or locked compartment. The Response Indicator with LED shall be all as specified in
Sch ‘A’ and in clause No 23.5.1.11 of SSR Part-I.
The remote indicator unit shall be driven directly from its associated local detector. It shall be either
flush or surface mountable.
56.22.1 Sounders
Two types of Electronic sounders shall be acceptable: loop-powered addressable
sounders (see above) and stand-alone versions. Loop powered sounders shall have Maximum
sound output of 95 dB. Stand-alone versions shall powered by 24 Volts DC from the FACP.
Non loop-powered versions shall be flush or surface mountable, red in colour. They shall have
a minimum sound output of 95 dB (A) at 1 meter distance and shall have a maximum current
consumption at 24V DC of 100 mA. Sounders shall be specified in Schedule Column No
27.5.1.9 of SSR Part-I. Sounder shall be anti Tamper features, CPD, LPCB approved in
accordance to EN 54 Part-3.
56.22.2 Alarm Bells
Fire alarm bells shall be under dome type with a high resonance pressed alloy-steel gong to
ensure a load clear-tone ring. They shall be fully suppressed and polarized. The operating
mechanism shall be fully enclosed and the gong shall be red stove enameled for long life. Alarm
bells shall have a minimum sound output of 95 dB (A) at 1 metre distance and shall have a
maximum current consumption at 24V DC of 30mA.
56.22.3 Active Repeater panel
The panel is intended for extending the Main Fire Alarm Control panel features at the
distant locations preferably Fire Station/Security room. The active panel shall have touch screen
and 2x40 character LCD display backlit adjustable Alpha- Numeric display. The Active Repeater
Panel shall essentially be fitted with Access enable to access control functions as in Main Control
Panel. Independent/Individual buttons shall be provided for system Reset, Mute, Accept, Sound
Alarms/Silence/Resound Alarms and Self Test. The panel shall operate on 18-24 Volts. The
panel shall be suitable for operation at ambient temperature of - 5 degree to 45 degree. The panel
shall be of metal enclosing.
LED indicators shall be all as specified in Schedule ‘A’ and in clause No 24.5.1.9 of SSR
Part-I (2009)
56.23 MULTI SPECTRUM QUAD BAND TRIPLE IR DETECTOR:
FS24X Product Specifications
Field of View: 110° cone of vision ± 55° from on axis
Sensitivity: Selectable : Very High, High, Medium and Low
Response Time: 3-5 Sec. to 1 sq. ft. Heptane fire at 100ft.
5-10 Sec. to 1 sq. ft. Heptane fire at 200ft.
Spectral Sensitivity: Visible: 400-700 nanometers
Near Band IR1: 0.7-1.1 microns Wide Band IR2: 1.1 - 7.0 microns Wide Band IR3: 3.0 – 5.0
microns
Operating Voltage: 18-32 VDC,
Regulated Power Input Operating: 50 mA @ 24 VDC
nominal Alarm: 85 mA @ 24 VDC nominal
Heater: 155 mA additional
Output Relays: Fire: SPDT – Normally De-Energized, Latching/Non-Latching Fault:
SPST – Normally Energized, Latching/Non-Latching Auxiliary: SPDT – Normally De-
Energized, Latching
Relay Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 24 VDC. 0.5 amp @ 110 VAC
Analog Output: 4-20mA Source or Sink - user selectable
Visual Indications:
Blue LED: Power
Red LED: Alarm
Yellow LED: Fault
Communication: One of the following - user selectable:
4-20 mA Sink or Source
RS-485, MODBUS RTU Protocol
RS-485, FireBusI or FireBusII
RS-485 Special (optional) Temperature Range: Operating: -40 to +185°F (-40 to +85°C)
Storage: -76 to +257°F (-60 to +125°C)
Optional version -76 to + 230°F (-60 to +110°C) Humidity Range: 5% to 95% relative humidity,
non-condensing Vibration: Meets Mil Spec 810C Method 514.2, Curve AW
Wiring: 12 AWG (3.0mm2) to 22 AWG (0.3mm2) Shielded Cable
Recommended
Conduit Entries:Standard: (2) ¾” NPT or 25mm

Enclosure: Powder Coated Copper-free Aluminum
316 Stainless Steel Optional
Enclosure Type: NEMA 4X, IP66
Certifications: CE Mark
FM: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, & D Class II, Div. 1 & 2 Groups E, F, &G Class III
ATEX: EEx d IIB + H2 (T4-T6)
Shipping Weight: Aluminum: 3.6lbs (1.6 kg)
Stainless Steel: 7.4 lbs (3.4 kg)
Mounting: Swivel Bracket Assembly - Optional
Warranty: Three years
Extended Warranty available
56.23.1 Features:
Patented WideBand™ infrared technology & electronic frequency analysis
Visible Light Sensor for optimum false alarm rejection
Selectable detection ranges and a wide 110° cone-of-vision
Dual Microprocessors for fast, reliable performance
FirePic™ pre-fire event data storage and retrieval
Event log with real-time clock providing date and time stamp
RS-485 ModBus communication & isolated 4-20 mA analog output (sink or source)
Alarm, fault and auxiliary relays
Automatic optical path and electronic self-test and test lamps for manual testing
Patented electronics module provides components protection with easy plug-in terminations and
field installation
FM, ATEX, and CE mark certifications
56.23.2 FAULT ISOLATOR MODULE:-

The fault isolator module should be placed between groups of Sensors on the loop wiring to
protect the loop if a short circuit fault occurs. The fault isolator module shall be DIN rail
mounting, surface mounting options, plug in connectors, Tri-Colour LED status indication.
Address selector switches visible in 2 planes, approved to GEA, GEI 1-082 and CEA GEI 1-084.
Addressable Fault Isolation Module shall be all as specified in Sch ‘A’ and in Clause No.
27.5.1.5 of SSR Part-I.
57.0 SPECIFICATIONS ITEM NO 18.00 to 21.00 OF THE BOQ (PEB STRUCTURE, ANNEXE & OTHER
BUILDINGS)
57.1 The pre engineered structure for hangar, annexe and other buildings will be constructed based on
contractor’s design as described in BOQ (Sl No 18.00 to 21.00 of BOQ), specified herein before and herein
after shown on drawings and as directed. The design of these shall be based on relevant IS and same shall
be got vetted from said IIT/NIT/Govt Engineering college by the contractor after acceptance of contract.
The pre engineered structure shall be got designed, manufactured and executed through one of the
following specialist firms:-
A) PEB (Design, manufacture and execution of PEB hangar)

(i) RCC Eco build systems Ltd (iv) M/s BNAL Prefabs Pvt Ltd
14 GF, VipulAgara, MG Road Show Room No. 19, Madhya Marg,
Gurgaon-122002 Sector 7 – C, Chandigarh
Tele -0124 4009411
(ii) M/s Kirby Building Systems (v) Zamil steel building indiapvt ltd
nd
A 4, Savodaya enclave 2 floor Aurobindo Almonte Software Park,Office No. 101, 1st Floor
Marg S. No. 8, Plot no. 2, Kharadi,
New Delhi-110017 Pune – 411014 Maharashtra, INDIA
Tele 011-46006800
(iii) M/s Paramount Building Solutions Pvt Ltd (vi) M/s Pennar Industries Limited
th
H.O 60 26 /1, Old 5 Route , SBI Colony 9 floor (West wing)
Ashok Nagar , Vijayawada -520 010 DHFLVC Silicon Towers’ Kondapur, Hydarabad- 500084
Tele: +9140 40210525/26
Email: pebsales@pennarindia.com
contact@pebspennar.com
Note: The name of approved manufacturer of PEB structure not shown here, but same have been added/
deleted by E-in-C Br are also deemed to be added/ deleted in the approved list.
B) Design only of Annexe Building and all other Buildings (Item Np 18.01, 19.01, 20.00, 21.00 & 22.00 of
BOQ),
(i)M/s Rites Ltd (iii) M/s Mecon Ltd
5th Floor, Industry House, 45, Fair Field Layout, MECON Limited, Vivekananda Path,
Race Course Rd, Bengaluru, 560001 P.O.Doranda, Ranchi, Jharkhand,
Pin 834002
(ii)M/s Engineers India Ltd (iv) M/s MN Dastur
EI Bhavan, 1, BhikaijiCama Place, M. N. Dastur& Company (P) Ltd.
New Delhi – 110 066, India Consulting Engineers
Faraday House
P-17 Mission Row Extension
Kolkata 700 013
(v) And all consultants approved by E-in-C’s Br /CE(CG)Goa
C) Vetting from any IIT/any NIT/any Government Engineering College.
57.1.1 Basic design parameters of structures shall be as under:-

Frame type -Rigid frame-clear span (Pre engineered structure)
Width
Length - As per architectural drawings given.
Eve length
Roof slope -1:10 (Minimum) as shown in drawing.
Bay spacing -As per design
Wind bracing -As per design.
Roof sheeting :- 0.55 mm thick (TCT), (0.50mm BMT) galvalume steel, high tensile, pre
colored, pre profiled sheets in colour as approved by GE with (20+5)
Micron Silicone Modified Polyester paint system applied one side and
(10+5) micron on other side on galvalume (15% area of roof shall be
provided with polycarbonate sky lighting sheet as per clause here-in-after).
Wall cladding - 0.50 mm thick (TCT), (0.45mm BMT) galvalume coated

steel, high tensile, pre colored, pre profiled sheets with silicon
Modified Polyester paint system applied on galvalume.
57.2.3 Designer to ensure that substructure is able to physically accommodate the

required anchor bolts and that the sub-structure is designed for proper transfer of loads
from roof system to the foundation. Purlins, sub-purlins, grifts and cave shall be designed in
accordance with IS standards as applicable. Where IS standards not applicable these shall
be designed in accordance with 1986 edition of AISI standards “Cold Formed steel Design
Manual”.
57.2.4 Roof and wall panels are laid perpendicular to the roof purlin and wall grifts
respectively and fastened to them by means of self-drilling fasteners.
57.2.5 Curved eaves, gutters and down spouts shall be provided as per relevant
standards. Gutters to be made of cold formed channel shape members designed to carry
water from the roof of building to down spouts
57.2.6 Standard building accessories such as ridge, ventilators, windows, personnel doors,
louvers, sliding doors, framed openings, partitions canopies and other special supplemental
attachment shall be combined with flashing and trims of thickness 0.55mm nominal.
57.3 GUIDE LINES FOR Hangar/PEB structure
(a) Cross bracing on columns.

(b) Wall cladding to be provided on both sides as shown on drawings.
(c) Front side to be provided with motorized power and manually operated
vertically opening door upto 9.50mt height with quick disconnecting mode to
facilitate manual opening of door.
(d) Gap between inner liner lining and wall cladding where ever shown to be
flushed.
(e) Roof gutter be provide as shown in drawing
(f) SBC (Safe Bearing Capacity): As specified here-in-before.
(g) Back filling in footings of columns for Main Shop including gable and shall be
carried out as per clause 3.21.4 of SSR Part –I (2009).
(h) Rod bracing is to be provided on the roof trusses and purlins
(j) The structure shall be designed as per the relevant IS codes with wind and
seismic load prevailing at Juhu Mumbai as given in preceeding para. If ISI code
is not available the design should be done/checked as per the relevant American
design codes as specified here-in- after).
58.0 WORKMANSHIP
58.1 The spacing of purlins for fixing the sheets shall be as per design considerations. The ends
lap shall be minimum 150 mm and side lap shall be one corrugation. The sheets shall be laid as the
purlins using drilling self-tapping screw with UV stablised caps matching the colour of the roofing.
Screw shall be provided on each crest at purlin location. The typical accessories gutters, curve
aver, ridge etc and hardware required shall be procured from the manufacturer or from their
authorized dealer of galvalume coloured sheets. On all over lap sides stitch screws shall be
provided at 500 mm center rivets shall be provided as per design specification.
58.2 Trusses/frame shall be supported on steel stanchions made up appropriate steel section.
58.3 The design calculations and working drawings offered by the tenderer shall have to be got
vetted and certified from IIT/NIT/Govt Engineering College by the contractor. Notwithstanding the
design certified by the above institution the contractor shall be fully responsible for the structural
stability of buildings. The design shall be offered by contractor after verification of availability of
various materials of required sizes/quantity/make etc.
58.4 The contractor shall also submit proper test certificate for each steel consignment received
about the structural characteristics of the sections etc conforming to relevant IS/ASTM standard as
applicable.
58.5 Proper water management should be planned by the tenderers for the disposal of rain water
from roof. Adequate slope shall be provided for all the gutters for draining the water towards back
side. No water should get drained towards from front side and the same time no intermediate down
take pipes for any gutters inside the hangar are permissible. The down take pipes shall be of 200
mm square section made out of Zincalume/galvalume sheets. The gutters shall be suitably designed
as per above requirements and to ensure that no overflow of rain water occurs from the gutters due
to inadequacy of the size of the gutter /down take pipes.
58.6 While designing the structure, the contractor shall keep in mind that the structure is likely to
accommodate/house air craft and therefore proper importance factor shall be taken while designing
the structure.
58.7 All steel work shall be as per IS 800. Contractor shall follow normal engineering pratice
ensuring structural soundness and safety of workmen during execution.
58.8 In addition to provision of wall cladding on annexes sides the cladding shall be provided at
both gable ends above electrically operated doors shall be provided of the same specification as
mentioned earlier.
59.0 CERTAIN GUIDE LINES FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

59.1 The gusset plate used shall be of mild steel plate and shall not be less than 8 mm. The
welding shall be continuous fillet type 5 mm thick or superior as per contractor‘s design.
59.1.1 EXPANSION JOINT-(LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL)

(a) Expansion joint shall be provided as per IS standard at locations as shown on drawing to
accommodate thermal expansion.
(b) Expansion joint shall be double rigid frame at expansion joint locations so as to absorb
due to thermal expansion
59.1.2 ROOF EXTENSION AT GATES, SIDE WALL AND AT THE END OF THE BLDG
59.1.2.1 It shall be provided for weather protection to the walls main gate and shall be as shown in
drawing and shall consist of built up members, hot rolled members or cold formed sections that are
cantilevered from the building at the side wall etc. Side wall extension shall be designed to cater for
all loads including uplift etc . Roof extensions shall be provided with soffit at underside of roof
extension framing to have neat flush appearance under roof extension. Roof extensions shall be
designed to accommodate gutters and return down spouts. Pre engineered bldgs shall comprise of
primary rigid frames, secondary structural members (roof, purlins, wall grits, eaves struts ) bracing
systems (diagonal bracing) , post and beam and walls (corner columns, end wall wing columns and
load bearing rafters) and sheeting roof as shown in the drawing.
FABRICATON:- No fabrication will be allowed at site. All members shall be shop fabricated.
59.2 All finished steel shall be well and cleanly rolled to the dimensions, sections and weights as
designed by contractor and as specified in MES Schedule.
59.3 Before execution of the work the structural steel brought to the site shall be stored in such a
way that there is always a gap of at least 15 cms above the ground level. In case of long storage
suitable protective measures shall be taken to prevent scaling and rusting.
59.4 The structural steel work to be welded or bolted shall be carried out as described in IS-800
code /ASTM of practice for use of structural steel work in general building construction.
59.5 All sections shall be straight and if necessary, before being worked shall be straightened
and flattened by pressure unless required to be curvilinear and shall be free from twists.
Strengthening of section by hammed blows is not permitted. All bending and cuttings shall be
carried out in cold conditions.
Purlins shall be bolted to top flanges of rafters and to each other purlin laps by means of machine
bolts confirming to Gr-4.6 IS 1367 Gr Zinc Plated.
59.6 Member shall be cut mechanically by saw or shear or by oxyacetalene flame. All sharp or
broken edges and all edges of joints which are subjected to tensile or oscillating stresses shall be
grounded . No electric metal arc cutting is permitted.
59.7 Prior to assembly, cutting , tolerance shall be as per MES Schedule and as per IS or as per
manufacturer’s instructions.
59.8 All holes shall be accurately marked and drilled. Holes through more than thickness shall be
preferably drilled together , after the members are assembled and tightly clamped tolerance + 5 mm
per member.
59.9 The component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that they are neither twisted nor
otherwise damaged and shall be prepared all as shown on drawing supplied by the tenderer.
Assembly shall be done by assembly fixtures, jigs and stands which facilitate high quality assembly
with proper safety. Misalignment and distortion of parts after assembly shall not be allowed. Only
thoroughly straightened parts free from burrs, IIgreose, rust etc shall be allowed for assembly.
59.10 In case of the structural member is not available to the full length as shown in drawing the
contractor will be allowed to provide a lengthing joint so as to provide the member of required
length. However, the joints design and details shall be as decided by the Accepting Officer. Nothing
extra shall be admissible on this account.
60. WELDING
60.1 Welding shall be metal arc welding conforming to IS-814 and the electrodes shall conform to
IS-816 as shown on drawings. Contractor has to submit the test certificate for welding to this effect
that welding conforms to IS has been done.
60.2 Before welding process is commenced the assembly of structural members to be welded
shall be made with proper jigs and fixtures to ensure correct positioning of members. Sharp edges ,
rust of cut edges, hotchels, irregularities and fissure due to fault cutting shall be chipped or ground of
field over the lengths of the affected area deep enough to remove faults completely. Edge
preparation of welding shall be carefully and accurately made so as to facilitate a good joint, the
edges to be welded as well as adjacent area extending members proper care shall be taken of
welding shrinkage and distortion as the drawing dimension cover finished of the structure. The
elements shall be got checked and approved by the GE before assembling/ welding. After the
assembly has been checked temporary tack welding in position shall be done by electric welding
keeping in view finished dimensions of the structure. The process of welding shall however be as
specified in MES Schedule and as directed by GE.
60.3 TESTING
60.3 .1 MATERIAL TESTING
(i) If material test reports are not available for any steel materials, the same shall be got
tested by the contractor to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge to demonstrate conformity
with the relevant IS specification.
(ii) The contractor shall provide all facilities for performing all the test required on the job
and at times shall arrange for facilities of an outside agencies or testing establishment as
and when required and as directed by the GE .The lumpsum quoted shall be deemed to
include this aspect.
(iii) The final stage of inspection and testing of welding shall include the following:-
a) Visual inspection – 100%.
b) Inspection of welded dimensions – 100%.
c) Mechanical testing
d) Destructive testing
60.3.2 TESTS OF WELDS
60.3.2 .1 MAGNETIC PARTICLE TEST: Only where the engineer-in-charge requires that
flawdetection
of welds to be done by ‘magnetic particle test’, in such cases the tests are to be done in
accordance with is: 3703, if heat treatment is performed, the completed weld shall be
examined after the heat treatment. all defects shall be repaired and retested. Magnetic
particle tests shall be carried out using alternating current. Direct current may be used with
the explicit written permission of the engineer-in-charge.
60.3.2.2 DYE PENETRATION TEST : Where welds are required to be examined by dye
penetration inspection method, such tests shall be carried out in accordance with is:3658.
60.3.2.3 RADIO GRAPHIC INSPECTION: Whether instructed by engineer-in-charges, or

not, all ‘butt’ welds shall be inspected by radiographic examination method. Such
examination shall be done in accordance with the recommendations of is: 1182.
60.3.3 TEST FAILURE
60.3.3.1 At any stage, in the event of any material or work failing to meet an inspection of
test requirement, which is not overseen by the engineer-in-charge, the contractor shall
notify the engineer-in charge immediately. the contractor must obtain permission from
engineer-in-charge before repair is undertaken. the quality control procedures to be
followed to ensure satisfactory repair shall be subject to approval by the engineer-incharge.
the contractor shall maintain records of all inspection and testing which shall be made
available to the engineer-in-charge on demand.
60.3.3.2 The following not testing frequency for fabrication of columns/ stanchions, rafters,
girders and crane beams shall be as under:
(a) Dye penetration testing - 10% of total Nos for fillet welds
(b) Ultrasonic testing - 10% of total Nos for butt welds
(c) Radiography testing - 10% of total Nos for butt welds
60.3.3.3 The exact location of testing shall be indicated in the printed test results, duly
signed
by the Contractor, Engineer-in-Charge and GE. The test result shall be kept on record.
61.0 MS BLACK BOLTS , NUTS AND WASHERS (ASTM A 325 M FOR BOLTS ,
ASTM A563M FOR NUTS)
61.1 All MS black bolts and nut to be incorporated in the subject work shall confirm to IS-
1353- Parts 1 to 3 61 1984 and round washers shall confirm top IS-5370, IS-53472 or IS
5374. Whenever specifications are not available the Amercian standards specification to be
followed.
61.2 Bolts, heads and nuts shall be of such length as to project and clear thread beyond
the nuts when fixed in position and these shall fit in the holes without any shake. The nuts
shall fit in the threaded ends of bolts properly.
61.3 Round washers shall be placed under the heads and nuts of permanent bolts.
Maximum two washers for one nut and one for each bolt head to be used. Bolt threads
shall be outside the limits of joining members and unthreaded portion of bolt shall not be
outside the washer.
61.4 Bolts, nuts and washers shall be thoroughly cleaned and dipped in double boiled
linseed oil before use. The bolts shall be tightened starting from the centre of the joint
towards the edge.
61.5 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
Joints and connections are critical to the stability of the structure. Test certificates of all
bolts, welds, foundation bolts, turnbuckles, links, anchor bolts, steel cables etc should be
made available by the vendor and the same should be strictly inspected by the site
executives before permitting their use.
62.0 ROOF
62.1 MATERIAL
62.1.1 PRE-PAINTED GALVALUME STEEL SHEET
62.1.2 Refer Clause No. 10.39 &11.3 of MES Schedule Part-I and IS 15961-2012 &
15965-2012.
62.1.2 Wherever shown/mention on drawing or in particular specification, pre-painted
galvalume /Zincalume /pre-engineering galvalume Sheet roofing shall be 0.55 mm thick
(TCT), (0.50mm BMT) corrugated pre-engineering galvalume Sheet (pre-painted
Aluminium zinc alloy metallic coating steel sheet). If not shown /mentioned in the drawings
roof covering shall be 0.55 mm thick (TCT), (0.50mm BMT) corrugated pre-painted
galvalume steel sheet as specified here in after.
62.2 PRE-PAINTED GALVALUME STEEL SHEETS: The galvalume steel sheet shall be
0.55 mm thick (TCT), (0.50mm BMT) and shall have 550 Mpa minimum yield strength.
The base metal steel plate shall be coated with minimum 150 GSM (On each sides)
coating of hot dip alloy consisting of 55 % Aluminium, 43.5% Zinc and 1.5% Silicon
confirming to IS 15965-2012.The profile of the sheet shall be trapezoidal as defined in SSR
Part 1, Clause No.10.39 or similar profile as commercially available and approved. The end
laps shall be provided as per manufacturer’s guidelines to eliminate any possibility of
Leakage of roof. Penetrations and laps in sheet shall be sealed as per manufacturer’s
instructions and Literature. HDPE fillers shall be provided wherever required to close voids
between sheets, sheet & fasteners etc. The color of the sheets shall be as approved by
GE.
62.2.1 Roof Sheeting:-

a) 0.55 mm thick (TCT), (0.50mm BMT) -550Mpa is working with below mentioned
Purlin spacing. End Zone - 900 mm, Interior Zone - 1400 mm
b) APPLICATION :Roofing
c) BASE METAL THICKNESS (BMT) : 0.50 mm BMT or more
d) SPECIFICATION : 550 MPa (G550)
e) PROFILE TYPE : Trapezoidal
62.3 Supply of colour coated profile sheet of nominal 1015 mm Effective width and nominal 28
mm deep ribs with subtle square fluting in the five pan at nominal 203 mm centre-to centre. The end
rib shall be designed for anti-capillary action, to avoid any seepage of water through the lateral
overlap. The feed material shall be of 0.55 mm Total Coated Thickness (0.50 mm BMT or more)
High tensile with min 550 MPa yield strength, metallic hot-dipped coated with Al-Zn alloy (55%
Aluminium, 43.5% Zinc, 1.5% Si ) as per AS1397 / IS15961 - ZINCALUME® AZ200(min. 150 GSM
total on each sides) with Silicone modified polyester paint system of approved color, suitable for
exterior application conforming to AS/NZS 2728 type-4 / IS15965 class 3. The sheet shall have a
total coating thickness of 35 microns, super durable polyester solar reflectance technology quality
paint system of 20 microns on exposed surface and 5 micron reverse polyester coat on back surface
over 5 micron primer coat on both surfaces. The paint system would have stable resin & inorganic
pigments for paint durability and is lead free for water harvesting. Manufacturer of raw material &
profile sheet should be one/same. The steel sheet shall have brand marking of manufacturer and
0.55 mm TCT on backside at regular interval confirming genuineness of the material
a) The specification remains same as per clause 62.2.1 to 62.3 hereinbefore for wall cladding
application, except the wall cladding could be crest fixed or valley fixed.
b) The contractor shall prepare the shop drawings based on the drawings supplied by the
Engineer-in-charge or the concern authority. These shall be submitted in five sets sufficiently in
advance to the concern authority for approval.
c) The contractor will be required to submit design calculation in support of the proposed profile of
the sheet and standard loading etc. to the satisfaction of the design consultant and the concern
authority.
d) The contractor shall also submit methodology for fixing and also a maintenance manual for
routine maintenance.
e) The contractor shall ensure that panel erector is familiarized with the erection procedure and all
the supporting members are straight, level and true (according to AISC) before starting panel
erection.
Panels shall be erected according to approved shop drawings by the concern authorities.
f) Cladding sheeting
(i) 0.50mm TCT – 550 mpa working with below mentioned Purlin spacing. End Zone - 900
mm, Interior Zone - 1400 mm.
(ii) Application: Cladding
(iii) Base metal thickness: 0.45mm BMT or more
(iv) Specification: 550 Mpa (G550)
(v) Profile type : Trapezoidal.
62.4 RAW MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Base Steel: The steel base material of sheet shall manufactured from 0.50 mm (nominal) Base
metal thickness with minimum 550 MPa Yield Strength. The steel manufacturer’s test certificate for
the chemical and mechanical properties of steel must be concerned authority prior to installation.
Metallic Coating: The sheets shall have a hot dip metallic Aluminium-Zinc alloy coating
(55%Aluminium, 43.5% Zinc, 1.5% Si ) as per AS1397 / IS15961 with total mass coating of min 150
gms/sq.mt on each sides as ZINCALUME® AZ200 as per as per AS1397 / IS15961.
Colour Coating: Silicon modified Polyester paint system of approved color, suitable for exterior
application conforming to AS/NZS 2728 type-4 / IS15965 class 3. The sheet shall have a total
coating thickness of 35 microns, Silicone modified polyester solar reflectance technology quality
paint system of 20 microns on exposed surface and 5 micron reverse polyester coat on back surface
over 5 micron primer coat on each surfaces. The paint system would have stable resin & inorganic
pigments for paint durability and is lead free for water harvesting.
62.5 PROFILE
Profile sheet shall have 1015 mm effective cover width, nominal 28 mm deep ribswith
subtle square fluting in the five pans at nominal 203 mm centre to centre. The end rib shall
be designed for anti-capillary action, to avoid any seepage of water through the lateral
overlap.
62.6 TRIMS & GUTTERS

Wall flashing and trims (gable, corner, framed opening, accessories, etc.) are
manufactured from same color, finish and thickness as wall panels (or manufacturer’s
recommendation).
Roof flashing and trims (parapet flashing, transition trims, expansion joint trims and ridge
caps) are manufactured from same color, finish and thickness as roof panels (or
manufacturer’s
recommendation).
Eave gutters and downspouts are manufactured from same color, finish and thickness as
wall panels (or manufacturer’s recommendation).
Louvers shall be manufactured from ZINCALUME® steel or COLORBOND® steel of same
thickness of roof and wall panel. (Note: The shape and girths shall be as per design
requirement and shall be approved by the concern authority.)
62.7 ACCESSORIES:
Fasteners: The steel sheet shall be fastened with min. 20 μm Zinc-Tin alloy coated, Hex
head, self-drilling screw as per AS 3566 Class 3 fasteners with EPDM washer oneach crest
of sheets for connecting with purlin (or as per design) perpendicular to the sheetingand in
the centre of the corrugation or rib. The fastener size shall be calculated as per the design
requirement.
In-fill strips: The infill strips are manufactured from closed cell polyethylene foam. This
materialshould have uniform compressibility, waterproof, weather resistance, UV
resistance, chemicalresistance, nontoxic, odorless and environment friendly to meet
installation requirement inaccordance with AS 2424-4 3 A & B or equivalent and approved
by engineer-in-charge.
Sealant: It should be acid free neutral curing silicone rubber sealant of approved make. It
shall beapplied at all end laps as per manufacturer's recommendation and approval by
engineer-incharge.
62.8 INSTALLATION -- ERECTION AND FIXING

The installation shall be done in accordance to the standard practices as specified by the
manufacturer and as approved by the concern authority. All sheets and accessories must
be storedand finally erected without any damage.
Fastening sheet to support: The sheet installation has to be done by using AS3566 class
3 fastenerswith EPDM washer. In case of roof, it shall be placed at each crest of sheets
connecting with Purlin(or as per design) perpendicular to the sheeting and in the centre of
the corrugation or rib. For walling,you may use either crest- or valley-fixing the fastener size
shall be calculated as per the design requirement. Do not place fasteners less than 25 mm
from ends of sheets
End Lap: All the sheet end lap (roof) shall have an overlap of 300 mm The silicon sealant
shall be applied at both the ends of the sheet at the overlap with stitch fasteners as per
manufacturer’s recommendations and conforming to AS 3566-2002 Class 3.
Side lap: The edge of sheet with the anti-capillary groove is always the underlap.
It is generally considered good practice to use fasteners alongside-laps however, when
cladding is supported as
Ends of Sheets: It is usual to allow roof sheets to overlap into gutters by about 50mm. If the
roof pitch is less than 25° or extreme weather is expected, the valleys of sheets should be
turned down at lower ends, and turned up at upper ends by about 80°
Lay sheets toward prevailing weather: It is much easier and safer to turn sheets on the
ground than up on the roof. Before lifting sheets onto the roof, check that they are the correct
way up and the overlapping side is towards the edge of the roof from which installation will
start. Place bundles of sheets over or near firm supports, not at mid span of roof members.
To align the first sheet uses a level on the gutter-end.
Sheet ends on low slopes: Profile sheet cut back the corner of the under-sheet, at the
downhill end of the sheet, to block capillary action.
62.9 POLYCARBONATE SKY LIGHTING , FIXING

62.9.1 The material shall be profiled Polycarbonate sky lighting sheet (2 mm thick) having
minimum light emission capacity 60% and shall be provided to the extent of 15% of roof
area. Polycarbonate sheet be provided to match the thickness of roof cladding.
62.10 FIXING OF ROOF SHEETS

62.10.1 Roofing sheet shall be factory cut and supplied in required length (length is
6 m to 12 m) to suit shop drawings. Roofing sheets shall be crest fixed to purlins with hot
dip galvanished self drilling fasteners with EPDM washers (one fastener on each crest).
Also fasteners to be provided on side laps. Minimum sheet overlap at ends shall be one
corrugation. Penetrations and laps in sheet shall be sealed by using proper sealant.
Profiled HDPE fillers shall be provided wherever required to close voids between cappings
and toughs of the sheet to provide a weather tight exterior.
62.11 WALL CLADDING

62.11.1 Wall cladding sheets shall be of 0.50 mm(TCT) Galvalume/Zincalume and
shall be factory cut and supplied in required length . Cladding sheets shall be fixed through
valleys (pans) to grits with hot dip galvanished imported self drilling fasteners (one fastener
in each valley). Also fasteners shall be provided on side laps at 500 mm centres
maximum. All sheets fully rest end to end laps at 500 mm centres maximum. All sheets
fully rest end to end laps if more than one length of sheet is used on a wall section.
Minimum sheet overlap at end laps shall be 150mm.
62.12 WIND TIES

62.12.1 Wind ties at both eaves end of Main shop roof shall be of flat iron 40mm x 3
mm thick treated with red oxide primer and matching colour paint or any other superior
specifications available, fixed as specified in PS clause here-in-before.
62.13 DIAGONAL CHORD BRACINGS

62.13.1 Diagonal bracings in between stanchion shall be solid smooth rods and to
be provided in columns in such a way that none of opening are affected.
62.14 Primary rigid frames including built ‘I’ shaped steel structural members, secondary
structural members including cold formed ‘Z’ shaped members (roof, purlins, wall grits ,
eves struts) bracing system (diagonal bracings), post and beam and walls (corner, columns
end wall wind coloums and load bearing rafters ) and sheeting roof (roof and wall panels)
as shown in the drg. Curved eves, gutters and down spouts shall be provided as per
relevant standards. Gutters to be made of cold formed channel shape members designed
to take any water from the roof bldg to drawn spouts. Standard bldg accessories such are
ridge, ventilators, windows , personnel doors louvers, sliding doors, framed openings
partitions, canopies and other special supplemented attachment shall be confirmed with
flashing and trims of thickness 0.55 nominal.
63.0 Pre-engineered building: All beams shall rest on columns.
63.1 STRUCTURAL FRAMINGS:-
(a) GENERAL:- All framing members shall be cleaned by power or hand wire brushing
to remove all dirt, oil , loose, millscal, wild slag, flux deposited , other foreign matter and
given one shop coat of red oxide , air drying , phenol modified alloyed resin primer.
(b) PRIMARY MEMBERS : Members fabricated from plate or bar stock shall have
flanges and webs joined on double sided by continuous submerged arc welding (SAW)
process. The plate or bar stock shall have minimum yield strength of 345 MN/Sqm. And
will confirm to physical specifications of either of 345 Mpa, ASTM A572 M (Grade 50) or
equivalent.
(c) Members fabricated from hot rolled structural framing shall have minimum yield
strength of 250 Mpa and conform to the physical specifications of ASTM-36M or Grade
36 or equivalent
(d) SECONDARY MEMBER : Secondary structural framing shall refer to purlins,

girts , cave struts , wind , bracing , flange bracing, base angles , clips and other
miscellaneous structural parts.
(e) Purlins, girts and cave struts etc shall be cold-formed from steel coils conforming to
ASTM A 653M Grade 65 or equivalent, with zinc coating to Z275 designation (275 g/m2
) on both surfaces & having a minimum yield strength of 450MPa.
(f) Rod bracing shall have a minimum yield of 240 Mpa and will conform to the physical
specifications of ASTM A36M or equivalent.
(g) All field connections shall be bottled (unless otherwise noted)
(h) All primary bolted connections, as shown on drawings shall be fixed with high
strength bolts conforming to the physical specifications of ASTM A325 M (or equivalent
). All high strength bolts, nuts and washer shall be zinc plated with a bronze iridite finish
for easy identification.
(j) All secondary bolted connections, as shown on drawing shall be fixed with machine
bolts confirming to the physical specifications of Gr-4.6 IS 1367 Gr Zinc Plated machine
bolts , nuts and washers will be zinc plated.
(k) Whatever specified anywhere in the tender/drawing/sch of finishes, all primary

structural members of PEB Structure(columns and rafters) shall be cleaned by short
blasting and finished with one coat of epoxy primer and finish two coat of epoxy paint
and all secondary member shall be GI coated with 275GSM .
(l) All shop connections shall be welded using either submerged (or ) shielded arc
process and welding shall be accordance with applicable sections , relating to design
requirement and allowable stresses, of the editions of the American welding society
structural welding code”
(m) Structural steel members of hanger door shall be treated with two coats of
synthetic enamel paint over a coat of zinc chromate primer.
64.0 PQC FLOORING FOR HANGER

64.1 Flooring for hanger building shall be 200mm thick PQC with minimum flexural strength of 45
Kg/Cm2 including formwork in field using non circular synthetic fibre as per manufacturer instruction by
weight of cement with min. cement content 400 Kg/Cum incl finishing concrete roads, pavements by belting,
and by brooming, forming 25mm wide expansion joint with 30mm thick polyethylene back up rod top filled
with polyurethane based sealant, dummy joint 8mm width and 10mm dia polyethylene backup rod top filled
with polyurethane based sealant, construction joint 8mm wide with 10mm dia polyethylene backup rod top
filled with polyurethane based sealant, all as specified and laid over 400 micron HDPE film over 10mm sand
layer over 125mm thick DLC with 7 days compressive strength 10MPa over 150mm WMM in two layers of
75mm each over 200mm thick GSB (Grade-V) in single layer over compacted subgrade. Detailed
specification other than above specified shall be followed as mentioned in PS clause no. 21.28 here-in-
before.
64.2 INSTALLATION OF ROOF AND WALL:-
(a) Roof shall be continuous from ridge to eave for bldgs. End laps shall be provided as
required.
(b) Side wall shall be continuous from eave downwards.
(c) All laps of roof shall be sealed with a continuous ribbon of tape sealer.
(d) Roof shall be sealed to intermediate framing members as per design requirement.
64.3 FLASHING TRIM & CLOSURES:-
(a) Flashing and /or trim shall be in required width and shall be made out of 0.55 mm thick.
Galvalume/ Zincalume sheet and furnished at the rake, corner eaves formed opening and
wherever necessary to provide weather tightness and finished appearance.
(b) Colour coated, sheet for flashing , metal closure, trim and other miscellaneous uses shall be
0.55 mm of the same specifications as the roof and walls covering material.
(c) A formed peak panel matching the slope and profile of adjoining panels shall be provided
alongwith the building ridge.
(d) Solid or closed cell, pre formed E.T.P (Ethylene poly propylene Rerpolymer) closures
matching the profile of the panel shall be installed alongwith the eave, rake and other
locations.
64.4 TURBO VENTILATORS

Turbo ventilator shall be all as specified in BOQ and fixed as per manufacturers instruction. Turbo ventilator
shall install such a way that overall height shall not be exceeded the ridge height.
65.0 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED VERTICALLY LIFTING DOOR

Vertically Lifting Fabric Door/ Hoist Up Door system, electrically operated to suit a clear opening. Doors to be
vetted and designed by IIT/ NIT/ Govt. Engineering college only
(Hangar -1) (Hangar-2)
Clear Width of each leaf 16280mm or as per design 15280mm or as per design
Clear Height 9500mm 9500mm
Leaf Quantity 2 Nos. 2 Nos
Door configuration 2 Leaves with 1 2 Leaves with 1

Movable Mullion Movable Mullion
Overall door size Clear Width 31700 x Clear Width 31000x

Clear Height 9500mm Clear Height 9500mm
Total No. of door 1 No. 1 No.

65.1 The standard door fabric shall be Translucent White Similar to RAL 9003. Standard Fabric
Colours Available
Translucent White Similar to RAL 9003 Grey Similar to RAL 7035
Blue Similar to RAL 5010 Red Similar to RAL 3002
Yellow Similar to RAL 102165.1 Orange Similar to RAL 2004
65.2 DOOR LEAF:
65.2.1 The Vertically Lifting Fabric Door / Hoist Up Door will be constructed in compliance with the
product standard and performance characteristic requirements of EN 13241-1
65.2.2 Each leaf will consist of two layers of fabric, folded on each side of the supporting
intermediate beams. The fabric sections will be fastened to horizontal aluminium support beams
with aluminum fastening strips. The intermediate beams will be constructed of aluminium with
optimum width and thickness depending on the wind load requirement.
- The fabric is made of one piece heavy duty vinyl coated reinforced polyester
- Total weight approximately 900g/m2
- Flame retardancy SIS 650082, BS 5438, M2, DIN 4102
- The fabric shall be attached to both sides of the intermediate beams, top beam and bottom
beam with self tapping screws through corrosion resistant aluminium batten strips.
- Special characteristics: Lacquered (water-dilutable), material is UV, mildew and rot- resistant
- Base Fabric type 1100 dtex polyester
65.3 DOOR BEAMS :
65.3.1 The intermediate beams shall be corrosion resistance extruded aluminum tempered after
the extrusion process to ensure required strength and have a length to depth ratio not to exceed
100:1 to meet the required wind load.
65.3.2 Intermediate beams over 16m long shall have a box type web to ensure torsional strength.
They shall be spaced 1 to 2 metres apart, dependent upon the wind load.
65.3.3 At each end of the beams there shall be a guide block of self-lubricating nylon material, or
rollers that run along the guides. The depth of the intermediate beams shall be 200mm.
65.4 SIDE GUIDES :
65.4.1 The vertical guides shall be an integral part of the door, made of extruded aluminium with a
suitable depth and width dependent on the size of the intermediate beams.
65.4.2 The guide shall be designed to provide weather sealing on the inside and the outside faces.
The guide shall be designed to provide sufficient strength to transfer the wind load and safety
arrestor forces from the door beams, at maximum wind load, to the jamb steel support system. The
guide shall be easily replaceable in case of damage.
65.4.3 The installer shall furnish jamb structural steel fasteners of size and type required for
attachment of guide rails as shown on the approved shop drawings.
65.5 SWING - UP MULLIONS :

65.5.1 The swing-up mullion, shall be designed to swing up under the door leaf in the raised
position. They shall be constructed of steel and coated with paint primer. The mullion hinge pivot
shall be of a maintenance free bearing design and shall be designed with a leaf spring suspension
system to allow for building deflections, both up and down, while allowing for proper alignment with
the floor guide plate.
65.5.2 A mullion guide plate shall be provided for each mullion, welded to the mullion pit frame and
provided with corrosion resistant aluminium cover plates. The mullion pit frame is to be provided
under the Misc. steel section.
65.5.3 The electrical control panel shall provide an interlock function to co-ordinate door leaf and
mullion operation to prevent equipment damage. Mullion push buttons for both up and down
operation shall be of the constant pressure type. Each mullion will be equipped with a safety
arrestor and standard fixed locking pin.
65.6 BELT SYSTEM :

65.6.1 A maximum of one belt per door, running inside the door guides, will be used to transmit
motive force to the door unit. The belt system will be connected to the bottom beam to facilitate the
vertical movement of the door leaf.
65.7 LOAD ARRESTER/ SAFETY ARRESTER :

65.7.1 The load arrester is a safety device which activates at the end of every opening and closing
operation of the door. It also prevents the door from falling accidentally in the unlikely even of belt
rupture. Each safety arrestor type shall be tested to the standards established by TUV-control for
the required door leaf weight and hold a valid certificate.
65.8 SLACK CABLE BREAKER :

65.8.1 A Safety device shall be used on all door leaf belts which will sense a slack belt condition
and cut power to the appropriate drive unit to prevent an unsafe condition.
65.9 BOTTOM BEAM :

65.9.1 The bottom beam shall be designed with a suitable width and depth to carry the load of the
intermediate beams when the door is open, and to ensure full closing and a tight floor seal in
heavy winds. A heavy U-shaped bottom rubber seal shall be provided to form a tight seal with the
floor, even on uneven surfaces
65.10 WIND LOCK :

65.10.1 Each door leaf shall be provided with two wind locks which activate and lock the bottom
beam when the door reaches its closed position. This locking action shall act to maintain a tight
floor seal and intermediate stability even under conditions of heavy wind.
65.11 DOOR OPERATION :
65.11.1 The Vertically Lifting Fabric Door / Hoist Up Door shall glide up and down in the weather
sealing vertical guide attached to the structure. The door shall operate by lifting the bottom beam
upwards, thereby stacking the intermediate beams one on top of the other, with the fabric panel folding
in pleats.
65.11.2 The fabric panel shall go over the top beam, covering both sides of the door, and shall be
attached to the intermediate beams by screws and batten strips.
65.11.3 When the door is fully closed, the intermediate beams shall hang between the two fabric door
panels, thus pulling the fabric tight. The tension created in the fabric panels shall stabilise the
intermediate beam.
65.11.4 The safety arrestors shall be attached to each end of the bottom beam and shall travel in the
vertical guide tracks. The safety arrestors shall immediately stop the downward movement of the door
in case of belt / cable failure.
66.0 ELECTRICAL OPERATION :

66.1 Control panels, motors and electrical wiring are CE certified according to the European Machinery
Directive 2006/42/CE and type tested according to standard European Norm 13241-1
66.2 When the door is completely opened, it shall stop on the primary top limit switch. In case of over
travel, a secondary limit switch shall cut off the drive unit's motor current to prevent damage. The
uppermost intermediate beam shall activate these two limit switches. The drive unit shall be stopped by
the slack belt / cable breakers when the door is closed. The slack breakers shall also stop the door in
case of belt / cable rupture of if an obstruction should prevent the door from being closed. Weight or
springs shall activate the slack breakers.
66.3 The standard door will be operated by three station push buttons (open-stop-close). A set of three
station push button will be provided for each door leaf & mullion. The door will be operated by deadman
control for open & close operations. Removing the pressure from the close button shall stop the motor
drive and set the brake. The push buttons will be installed on the lid of the control unit. Removing the
pressure from the close button shall stop the motor drive and set the brake.
66.4 PROTECTION FEATURES :

67.4.1 Fuses shall be utilized to protect the system from power line over current and from secondary
control voltage over current. Additionally, a system shall be provided to detect over current to the motor.
66.5 MAINTENANCE :
In case there is no gangway provided by others then a man-lift or cherry-picker may be used to inspect
the motors.
66.6 INSTALLATION :
In case there is no gangway a man-lift or cherry-picker may be used to inspect the motors.
66.7 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS :
*Below parameters are subjected to door design & configuration.
Opening/closing speed : 0.15m/s to 0.25m/s
Water Permeability : Class 3, EN 12425
Wind Permeability : Class 3, EN 12426
U value : 0.6 W/m²K
66.8 Contractor/ OEM of the door to provide hoisting up/down of door manually in case of electricity
failure.
66.9 Contractor to give warranty on Rs. 100 Non judicial stamp paper for satisfactory operation of doors
for 10 years after defect liability period. During this period contractor through OEM shall carry out
required check-up of doors for its operations and carry out maintenance and replacement of defective
parts without any additional cost. Contractor shall give a security deposit of 2% of the Contract value.
This shall be valid for 10 years of warranty period. In case of default by contractor in maintenance of
door during this period, GE shall encash the security deposit on continued default of contractor in
maintenance of doors by giving a notice of 15 days.
67.00 ----- Blank ------
68. ROAD / PATH / CULVERT (SCHEDULE-‘A’ PART-V)

68.1 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK
68.1.1 Excavation and earthwork shall be carried out all as described in clause 20-A.15 of MES
SSR Part I.
68.1.2 Before commencement of excavation or earth filling, the representative of the GE and the
contractor shall take the levels jointly, of the existing ground surfaces at intervals as
decided by the GE (the decision of the GE will be final and binding) and cross sections to
be prepared by the Engineer-in-Charge. These cross sections shall also show the
proposed formation levels after consolidation and shall be signed by the GE and contractor
in token of their acceptance and sent to CE office for record within 2 months from the date
of commencement.
68.1.3 For the purpose of filling/cutting, the entire area where filling/cutting activity is to be done
shall be divided into grids of suitable sizes and quantities shall be computed by using
Simpson’s rule for areas and prizmoidal formula for computing volumes.
68.2 WATER BOUND MACADAM:
Stone aggregate, screenings and binding materials for water bound macadam shall be as
specified in clause 20-A.3 of MES Schedule and conform to the samples kept in GE’s office
and approved by the GE before incorporation in the work. Screening shall be of Grade ‘A’ as
specified in clause 20-A.3.2 of MES schedule. Water bound macadam shall be of thickness
given in Sch À’ of broken stone aggregate consolidated in one layer. Spreading, rolling
applying screening and watering shall be as specified in clause 20-A. 21.1 to 20-A. 21.13 of
MES Schedule. The rolling shall be done with power roller.
68.3 BITUMEN :
Bitumen for binder, priming coat / tack coat ,seal coat, carpet, macadam and asphaltic
concrete shall be paving bitumen conforming to IS-73-1961. The bitumen shall be IS grade
VG-30. The bitumen may be brought at site either in sealed containers or in bulk in bouncers
at the contractor’s desecration and no price adjustment shall be made on this account.
Contractor shall produce paid voucher for the total quantity consumed in the work and shall
be entered in the MB (NOT TO BE ABSTRACTED). The contractor shall procure the bitumen
from manufacturers listed below and produce original paid vouchers for the total quantity of
bitumen supplied under each consignment and to be incorporated in the work. The original
vouchers shall be kept on record of the GE duly defaced by Engineer-in-Charge. Quantity of
bitumen brought at site shall be entered in the MB with reference to vouchers as ‘Not to be
abstracted’. Bitumen supplied shall be in packed containers. While calculating the quantity of
bitumen used in the work weight of container shall not be taken into account.
(i) Indian Oil Corporation.

(ii) Bharat Petroleum Corporation Ltd
(iii) Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd
68.4 STONE CHIPPINGS :
Stone chippings for premix bituminous carpet shall be as per Clause No 20-A.5.1 of MES
Schedule Part-I course aggregate for bituminous carpet shall be all as specified in clause
No 20-A.5.1 of MES schedule Part-I. NOTE mentioned in SSR clause 20-A, 5.1 shall not
be applicable to this work.
68.5 QUANTITY OF MATERIAL REQUIRED FOR TACK COAT AND CARPET :
Quantity of stone chipping and binder required for 10 Sqm of road surface for tack coat and
carpet shall be as given in Clause No. 20-A.27.9 of MES Schedule Part-I.
68.6 COLLECTION AND STACKING OF MATERIALS :
68.6.1 The materials shall be stacked on the side of the road and clear of the road. Stacks shall be
uniformally distributed along road. The collection of materials shall be completed for the
entire work or for a complete stretch as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Aggregates shall
not be stacked unless they have been screened by gauge and free from all the deleterious
matter such as earth, rubbish etc. or any such rejected materials. The rejected materials
shall be removed immediately from the site of work. Measurements shall not be taken until
sufficient materials have been collected and all rejected material has been removed.
68.6.2 The contractor shall ensure that his transport vehicles do not drop any aggregate, moorum,
sand etc on the road and shall keep screens or sieves of proper sizes at the site of stacks
to enable the Engineer-in-Charge to carryout checks regarding sizes of the materials
brought are as desired.
68.6.3 The contractor’s representative and Engineer-in-Charge shall jointly record measurements
of the stack in the ‘MEASUREMENT BOOK’ (NOT TO BE ABSTRACTED) and check the
quantities brought for the work.
68.6.4 The details like truck/dumper No, size of dumper, date, time etc in respect of bituminous
macadam brought from the plant shall also be recorded in the ‘MEASUREMENT BOOK’
(NOT TO BE ABSTRACTED) and check the quantities brought for the work.
68.7 WORKMANSHIP OF PREMIX BITUMENOUS CARPET :

Premix bituminous carpet work shall be carried out all as per IS and spreading of premix
bituminous carpet shall be carried out using mechanical paver and rolled with 8 to 10 tonne
power roller to required gradient and camber. The unit rate shall be deemed to include
filling in of depressions in the existing road surface. Premix carpet shall be prepared all as
specified in clause No 20.A.27 of MES schedule Part-I.
68.8 PREMIXED GRIT SEAL COAT :
Premixed grit seal coat work shall be carried out all as specified in clause No. 20-A.28 of
MES Schedule Part-I. The rolling shall be done by 8 to 10 tonne power roller.
68.9 ROLLING FORMATION SURFACES
68.9.1 The formation surfaces shall be rolled to the required gradient and camber with power roller
including sprinkling the surfaces with water as required.
68.9.2 Where rolling is not feasible, prior permission of the GE shall be obtained in writing for
hand ramming. The laying of the coarse aggregate shall commence only after the earth
formation is approved by the GE.
68.9.3 The compaction of approved filled earth/moorum shall be carried out as specified in clause
3.22 of MES SSR Part I. The compaction of earth filling in embankment shall be carried out
under optimum moisture condition so as to obtain at least 95% of standard proctor density
for each layer.
68.10 ROLLING-
After spreading of the mix, rolling shall be done by 8 to 10 tonne power roller. Rolling As
soon as sufficient length has been spread with the premix, the surface shall be rolled with 8
to 10 tonnes smooth wheeled power rollers or pneumatic tyre rollers. Rolling shall
commence at the edge and progress towards the center longitudinally, except in the case
of super-elevated curves, where rolling shall progress from the inside towards the outside
of the curve. When the roller has passed once over the whole area any high spots or
depressions which become apparent, shall be corrected by removing or adding premixed
chippings. When this has been done, the surface shall be rolled to compaction and all roller
marks eliminated. Excessive rolling shall be avoided as this serves no useful purpose and
may spoil the carpet. In each pass of the roller and preceding track shall be overlapped
uniformly by atleast 1/3 width.The roller wheels shall be kept damp to prevent the premix
from adhering to wheel and being picked up. Fuel and lubricating oils shall not be used for
this purpose. Longitudinal and transverse edges of the carpet laid and compacted earlier
shall be cut to their full depth so as to expose fresh surface, which shall be painted with a
thin surface coat of binder before new mix is placed against it.
68.11 DRAINAGE OF EARTH FORMATION:

At all times the formation surfaces shall be kept drained by the contractor. The contractor
shall provide such temporary open drain as may be necessary to prevent accumulation of
water from any cause whatsoever.
68.11.1Moorum/Earthen berms as described in respective items of Sch ‘A’ shall be watered and
well consolidated with 0.20 to 0.5 tonne hand roller and finished to profile in line with
finished surfaces of the road/path.
68.12 RCC PIPE :

Refer clause 44.2 herein before
68.13 CONCRETE: Refer Clause 8 here-in-before.
68.14.4 Moorum/Earthen berms as described in respective items of Sch ‘A’ shall be watered and
well consolidated with 0.20 to 0.5 tonne hand roller and finished to profile in line with
finished surfaces of the road/path.
68.15 SOLING:
68.15.1 Soling shall be of thickness as mentioned in Sch ‘A’ of broken stones spread, levelled in
layers, watered and rolled to required surface and camber all as per relevant clauses of
MES SSR Part I.
68.15.2 Wherever soft disintegrated rock or hard rock is met at site as sub grade, item for rolling to
formations surfaces and soling shall not be ordered on the contractor.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS (Contd..)

(APPLICABLE ONLY TO PILE FOUNDATION)
69.0 PILE FOUNDATION:
69.1 GENERAL: -
69.1.1 Piling work shall be carried out in accordance with Sch ‘A’ this particular specifications and
drawings read in conjunction with the specifications General Rules Special conditions and all
preamble contained in the MES Schedule. Where at variance, the provisions in these particular
specifications shall take precedence over provision in the MES Sch.
69.1.2 The number, type and location of piles shall be as design approved by Accepting officer.
69.2 ERRORS IN SETTING OUT
69.2.1 Under reamed pile/ bored pile cast-in-situ shall be installed as accurately as possible within
the permissible tolerance as specified in IS-2911 Part I section 2 2010 and clause 7.3 IS –2911
Part III. If the piles are found to be in position beyond the aforesaid the contractor shall render a
report in writing to the GE about the deviation with possible remedial, solution, if any. Such
remedial measures will be examined by the Accepting Officer who shall have the option either to
accept remedial measure with or without modification as may be necessary or reject them outright.
It is only for the normal pile (s) and pile cap(s) as per the original design in the contract. The extra
cost of providing alternative piles and or enlarged pile caps in case of outright rejection of piles (s)
and for rectification/modification shall be borne by the contractor. In case of disputes arising as to
whether or not the piles are to proper position or defective, if any other manner the decision of the
Accepting Officer there on shall be final, conclusive and binding. The depth of pile shown in the
drgs are tentative and the exact depth shall be determined site depending on the soil strata, No
adjustment in rate shall be made if the depth varies from the depth shown on drgs.
69.2.2 Boring for bored piles shall be carried out by direct mud circulation (DMC) method by
injecting bentonite slurry to maintain the walls of the bore and boring and under reaming will have
to be carried out using a suitable approved drilling mud. The properties of the drilling mud
(bentonite) shall be all as specified in IS-2911 Part I section 2 2010 of the IS for the bored piles
and all as specified in Appendix ‘E’ on sl page No 31 and 32 of IS-2911 Part III for under reamed
piles. The relative density of the bentonite slurry should be between 1.034 and 1.10 at all times.
The density bentonite slurry shall be checked at least twice in a day ie, at the commencement of
the work, and in the middle of the period of days working. Record of this shall be maintained duly
signed by the Engineer-in-Charge and contractor’s representative. The bore shall be cleared off all
the bored/excavated materials before commencing concreting by proper flushing. Final flushing (i.e
before commencing concreting) shall be with fresh bentonite preferably of density not exceeding
1.15 grams/C.C.
69.3 EARTHFILLING: - Use of vegetable soil, turf, peat and black cotton soil is prohibited for use
in filling. Earth obtained from excavation and approved by Engineer-in-Charge shall be used for
filling RFR/ under the floors. Additional earth if required for filling shall be approved earth obtained
by the contractor at his own expenses from outside MD land.
69.4 CONCRETE
69.4.1 INGREDIENTS
(a) Coarse aggregate shall be graded crushed or broken granite obtained from source
as approved by GE
(b) Fine aggregate shall be natural sand obtained from source as approved by GE.
Sand shall be clean free from admixture of clay loam silt, organic matter etc, and washed
before use percentage of deleterious materials exceed the permissible limit laid down in IS-
238 (Part-II) of 1963. In the alternative manufactured sand/manufactured fine aggregate
conforming to grading and other characteristics of Zone I to III and other requirement in all
respect as per IS 383-2016 and IS 2430 may also be used without any price adjustment.
Sand obtained from quarry dust by washing and screening method shall not be used.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS (Cont....)

(c) Cement required for the work shall be provided by the contractor by his own
arrangement. Cement used in the work shall conform to Clause 3.1 of Particular
Specification hereinafter
(d) Strength of Concrete:- The concrete mix shall be designed to have an average strength
corresponding to the values specified for preliminary tests in Table I of IS-456 and IS-
10262. The minimum cement content in pile shall be as per relevant IS. The proportions
chosen should be such that the concrete is of adequate workability for the conditions
prevailing on the work and can be properly compacted with the means available.
Workability of the concrete should be checked at frequent intervals. The slump test in
accordance with IS-1199 may be adopted for this purpose. The compressive strength given
in table 11 of IS-456 shall alone be the criteria for acceptance of rejection of the concrete.
The optional work tests result are to be taken for general guidance.
(e) The contractor shall provide 12 Nos of steel moulds for making the test cubes and make
adequate arrangement for casting and curing the cubes. The test cubes after 7 days and
28 days shall be taken by the contractor in presence of the Engineer-in-Charge or his
representative for testing at NABL approved test house/ Engg. College. All Charges shall
be recovered from the contractor for testing the cubes in NABL approved test house/ Engg.
College as per Annexure ‘F’ hereinafter.
69.5 REINFORCEMENT CONCRETE IN BORED PILE CAST-IN-SITU
69.5.1 RCC shall be M30 with RMC only. In this connection refer particular specification Clause
3.7
69.5.2 Before commencement of piling work contractor has to test the quality of soil/ ground water
and if the SO3 contents of ground water exceeds 300PPM in ground water or 2% in the soil, then
Contractor has to use SRP cement (Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement) confirming to IS 12330
in lieu of OPC cement for pile work without any price adjustment. The cost of testing of soil/ ground
water is deemed to be included in the rate quoted. In case of Chloride contents & SO3 contents in
soil/ water are more than permissible limits of IS then PSC/ SRPC/ OPC may be used depending
upon approval of GE, without any price adjustment.
69.6 REINFOCEMENT CONCRETE IN COMPACTION PILE/BORED PILE CAST-IN-SITU:-
69.6.1 The actual requirement of cement for concrete grade M-30 shall be ascertained by design
mix preliminary tests etc. The minimum cement required shall be as per IS. The actual quantity of
cement to be added shall satisfy the provisions in clause 6.6.3 of IS-2911(Part I /section 2) 2010
for tremie method. However, the minimum quantity of cement shall be as per IS. All the
requirements of RCC given in Clause 3.0 of PS part II hereinafter shall be applicable for RCC M-
30 in piles.
69.6.2 The actual consumption of cement for each pile shall be recorded separately.
69.7 PILE CAPS AND GRADE BEAMS
69.7.1 All the requirements of RCC given in 3.6.1 of Particular Specification hereinafter shall be
applicable for plinth beams and pile caps.
69.8 MIXING AND DEPOSITING OF CONCRETE FOR OTHER THAN PILES

(a) The mix shall be carried out by weight batching by using a automatic weigh batching plant.
It shall be ensured that the grading characteristics as adopted in the mix design are followed
through out. Whenever the type of cement and/or aggregate is changed a fresh design mix design
shall be carried out, the rate quoted for relevant items in Sch ‘A’ shall interlia be deemed to cater
for above mentioned provisions.
(b) Slump test shall be carried out all as per IS-456 of 1978.

69.9 MIXING AND DEPOSITING OF CONCRETE IN PILES:- Mix design shall be carried out by
weight and tested. Cement shall be weighed and no volumetric batching of cement is permitted.
This proportioning shall be followed till there is a change in the cement and/or aggregates. Fresh
mix design, testing shall be carried out and approved by GE, when there is a change in the cement
and/or aggregates.
69.10 CONSOLIDATING CONCRETE OTHER THAN CONCRETE IN PILE: - Reinforced cement
concrete work shall be vibrated with suitable power operated immersing vibrator in addition to
hand tamping with rods in order to get dense cement concrete.
27.11 COVER FOR CONCRETE: - Unless otherwise indicated in drg, cover for concrete
shall be as under: -
(i) Piles - 75mm
(ii) Pile caps/grade beam bottom -75mm
(iii) Sides and top of pile cap -75mm
(iv) Side and top of grade beam -45mm
27.12 Bedding Concrete: - Bedding Concrete shall be provided below pile caps and grade
beams. Bedding concrete of 100mm extra width on either side of grade beams shall be
provided:
69.13 FORM WORK: -
69.13.1 The contractor is responsible for the design and stability of formwork for concrete. The
form work shall comply with the following requirements: -‘
(a) Form work shall conform to the shape, lines and dimension as design approved and
shall remain rigid while concrete being deposited and shall be water tight.
(b) Concrete shall be deposited only after the form work is approved by the Garrison
Engineer. Wherever the form work below grade beam is required due to site conditions,
the binding concrete shall not be provided.
(c) Form work shall be of steel.
(d) Form work shall be removed only after the following minimum period have elapsed
(from the date of concreting) where possible, the form work shall be left long as it
assists the curing: -
(i) For side of pile caps/ grade beams/columns.............................3 days
(ii) For soffits of plinth Beams upto 6 metre span..........................14 days
(iii) For soffits of grade beams over 6 metre spa .........................21 days
NOTE: The above period is for concrete using ordinary Portland cement. For concrete
using PSC/ SRPC cement the period shall be suitably increased as directed by the
Engineer-in Charge.
69.14 REINFORCEMENT
(a)Steel for the work shall be provided by the contractor by his own arrangements.
(b)Steel bars shall be straightened to required lengths bent to shape etc, as indicated on
drgs.
(c)Where laps and joints are provided in reinforcement bars, these shall be staggered. For
all RCC works lap length for joints and dowel bars/anchorage length in grade beams shall
be as under irrespective of what is shown on drgs:-
69.15 (a)All laps and crossing shall be tied with mild steel wire (soft drawn) of size not less than
0.9mm. Reinforcement in piles shall be welded or tied with binding wire as directed by
Garrison Engineer.
(b)The contractor shall not commence concreting until the reinforcement has been
approved by the Garrison Engineer.

69.16 REINFORCEMENT IN PILES
69.16.1 Welding for lapping and extension of bars shall be welded with MS Electrode and in
accordance with clause 11.4 of IS –436-1978.Code for practices for welding of mild steel
bars and cold twisted bars used for reinforced concrete construction IS-2751 of 1966 and
IS-1979 respectively shall also be followed: -
The following shall be adhered to: -
(a) Welding: Wherever welding is required the choice of electrode should be restricted to
low hydrogen basic coated type containing cu and /Cr and Ni for achieving good
results.
(b) Electric butt weld/flash butt weld is permitted for bars dia of 25mm or greater. Refer
table 1 Sl No 4 of IS-2751 of 1966.
(c) For bars of 20mm dia and less lap welding/or flash butt welding is permitted. Refer
Table 1 Sl No 4 ofIS-2751 of 1966.
(d) Minimum spacing of welds shall not be less than 3 meters for all reinforcement.
(e) The minimum clear distance between adjacent main bars shall be 100mm for full
depth of the cage. To achieve this requirement main bars can be provided in bundles
where required.
69.17 CUTTING OF LAITANCE/ CHIPPING OF CONCRETE :- To ensure building up of pile to
required level with good concrete, piles has to be build up initially about 1000mm more than what
is required and this has to be cut off to remove all laitance layer of concrete on top. In case any
extra chipping more than 1000mm is required due to ground and technical reasons same shall be
deemed to be included in the unit rate quoted by the tenderer.
69.18 DOWEL/ ANCHORAGE BARS :- Dowel/ Anchorage bars (reinforcement bars anchored
from column to pile cap shall be provided as shown on drgs and as directed by the Engineer-in
Charge. The exposed surfaces of dowel bars shall be coated with a thin coat of neat cement slurry
without extra cost to Govt. Dowel/ anchorage bar shall be as per IS-456 and as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
69.19 RECORD: - Contractor shall maintain a careful and comprehensive record during the
driving of piles giving the following and other necessary date in the tabular form.
(a) Sl No (with reference to plan) of the pile driven

(b) Data of which pile is driven.
(c) Total depth of pile driven
(d) Strata Chart
(e) Two copies of the above record shall be signed by the contractor and the Engineer-
in-Charge. [One copy retained by the Engineer-in-Charge and the other by the
contractor.]
Signature of Contractor Jt Dir (Contract)

Date : ______________ for Accepting Officer
CA NO : CECG/GOA/ OF 2022-23 SER PAGE NO 417
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS (CONTD)
70.0 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT:-

DENSE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE (DAC)& DENSE BITUMINOUS MACADAM(DBM):
This shall consist of construction of two layers /single layer of compacted crushed
aggregates mixed with bitumen & filler laid immediately after application of tack coat. The
thickness of the single compacted layer shall be as specified in BOQ.
70.1 MATERIALS:
COARSE AGGREGATE
The coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed rock, crushed gravel or other hard material
retained on 2.36 mm sieve. It shall be clean, hard, and durable and shall have cubical shape, free
from dust and soft organic and other deleterious substances. The aggregate should preferably be
of low porosity. The coarse aggregate shall satisfy the physical requirements specified in Table as
under. Where crushed gravel is proposed for use as aggregate, not less than 90% by weight of the
crushed material retained on 4.75 mm sieve shall have at least two fractured faces. Coarse
Aggregate for DAC & DBM shall satisfy the following requirements:-
Property Test Method Frequency

DAC DBM
Cleanliness Size Analysis IS : 2386 (P-1) < 5% < 5% One test per 100 Cum
passing passing
0.075 mm 0.075 mm
sieve sieve
Flakiness index IS : 2386 (P-1) <15% <16% One test per 200 Cum
Particle Elongation index IS: 2386 (P-1) <20% <24% One test per 200 Cum
Shape
Combined IS : 2386 (P-1) <30% <30% One test per 50 Cu m
flakiness and whenever there is
elongation change in source.
Los Angels IS : 2386 (P-4) <30% <30% One test per 50 Cum
Strength Abrasion Value and whenever there is
Abrasion change in source.
value Aggregate impact IS : 2386 (P-4) <18% <24% One test per 50 Cum
value and whenever there is
change in source.
Polishing * Polished stone IS : 2386 (P-4) > 55% > 55% One test per source
value
* only for wearing
course
Durability
Sodium Sulphate IS : 2386 (P-5) < 12 % < 12 % One test per source
change in source.
Magnesium IS : 2386 (P-5) < 18 % < 18 % One test per source
Sulphate and whenever there is
change in source.
Water Water Absorption IS : 2386 (P-3) <1% One test per source
Absorption and whenever there is
change in source.
Coating and stripping of Bitumen IS : 6241 Min retained coating One test per 200 Cum
Aggregate Mixture** 95%
Water Sensitivity*** Retained ASHTO 283 Min 80% One test per 200 Cum
Tensile
strength
CA NO : CECG/GOA/ OF 2022-23 SER PAGE NO : 418

Notes:
* Only for wearing courses
** This test shall be conducted as a screening test for coarse aggregate only. It is mandatory to
conduct AASHTO T 283 for moisture susceptibility (Annexure I), which is conducted on the whole
designed bituminous mix as specified in Table 6.10 of TI 09/18
*** For TSR less than 80%, use of anti stripping agents is recommended.
70.2 FINE AGGREGATE:- Fine aggregate shall consist of crushed or naturally occurring mineral
material, or a combination of two, passing 2.36 mm sieve and retained on 0.075 mm sieve. No
natural sand shall be allowed in the binder and wearing courses and no more than 10 percent
natural sand shall be allowed in the base courses. The fine aggregate shall be clean, hard,
durable, dry and free from dust and soft organic and other deleterious substances. Fine aggregate
shall have a sand equivalent value not less than 50 when tested in accordance with the
requirement of IS 2720 Part 37.The plasticity index of the fraction passing the0.425 mm sieve shall
not exceed 4 when tested in accordance with IS 2720 Part 5.Aggregates for pavement mix shall be
natural material complying with IS:383 but with a Los Angeles Abrasion Test value not exceeding
30 percent. The limits of deleterious materials shall not exceed the requirements set out in Table
below.
Ser Deleterious Method Fine Aggregate Coarse Aggregate
No. of Test percentage by Percentage by
Weight, (Max) Weight (Max)
Uncrushed Crushed* Uncrushed Crushed*
1 Coal and lignite IS:2386 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
(Part II)-
1963
2 Clay lumps IS:2386 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
(Part II)-
1963
3 Material Finer IS:2386 3.0 8.0 3.0 3.0
than 75 Micron (Part I)-
IS Sieve 1963
4 Soft fragments IS:2386 - - 3.0 -
(Part II)-
1963
5 Shale IS:2386 1.0 - - -
(PartII)-
1963
6 Total of 5.0 2.0 5.0 5.0
percentages of
all deleterious
materials
(except mica)
including S No.
1 to 5 for Col
4,6, and 7 and S
No 1 and 2 for
Col 5 only
*Crushed aggregate at least one face fractured

70.3 Filler : Filler shall consist of finely divided mineral matter such as rock dust, or hydrated lime
or cement as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The use of hydrated lime is encouraged
because of its very good anti-stripping and antioxidant properties. Rock dust or cement may be
used if
hydrated lime is not available. The filler shall be graded within the limits indicated in
Table
IS Sieve (mm) Cumulative % passing by weight of total
aggregate
0.6 100
0.3 95-100
0.075 85-100
The filler shall be inert material free from organic impurities and shall have Plasticity Index not
greater than 4. P I requirement will not apply if filler is hydrated with lime or cement. Where the
complete bituminous mixture fails to satisfy requirement of Moisture Susceptibility test (AASHTO
T283 with freeze & thaw option), 2% by total weight of aggregate hydrated lime shall be used and
percentage of fine aggregate reduced accordingly. See Annexure I for the outline of modified
AASHTO T 283.
70.4 The combined grading of Coarse and Fine Aggregates for DAC & DBM shall conform to
following: -
Grading DAC Gde I binder DAC Gde II wearing DBM Gde II
course course
Nominal Maximum 19mm 13.2 mm 26.5 mm

Aggregate
size(NMAS)*
Layer / Lift 50-75mm 40-50mm 50-75 mm
Thickness
IS Sieve ( mm ) % Passing % Passing % Passing
37.5 - - 100
26.5 100 - 90 – 100
19.0 79-100 100 71 – 95
13.2 59-79 90-100 56 – 80
9.5 52-72 70-88 -
4.75 35-55 53-71 38 - 54
2.36 28-44 42-58 28-42
1.18 20-34 34-48 -

0.6 15-27 26-38 -
0.30 10-20 18-28 7 - 21
0.15 5-13 12-20 -

0.075 2-8 4-10 2-8
Bitumen Content Minimum 5.4 % as per Minimum 5.6 % as per Minimum 4.5 % as
% by weight of design mix whichever design mix whichever is per design mix
total mix is higher higher whichever is higher
Bitumen Grade PMB 40 VG - 30

*NMAS : It is the largest specified sieve size up on which any of the aggregate is retained
70.5 REQUIREMENT OF PAVING BITUMEN VG-10 & VG-30:

Sl. Characteristics Required Required Method of test Frequency of test
No Value for Value for
VG-10 VG-30
1 2 3 4 5
1 Absolute viscosity at 60 800-1200 2400-3600 IS:1206 (Part One sample from
degree C, poises minimum 2) each container
2 Kinematic viscosity at 135 250 350 IS:1206 (Part arrived on a day if
degree C, cST, minimum 3) the number of
3 Flash point (Cleveland open 220 220 IS;1209 containers arrived
cup) degree C, minimum on a day more than
4 Solubility in 990 99 IS:1216 3 but upto 50,
trichloroethylene, percent, samples from 3
minimum randomly selected
5 Penetration at 25 deg C, 80 50-70 IS:1203 containers shall be
100g, 5s, 0.1mm collected and all
6 Softening point(R & R) 40 47 IS:1205 samples shall be
degree C, minimum individually tested
7 Test on residue from thin film oven tests/ RTFOT for absolute
(a) Viscosity ratio at 60 4 4.0 IS:1206 viscosity,
deg C, max (Part2) penetration,
(b)Ductility at 25 deg C CM, 75 40 IS:1208 softening point on
minimum after thin film oven daily basis. For
test other parameters
all samples
collected can be
clubbed and
tested.
70.6 REQUIREMENT OF POLYMER MODIFIED BITUMEN (PMB)

PMB shall conform to type B PMB (E) i.e Elastomeric thermo plastic SBS based mentioned
in clause No. 4 of IS:15462-2004. Suitable viscosity grade of base bitumen conforming to
IS;73 shall be selected and tested in accordance with codal requirement before blending.
The polymer used for modification shall be compatible with bitumen, resist degradation at
mixing temperature, capable of being processed by conventional mixing and laying
machinery, produce required coating viscosity at application temperature and maintained
premium properties during storage, application and in service. The polymer shall be
homogeneous and shall not foam when heated at 170 deg centigrade. No mineral other
than naturally present, in the ingredient materials, shall be used. The PMB-40 shall confirm
to following characteristics:
Sl Characteristics Requirement Method Frequency of tests

No of test
1 2 3 4 5
1 Penetration at 25 deg C, 30-50 IS:1203
0.1mm, 100 g, 5s
2 Softening point (R&B), deg 60 IS:1205
Refer para 70.8 of
C, Minimum
CA
3 FRAASS breaking point deg -12 IS:9381
C, Maximum
4 Flash point COC, deg C, 220 IS:1209
minimum

70.6 (Contd.)
1 2 3 4
5 Elastic recovery of halt thread in 80 IS:15462,
ductilometer at 15 deg C, percent, min Annex ‘A’
6 Separation, difference in softening point (R 3 IS:15462,

& B), deg C, Max Annex ‘B’
7 Viscosity at 150 deg C, poise 3-9 IS:1206
(Part I)
8 Thin film over test and tests on residue IS:9382
(a) Loss in weight, percent, Max 1.0 IS:9382
(b) Increase in softening point, deg C, 5 IS:1205

Max
(c) Reduction in penetration of residue 35 IS:1203
at 25 deg C, percent Max
(d) Elastic recovery of halt thread in 50 IS:15462
ductilometer at 25 deg c, percent, min Annex ‘A’
70.7 BITUMEN AND POLYMER MODIFIED BITUMEN(PMB)
70.7.1 PMB – 40 shall have minimum 85% elastic recovery and softening point 60 degrees and
shall conform to all relevant requirements of IS 15462 - 2004. PMB 40 – shall be of plant / factory
blended and no site blending will be permitted. During use, the requirements for viscosity,
softening point, penetration and elastic recovery shall be tested as specified and conform the
requirements given in Tables as above in clause 14.6’. Base Bitumen for PMB shall be procured
directly from Refinery of IOCL HPCL/BPCL or any PSU refinery. The same shall be handed over
to approved blender for modification. Original voucher and manufacturer’s test certificate issued by
approved blender shall also be produced. In case approved blender purchases base bitumen
directly from approved refinery i.e IOCL /HPCL/BPCL or any PSU refinery then the purchase
vouchers shall have information like contractor name and CA No. in addition to purchases i.e
blender’s name. The contractor shall produce machine numbered original vouchers obtained from
manufacturers for the full quantity required for the work. The contractor shall submit the test
certificates for each consignment brought to site.
70.8 TESTING OF PAVING BITUMEN AND PMB
70.8.1 The contractor shall submit the test certificates for each consignment brought to site. The
material shall also be tested at site in field laboratory at stipulated frequency as given
below. Any test which is required to be carried out as per MES schedule/IS code, but
cannot be performed at filed laboratory established by contractor, shall be carried out at
approved laboratory (i.e. Government Engineering college/IIT/SEMT) and expenditure of
such test shall be borne by the contractor. In addition the GE may also get it tested
independently from approved laboratories mentioned here-in- above. The contractor shall
provide all facilities like material, transportation of material to laboratory etc. for testing by
the department. The test charges shall be borne by the department.
Srl Material Test Frequency (Minimum)

No
1 2 3 4
1. Paving bitumen (i) Penetration test Number of samples percent and
(ii) Softening point test test as per IS:73
2. Modified (i) Softening Point Initially on submission thereafter,
bitumen for each container when work is in
progress
(ii) Penetration at -do-
25 Degree C
(iii) Elastic Recovery -do-
(iv) Ductility -do-
(v) Flash Point -do-
(vi) Fraass Breaking Initially on submission and for
every 500 T there after
(vii) Viscosity at 150 Initially on submission thereafter,
Degree C for each container when work is in
prog.
(viii) Thin film oven test, Initially on submission and for
loss on heating every 500 T there after
(ix) Dynamic shear, Initially on submission and for
G*/Sin, min 1.00 kPa, every 500 T as per ASTM D7175.
test temp @10 rad/s deg C
70.9 JOB MIX
70.9.1 TENSILE STRENGTH RATIO (TSR) :- TSR of the design mix shall be determined in
accordance with AASHTO T 283 (Annexure I Annex A of IRC 111). If the TSR of the mix
conditioned with one freeze and thaw cycle is less than 80%, then hydrated lime or liquid
anti stripping agent shall be used in the mix to satisfy the criteria.
70.9.2 MOISTURE SUSCEPTIBILTY TEST : Following test shall be carried at time of Job Mix
formula:
a. Boiling Test : as per ASTM D 3625
b. Static-Immersion test : as per AASHTO T 182.
70.10 OPTIMUM BINDER CONTENT (OBC) (DAC-1, DAC-2, DBM)
The optimum binder content shall be determined in at Govt Engineering college/SEMT/

IITs/CRRI New Delhi by Marshall design method corresponding to 3-5 % air voids. The
mix shall satisfy all mix design criteria such as Marshall Stability, flow value, voids in
mineral aggregate and voids filled with binder at the optimum binder content. The rates
quoted by the contractor for these dense mixes should satisfy the criterion of job mix
formula and no extra payment shall be paid to the contractor for any higher variation of
bitumen content in the relevant item of BOQ. However price adjustment would be done in
case of lesser bitumen/PMB 40 content.
70.11 JOB MIX FORMULA

70.11.1 Prior to start of work, an economical job mix of asphalt mix design (DAC-1, DAC-2,
DBM) should be designed from, Govt Engineering college/SEMT/ IITs/CRRI New Delhi by
the Marshall Design Method contained in the asphalt institute manual MS-2 (Seventh
edition). The Fines to bitumen (F/B) ratio by weight of total mix shall range from 0.6 to 1.2
for all mixes (DAC-1, DAC-2, DBM). The laboratory mix design gives the proportion of the
mineral aggregate combination in terms of individual sieve sizes, for actual operational
purpose in the field, blending of the two or more sizes of aggregates (each size having
within its range of individual sieve size) would be necessary. This blending ratio is obtained
on a weight basis giving percent weight of the coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and filler
needed to give the ultimate gradation. This mineral aggregate combination together with
the corresponding optimum bitumen content as determined in the laboratory, constitute the
job mix formula for implementation during construction. The job mix formula proposed for
the use in the work shall give the following details:
(a) Source and location of all materials
(b) Proportions of all materials
(c) Binder type and percentage by weight of total mixture
(d) Coarse aggregate/ fine aggregates/ mineral filler as percentage by weight of total
aggregate
(e) A single definite percentage passing each sieve for the mix aggregate.
(f) The individual grading of the individual aggregate fraction and the proportion of each in
the combined grading
(g) The test results of mix design such as theoretical maximum specific gravity of loose mix
(Gmm), compacted specimen densities, Marshall stability, flow, air voids, VMA, VFB and
related graphs, and test results of AASHTO T 283 Moisture Susceptibility Test
(h) In case of batch mixer, the individual weight of each type of aggregate and
binder per batch
(j) Test results of aggregates and of all constituent materials.
Approval of the job mix formula shall be based on independent testing by the Engineer-in-
charge on the samples furnished by the Contractor. It should be ensured that it is based on
the truly representative samples of the material that will be used for the work. New job mix
formula shall be approved whenever there is change in source of any constituent material
used for the work.
70.11.2 Job Mix formula shall be approved by Accepting officer.

70.12 DESIGN REQUIREMENT FOR DAC &DBM
70.12.1 The design requirements for DAC&DBM shall be as under :
Design Parameters DBM DAC I as DAC II as
binder wearing
course course
Minimum Stability (kN at 60 °C) 9.0 12.0 14.0
Marshall Flow 2–4 2.5-4 2.5-4
Compaction Level (Number of 75 on each 75 on each 75 on each face
blows) face face
Per cent air voids 3–5 3–5 3–5
Percent Voids in Mineral 12% 14% 14%
Aggregate (VMA), Minimum
Percent Voids Filled with 65 – 75 65 – 75 65 – 75
Bitumen (VFB)
Retained Tensile Strength Minimum 80 Minimum 80 Minimum 80 %
(AASHTO T 283) % %
Coating of Agg with bitumen Min 95% Min 95% Min 95%
% Voids in Mineral aggregate VMA
Nominal Maximum Particle size Min % VMA related to designed % air voids**
(mm) * 3% 4% 5%
9.5 14 15 16
12.5 13 14 15
19.0 12 13 14
26.5 11 12 13
Coating with aggregate 95% 95% 95%
Requirement of retained stability - 90 95
o
after 24 hrs in water at 60 C % Min
* The nominal maximum particle size is one size larger than the first sieve, which retains more
than 10% material.
**For intermediate value of designed percentage air voids interpolate the VMA
70.13 BLANK
70.14 PREPARATION OF MIX

Weather and Seasonal limitations shall be as per Clause No. 20.B.3.3.1 of SSR Part – I.
Hot mix plants used by the Contractor shall conform to the Specifications and features as per
Clause No. 20.B.3.3.2 to 20.B.3.3.2 (h) of SSR Part – I or the specifications given
hereinafter whichever is superior. Refer E-in-C’s Br TI 09/2018.
70.15 TRANSPORTATION OF MIXED MATERIALS
(i) The mixed materials shall be transported from mixing plant to the site in clean
insulated and covered vehicles. Every precaution shall be taken to avoid segregation and
to ensure that they do not become contaminated with dust or foreign matter. In order to
maintain satisfactory temperature of materials in transit, particularly in cold weather, and
to prevent undue loss of heat, adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that the
materials are properly protected/covered during transportation. The rear flap of transport
vehicle should be properly closed to prevent slippage of mix during transportation to
prevent segregation. Asphalt release agent (not diesel) shall be applied on interior of
vehicle to prevent sticking and facilitate discharge of material.
(ii) The temperature of the mix in every transporting vehicle shall be checked
immediately prior to discharge into the spreader. If the temperature of any batch is below
the laying temperature specified the mix shall be rejected and shall be removed from site
immediately.
70.16 TEMPERATURE
The permissible range of temperature(Degree Celsius) during mixing, laying and rolling
for DAC/DBM shall be as given below : - (Table 6.12 of TI 09/2018)
Stage of Work Indicated Indicated Indicated

Temperature with Temperature Temperature with
VG-10 bitumen with VG-30 PMB (Polymer
bitumen Modified Bitumen)
Bitumen Temperature 140-160 150-165 165-185
Aggregate Temperature 140-165 150-170 165-185
Mixed Material Temperature 140-160 150-165 150-170
Laying Temperature 130 Min 140 Min 140-160
Rolling Temperature* 80 Min 90 Min 110 Min
*All rolling must be completed before mix temperature falls below this temperature.
70.17 PREPARATION OF SURFACES AND APPLICATION OF PRIME / TACK COAT
70.17.1 The surface to be primed shall be dry and shall be swept clean and made free from
dust. All loose material and other foreign material on the surface shall be removed completely
by compressed air.
74.17.2 The binder shall be heated to it’s appropriate temperature and applied uniformly over
the prepared surface with the help of either self propelled or towed pressure sprayer with
self heating arrangements and spraying nozzles, a system capable of spraying bitumen
at specified rates and temperatures so as to provide a uniform & even spread of bitumen.
The tack coat shall be applied just immediately before spreading the mix. The rate of tack
coat shall depend upon the surface and should be as per MORT&H specifications, Fourth
Revision (Reprinted April 2005) and subsequent revisions from time to time. The
temperatures of application of binder shall be between 165 deg C to 185 deg Celcius.
70.18 MATERIALS FOR PRIMER/TACK COAT
The binder used for tack coat shall be VG-10 specifications and as specified in BOQ.
70.19 LAYING
The Bituminous mix should be laid by a mechanical paver spreader with electronic
sensor taking signal from string laid with the help of total station as per given profile
(moving reference control) capable of laying to a minimum width of 7.5m to 9 m and
profile without causing segregation, dragging and irregularities or other surface effect. It
should be capable of being operated at the speed consistent with the character of the
mixture and the thickness of the course being laid, so as to produce a surface having a
uniform density and surface texture. The screed plate of the paver should be tested
before the commencement of works to ensure good surface texture. The augers behind
the screed should be in good mechanical condition to supply a homogeneous mix
without segregation to the screed plate. The temperature at the time laying of mix as
mentioned in Clause No. 14.16 here-in-before.
70.20 JOINTS: Echelon paving with two or more pavers should be used to minimize the number
of longitudinal joints on the airfield. Longitudinal joints in successive layers shall be offset
by at least 300 mm from parallel joints in the layer beneath. All joints shall be cut vertical
to an even line with a cutting wheel or other suitable device to a width not less than the
course thickness. All loosened material shall be discarded and the vertical face be coated
with tack coat of VG-30 or VG-10 viscosity grade bitumen or cold applied emulsified
bitumen prior to laying the adjacent lane. While spreading the material along the joint the
material spread shall overlap 25 mm to 40 mm on the previously laid mix beyond the
vertical face of the joint. The thickness of the loose overlap material should be
approximately a quarter more than the final compacted thickness. The overlapped mix
should be bumped back with a lute just across the joint so that the excess material on the
hot side can be pressed to obtain a high joint density. Rolling of longitudinal joints shall be
done with roller on the hot side with 150 mm overlap on the previously laid cold lane. The
joint density when measured by taking 150-mm diameter cores right on the joint shall be
at least 90% of the theoretical maximum specific gravity obtained on that day. In multi –
layer construction, the joints in one layer shall offset the joints in the underlying layer by
150 mm. However, the joint in the top layer shall be along the centre line of the pavement
and to be kept to the minimum.

70.21 COMPACTION/ROLLING
70.21.1 Compaction shall commence as soon as possible after laying and shall be completed
before the temperature falls below the minimum rolling temperatures given in clause
74.16 of PS. Rolling of the longitudinal joints shall be done immediately behind the
paving operation. After this, the rolling shall commence at the edge and progress
towards the center longitudinally except at sections with unidirectional camber, where
it shall progress from lower edge to upper edge parallel to center line of the pavement.
Paving and Rolling operations should be planned such that the pavers and rollers do
not stop anywhere in the paving mat during the work (to avoid minor undulations).
70.21.2 The initial or breakdown rolling shall be done with a vibratory steel wheel roller in
vibratory mode. However, the vibratory system shall be turned off during first pass if
the mix is too tender or plastic. The intermediate rolling shall be done with smooth
wheel pneumatic tyred roller of 15 to 30 tonnes, with a tyre pressure of at least 7 kg/sq
cm. The finished rolling shall be done with 8 to 10 tonnes smooth wheel roller. Rolling
shall continue till all the roller marks are removed from the surface and the minimum
specified field density is achieved.
70.21.3 The dense graded bituminous mixes shall be rolled in the longitudinal direction, with
the roller as close as possible to the paver. The overlap on successive passes should
be at least one-third of the width of the rear roll or in the case of pneumatic wheeled
rollers, at least the nominal width of 300 mm. The roller should move at a speed of no
more than 5 km/hour. The roller shall not be permitted to stand on pavement, which
has not been fully compacted. All precautions shall be taken to prevent dropping of oil,
grease, petrol or other foreign material on the pavement. The wheel of the rollers shall
be kept moist with the water or spray system provided with the machine to prevent the
mixture from adhering to the wheels. Minimum moisture to prevent adhesion between
wheels and mixture shall be used and surplus water shall not be allowed to stand on
the partially completed pavement.
70.22 COLD ROLLING

The final compaction will be carried out with a pneumatic tyred roller of 15 to 30 ton
capacity having tyre pressure of 7 kg/ sq.cm after the entire paving operations are
completed. This should be done on bright sunny days such that the entire airfield is
rolled minimum five times.
70.23 MAX SPEED OF ROLLING
70.23.1 The speed of roller while cold rolling should not exceed 4 – 5 Km / hour.
70.24. DEGREE OF COMPACTION

The degree of compaction achieved by rolling shall be determined by cutting 150-
mmdiameter c ores from the finished surface. One field density test shall be conducted
for every 500 sq m. If reqd cores can be cut as per site condition/finished surface to
determine the field density and relative compaction in percentage. The field density
should be at least 93 % of the maximum theoretical specific gravity of the loose mix
obtained on that day, that is, no more than 7% air voids in the compacted mat. The
maximum theoretical specific gravity shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D
2041 (refer Annexure-II of TI 09/2018) for outline of this test). The portion of the work
represented by the field density of which is less than 93% of maximum theoretical
specific gravity shall be rejected. Where this is not found possible, the work shall be
removed and redone by the contractor at his own risk and cost. Use of nuclear or non-
nuclear portable density gauge to control 150-mm diameter cores shall be used for
acceptance. Therefore, contractor shall correlate his density gauge with cores for that
specific project during construction. Where this is not possible the work shall be
dismantled and redone by the contractor at his own risk and cost.
70.25 ROUGHNESS TEST :

Roughness test of finished surface shall be got done through recognized agency like
RITES/ AIMIL/AIR PORT AUTHORITY OF INDIA or as approved by GE as per IRC:
SP 16. Values of roughness in wet and dry condition shall be within norms table 12 of
IRC 1112009 in good condition.
70.26 SURFACE ACCURACY

When tested with a 3 m straight edge beam as per IRC SP:16 placed anywhere in any
direction on the surface, there should not be gap greater than 3 mm between the
bottom of the straight edge and the wearing course surface of the pavement. Any
undulations / deficiency in surface accuracy will be made up by the contractor at his
own risk & cost.
70.27 QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control tests shall be carried out at frequencies as specified in MORTH table
900-4 and Clause No. 20.B.4.9 of MES Schedule Part – I or as given in PS (whichever
is higher) and Acceptance criteria shall be as per para 6.5 of IRC 111-2009.
70.28 DETERMINATION OF FINSHED SURFACE LEVELS

All finished surface levels shall be surveyed by precise leveling instruments and the
survey shall be undertaken by Engineer-in -Charge.. The finished surface level of the
completed pavement shall not vary by more than 7 mm below or 7 mm above the
finished surface level as finalized. Notwithstanding, the interface of runway or
taxiway and shoulders shall be flush.
70.29 MEASUREMENTS
70.29.1 Thickness of various layers shall be accurately maintained during the construction as
specified in the design and shall be checked /monitored continuously by taking regular
levels and maintaining level sheets. Regular calibration of sensor paver to be
ensured for thickness to be spread and compacted thickness should be monitored. In
case of dispute the following method for determination of thickness be adopted
70.29.2 Average Thickness Determination Using Cores: In areas where density testing using
cores has been undertaken in accordance with the clause on compaction the average
thickness of the course will be determined on the basis of thickness measurements of
the cores obtained. Measurement of individual cores will be made after cleaning of any
adhering material from the bottom of the core and shall be the average of four
measurements of thickness made at approximately 90° apart Measurements shall be
made to the nearest 1 mm and the average of the four measurements expressed to the
nearest 1 mm. The average thickness of a core in an area will be the average thickness
of a minimum of four cores expressed to the nearest 1 mm and the area for each
assessment shall be not less than 1,000 m² and not more than 1,500 m2.

70.30 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM JOB MIX FORMULA:
Plant trial shall be carried out to establish that the plant can produce uniform mix conforming
to the job mix formula. The permissible variation of the various ingredients in the actual mix
from the job mix formula shall be within the limits as given in Table as under. These
variations are intended to apply to individual specimen taken for quality control test.
Sl Description DBM DAC

NO.
1 2 3 4
1 Aggregate passing 19mm or lesser +8% +7%
sieve
2 Aggregate passing 13.2mm, 9.5 mm +7% +6%
3 Aggregate passing 4.75 mm +6% +5%
4 Aggregate passing 2.36 mm, 1.18 +5% +4%
mm, 0.6mm
5 Aggregate passing 0.3mm, 0.15mm +4% +3%
6 Aggregate passing 0.075mm +2% +1.5%
7 Binder Content* +0.3% +0.3%
8 Mixing temperature +10 deg C +10 deg C
Note* : For binder content on minus side, price adjustment will be done
70.31 OPENING OF TRAFFIC:
70.31.1 Allowing traffic on DAC grade I (binder coarse) will be considered with the approval of GE in
writing, after the paved surface temperature is cooled below 60 deg C in its entire depth.
Allowing final traffic on DAC grade II (wearing course) with the written approval by GE after
complete rolling operations including cold rolling is completed and paved and temperature is
below 65oC.
71.00 INDEPENDENT TESTING / THIRD PARTY TESTING/ SITE LAB

17.1 The further tests listed in table hereinafter will be carried out in site lab and independent testing in
Government Engineering college/IIT/SEMT/CRRI through department as mentioned against each. In
case method of tests is at variance with the classes mentioned hereinbefore the relevant IS shall super
cede in this regard. The charges for getting the tests done in independent lab through department
including transporting the testing material shall be deemed to be included in the rates quoted and no
extra claim on this account shall be admissible.
Ser Name of Test Frequency No of test No of tests in
No in site lab IIT/NIT/SEMT/
CRRI/NABL
Approved lab
1. PAVING BITUMEN VG-10 & VG-30
(a) Absolute & kinetic One sample from each 100% 5%
viscosity container recd on a day or
minimum three randomly
selected containers in case
numbers of containers recd
more than three and upto 50.
(b) Flash point One sample from each 100% 5%

container recd on a day or
(c) Penetration One sample from each 100% 5%

(d) Softening point One sample from each 100% 5%

(e) Viscosity & ductility on One sample from each 100% 5%

residue from thin film container recd on a day or
oven tests minimum three randomly
2. POLYMER MODIFIED BITUMEN (PMB 40)

(a) Flash point Initially on submission and thereafter 100% 5%
sample from each container recd.
(b) Penetration at 25 Initially on submission and thereafter 100% 5%
degree C sample from each container recd.
(c) Softening point Initially on submission and thereafter 100% 5%
sample from each container recd.
(d) Ductility and Elastic Initially on submission and thereafter 100% 5%
recovery sample from each container recd.
(e) Viscosity at 150 Initially on submission and thereafter 100% 5%
Degree C sample from each container recd.
(f) Thin film oven test Initially on submission for every 500T - 5%
thereafter
(g) Frass breaking Initially on submission for every 500T - 5%
thereafter
(h) Dynamic shear Initially on submission for every 500T - 5%
thereafter
(j) PCN evaluation On completion - 100%
3. TESTS ON BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT

(a) Marshal stability and For every 100 ton of mix 100% 2%
flow
(b) Bitumen/Binder content For every 400 ton of mix, subject to 100% 2%
(As per note on page 28 min 3 Test per day per plant.
of TI 09/2018Centrifuge
or NCAT ignition oven
method)
(c) Percentage air voids For every 100 ton of mix 100% 2%
(d) Moisture susceptibility of 1 test for each mix type whenever 100% 100%
mix there is a change in the quality or
source of coarse or fine aggregate.
(e) Temp of binder in boiler At regular intervals during days of 100% 5%
, aggregate in dryer and work
mix at the time of laying
and compaction
(f) Stability and void 3 test for stability flow value , 100% 5%
analysis of mix including density and void contents for each
theoretical maximum 400T of mix subject to min 3 tests
specific gravity of mix. per day per plant.
(g) Sand equivalent test. 1 test for each source. 100% 5%
(h) Polished stone value. 2 test for each source and then 100% 5%
whenever there is a change in
source.
(j) Mix grading One set of individual constituent 100% 5%
materials and mixed aggregate
from dryer for each 400T of mix
subject to min 3 tests per day per
plant.
4. TESTS ON COARSE AGGREGATE FOR DAC
DAC
Cleanliness Size IS : 2386 (P-1) < 5% One test per 100% 5%
Analysis passing 100
0.075 Cum
mm
sieve
Flakiness IS : 2386 (P-1) <15% One test per 100% 5%
index 200
Cum
Elongation IS: 2386 (P- <20% One test per 100% 5%
index 1) 200
Particle Shape Cum
Combined IS : 2386 (P-1) <30% One test per 100% 5%
flakiness 50 Cu m and
elongation whenever
there is
change in
source.
Los Angels IS : 2386 (P-4) <30% One test per 50 100 5%
Abrasion Cum and %
Value whenever there
is change in
Strength
source.
Abrasion value
Aggregate IS : 2386 (P-4) <18% One test per 50 100 5%
impact Cum and %
value whenever there
is change in
source.
Polishing * Polished IS : 2386 (P-4) > 55% One test per 100 5%
stone value source %
* only for
wearing
course

Durability
Sodium IS : 2386 (P-5) < 12 % One test per 100 5%
Sulphate source and %
whenever there
is change in
source.
Magnesium IS : 2386 (P-5) < 18 % One test per 100 5%
Sulphate source and %
whenever there
is change in
source
Water Absorption Water IS : 2386 (P-3) <1% One test per 100 5%
Absorption source and %
whenever there
is change in
source.
Coating and stripping of IS : 6241 Min One test per 200 100 5%
Bitumen Aggregate Mixture** retained Cum %
coating
95%
Water Sensitivity*** Retaine ASHTO 283 Min One test per 200 100 5%
d 80% Cum %
Tensile
strength
Percentage of One test per 50 - 100%
Fractured faces m3 of aggregate
when crushed
stone is used
5. TESTS ON COARSE AGGREGATE FOR DBM

DBM
Cleanliness Size IS : 2386 (P-1) < 5% One test per 100 100% 5%
Analysis passing Cum
0.075
mm
sieve
Flakiness IS : 2386 (P-1) <16% One test per 200 100% 5%
index Cum
Elongation IS: 2386 (P-1) <24% One test per 200 100% 5%
Particle Shape index Cum
Combined IS : 2386 (P-1) <30% One test per 50 Cu 100% 5%
flakiness m and whenever
elongation there is
change in source.
Los Angels IS : 2386 (P-4) <30% One test per 50 100% 5%
Abrasion Cum and
Value whenever there is
Strength
change in source.
Abrasion value
Aggregate IS : 2386 (P-4) <24% One test per 50 100% 5%
impact value Cum and
whenever there is
change in source.
Polishing * Polished IS : 2386 (P-4) > 55% One test per 100% 5%
stone value source
* only for
wearing
course
Durability Sodium IS : 2386 < 12 % One test per 100 5%

Sulphate (P-5) source and %
whenever there is
change in source.
Durability Magnesium IS : 2386 < 18 % One test per 100 5%
Sulphate (P-5) source and %
whenever there is
change in source
Water Water IS : 2386 < 1 % One test per 100 5%
Absorption Absorption (P-3) source and %
whenever there is
change in source.
Coating and stripping of Bitumen IS : 6241 Min One test per 200 100 5%
Aggregate Mixture** retaine Cum %
d
coating
95%
Water Sensitivity*** Retained ASHTO 283 Min One test per 200 100 5%
Tensile 80% Cum %
strength
6 DAC CORE TEST Each Layer As per clause 70.29 of PS. 100% 5%
(4 samples for each test)
7 DAC CORE density measurement (As per para 70.24 of PS) - 5%

One test for 500 m2 area
APPENDIX - 'C
1. CEMENT
1.1 GENERAL
Cement required for the work under the contract shall be procured, supplied and incorporated in
the works by the Contractor under his own arrangement. Cement shall be of tested quality and
shall comply with the requirements mentioned in the drawings, SSR, IS specifications as
amended and particular specifications given hereinafter.
1.2 TYPES OF CEMENT
(i) Ordinary Portland cement Grade 43 - (IS: 269-2015) or Grade 53/ SRPC/ PSC
1.2.1 OPC 43/53 grade shall be used in super structure. In sub structure, the type of cement i.e OPC
43/53 or SRPC or PSC will be decided based on contents of SO3 & Chloride in sub soil and sub
soil water. It shall be finalized by Accepting Officer depending upon soil and water test report.
No price adjustment shall be made for use of any type of cement/testing of water by contractor.
1.2.2 Type of cement for the subject work shall be Ordinary Portland Cement grade 43 (Forty Three)
in accordance with IS: 269-2015 unless otherwise mentioned in structural drawings forming part
of the tender documents.
1.3 PROCUREMENT / SUPPLY OF CEMENT BY CONTRACTOR
(a) PROCUREMENT
The cement supplied by the Contractor shall only be procured from main producers of cement.
The particulars of the manufactures of cement along with the date of manufacture shall be
obtained from the Contractor for every lot of cement separately. The documents in support of
the purchase of cement shall be verified by the Engineer-in-Charge / GE and site staff. The
cement shall be procured by the Contractor from the manufacturers as given below
(b) MANUFACTURESThe following are the main producers of Ordinary Portland cement
Sl COMPANY NAME & ADDRESS
No BRAND
1 2 3
nd
1. M/s Associated Cement Mayur Garden, 2 Floor, Opp-Rajuv
Manufacturing CompanyBhawan, GS Road, Guwhati-781005,
Ltd. Ph: 0361-2462215/216/513
Brand: “STAR” Fax: 0361-2462217,
Email: cmclghy@cml.co.in
nd
2. M/s Ultra Tech Cement ‘B’ Wing, 2 Floor, Mahakali Caves
Ltd Road, Andheri (East), Mumbai-400093,
Brand: “ULTRATECH” Ph: 022-66917800
3 The India Cement Dhun Building, 827, Anna Salai,
Chennai- 600002
4 Dalmia Cement (Bharat) DalmiapuramDistt- Truchirappalli,
Ltd. Tamil Nadu- 621651
Brand: “DALMIA”
“KONARK”
5 Century Cements Industry House, 159 Church gate
Reclamation,
Brand: “CENTURY” Mumbai- 400020
Ph- 022 22023936
6 Saurashtra Cement Gala No A-1, Ground Floor, Udhyog
Sadan No 3 MIDC, Central Road,
Brand: “SAURASHTRA” Andheri (East), Mumbai- 400093
Ph- 022 32955557/67
Mo- 9320290081
7 The Ramco Cements Ltd. Auras Corporate Centre, 98-A, Dr
(Formerly Madras Cement) RadhakrishnanSalai, Mylapore,
Chennai- 600004
Brand: “RAMCO” Ph- 044 28478666
8. Mangalam Cement Ltd PO Adithyanagar, Morak, Dist, Kota
Rajasthan-326 520
Brand : “MANGALAM” Ph – 9351468076
9 Birla Corporation Ltd Birla Building (3rd & 4th Floor) 9/1, RN
Mukherjee Road, Kolkata – 700001,
Brand: “BIRLA” Ph : 033-30573700
10 Orient Cement 5-9-22/57/D, 2nd & 3rd Floor, GP Birla
Centre, Adarsh Nagar, Hyderbad –
Brand: “ORIENT” 500063, Ph : 044-23688600
11 M/s Nuvoco Vistas Equinox Business Park
th
Corporation Ltd Tower-3, East Wing, 4 Floor
LBS marg, Kurla (West), Kurla
Brand: “NUVOCO” Mumbai, Maharashtra-400 070
12 Shree Cement Bangur Nagar, Beawar, Dist-Ajmer,
Rajasthan-305901,
Brand: “SHREE” Ph : 01462-228101-06
13 J K Cement Kamala, Tower Kanput-208001
Brand: “JK”
14 JK Lakshmi Cement Ltd Jaykaypuram, Dist-Sirohi, Rajasthan
Brand: “JK LAKSHMI” Ph : 02971-244409/10
15. JaypeeRewa Cement Jaypee Nagar
Brand: "JAYPEE" P.O.- Jaypee Nagar,Rewa-486450 M.P.
1 2 3
16. Ambuja Cement Ltd Kodinar, PO- Ambujanagar, Taluka-
Kodinar, Dist- Junagadh, Gujarat- 362715
Brand: "AMBUJA" Ph- 02795 237000
17. M/S Shree Guru Kripa 4/4 Trikuta Nagar Jammu
Cement (Pvt) Ltd Ph. 0191-2472043
Brand: "SARTAJ"
18. M/S Parasakti Cements 123/3RT, Plot # 8-3-214/21,
Ltd. Srinivasa Nagar Colony(West) Hyderabad-500038
Brand: "PARASAKTI Cement" Tel- 040-44119100 / 200, Fax- 040-23747562
19. M/s Chettinad Cement 4th Floor, Rani Seethai Hall Building,
Corporation Ltd. 603, Anna Salai Hall, Chennai-600006
Tel No. 044-42951800 Fax No. 044-28291558
Brand: EMail:-info@chettinadcement.com
"CHETTINAD Cement" Website- www chettinadcement.com
20. M/s Sagar Cement Ltd M/s Sagar Cement Ltd. Plot No 111, Road No 10
Brand : SAGAR Jubilee Hills, Hydrabad-500033
Tele : +91-40-23351571, 2335672
Fax : +91-40-2335673
Email : info@sagarcements.in
Web site : www.sagarcements.in
th
21. M/s Sanghi Industries Ltd 10 floor, Kataria Arcade, Off S G Highway,
Brand : Sanghi PO- Makarba, Distt-Ahmedabad Pin 380051
Mob – 0828093065 Tel – 079 26838000
Fax -079-26838111
Web site – www.sanghicement.com
22. M/S My Home Industries Ltd 9th Floor, Block-3, My Home Hub,
Madhapur, Hyderabad - 500081
Brand: "MAHA CEMENT" Ph- 040-66929696 Fax- 040-66929797/98
23. M/S Wonder Cement Ltd 17, Old Fatehpura
SevaMandir Road, Udaipur-313004
Brand: Rajasthan (India)
"WONDER Cement" Tele: +91-294-33991133 Fax: +91-294-3006333
Email:Corp.office@wondercement.com
Note: The name of manufacturer of cement if has been added/deleted by E-in-C’s branch are
also deemed to be added/ deleted in the approved list.
1.4 TESTING OF CEMENT
1.4.1 The manufacturer shall carry out inspections and testing of cement in accordance with relevant
BIS provisions. The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's Test Certificate in original
alongwith Test Sheets giving the result of each physical test as applicable and chemical
composition of the cement in accordance with relevant IS provisions and the chemical
composition of the cement or authenticated copy thereof duly signed by the manufacturer with
each consignment, as per the following IS provisions:
(a) Method of Sampling Hydraulic Cement as per IS-3535-1986
(b) Method of Physical Tests for Hydraulic Cement as per IS-4031
(c) Method of Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement as per IS-4032-1985
The test certificate and test sheet shall be furnished with each batch of the manufacture.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall record these details in the Cement Acceptance Register as
given in Appendix-‘E’ to be maintained by him which will be signed by JE (Civil), Engineer-in-
Charge, Garrison Engineer and the Contractor as given in the format hereinafter for verification.
1.4.2 The following tests of cement shall be carried out:
Ser Name of Tests Relevant IS Frequency

No.
(a) Setting time 4031-5 (Latest version) Once each bulk supply and as
and when required
(b) Soundness 4031-3 (Latest version) Once each bulk supply and as
and when required
(c) Compressive 4031-6 (Latest version) Once each bulk supply and as
strength and when required
(d) Specific gravity test 4031-11 (Latest version) Once for each bulk supply as
when required
(e) Chemical analysis 4032 (Latest version) Once for each bulk supply as
and when required
Dated: Jt Dir (Contract)
CEMENT SUPPLY & ACCEPTANCE FORM Appendix-‘E’
1. Contract No. :
2. Name of work :
3. Control No. :
4. (a) Name of Manufacturer : (b) Brand Name: (a) Grade of Cement :
5. (a) Quantity of Cement (bags): (b) Lot No. /Week No. :
6. Manufacturer’s Test Certificates No. :
22 Random Test Details:
a. Physical Test Report from (*) vide their letter No. : (Name of approved lab / Engineering College)
b. Chemical Test Report from (*) vide their letter (Name of approved lab / Engineering College)
No. :* to be filled the name of approval
Lab/Engg. College
8. Details of Physical & Chemical Proprieties :
Chemical Requirements
(as per IS: 4032)
Physical Requirement (as per IS: 4031)
Lime Saturstion Factor (Ratio)

Standard consistency (%)
Temp During Testing
Sulphuric Anhydride (%)

Initial Setting time (Minutes)
Final Setting time (Minutes)
Insoluble Residue (%)

Soundness by Le Chatellar
Compressive
Soundness by Auto Clave
Loss on ignition (%)

Alumuna Iron Ration
Strength
Chlorides (%)
Magnasium (%)
Alkalies (%)
(Mpa)
Specific surface Area
(Sqm/Kg)
3 Days 7 Days 28
Days
As per relevant IS
As per Manufacturer’s
certificate
As per random test certificate
Accepted/Rejected
Remarks with signature
Contractor JE(Civil) Engineer-in-Charge Garrison Engineer
Remarks of BOO/Inspecting Officer/CWE:*To be allotted serially by the GE consignment wise

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION – CONTD/-)
Appendix-‘F’
STEEL SUPPLY & ACCEPTANCE FORM
1.Contract No. :
2.Name of work :
3.Control No. :
4.Name of Manufacturer :
5. (a) Type of steel (TMT/CRS) :

(b) Dia of bar (mm) :
(c) Quantity of steel
(i) Actual Weight (MT) :
(ii) Conversion Weight (MT) :
(b) Manufacturer’s Test Certificates No. :
(c) Random Test Details:

(a) Physical Test Report from (*) vide their letter No. :
(b) Chemical Test Report from (*) vide their letter No. :
* to be filled the name of approval Lab/Engg. College
8. Details of Mechanical & Chemical Proprieties :
Chemical Test Mechanical Test

Sulphur(%) + Phosphorous(%)
CorrosionResistantElement
Yield Strength (N/Sqmm)
TensileStrength
Phosphorous(%)
Weight per meter

Manganese(%)
(Minimum 18 %)
Elongation(%)
RebendTest
(N/mm)2
Sulphur(%)
Silicon(%)
Carbon(%)
Remarks
BendTest
As per relevant
IS
As per
Manufacturer’s
certificate
As per random
test certificate
Remarks with signature Accepted / Rejected
Contractor JE(Civil) Engineer-in-Charge Garrison Engineer
Remarks of BOO/Inspecting Officer/CWE :

SOURCES OF MATERIALS
Sl No Name of Materials Sources of materials for works at station*
1 2 3
1. Coarse aggregate for all RCC, Best locally available as approved by GE
PQC,DLC and PCC works
2. Sand for mortar in Best locally available as approved by GE

masonry,plastering and concreting
3. Stone for hardcore. Best locally available as approved by GE
*Sources indicated are for guidance only.
NOTES: -
1. Sources of materials shall be as above or in the vicinity thereof. The tenderer shall ascertain
the actual position/exact location of source before submitting his tender and no additional
payment shall be made on account of misunderstanding of its distance from site of works.
Contractor may bring material conforming to contract specifications from other sources without
any price adjustment after obtaining written approval of GE.
2. The tenderer shall amongst other things also ascertain all information such as royalties, taxes
duties and other charges etc, on the materials and no additional payment shall be made on
account of the foregoing.
3. However, if due to any ban imposed by the state Govt authority on obtaining the materials
from the sources specified above and or specified materials is not available at the sources
mentioned above these materials conforming to specifications as given in particular
specifications will be procured from any other place/source after getting the same approved
from GE in writing and without any extra cost to Govt.

Date: for Accepting Officer
LIST OF DRAWINGS: Following drawings listed shall form part of these tender documents.
Date of Date of
Sl Description Drg No Sheet drawing Revision
No No /Retraced
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 LIST OF DRAWINGS CE(CG)GOA/LD-1036/2022 1R1/1 12-04-2022

30.06.2022
SITE PLAN
1
2 SITE PLAN SHOWING CE(CG)GOA/SP-1036/2022 / 1R1/2 29-06-2022
EXTERNAL EM SERVICES
1
3 SITE PLAN SHOWING CE(CG)GOA/SP-1036/2022 2R1/2 29-06-2022

EXTERNAL B&R SERVICES
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
A. HANGER-01
4 GROUND FLOOR PLAN CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 01 -1036/2022 1R2/10 17-06-2022
5 FIRST FLOOR PLAN CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 01 -1036/2022 2R1/10 10-06-2022
6 SECOND FLOOR PLAN CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 01 -1036/2022 3R1/10 10-06-2022
7 THIRD GROUND PLAN CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 01 -1036/2022 4R1/10 10-06-2022
8 ROOF PLAN CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 01 -1036/2022 5R1/10 30-06-2022
9 SECTIONS CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 01 -1036/2022 6R2/10 17-06-2022
10 ELEVATIONS CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 01 -1036/2022 7R1/10 17-06-2022
12 KITCHEN AND TOILET DETAILS CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 01 -1036/2022 9R/10 10-06-2022

AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
13 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 01 -1036/2022 10/10 12-04-2022
B. HANGER-02
14 GROUND FLOOR PLAN CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 02 -1036/2022 1R1/10 10-06-2022
15 FIRST FLOOR PLAN CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 02 -1036/2022 2R1/10 10-06-2022
16 SECOND FLOOR PLAN CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 02 -1036/2022 3R1/10 10-06-2022
17 THIRD GROUND PLAN CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 02 -1036/2022 4R1/10 10-06-2022
18 ROOF PLAN CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 02 -1036/2022 5R1/10 10-06-2022

LIST OF DRAWINGS(Contd..)
1 2 3 4 5 6
19 SECTIONS CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 02 -1036/2022 6R1/10 10-06-2022
22 KITCHEN AND TOILET DETAILS CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 02 -1036/2022 9R/10 10-06-2022

AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
23 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS CE(CG)GOA/AR-HAN 02 -1036/2022 10/10 12-04-2022
C. PUMP HOUSE
24
GROUND FLOOR PLAN,ROOF CE(CG)GOA/AR-PH-1036/2022 1R/1 26-04-2022
PLAN, ELEVATIONS,SECTIONS.
D. POL STORE
25 GROUND FLOOR PLAN,
CE(CG)GOA/AR-POL-1036/2022 1/1 12-04-2022
ELEVATION, SECTION AND 30.06.2022
OTHER DETAILS
E. BATTERY CHARGING ROOM & CURRENT CONTROL REGULATOR ROOM

26
GROUND FLOOR PLAN AND CE(CG)GOA/AR-BTY-CUR-1036/2022 1/1 12-04-2022
TYPICAL FLOOR PLAN
B & R DRAWINGS
27 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES
CE(CG)GOA/ SCH-1036/2022 1/5 12-04-2022
CE(CG)GOA/ SCH-1036/2022 2/5 12-04-2022
30.06.2022
CE(CG)GOA/ SCH-1036/2022 3/5 12-04-2022
CE(CG)GOA/ SCH-1036/2022 4/5 12-04-2022
26.06.2022
31 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF
CE(CG)GOA/ WS-1036/2022 5/5 12-04-2022
INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY
E/M DRAWINGS
A. HANGER-01
32
GROUND FLOOR PLAN CE(CG)GOA/EM-HAN 01 -1036/2022 1/5 12-04-2022
SHOWING INTERNAL 27.05.2022
ELECTRIFICATION
33
FIRST FLOOR PLAN SHOWING CE(CG)GOA/EM-HAN 01 -1036/2022 2/5 12-04-2022 27.05.2022
INTERNAL ELECTRIFICATION
34
SECOND FLOOR PLAN CE(CG)GOA/EM-HAN 01 -1036/2022 3/5 12-04-2022
SHOWING INTERNAL 27.05.2022
ELECTRIFICATION
1 2 3 4 5 6
35
THIRD GROUND PLAN CE(CG)GOA/EM-HAN 01 -1036/2022 4/5 12-04-2022
SHOWING INTERNAL
ELECTRIFICATION
CE(CG)GOA/EM-HAN 01 -1036/2022 5/5 12-04-2022
ELECTRIC SUPPLY 30.06.2022
A. HANGER-02
37
GROUND FLOOR PLAN CE(CG)GOA/EM-HAN 02 -1036/2022 1/5 12-04-2022
SHOWING INTERNAL
ELECTRIFICATION
38
FIRST FLOOR PLAN SHOWING CE(CG)GOA/EM-HAN 02 -1036/2022 2/5 12-04-2022
INTERNAL ELECTRIFICATION
39
SECOND FLOOR PLAN 3/5 12-04-2022
SHOWING INTERNAL CE(CG)GOA/EM-HAN 02 -1036/2022
ELECTRIFICATION
40
THIRD GROUND PLAN 4/5 12-04-2022
SHOWING INTERNAL CE(CG)GOA/EM-HAN 02 -1036/2022
ELECTRIFICATION
CE(CG)GOA/EM-HAN 02 -1036/2022 5/5 12-04-2022
ELECTRIC SUPPLY 30.06.2022
C. PUMP HOUSE
42 FLOOR PLAN SHOWING
INTERNAL ELECTRIFICATION CE(CG)GOA/EM-PH-BTY-CUR- 1R/1
AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 26-04-2022
1036/2022
TYPICAL DRAWINGS CE (CG) GOA

43 ARCHTECTURAL NOTES
CE(CG)GOA/TD -101 1/1 31-01-2020
44 TYPIC/\L DETAILS OF FLUSH 1R/1
DOOR WITH WOODEN FRAME CE(CG)GOA/TD -102 24-03-2022
45 TYPICAL DETALS OF WET

CE(CG)GOA/TD -103 1/1 23-12-2021
RISER
46 DETAILS OF SOUNDPROOF
1R/2 17-11-2021
FIXED AND CASEMENT CE(CG)GOA/TD -103
&2R/2
WINDOW
TYPICAL DRAWINGS CE (NAVY KOCHI)
47 DETAILS OF PELMET BOXES

AND <1 BRACKETS FOR TD/A/118 1/3-3/3
CURTAIN ROD.
48 DETAIL OF WALL PEGS AND
TD/A/136 1/1
HOOKS.
49 FUNCTIONAL HEIGHTS OF
TD/A/146 1/1
TOILET/LAVATORY FITTINGS.
50 ARCHITECTURAL NORMS
HEIGHTS OF VARIOUS TD/A/147 1/1
FITTINGS.
1 2 3 4 5 6
51 DETALS OF ROAD,HARD STAND AND FOOT
PATH. TD/A/170 1/1
52 TYPICAL DETAILS OF STEPS AND PLINTH TD/A/190 1/1
PROTECTlON AND RAMP.
53 TYRCAL DETAILS OF ALUMlNIUM WINDOWS / TD/2004/6 1/3-3/3
VENTS.
54 ALUMINIUM SLIDING WINDOWS TD/A/197 1/3-3/3
55 DETALS OF DRAINS AND RCC COVER SLABS. TD/A/167 1/1
56 TYPCAL DETAKS OF HUME PIPE CULVERT TD/A/168 1/1
57 LEGEND FOR INTERNAL ELECTRCAL TD/E/401 1/1

INSTALLATI0N & TYPICAL DETAILS OF FIXING
FAN HOOK, TYPICAL SECTlONAL ELEVATION
SHOWING HEIGHTS OF DIFFERENT
ELECTRICAL FITTlNGS
58 DETAILS OF CABLE DUCT TD/E/404 1/1
59 FRP DOOR FOR BATH/WC TD/A/110 1/1
60 TYPICAL DETIAL OF LIGHTINING CONDUCTOR TD/E/410 1/2 &2/2

FOR FLAT ROOPS
61 TYPICAL DETAIL OF SWITCH BOX, FAN HOOK, TD/99/55 1/5-5/5
SWITCH CUPBOARD AND WATER METER BOX
62 DETAIL OF FIXING OF EXHAUST FAN TD/E/411 1/1
63 TYPICAL DETAILS OF MS HOOKS FOR TYPING TD/A/148 1/1

WIRE ROPE FOR CLOTH DRYING AT BALCONY
64 TYPICAL DETAILS OF MS RUNGS, OPENING TD/A/191 1/1

FOR WINDOW TYPE A/C
65 TYPICAL FIXING DETAILS OF HDPE WATER TD/A/156 1/1
STORAGE TANKS OVER RCC ROOF SLAB
66 DETAILS OF VALUE CHAMBER TD/A/169 1/1
67 TYPICAL DETAILS OF WC AND WASTE WATER TD/77/4 1/1

PIPE CONNECTIONS MANHOLE ETC
68 TD/S/2016/02 1/11
GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS
69 DETAILS OF STEEL GATE (SPAN 3000-6000) TD/A/174 1/2-2/2
AND WICKET GATE (SPAN -1500)
70 DETAILS OF RWP TD/A/150 1/1
71 TYPICAL DETAILS OF BLACK BOARD AND TD/2010/4 1/1
NOTICE DISPLAY BOARD
72 TYPICAL DETAILS OF WC CONNECTIONS AND TD/A/145 1/1
WATER PROOFING ARRANGEMENT IN SUNKEN
SLAB
73 DETAILS OF COVER FOR EXHAUST FAN TD/A/149 1/1
1 2 3 4 5 6
TYPICAL DRAWINGS CE (NAVY) MUMBAI

74 DETAILS OF SEMI UNDERGROUND SUMP TD/S/2011/01 1/1 73
(50000 LTR CAP) AND UNDERGROUND SUMP
(75000 LTR CAP)
75 DETAILS OF RCC SHELVING, PLATFORM, TD/S/2010/11 1/5-5/5 20.04.2022
COUNTER, LOFT ETC
76 TYPICAL DETIALS FOR FALSE CEILING OF A/C TD/2007/38 1/2-2/2 20.04.2022 30.06.2022
AND NON A/C ROOM AND INSULATION FOR
ROOF SLAB OF A/C ROOMS
NOTES:
(i) Site plan has not been uploaded and the same can be seen in the office at HQ CE (CG) Goa/ GE Daman on
any working Day
(ii) The tenderers are supposed to be in possession of STD/CTD/TD drawings, hence the same are not being
uploaded alongwith tender documents, However, in case any tenderer is not having above mentioned drawings,
the tenderer may see and obtain hard/soft copy of these drawings from the office of HQ CE (CG) Goa on any
working day.
(Signature of Contractor) Jt Dir (Contracts)

LIST OF BIS CERTIFIED PRODUCTS TO BE INCORPORATED IN THE WORK
Sl No. Material IS No.

1. Concrete:
Integral water proofing compounds IS-2645-2003
2. Joinery:
Wooden flush door shutters, solid core type IS-2202, Part I -1999
3. Building Hardware
(a) Steel butt hinges IS-1341-1992
(b) Ferrous tower bolts IS-204, Part I-1991
(c) Non-ferrous tower bolts IS-204, Part II-1992
(d) Door handles (non-ferrous) IS-208-1996
(e) Parliament hinges (ferrous) IS-362-1991
(f) Continuous piano hinges IS-3818-1992
(g) Non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts IS-2681-1993
(h) Tee and strap hinges IS-206-1992
(i) Mild steel sliding door bolts IS-281-1991
4. Steel and Iron Work
Steel Doors, Windows and Ventilators IS-1038-1983
5. Roof Covering
Bitumen felts for water proofing and damp proofing IS-1322-1993
6. Ceiling & Lining
(a) Plywood for general purposes IS-303-1989
(b) Block boards IS-1659-2004
(c) Veneered particle board IS-3097-2006
(d) Marine plywood IS-710
(e) Fibre hardboard IS-1658
(f) Medium density fibre board IS-12406
7. Flooring
(a) White portland cement IS-8042
(b) Cement concrete flooring IS-1237-1980
8. Water supply, plumbing, drains & sanitary appliances:
(a) Concrete pipes with or without reinforcement IS-458-2003
(b) Salt glazed stoneware pipes & fittings IS-651-1992
Sl No. Material IS No.

Centrifugally cast (Spun) Iron spigot & socket soil,
(c) waste & vent pipes, fittings & accessories IS-3989-1984
(d) UPVC soil, waste & rain water pipes IS-4985-2000
Cast iron / ductile from drainage pipe & pipe fittings for
(e) over ground non-pressure pipes, spigot & socket IS-1729-2002
services
(f) Galvanised mild steel tubes IS-1239 Part-I-2004
(g) Galvanised mild steel tube fittings IS-1239, Part II-1992
(h) Vitreous China sanitary appliances
(i) Wash down water closets IS-2556-Part-II-2004
(ii) Squatting pans IS-2556 Part-III-2004
(iii) Wash basins IS-2556 Part-IV-2004
(i) Plastic WC seat covers IS-2548 (Part-I & II) 1996
Flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals other
(k) than plastic IS-774-2004
(l) PVC Flushing cisterns IS-7321
(m) Ball valves (horizontal plunger type) including floats
for water supply purposes IS-1703-2003
Cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop
(n) valves IS-781-1984
(o) Pillar taps IS-1795-1982
(p) Cast iron manhole covers and frames IS-1726-1991
9. Electrical Works
(a) Ceiling rose IS-371-1979
(b) Tumbler switches IS-3854-1966
(c) Socket outlet - 3Pin plug and socket IS-1293-2005
(d) Switch fuses (mains & switches) IS-4064
(e) Rigid steel conduit IS-9537 Part-II-1981
(f) Rigid non-metalic conduits IS-3419-1988
Single core cable polythylene insulated and PVC
(g) sheathed cable IS-1596-1977
(h) Starter for tube light IS-2215-1983
(i) Fluorescent lamps IS-2418 Part-I to IV- 1977
(j) Aluminium stranded conductor IS-398-1976
(k) MCBs IS-1828-1996
Sl No. Material
Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (general)
10. fire fighting equipment and its maintenance IS-1648 - 1961
Code of practice for installation of internal fire hydrants
11. in multi-storied buildings IS-3844 - 1966
Dimensions for pipes, threads where pressure tight
12. joints are required on the threads IS- 554
13. Sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing IS- 638
Copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for water
14. work purposes IS-778
Sluice valves for water work purposes (50mm to
15. 300mm ) IS-780
Couplings double male and double female,
16. instantaneous pattern for fire fittings IS-901
Mild steel tubes, tubular and other wrought (Part-I & II)
17. steel fittings IS-1239
18. Swinging type wall mounted hose reel with drum IS-884
19. Fire hose tubing IS-388
20. Foot valves for water work purposes IS-4038
21. Landing valves IS-5290
22. Anti-corrosion treatments for under ground MS pipes IS-10221
23. Swing check type reflux (non- return) valves IS-5312
24. Fire fighting delivery hose IS-636-1988
Specification for fire hose, delivery coupling, branch
25. pipe, nozzles IS- 903-1984
26. Pumps IS-12469
Note: Corresponding year against each IS code whether mentioned or not, latest version in
thetrade shall be implied.

APPENDIX - 'B'
MAKES / NAMES OF FIRMS FOR PRODUCTS TO BE INCORPORATED IN WORK
SL No. ITEMS MAKES
JOINERY AND HARDWARE
1. Factory made Kit Ply Industries, Century Ply Industries, Green Ply Industries,
Flush Doors National Ply Wood Industries, Sarda Ply Wood Industries, Mayur Ply
Wood , M/s Jain Wood Industry New Delhi (JAYNA BRAND).
M/s Gayatri Doors Ltd, Hyderabad,(E-DOOR brand), M/s A-1 Teak
Products Pvt Ltd, Indore - 452002
2. Factory made M/s Bhimsaria Doors Pvt Ltd, Raipur Chattisgarh Pin 492009.
panelled shutters M/s Berar Timber Industries Pvt Ltd National Highway No 8, Village
Saran, Valsad, Gujrat – 396 001
M/s Pioneer Timber Projects, 22, Madhya Marg Sec ‘C’
Chandigarh
M/s A-1 Teak Products Pvt Ltd, Indore - 452002
M/s Betul wood products Pvt Ltd Industrial Estate,

Betul – 460022 (MP) (India)
M/s Egwood electrical and General Industries, 1st Floor,

M.G. Secunderabad – 500 003
M/s Goyal Industries Corpn 83443, D. B. Gupta Marg, New

Delhi 110 005
M/s Prince Timbers, Gulab Nagar, Outside Victoria Bridge,
Jam Nagar – 261 001
M/s Arkay Doors (P) Ltd G-1/45 Shop No 24, Lawrence Rd,
Industrial Area, New Delhi – 110 035
M/s Doorking Industries 27, G.N. Block Sector V,
Industrial Estate, Salt Lake, Calcutta – 700 091
Mehta Seaschem wood industries Pvt Ltd, Old Bunder Road, Near
Ferri Naka ehind Sharda Timber Mart Bhavnagar – 364 001
M/s Jain Doors Pvt Ltd, Kundi Industrial Area
M/s VPRPART, H-399, Mini Growth Centre Phase-II
Sangaviya Jodhpur.
M/s JK Interior Vakola, Santacruz (East)
M/s MP Wood Products
124, LabriyaBheru, Dhar Road,
Indore-452 002(MP)
E-mail: mpwoodindore@gmail.com.”
M/s Jain Wood Industry New Delhi (JAYNA BRAND).
3. Factory made PVC M/s Sintex Industries Ltd, Plastic Division, Kalol, N Gujarat – 383721
door frames and M/s Rajshree Plastiwood Ltd, 10/1 South Tukoganj, Kanchan Baug
shutter Road, Indore,
M/s AccuraPloytech Pvt Ltd Ahmedabad,
M/s Everest composites Pvt Ltd, Vadodra, Gujarat
M/s Poly window, Pune
M/s Dhabriya Agglomerates Pvt Ltd, Jaipur
M/s Lakshmi Fibres Goa
SL No. ITEMS MAKES

4. Wood based Novapan, Bhutan board, Green Ply, Mangalore, Mysore &Chipboard,
partitions Century Ply board India Pvt. Ltd, Kit Ply
4A. Dash tru-hold Dash fasteners Pvt Ltd., C-16, South Extension Part II, New Delhi
expansion
fasteners M/s Mon Traders, C-16, Tardeo, Air conditioned Market, Bombay - 34
5. Rolling shutters & M/s Shaparia Dock and steel Co. Pvt Ltd
collapsible gates
M/s Swastik rolling shutters and Engineer works
M/s Sentinal rolling shutters and Engineering Co
M/s Shalimar rolling shutters
M/s Darshan rolling shutters, Panchvati, Nashik
M/s Ajanta Engineering Works, Pune
M/s Shiv Shakti Engineering, Pune
M/s Prakash & Co., Delhi

6. Mortice locks Harrison, RP Lock Co. New Delhi, Godrej & Boyce Co. Ltd.,KICH
7. Hydraulic door Everlite, Prabhat, Everest Universal, Jai Engineering, Master ISI
Closers (Marked), KICH
8. Glass for glazing Modiguard, Saint Gobain, Haryana Sheet glass, Atul, TATA
9. MS sheet TATA, Jindal, SAIL
10. Aluminium Sections Indal Co , Jindal , Hindal Co, NALCO
11. Drapery rod Vista Levolor, MAC-DÉCOR, Soffia
12. Aluminium doors / Associated profiles & Aluminium Ltd., DG Make / HINDAL Co / INDAL
window Co / Everlite / ECL / Jindal / M/s TulsiVihar, Dr. AB Road, Worli,
/ ventilators Mumbai / Ms Eastern commercial & Industries Enterprises Bombay /
Indian Aluminium Coy (INDAL Co.)
13. Aluminium & brass Argent Industries, Crown Industries, Mech India, Nu-lite Industries,
mongery Perfect Fabricators, Classic
14. Gypsum Based Gypsum board, Arm strong, Ramco, Bison
ceiling
15. Aluminium section Jindal, Indal, Hindalco
for false ceiling
16. Venetian Blinds Trac, Kurlon, MAC, VISTA
17. Laminated sheets Formica, Sunmica, Ecocell, HYLAM, Greenlan Laminates, Merino
Laminates, Century, Kit Vista
18. Particle board and Anchor, Kitply, Century, Diamond, Archidply, Navopan, Deco board,
prelaminated Green Ply, Eco board, M/s Novatek Bombay Burmah Trading Corp
particle Ltd., Wallace Street Fort Bombay-1
board
SL No. ITEMS MAKES

19. Pre moulded non Elcon, Duran Board HD-100
bituminous joint
filler board
20. Pre moulded STP Ltd., Tikitar Industries Ltd, Capital Steel and Chemicals Ltd.,
bituminous joint Garlex Joint Filler by M/s Garlick & Co Pvt Ltd, Roof Rites Delhi , SN
filler board Industries, Delhi
21. AC sheets and Charminar, Everest, UP Asbestos, Rohtas industries, Swastik,

ridges Ramco, Visakha Industries, M/s Asbestos Cement Ltd.,
Ashok Bhawan
22. AC rain water pipes Everest, Rajastan asbestos Cement, Hyderabad Asbestos Cement,
India Asbestos Products, Rohtas, Sabarmangala Manufacture Co.,
Hyderabad Charminar
23. Polymer modified Make Easy Plast from Wall Plast, Chemplast, Ready Plast from Ultra
readymix plaster Tech
24. Pre painted galvalume / JSW colouron + , Tata blusecsope , Lyod insulation ,Tata steel BSL.
galvanised corrugated
steel sheets .
KITCHEN / BATH / SANITARY FITTINGS
SL No. ITEMS MAKES
1 Kitchen chimneys Bajaj, Sunflower, Butterfly, Glen, Sunflame
2 Stainless steel sink ISI marked Nirali, Blue Star, Prayag (GoldRange, Silver
Range & Solitaire), JAYNA, Impex Sanitation
(Marlex/AMC/Simpex) Diamond, Cristal
3 EWC, IWC, Wash Hand Basin, Urinal NeycerKermag (Standard), Hindustan Sanitary
st
Flushing Cisterns and other vitreous Ware Industries,(1 Quality) Parryware (Super
st
china sanitaryware Fine), Cera (1 Quality), Jaquar, Neyveli
ceramics (Neycer), HINDWARE, Commander,
Flushline, Prayag
4 Towel Rails Crown, Jindal, Swastik, ESSESS, Prayag, KICH
5 PVC Low level flushing cistern Commander (Champion), Parryware (Slimline),

JINDAL, SARAL Slim Touch (riddiSiddi),
HINDUSTAN, PRAYAG
6 Seat and cover for WC Commander, Parryware, Cera, Neycer, Johnson,
PRAYAG
7 CP Fancy bib taps, stop valves Jaquar, Marc, Goldline, Prayag, ESSCO,
PARKO, Seiko, Kohler, Plumber
8 PVC toilet cabinet Commander, Jasmine, Cipla Plast, Rotamax
Polytuff
9 Hot &cold water supply fittings M/s Jaquar, M/s L&K, Goldline, M/s Crabtree,
PRAYAG, Marc, Seiko, Plumber
10 Mirror Atul Product Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, , Kohinoor,
Swastik, Golden fish, Saint Gobain, Modiguard
11 PTMT fittings(Bib Taps, stop cock, pillar Prayag, Polytuff

Tap)
APPENDIX - 'B'
SL No. ITEMS MAKES
CHEMICALS / WATER PROOFING COMPOUNDS
1 Chemical for anti-termite treatment for Montari Industries Ltd., 78, Nehru Place, New
structures (Chloropyrifos)(20EC) Delhi -110019
4-H, Clubs (india), 487 A, Gandhi Nagar, Jammu-
04,TRISHUL bearing ISI Mark conforming to IS
specifications,
M/s Dara Chemicals Industries Ltd. D-3, Laj[at
Nagar-01, New delhi-24
‘ DURSBAN’ manufactured by DENOCIL
marketed at Mumbai by DE-NOCIL Corporation
st nd
Pretection Ltd, 1 & 2 Floor, Priojshah Nagar,
Eastern Express Highway, Vikroli (East) Mumbai –
79 ,M/s Kanonia chemicals & Industries, PO
Renukoot-231217, Dist-Sonebhada (UP)
M/s India Pesticides Ltd., E-17 to 23, UOSIDS
Industrial Area, Deva Road, Chinal Lucknow (UP)-
227105,M/s Pest Control (Rajastan) Guruhari
Niwas D-232 Marg Bani Park Jaipur,
Firm having membership of IPCA and holding
Valid licence
2 Water proofing compound Pidilite Industries Ltd, taloja, raigad District, super
Aquacem (India) Ltd., New delhi
M/s Krishna Conchem Products Pvt Ltd , STP
LTD, SICO NO 1 ,IMERMO ,EXCOT,SCOT NO 1
FOSROC,M/s Bauchemimic (India)
FLOORING/TILING
1 Cement tiles/Terrazzo tiles M/s Bharat Tiles & Marble Pvt Ltd
M/s National Tiles & Industries Pvt. Ltd.
M/s Kajaria Tiles Pvt Ltd.,M/s Orient Bell
M/s SomaniTiles,M/s VITCO Tiles, Mumbai
2 Glazed earthen ware/ceramic tiles Johnson Tiles, Somani Tiles, Neycer tiles, Nitco
(rectified (edge cut) tiles) Tiles, Kajaria Tiles, Orient Bell
3 Vitrified Tiles Johnson Tiles, Somani Tiles, Regency Nitco Tiles,

Kajaria , Orient Bell
4 Acid resistant Tiles Johnson Tiles, Somani Tiles, Kajaria Tiles
Orient Bell
5 Inter locking tiles Super tiles & marble Pvt Ltd, Dadar (E), ACME
Floor (S) Tiles Mfg Co, Maulana Azad Road
Vipurva Tiles & Pavers Andheri(W),
Vitco Pavers & Tiles, Thane (W), EUROCON
Mehtab
PAINTS/FINISHES
1 Primer Asian paints, Nerolac, Shalimar, J&N, Berger
Synthetic Enamel
2 Synthetic enamel paint Berger Paints (Luxol high gloss), Goodlass
Nerolac (Nerolac), Asian Paints (Apcolite
Premium), Dulux Gloss 5 in
SL No. ITEMS MAKES

3 Anti corrosive paint on structural steel Asina Paints, Nerolac, Berger,Dulux,
Shalimar, Johnson Nicholson
4 Cement Base Paint SUPER SNOWCEM, DUROCEM,

SILVOCEM, AQUACEM, SIMCO, SNOWEM,
SHALIMAR, Asian Paints, Nitco Paint, Pvt Ltd.
5 Acrylic emulsion paints (interior) Berger Paints (Rangoli Acrylic emulsion),
Asian Paints (Premium emulsion), Nerolac
Paints (Beauty Gold acrylic emulsion), ICI
Dulux (super smooth acrylic emulsion)
6 Acrylic exterior antifungal paints Asian Paint (Apex) / Ultima,
Berger Paint (Weather coat all guard
emulsion)
ICI Dulux (Whether shield max/Ultra clean
emulsion)
Nerolac (Excel anti peel emulsion)
7 Dry Oil bound distempers and emulsions Asian Paints (Tractor acrylic distemper)
Nerolac Paints (Beauty acrylic distemper)
Berger Paints, Shalimar Paints, Jenson &
Nicholson. (Jensolin acrylic distemper), ICI
(Mailite acrylic distemper)
8 Colour anodizing for Aluminium sections Conpaptex, Vadodara, KrishnaMetal
industries, Mumbai. Mansi chemical,
ahemdabad, Anand tech Process, Bengaluru
9 Putty Shalimar, diamond Paints New delhi, UK Paint
Industries, New Delhi, Birala, J K White, Gold
Mohar
10 Hot applied thermo plastic road marking M/s Shivalik Primo India Pvt Ltd. New delhi,
paint (As per cl 803.4 of MORTH) Asian Paints Ltd, SHALIMAR, STP Ltd, SAI
Thermoplastic Paints Ltd..
PLUMBING
1 PPR Pipes SFMC, RELIANCE, SUPREME.
2 CI Pipes (centrifugally cast & vertical Neco, Kesoram, IISCO, JINDAL, TATA,
cast ) and fittings TISCO, Kalinga, Prince. SKF
3 GI and MS pipes Tata, Swastik, Jindal, Prakash, Zenith, Surya,
Quality, Gujrat tubes, Lotus, Hindustan.
4 HDPE pipes Dutron, Finolex, Prince, Kissan, Prayag,
Reliance4, Noble
5 PVC SWR Pipes Kissan, Prince, Supreme.
6 Stop valves Jaquar, Leader, Jindal, Seico, GEM, Goldline,
T&K Industries, Neeta,Zolto
7 Foot valve Kirloskar, Leader, Prayag, SANT, Kartar
8 Sluice valves (ISI marked) Leader, Venus, Kirloskar, Kajariwal
Upadhyaya Valves, L&T (AUDCO), BIR,
SANTA, Kartar, Indian Valves, Kartar
9 Gate valve, Ball valve Neeta, Kartar, Leader, Zoloto, Rotex, Prayag,
Boss,
APPENDIX - 'B' (Contd…)

SL No. ITEMS MAKES
9 PVC/HDPE water tanks (ISI marked) Sintex, Rotomex, Polycon, OMTEX, Ashish
10 Float Valve Prayag, Satyam, Goldline, Techno
11 GI Pipe Fittting Zolto, Leader, Unik
12 Loft Tanks Sintex, Polycon, Plasto, Ganga
MISCELLANEOUS
1 APP membrane Texas, STP, IWL, Hydrotech, Tiki Asphalt,

Pidilite Industries Ltd. Mumbai
2 Protective Coating to Reinforcement PSL Ltd, Zary Causeway, KAchigam, Daman

Bars (UT) or equivalent, Pidilite, Zinga (Calcutta),
SRMB Srijan Ltd, Hariom Epoxy Shield
3 Bituminous Sealing Compound STP Ltd, SN Industries, Tikitar
4 ERW pipes Jindal, Tata, SAIL
5 Tools Taparia, Jhalani, Imperial

SL
No ITEMS MAKES
1 2 3
ELECTRICAL ITEMS
Sl
Items/Materials Name of Manufacturers/firms
No
1 Power Transformer CROMPTON GREAVES, KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC Co, BHEL,
33/11 KV SCHNEIDER, ABB, ALSTOM, T&D INDIA, VOLTAS,
SIEMENS, TRANSFORMERS &RECTIFIERS (INDIA)
LIMITED, T &D INDIA.
2 Transformer 11 KV/ 415 CROMPTON GREAVES, KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC Co, BHEL,
Volts SCHNEIDER, ABB, ALSTOM, T&D INDIA, VOLTAS,
LIMITED, T &D INDIA,
2A Isolation Transformers/ CROMPTON GREAVES, KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC Co, BHEL,

UPS etc SCHNEIDER, ABB, ALSTOM, T&D INDIA, VOLTAS,
LIMITED, T &D INDIA,
3 GOD (Gang Operated PACTIL (MATRO), JAIPURIYA BROTHERS, OBLUM, ATLAS,

Device), ABB
11 KV and above
4 HT Switch gear 33 KV, BHEL, ABB, SIEMENS, CROMPTON GREAVES, SCHNEIDER,
VCB (Out Door) ALSTOM, KIRLOSKAR
5 HT Switch gear 11 KV, BHEL, ABB, SIEMENS, CROMPTON GREAVES,
VCB (Indoor/Outdoor) SCHNEIDER, ALSTOM.
6 HT Switch gear ABB, SCHNEIDER, C&S, SIEMENS, L&T
protection relay
electronics
7 HT Trivector Meter SECURE, L&T, ABB (ELSTER), SCHLUMBERGER, SIEMENS
8 HT Ring main unit, SF6, ABB, SIEMENS, CROMPTON GREAVES, SCHNEIDER
11 KV
9 Package/unified Sub- ABB, SIEMENS, CROMPTON GREAVES, SCHNEIDER
Station
10 HT Cable joints heat RAYCHEM, M-SEAL, DENSON, BIRLA 3M, MAHINDERA &
shrinkable/cold MAHINDERA, SIEMENS,ICC, RAYOHEM, LT JOINT
shrinkable/push on type
11 CT & PT, 11 KV/33 KV PRAGATI, AE, KAPPA, SCHNEIDER, L&T (AS PER HT PANEL
MANUFACTURERS DESIGN), SIEMENS, ABB
12 HT 33 KV/11 KV XLPE UNIVERSAL CABLES (UNISTAR), ASIAN CABLES (RPG), CCI
Cables (TROPODOUR), POLYCAB, NICCO, GLOSTAR
13 Disc Insulator/Pin BHEL, WS INSULATORS, JAYSHREE, MODERN INSULATOR,
Insulator 11 KV and 33 YAMUNA POWER (DENSON), JAYPURI CO.
14 HT/LT Steel tubular NATIONAL TUBING CO. KANPUR, SINGH PROFILES,
swaged pole QUALITY STEELS, BHARAT CONDUIT & POLES CO
15 HT/LT PCC Poles SATHE CEMENT VASTU NIRMITI PUNE, DEVANG FENCE
THANE, VAIBHAV CEMENT PRODUCT PUNE, AKAT
16 Bus Bar Trunking L&T,SIEMENS,SCHNEIDER,ABB,GE,LEGRAND,C&S
17 Lightning Arrestor non- OBLUM, ELPRO, ATLAS, PACTIL, CROMPTON GREAVES,

linear resistor type SCHNEIDER, BHEL
SL
ITEMS MAKES
No.
18 LT Panels SIEMENS, CROMPTON GREAVES, L&T, ABB, HPL INDIA
LTD, DOLAR, EPLEC LEGRAND
18A HT PANEL L&T,SIEMENS,SCHNEIDER,ABB,GE,EPLEC LEGRAND,C&S
19 LT AIR CIRCUIT L&T, ABB, GE, SIEMENS, BCH, LEGRAND, SCHNEIDER,

BREAKER HPL,C&S
20 MCCB LEGRAND (DPX), SIEMENS/ L&T (SENTREN), SCHNEIDER
(MERLIN GERIN) / C&S, MDS, ABB (ISOMAX SERIES), GE
(RECORD PLUS) , HPL INDIA LTD
20A ACB (Drawout type) GE, SCHNEIDER, HAVELLS, LEGRAND, SIEMENS, C&S
20B Contactor SIEMENS, ABB, L&T, GE, SCHNEIDER, BCH, C&S,LEGRAND
21 MCB/RCBO/RCCB/D L&T (HEGAR), LEGRAND (LEXIC), SIEMENS (BETAGUARD),
B/Isolators SCHNEIDER (MG-MULTI-9), ABB, GE, HAVELLS, HPL, CGS,
C&S, MDS
21A Prewired DB HAVELLS/LEGRAND/L&T/SIEMENS/ABB, C&S, MDS
22 Voltmeter/Ammeter/Fr AE, IMP, L&T (RISHAB), HAVELLS, BENTEC, TTL
equency
meter/Meters/ PF
Meter (Analog Type)
23 Voltmeter/Ammeter/Fr ENERCON, DIRIS, DUCATI, L&T (RISHAB), TRINITY, RAAS,

equency meter/PF CONCORD, AE, SECURE, TTL TECHNOLOGY, ENERCON,
Meter (Digital Type) LEGRAND
24 Selector Switch SIEMENS, KAYCEE, C&S. L&T, LEGRAND

25 Street light timers L&T, LEGRAND, GE, BAJAJ, SIEMENS, ABB, BCH,
26 LT Cables, 1100 Volts, RPG, UNIVERSAL CABLES, KEI, FINOLEX CABLES, POLY
XLPE CAB, HAVELLS INDIA LTD, HAVELLS INDIA LTD, RR
KEBLES, RPG CABLES (KEC) ,UNIFLEX,
27 Change over Switches L&T, SIEMENS, CROMPTON GREAVES, GE,

HAVELLS/INDOASIAN/ STANDARD, C&S, LEGRAND
28 Tamper proof electronic SECURE, L&T, ACCURATE METERS, HAVELLS, HPL,
meter
29 (a) Voltage Stabilizers 5 SINETRAC, BRENTFORD, VINITEC, AE, MICROTECH,
KVA to 25 KVA APLAB
(b) Voltage Stabilizers up VINTEC, SINETRAC, MICROTECH, POWER WARE,
to 4 KVA APLAB,
V GUARD, AE
(c) Voltage Stabilizers ANDREW YULE (BRENTFORD), AE, APLAB
above 25 KVA (Servo
Controlled)

Sl No Items/Materials Name of Manufacturers/firms
30 UPS (off line & on line) TATA LIMBART, SINETRAC, APLAB, POWER
(a) above 5 KVA CONVERSION TECH, PROTECH SERVICES , MICROTECH
(b) up to 5 KVA
31 DG SETS CUMMINS, KIRLOSKAR OILS ENGINES, ASHOK
(i) Engine LEYLAND, GREAVES LTD, COTTON, MAHINDRA
(Iii) Alternator KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC, CROMPTON GREAVES,
STAMFORD, ABB, SIEMENS
(iii) Acoustic Enclosures BHASKAR POWER PROJECTS PVT LTD, KALA GENSET,
for DG Sets (as per CPCB GOEL POWER ENGINEERS, JACKSON, SUDHIR GENSET
norms) LTD, POWERICA, RA POWER, SHREE DIESELS,
CROMPTON GREAVES.
32 LT Capacitor Banks SIEMENS, L&T, ABB, EPCOS, GE, UNIVERSAL, C&S,
LEGRAND
32A APFC Panels L&T, SCHNEIDER, CROMPTON GREAVES, HPL,
33 Electronic Energy Meters SECURE, L&T, ALSTOM(AREVA),HPL, LEGRAND
33A COPPER WIRES FINOLEX, POLYCAB, NICCO, HAVELLS, PLAZA.
650/1100V
34 CTs (LT) KAPPA, IMP, AE, SIEMENS, L&T
35 PVC insulated Copper FINOLEX, L&T, HAVELLS, POLYCAB, PLAZA, ANCHOR
wires - 650/1100 Volts
36 Steel Conduit AKG, BEC, NIC, BHARAT STEEL TUBES, CTI
37 PVC casing capping PRESS FIT, PRECISION, SUPREME, MODI. PRINCE- ( only
ISI marked)
38 PVC Rigid Pipe (Heavy FINOLEX, PRINCE, TIRUPATI, DUTRON, SUPREME, AKG,
Duty)/ PVC Conduit Pipe PRECISION, AVON PLAST
39 Piano type Switch/ LEGRAND, HAVELLS, CPL, STANDARD CONA,
Sockets LEADER.,C&S
40 Modular Switches/ sockets ANCHOR (ROMA), LEGRAND, CRABTREE, HAVELLS,
MDS, PHILIPS, C&S
41 Ceiling Rose ANCHOR, LEGRAND, CRABTREE, CONA, LEADER,
PRESTOP.
42 Street light luminaries PHILIPS, CROMPTON GREAVES, BAJAJ, WIPRO,
HPSV/Metal Halide C&S,HALONIX
43 LED Street Light, LED PHILIPS,ELEKTRON,CROMPTON
High bay Fittings GREAVES,SURYA,HALONIX,C&S
44 Fluorescent tube light PHILIPS, CROMPTON GREAVES, BAJAJ, WIPRO, C&S,
fittings , LED tube light WIPRO, SIAKA,HALONIX
45 CFL Fittings PHILIPS, CROMPTON GREAVES, BAJAJ, WIPRO, SURYA,
HAVELLS, C&S,HALONIX
46 CFL Lamps OSRAM, PHILIPS, CROMPTON GREAVES, BAJAJ, WIPRO,
HALONIX, SURYA ROSHNI LTD
47 Exhaust Fans CROMPTON GREAVES, KHAITAN, BAJAJ, USHA
48 Electric Call Bell ANCHOR, LEGRAND, CONA, C&S
Ceiling fan / Wall Mounted
49 Fan/Air CROMPTON GREAVES, ALMONARD, USHA, KHAITAN,
Circulator BAJAJ

Sl No Items Manufacturer
50 PVC Pole Boxes SINTEX, FINOLEX, UNIVERSAL
51 Flame Proof Electrical BALIGA LIGHTNING EQUIPMENT, BAJAJ ELECTRICALS,
Fittings SHYAM SWITCHGEAR, FLEXPRO, SUDHIR, CGS.
52 ACSR Conductor ALL-IND, ICC, NICCO, BHARAT CONDUCTORS, INDIAN

ALUMINIUM CO
53 Laminated Sheet Cover HYLAM, FORMICA, GREEN LAMINATED BOARDS,
ANCHOR, BAKELITE
54 Aviation Obstruction Light BAJAJ, CROMPTON GREAVES, WIPRO, PHILIPS
55 Thimbles/Studs/Lugs DOWELLS, JAIPURIA BROTHERS, AXIS, INDIRA
56 Lifts OTIS, MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC, KONE INDIA, SCHINDLER
ELEVATORS, HITACHI LIFTS, FUJITEC INDIA, THYSSEN
KRUPP ELEVATORS INDIA
57 LT Changeover Switch L&T, SCHNEIDER, HAVELLS, STANDARDS, C&S,
LEGRAND
58 Battery Charger VOLTSTART, AE, BCH
59 Cranes MUKUND LTD, LOAD MATE, DEMAG, ELECTROMECH,

JESSOP CRANES, WMI(KONE CRANES), CRANEX LTD
Sl Items/Materials Name of Manufacturers/firms

No
WATER SUPPLY
1 GI Pipes JINDAL, TATA, SWASTIK, BANSAL, ZENITH.
2 HDPE Pipe DUTRON, FINOLEX, TIRUPATI, SUPREME, DUPLON
(RELIANCE), KISAN MOULDING LTD
3 CI Pipes ELECTRO-STEEL, KESORAM, IISCO, TATA, LANCO
4 DI Pipes ELECTRO-STEEL, JINDAL SAW, TATA METALIKS, KUBOTA
PIPES LTD, LANCO INDUSTRIES, ELECTROTHERM (INDIA
LTD)
5 CPVC Pipe FLOW GUARD, DUTRON, FINOLEX, ASTRAL
5 PP-R Pipe SFMC, RELIANCE, SUPREME.
7 MS/ERW Pipes TATA, JINDAL, BST

8 Sluice Valves KIRLOSKAR, L&T (AUDCO), LEADER, UPADHAYAY,
KARTAR
8A Non Return Valve KIRLOSKAR, LEADER, VENUS, NVR, NORMEX/ KARTAR
9 Pump Sets-Mono Block KIRLOSKAR, CROMPTON GREAVES, BEST & CROMPTON
(BEACON), MATHER & PLATT, GROUND FOSS
10 Centrifugal Pumps KIRLOSKAR, BEST & CROMPTON (BEACON), KSB,
MATHER & PLATT, GROUND FOSS
11 Submersible Pumps KSB, CALAMA, KIRLOSKAR, GROUND FOSS, CROMPTON
12 Submersible Cable FINOLEX, NICCO, HAVELLS, PLAZA
13 Motor Starter L&T, BCH, SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS, GE
14 Electric Motors BHARAT BIJLEE, KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC, CROMPTON
GREAVES, ABB, SIEMENS
15 Single Phase L&T, SIEMENS, MINILEC, SINETRAC
Preventer/Phase Sequence
corrector
16 Silver Ionization Plant SIEMENS, BHEL, BHARTI WATERS, JYOTI WATERS,
PIOUS WATERS
17 Dual Ionization Plant SIEMENS, BHEL, BHARTI WATERS, JYOTI WATERS,
PIOUS WATERS
18 Air Release Valve BIR, KIRLOSKAR, LEADER AUDCO, L&T, NORMEX
19 Foot valve VENUS, KIRLOSKAR, LEADER, VENUS, NORMEX, L&T

(AUDCO)
20 Butterfly Valves L&T (AUDCO),NVR, NORMAX, CASTLERS, LEADER
21 Battery EXIDE, AMCO, AMRON, TATA GREEN
22 CI Fitting UPADHAYAY, KEJERIWAL, BIR, SANT, VENUS
23 Water Meter CAPSTON, DASHMESH, ACCUFLOW
24 Gate Valves/ Globe Valves ZOLOTO/LEADER/PRAYAG/CRI/HM
AIR CONDITIONING
Sl
No
1 Air Handling Unit BLUE STAR/ VOLTAS/ CARRIER / HITACHI
2 Cooling Tower MIHIR/ PAHARPUR/ VOLTAS/ POLO/ DELTA
3 Chillers/Condenser VOLTAS/ BLUE STAR/ CARRIER
4 Compressors DANFOSS/ KIRLOSKAR, BLUE STAR, VOLTAS, CARRIER.
Pumps (Chillers & KIRLOSKAR/GROUNDFOSS/MATHER & PLATT/BEST &
5
Condensers) CROMPTON (BEACON)
SIEMENS/ABB/CROMPTON GREAVES/KIRLOSKAR
6 Motors
ELECTRIC/BHARAT BIJLEE/NGEF
7 Pot/Y-Strainer EMERALD/RAPID COOL/DANFOSS/SPARLAN
8 MS Piping TATA/BST/JINDAL
9 (a) Butterfly Valve AUDCO/SANT/ NORMAX/LEADER
(b) Check Valve/ AUDCO/SANT/ BIR/ KIRLOSKAR/LEADER
Non Return Valve
(c) Gate Valve LEADER/ AUDCO/ITT BELL & GOSSETT/ HM/ZOLOTO
10 Balancing Valve AUDCO/DANFOSS/FLOWCON
11 Pressure Gauge FIEBIG/ BAKER MERCER/DANFOSS/L&T
12 Dial Type Thermometers FIEBIG/ TEDDINGTON/DANFOSS

13 Insulation
(i) Glass wool OWENS CORNING/UP TWIGA/LLOYD
(ii) Insulation (Expand

CAPRICORN/BEARDSELL/PENGUIN/LLOYD
Polystyrene)
(iii) Insulation (Cross
SUPREME/TROCELLANE/PARAMOUNT/LLOYD
Polyethylene Foam)
(a) Controls (3 Way Valves
14 SIEMENS/HONEYWELL/JOHNSON/ANERGY
Actuator & Motor)
(b) Thermostats ENERGY/ SIEMENS/ HONEYWELL/ JOHNSON/ ANERGY
15 Extruded Aluminum Grills DYNA CRAFT/ RAVISTAR/ MAPRO/ CARRYAIRE/

Diffusers COSMOS
16 (a) Control Cable NICCO/ASIAN CABLES/UNIVERSAL/FINOLEX/POLYCAB
(b) Power Cable GLOSTER, ASIAN, UNIVERSAL, ELEKTRON

17 Contactors/Starters L&T/SIEMENS/ABB/BCH
18 Overload Relay L&T/SIEMENS/ABB/BCH
19 Time Delay Device L&T/SIEMENS/SCHNEIDER/BCH
20 Single Phasing Preventer L&T, SIEMEN, MINILEC, SCHNEIDER

Sl
No
SAIL/TATA/JINDAL
21 GSS Sheets
22 AIR CURTAIN SAN PRODUCTS,EURONICS,CRISIL
23 DEHUMIDIFIER BRYAIR,OSTER BIONAIRE, NOVITA
24 Fire Dampers/ Grill/Diffuser DYNA/RAVISTAR/MAPRO/CARYAIRE/ATE

25 Expansion Valve DANFOSS/SPORLAN/RANCO
Switchgears MCCBs/ LEGRAND/L&T/SCHNEIDER (MERLIN
26
ACBs/MCBs GERIN)/GE/SIEMENS/BCH/C&S
27 LT Control Panel FACTORY FABRICATED CONTROL PANEL WITH CPRI
TEST CERTIFICATE
28 LT current transformer IMP, KAPPA, AE, SIEMENS
29 HP/LP/Op Cut Out PENN/INDOFOSS/RANCO/DANFOSS/JOHNSON
HONEYWELL/FORBES MARSHALL/SUBZERO/JOHNSON
30 Digital temp and RH meters
CONTROL
31 Centrifugal Fans (for AHU's) NICOTRA/KRUGER/COMBIFREE/OEM'S MAKE
32 Strip Heaters RACOLD/DASSPASS/UE
33 Humidistat PENN, DANFOSS, HONEY WELL, JOHNSON, INDOFOSS
34 Filter JOHN FOWLER/THERMODYNE/TENACITY/PUROLOTER
35 Factory Built Duct ROLASTAR/TECHNO AIR/CAM DUCT
36 Selector Switch L & T, LEGRAND, C&S, OMEGA, KAYCEE
37 Indicating light SIEMEN, CONCORD, C&S, LEGRAND
38 Digital Voltmeter/ Amp meter AE, EMERCON, SECURE, L&T,C&S
39 Current Transformer AE, KAPPA, SCHENIDER
40 Flexible Connector CORI ENGINEER, RESISTO FLEX
RAPID COOL/ROSS THERMAL SYSTEM PVT

41 Hot Water Generator
LTD/REYNOLD/RAPID CONTROL
42 Air Washer BREEZE AIR/THERMODYNE/CHEMPAC/KLENZOID
Non Chemical Type SCALEOFF (MFD BY M/S WELDON), SCALEX (MFD BY
43
Electrostatic Scale Preventer M/S TBI SYSTEM), HYDROCON
44 Split Ac , Window Ac DAIKIN/BLUESTAR/LG/VOLTAS/SAMSUNG
APPOLO, EDWARD, MARLAY SYSTEMS, SAFEX,
45 Smoke Detector
SENSOR
46 Manual Call Point MINIMAX, APPOLO, VIJAY, SAFTEX, HARDIK ENGGS
47 Fire Hydrant Valves MINIMAX, VIJOY, SAFEX, CEASE FIRE.
46 Fire Hose Pipe/ Reel MINIMAX, SAFEX, VIJAY, DUNLOP
MINIMAX, SAFEX, VIJAY, SAFEZONE, CEASE FIRE,
47 Fire Extinguishers
MONARC ENGINEERINGS

Sl
No
Branch Pipe Nozzle MINIMAX, SAFEX, VIJAY, SAIFEZONE, CEASE FIRE, MONARC
48
and Couplings ENGINEERINGS
49 Control Panels CEASE FIRE, VIJAY FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS, EX- FLAME.
50 AIR WASHER BREEZE AIR, THERMODYNE,CHEMPAC,KLENZOID
SOLAR WATER
51 BHEL, MAHARAJA WHITELINE, RACOLD, TATA BP,USHA
HEATER
SOLAR LED
52 WIPRO, CROMPTON GREAVES, PHILIPS, HAVELLS, BAJAJ
STREET LIGHT
MISC
SODIUM
53 AQAFID, ALTOCH DECLIBAC,BIROJING
HYDROCHLORIDE
BLEACHING KANORIA CHEMICALS, SREERAM BENGAL CHEMICALS,
54
POWDER KASHYAP INDUSTRIES
SREERAM BENGAL CHEMICALS, JYOTI, INDIAN ABRASIVE
55 ALUM
IMPEX INDIA, DANEC INTERNATIONAL
56 GLAND PACKING CHAMPION, COMMANDER, NAVEEN ENGINEERING
57 WATER GASKET CHAMPOIN, CHARMINAR, COMMANDER
58 FLOAT VALVE PRAYAG, SATYAM, TECHNO, GOLDLINE
59 GI PIPE FITTINGS ZOLOTO, LEADER, UNIK
60 Bitumen emulsion (i) M/s Hindustan colas Ltd
(ii) M/s Indian oil total pvt ltd
(iii) M/s Tiki Tar and Shell India Pvt ltd
(iv) M/s Ooms Polymer modified bitumen Pvt ltdLtd
(iv) M/s STP limited.
NOTES:
(I) Items shall be considered whichever is applicable only and if not specifically mentioned in Sch ‘A’.
(ii) Sources indicated are only for guidance and approval of the Garrison Engineer shall be taken in
proper time before procurement of materials and its incorporation.
(iii) The above list is not exhaustive but indicative of all items required for work under the contract.
(iv) Sources of materials shall be as above or in the vicinity thereof. The tenderer shall ascertain the
actual position/exact location of source before submitting his tender and no additional payment shall be
made on account of misunderstanding of its distance from site of works. Contractor may bring material
conforming to contract specifications from other sources without any price adjustment after obtaining
written approval of the Garrison Engineer.
(v) The tender shall amongst other things also ascertain all information such as royalties, taxes duties
and other charges etc. on the materials and no additional payment shall be made on account of the
foregoing.
(vi) All makes approved by E-inC’s Br, ADG (P) Chennai CESC on the day of bid submission are
deemed to be included, even if not mentioned above.
(vii) The name approved make is not shown in the list attached, but the same has been added/ deleted
by E-in-C are also deemed to be added/ deleted in the above approved list.
APPENDIX – D’
RECOVERY RATES OF TESTING CHARGES
Sl Materials Test Method of Frequency of Tests Level Rate per Remarks

no testing of test Test
Rs. P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Bricks (i) Compressive strength IS-3595 AS per IS-5454 a given under À’ 330/- Checks for visual
(Part-II) and dimensional
characteristics
shall also be
carried out
(ii) Water absorption - do - Lot size Sample Permissible À’ 330/- As per IS-5454
Size No of
defective
bricks
(iii) Efflorescence - do - 1001 to 5 0 À’ 330/- Legend:-
(Part I) 10000 A-Site lab
10001 to 10 0 C-National test
35000 house / SEMT
35001 to 15 1 wing Pune /Govt
50000 Engineering
College/NABL Lab
2. Coarse aggregates (i) Sieve analysis IS-2386 One test for every 15cum of aggregates À’ 660/-
(Part-I) or part thereof brought to site
(ii) Flakiness Index - do - - do - À’ 250/-
(iii) Estimation of deleterious IS-2386 One test for every 100cum of aggregates À’ 600/-
materials (Part-I) or part thereof
(iv) Organic impurities - do - One test per source of supply `C’ 275/-
(v) Moisture content - do - Regularly as required À’ 330/-

(Part - II)

APPENDIX – D’(Contd..)
RECOVERY RATES OF TESTING CHARGES (CONTD…)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(vi) Specific gravity - do - One test for each source of supply `C’ 330/- -
3. Fine aggregate (i) Sieve analysis IS-2386 One test for every 15CUM of FA or part À’ 660/- -
(Part-I) when brought to site.
(ii) Test for clay, silt and - do - - do - À’ 500/- -

impurities (Part-I)
(iii) Specific gravity - do - One for each source of supply `C’ 330/- -
(Part-I)
(iv) Moisture content - do - Regularly as required subject to À’ 330/- -

(Part – II) 2tests/day when being used
(v) Test for organic impurities - do - One test for each source of supply `C’ 275/- -
(Part - II)
4. Structural Concrete (i) Slump-test or compacting IS-119 The minimum frequency of sampling of À’ 300/- Random sampling
(M-25 grade and factor test or vee-bee time concrete of each grade shall be as shall be carried to
above) under: cover all mix units
(ii) Compressive strength IS-516 Qty of concrete No of samples À’ 900/- -
In the work
(Cubic Meter)
1----5 1
6----15 2
16---30 3
31---50 4
51 and above 4+1 for each
Addl 50m or
part thereof

RECOVERY RATES OF TESTING CHARGES (CONTD…)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5. (a) PCC Block for (i) Compressive strength IS-2156 – 08 Blocks out of 20 À’ 900/- Sample: 20blocks
walling (Hollow Block) 1984 (Appx- from consignment
`B’) of every
5000blocks or part
thereof
(ii) Water absorption - do - 03 Blocks out of 20 `C’ 330/- -
(Appx-`B’)
(iii) Density - do - 03 Blocks out of 20 `C’ 330/- -

(Appx-À’)
(b) PCC solid Block (i) Compressive strength IS-2185 08 Blocks out of 20 À’ 900/- Sample: 20blocks
for walling from consignment
of every 5000
blocks or part
thereof
(ii) Water absorption - do - 03 Blocks out of 20 `C 330/- These blocks to be
checked for
dimension and
weight
(iii) Density - do - 03 Blocks out of 20 `C’ 330/- -
6. Cement Flooring Tiles (i) Water absorption IS-1237 06 tiles out of 18 `C’ 330/- Sample of 18tiles
/ Terrazzo Tiles (Appx-`D’) from each source
of supply selected
at random
(ii) Wet transverse strength - do - - do - `C’ 660/- -
(Appx-È’)
RECOVERY RATES OF TESTING CHARGES (contd…)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(i). Setting time ‘C’ 500/-
7. Cement
(ii). Soundness ‘C’ 550/-
iii). Compressive ‘C’ 550/-

Strength
(iv). Fineness ‘C’ 275/-
8. Reinforcement Steel (i). Physical tests up to 16mm ‘C’ 2500/-

dia (normal mass, tensile
elongation, bend and rebend)
(ii). More than 16mm dia ‘C’ 2750/-
9. Timber (i) Specific gravity and weight IS-1708- Minimum `3’ samples from a lot of 4 Cum `C’ 120/- -
1960 or 250pieces of seasoned timber.
(ii) Moisture content - do - - À’ 120/- -
10. Water for construction (i) Test for Acidity IS-456 & Once at the stage of approval of source `C’ 240/- Also refer clause
purpose 3015 of water 4.3 of IS-456 and
its subsequent sub
clauses regarding
suitability of water

RECOVERY RATES OF TESTING CHARGES (contd…)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(ii) Test for Alkalinity - do - - `C’ 240/- -
Test for solid content - do - - `C’ 300/- -
11. Welding of steel work Visual inspection test IS-822-1970 100% by visual inspection Work 360/- Specialized tests
Clause 7.1 site their method and
frequency to be
decided on
consideration of
their importance by
the Accepting
Officer
12. Timber paneled and (a) Dimensions, sizes, IS-1003- Frequency of sampling from each lot À’ 180/- -
glazed Door/ Window workmanship and finish 1977 shall be as under:
& shutters (Including (Part I) Lot size Sample size
factory made shutters) 26 to 50 5
51 to 100 8
101 to 150 13
151 to 300 20
301 to 500 32
501 to 1000 50
1001 and above 80
(b) Strength test IS-1303- Form the each lot 5% of the factory - - -
(i) Slamming 1990 made shutters shall be manufacturer
tested for strength tests
(ii) Impact indentation - do - - - - -
(iii) Shock resistance - do - - - - -
(iv) Edge loading - do - - - - -

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS Part-II

RECOVERY RATES OF TESTING CHARGES
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13. Plywood (a) Moisture content IS-1734- Six tests pieces cut from each of the `C’ 240/- Sampling shall be
(IS-303-1989) 1983 boards selected as per table shall be as per IS-7835-
(Part-I) subjected to tests 1975 Tables
14. Wood particle board (a) Density IS-2360- Three test specimens from each sample À’ 60/- Sampling shall be
(medium density) (Part-III) (size 150mm x 75mm) as per IS-3487-83
IS-3097-1985 with moisture
meter
(b) Moisture Content - do - - do - À’ & 60/- -
`C’
(c) Water Absorption - do - - do – (Size 300mm x 300mm) À’ 60.- -
(Part 16)
(d) Swelling due to surface - do - - do – (Size 125mm x 100mm) À’ 60/- -

absorption (Part-17)
(e) Swelling in water - do - - do – (Size 200mm x 100mm) À’ 60/- -
(f) Modulus of rupture - do - Three test specimens as per IS-2380-77 `C’ 90/- -
(Part-4)
(g) Screw withdrawal strength - do - - do – as per IS-2385 `C’ 120/- -
(Part-4)
NOTE:
The rate given in Appendix- ‘D’ above shall be enhanced by 70%
Jt Dir (Contracts)
For Accepting

Tender Pages

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tender Pages

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tender Pages

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CA NO: CE CG/GOA/ OF 2022-23 SER PAGE NO 01

MILITARY ENGINEER SERVICES

Sl Description Serial Page No.

3. Instructions for filling and submission of tenders.

Notice of e-Tender IAFW-2162 (Revised 1960) including Appendix ‘A’

Item Rate tender and contract for works [comprising BOQ

6. General Conditions of contracts IAFW-2249 (1989 Print)

8. Particular Specifications, List of drawings and Appendices.

9. Amendments / Errata to Tender documents

10. Relevant correspondence.

11. Acceptance letter.

Signature of Contractor Jt. Dir(Contracts)

HQ, Chief Engineer (Coast Guard)

82079 / 120 / E8 22 Jul 2022

Dear Sir (s),

10. PERFORMANCE SECURITY DEPOSIT

Signature of Contractor Jt. Dir(Contracts)

Date: For Accepting Officer

INSTRUCTIONS ON FILLING AND SUBMISSION OF TENDER

01 EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD)

2 PERFORMANCE SECURITY (Refer Condition 19 of IAFW-2249 General Condition of

INSTRUCTIONS ON FILLING AND SUBMISSION OF TENDER (CONTD…)

3. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE

INSTRUCTIONS ON FILLING AND SUBMISSION OF TENDER (CONTD…)

8. REFUND OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY

9. These instructions shall form part of the contract documents.

Signature of Contractor Jt. Dir (Contracts)

MILITARY ENGINEER SERVICES

(IN LIEU OF IAFW-2162 (REVISED 1960)

NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT) (CONTD…)

Signature of Contractor Jt. Dir (Contracts)

APPENDIX ‘A’ TO NOTICE OF E-TENDER

1. Name of Work: : PROVISION OF HANGER WITH APRON LINK TAXI TRACK

2. Estimated Cost: : Rs. 2800.00 lakhs (At par market)

APPENDIX ‘A’ TO NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT) (Contd…)

APPENDIX ‘A’ TO NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT) (Contd…)

a. In case of tenders from an enlisted contractor of MES. Where scanned copies of

APPENDIX ‘A’ TO NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT) (Contd…)

Signature of Contractor Jt Dir (Contracts)

Commitments of principal/ Owner

INTEGRITY PACT (Cont…)

INTEGRITY PACT (Cont…)

(v) To encash the Performance Security furnished by the Bidder.

(vi) To cancel all or any other contract(s) with the Bidder.

(INTEGRITY PACT (Cont…)

a) Shri. Sudhir Bhargava,IAS(Retd) bhargav4@nic.in

b) Shri. Vikram Srivastava ,IPS (Retd) vikramsrivastava1973@gmail.com

10.2 Details of Nodal Officer nominated by E-in-C’s Branch are as follows :-

11. Examination of Books of Accounts:

12. Law and Place of Jurisdiction

13. Other Legal Actions

(INTEGRITY PACT (Cont…)

14 Signing of Integrity Pact on behalf of Bidder

Sub:Tender ID No. FOR THE WORK “PROVISION OF HANGER

Dear Sir (s),

Sub::Tender ID No. FOR THE WORK “PROVISION OF HANGER WITH

(Duly authorized signatory of the Bidder)

INSTRUCTIONS ON FILLING AND SUBMISSION OF TENDER

1.0 EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD)

For (Name of Bidder M/s_ For (Name of Bidder M/s_